Copyright: © 1992 - 1995 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: © 1992 - 1995 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


Working with bitmaps

Bitmaps are graphics composed of pixels arranged to represent an image. Paint programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT and image scanners generate bitmaps.

Unlike vector graphics, bitmaps have a fixed resolution. In other words, a bitmap looks best when you display or print it at its original resolution. Enlarging the bitmap appears to enlarge each pixel because extra pixels are added, making the graphic look jagged and distorted. Reducing the size of the bitmap also causes distortion, because pixels are eliminated to shrink the bitmap to its new size.

CorelDRAW lets you import bitmaps and include them in your drawings. You can then move, crop, shape using either path editing or PowerClips and, in the case of a monochrome bitmap, color the bitmap. You can also scale, rotate, or skew a bitmap.

CorelDRAW's autotracing program, Corel OCR-TRACE, lets you turn bitmaps into vector graphics that you can edit, scale, print, and so on, without distortion. You can also use CorelDRAW’s Freehand tool for autotracing simple bitmaps.

CorelDRAW lets you export graphics as bitmaps. You can then use your drawings in applications that do not accept vector graphics.

 Related Topics


To select a bitmap in Editable Preview mode

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click anywhere on the bitmap.

Notes

You can also marquee select a bitmap in Editable Preview mode.

You must enable the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager) to select objects not on the current layer.

 Related Topics


To select a bitmap in Wireframe view

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click the box that encloses the bitmap.

Note

You can also marquee select a bitmap in Wireframe view.

You must enable the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager) to select objects on layers other than the current layer.

 Related Topics


To color a monochrome bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap you want to color.

2.	Click a color well from the color palette with the right mouse button to change the color of the foreground (black) pixels.

3.	Click a color well from the color palette with the left mouse button to change the color of the background (white) pixels

 Related Topics


To crop a bitmap before importing it

1.	Click File, Import

2.	Choose Crop from the list box below the Preview check box.

3.	Choose the image file you want to import.

4.	Click Import.

5.	When the Crop Image dialog box opens, point to a corner handle on the cropping frame and drag to crop in two directions. Point to a side handle and drag to crop in one direction.

Notes

When you crop an image using the Crop Image dialog box, the imported image consists only of the area within the cropping frame. If you are not certain of how much you want to crop, you can crop after importing the bitmap.

Tips

Use the Width and Height or Top and Left controls (found on the Crop Image dialog box) to crop the image precisely.

Once you have resized the cropping frame, you can drag it to outline the portion of the image you want to keep. You can also click outside the cropping frame to specify the center of the cropped image.

Click Select All to re-crop the image.

 Related Topics


To crop a bitmap after it has been imported
To crop a bitmap after you import it

1.	Click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the bitmap.

3.	Drag the bitmap’s nodes to change the shape of its outline.

Note

Changing the bitmap’s outline has no effect on the bitmap. Rather, CorelDRAW displays only the area of the bitmap that appears within the outline.

Tips

To readjust the outline, delete all of the nodes on the outline path. CorelDRAW automatically recreates the original bitmap outline.

Hold down CTRL while you drag a node to allow only horizontal or vertical movement.

 Related Topics


To trace a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap.

2.	Click the Freehand tool. The mouse pointer changes to a cross.

3.	Click the area in the bitmap you want to trace.

CorelDRAW finds the closest traceable area and draws a closed path around it.

4.	Fill the path as desired.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each area you want to trace.

6.	Move or delete the bitmap to see the effects of tracing.

Note

Use Corel OCR-TRACE for more complex bitmap tracing.

Tips

To see the paths more clearly, switch to Wireframe view, then click View, Bitmaps to hide the bitmap.

Click Arrange, Order, To Front or Forward One to help you select and fill objects.

To make the interior areas transparent, combine the paths into a single curve object by clicking Arrange, Combine, then fill the resulting object.

 Related Topics


To hide bitmaps on screen in Wireframe view
To hide bitmaps on the screen in Wireframe view

Click View, Bitmaps, and disable the Visible command. The option is disabled if a check mark does not appear beside the command.

Tip

If you're working in Editable preview, you can place bitmaps on a separate layer, then make that layer invisible.

 Related Topics


To display hidden bitmaps in Wireframe view

Click View, Bitmaps, and enable the Visible command. The option is enabled if a check mark appears beside the command.

Tip

If you're working in Editable preview, you can put bitmaps on a separate layer, then make that layer visible.

 Related Topics


To rotate and skew bitmaps

You can rotate and skew bitmaps just as you would any other object.

Note

To maintain fastest screen redrawing times, the bitmap appears as a gray rectangle in Wireframe view. The white triangle in the corner of the rectangle indicates the orientation of the bitmap. In Editable preview click View, Bitmaps to choose to display the bitmap at a high or low resolution. Displaying bitmaps at a lower resolution helps to increase the screen's redrawing speed.

 Related Topics


Hiding and showing bitmap colors

The Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up lets you choose specific colors you want to hide or show in a bitmap imported to your drawing. When you eliminate or show specific colors, you let objects show through from behind the bitmap, thereby changing the bitmap’s appearance. Eliminating a color can also alter the bitmap’s apparent shape. For example, if you have a bitmap with red text on a black background, you can use the Bitmap Color Mask to eliminate the background. As a result, the bitmap appears to take on the shape of the text only. In reality, the bitmap retains its original rectangular shape.

You can select the colors using the color palette or directly from the bitmap itself using the Color Selector in the roll-up. You can adjust the tolerance for each color selected. When you increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW shows or hides a broader range of colors. For example, if you hide baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW may also hide powder blue and navy blue. You can also have DRAW fill in holes created by hiding or showing colors.

You can save Bitmap Color Masks for future use by using the commands listed in the roll-up menu. Click the arrow button in the roll-up to see this menu.

 Related Topics


To hide colors in a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap.

2.	Click Effects, Bitmap Color Mask.

3.	Choose Hide Colors from the list box.

4.	Click the Color Selector.

5.	Point to the bitmap and click the color you want to remove. The color appears in the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up.

6.	Enable the check box next to the color you selected.

7.	Adjust the tolerance as desired using the slider provided.

As you increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW removes a broader range of colors around the color you selected. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, DRAW will remove pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

8.	Click Apply.

Tip

To remove multiple colors at once, repeat steps 3 to 6 as desired before clicking Apply.

Disable the check box next to a color to have it appear in the bitmap when you click Apply.

 Related Topics


To show only certain colors in a bitmap

1.	Select the bitmap.

2.	Click Effects, Bitmap Color Mask.

3.	Choose Show Colors from the list box.

4.	Click the Color Selector.

5.	Point to the bitmap and click the color you want to show. The color appears in the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up.

6.	Enable the check box next to the color you selected.

7.	Adjust the tolerance as desired using the slider provided.

As you increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW shows a broader range of colors around the color you selected. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, DRAW will show pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

8.	Click Apply.

Tip

To show multiple colors at once, repeat steps 3 to 6 as desired before clicking Apply.

Disable the check box next to a color to have it hidden when you click Apply.

 Related Topics


To open a bitmap color mask

1.	Click Effects, Bitmap Color Mask.

2.	Click [image], Open Color Mask.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose the directory and file you want to open.

4.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To save a color mask

1.	Click Effects, Bitmap Color Mask.

2.	Click [image], Save Color Mask.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose the directory in which you want to save the current color mask.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To edit a color in the color mask

1.	In the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up, choose a color from the color list.

2.	Click [image], Edit Color.

3.	Use the controls provided in the Select Color dialog box to edit the color.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


The Color Selector lets you select a color from a bitmap. You can then use the other controls on the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up to mask or show the color you select.


Blending objects

The Blend Roll-Up allows you to blend one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes. Controls in the Blend Roll-up let you specify the number of intermediate shapes created and the range of colors blended. You can also fit objects you've blended to a path.

 Related Topics


To blend two objects

1.	Select the two objects you want to blend.

2.	Click Effects, Blend.

3.	Type the number of steps and/or intermediate shapes you want in the Steps number box.

4.	Click the color wheel icon, then specify how the colors are to be blended.

CorelDRAW blends the two objects using the widest range of colors possible. The colors used are those that appear along an arc on the color wheel. Use the Direction buttons to specify the arc you want.

5.	Click [image], Map Nodes to specify the start nodes. (The cursor changes and nodes appear on one of the objects.)

6	Click the node you want as this object's start node.

7	When the arrow flips over, click the node you want as the other object's end node.

Selecting different combinations of nodes can produce very different results when blending dissimilar shapes.

8.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To blend objects along a path

1.	Draw a path.

2.	Blend two objects.

3.	Click the Path button.

4.	Click New Path. (The cursor changes.)

5.	Click the path you want to blend along, using the new cursor, then click Apply. (To extend the blend over the full length of the path, enable the Full Path check box before clicking Apply.)

If Full Path is not enabled, the blend attaches itself to the closest point on the path. You can also adjust where the blend begins and ends by selecting the top or bottom object and dragging it along the path.

6.	Enable Rotate All to rotate the blend along a curved path.

7.	In the Steps list box, choose Spacing and enter the amount of spacing you want between the intermediate shapes.

Choosing the spacing option with the Full Path option may override the number of steps you specified (that is, in order to blend along the full path and maintain the desired spacing between objects, CorelDRAW may need to have fewer, or more, steps than the number you typed when you first blended the objects).

 Related Topics


To edit a blend group using the Blend Roll-Up

1.	If you haven’t already opened the Blend Roll-Up, click Effects, Blend.

2.	Select the blend group.

If the group is part of a compound blend, hold down CTRL and click an object in the group you want to edit.

3.	Use the controls on the Blend Roll-Up to choose the options you want to use.

 Related Topics


To edit the original objects or the path along which they are blended

1.	Click the object or the path you want to change.

2.	Edit the object or path.

When you finish, the blend automatically incorporates your changes.

Tip

You can also use the Start End, and Path buttons in the Blend Roll-Up to select the objects or path.

 Related Topics


To blend with a new start or end object

1.	Select the blend group.

2.	Click the Start button and choose New Start to have the new object start the blend.

If you want the new object to be the end object, click the End button and choose New End.

3.	Click the new object.

 Related Topics


To blend along a new path

1.	Draw a new path.

2.	Select the blend group.

3.	Click the Path button and choose New Path.

4.	Click the new path.

 Related Topics


To edit intermediate blend shapes

1.	Select the blend group.

2.	Click the [image] button in the roll-up, then click Split.

3.	Click the intermediate shape you want to edit.

The blend group splits into two linked groups called a compound blend, with the object you clicked becoming the start object in one group and the end object in the other. Editing this object affects both groups.

You can select one of the blend groups and make changes that won't affect the other group. For example, you can specify a different number of steps.

4.	Edit the intermediate shape. The blend(s) automatically incorporate your changes.

 Related Topics


To reverse the direction of a blend

1.	Select the blend group.

2.	Click Arrange, Order.

3.	Click Reverse Order.

 Related Topics


To change the center of rotation

1.	Double-click the start or end object in the blend group.

The handles on the object's highlighting box change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Drag the center-of-rotation marker (found in the middle of the highlighting box) to the desired spot.

3.	Choose the options you want using the Blend Roll-Up.

4.	Click Apply.

Note

CorelDRAW rotates the blend around a point midway between each object's center of rotation.

 Related Topics


To select an intermediate object in a blend group

1.	Select a blend group.

2.	In the Blend Roll-Up, click [image].

3.	Click Split.

4.	Using the pointer that appears, click the intermediate object you want.

Note

You can now edit, move, or transform this object. You can also use it as the start or end object in a compound blend.

 Related Topics


To create a compound blend

1.	Blend two objects.

2.	Select the object from which you want to create the compound blend. This object becomes the start object.

You can select the start or end object or any of the group’s intermediate objects.

4.	Hold down the SHIFT key, then select a new end object.

5.	Choose the options you want using the Blend Roll-Up.

6.	Click Apply.

Note

Repeat this procedure to create a series of compound blends.

 Related Topics


To fuse objects in a compound blend
To fuse start or end objects in a compound blend

1.	Click Effects, Blend.

2.	Click [image].

3.	Hold down CTRL and click one of the blend groups.

4.	Click Fuse Start or Fuse End.

Note

A special point appears if the selected blend group and at least two others in the compound blend share the same top or bottom control object. Use the pointer to select an intermediate object in the blend group with which you want to blend.

 Related Topics


To clear the intermediate shapes in a blend

1.	Select the blend group(s).

2.	Click Effects, Clear Blend.

 Related Topics


To break the link between blended objects

1.	Select a blend group.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

Note

The original objects are separated from the blend, while the intermediate shapes remain grouped. Click Arrange, Ungroup if you want to manipulate each intermediate shape individually.

 Related Topics


To copy special effects from one object to another

1.	Select the object to which you want to copy an effect.

2.	Click Effects, Copy.

3.	Choose an effect from the submenu that appears.

The pointer changes to a horizontal arrow.

4.	Click the object whose effect you want to copy.

Note

 To copy an effect other than an envelope from an object to which you’ve applied an envelope, you need to remove the envelope first. If you don't remove the envelope, CorelDRAW copies only the envelope to the other object.

 Related Topics


To clone an object's special effects

1.	Select the object to which you want to clone the effect.

2.	Click Effects, Clone.

3.	Choose an effect from the submenu that appears.

The pointer becomes a horizontal arrow.

4.	Click the object whose effect you want to copy.

Notes

A master-client relationship exists between the original and cloned effects. The cloned effect in the client object changes to reflect any alterations made to the effect in the master object. You cannot alter the clone effect in a client object only. To change the clone effect, change it for the master object, then copy it to the client object.

 To clone effects other than an envelope from a master object to which you’ve added an envelope, you need to remove the envelope first. If you don't clear the envelope effect, CorelDRAW clones only the envelope effect to the other object.

 Related Topics


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.

Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


The Path button allows you start a new path, show a path, and detach objects from a path.


The Start button allows you to specify a new start object, or show the start of a blend.


The End button allows you to specify a new end object, or show the end of a blend.


Contouring objects

Adding contours to an object creates an effect much that created when you blend one object into another and one color into another. Unlike a blend, however, contouring affects only one object rather than two objects and the path between them. Contours act like concentric lines or steps on a topographic map, giving the object a three-dimensional appearance. You can apply contours to text or graphics (with closed paths) and have them radiate inside, outside, or to the absolute center of an object.

 Related Topics


To contour an object

1.	Select the object you want to contour.

2.	Click Effects, Contour.

3.	Click To Center, Inside, or Outside to specify the contour type you want.

4.	Use the Steps and Offset boxes to specify the number of intermediate shapes you want to create and the distance you want between them.

5.	Click the Color wheel tab.

6.	Click the outline color button or fill color button, then click Others to open the Select Color dialog box.

7.	Use the controls on the Select Color dialog box to select or create an outline or fill color.

Notes

The Steps box appears dimmed if you have selected To Center.

 If the original object has a uniform color fill, CorelDRAW fills the intermediate shapes with colors between the object’s fill and outline and those you specify.

You can also fill the object with a Rainbow fill. Rainbow uses an arc on the color wheel to fill the contours of the object using the widest range of colors possible. Click a Direction button to blend using colors opposite to those along the arc.

If the object has a fountain fill, a second fill color selector appears in the roll-up. You can use this button to contour from one fountain fill to another.

 Related Topics


To change the fill color of a contoured object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Use the left mouse button to choose a color from the on-screen palette.

Note

The contour automatically incorporates the changes you make.

Tip

You can edit the fill attributes of a contoured object just as you do for any closed path you draw. Use the tools in the Fill flyout to change these attributes.

 Related Topics


To change the outline color of a contoured object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Use the right mouse button to choose an outline color from the on-screen palette.

Note

The contour automatically incorporates the changes you make.

Tip

You can edit the outline attributes of a contoured object just as you do for any closed path you draw. Use the tools in the Outline flyout to change these attributes.

 Related Topics


To edit the shape of a contoured object

1.	Choose the Shape tool.

2.	Select the object you want to edit.

3.	Drag the object’s nodes to attain the desired shape.

Note

The contours automatically incorporate the changes you make.

 Related Topics


To separate the original object and its contour group

1.	Select the contoured object.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

Note

CorelDRAW separates the original object from the intermediate shapes; the contours remain grouped. To separate the contour group, select it, then Click Arrange, Ungroup.

 Related Topics


The Color wheel tab displays controls that let you change outline and fill colors.


Click the down arrow, then click Others to open the Select Color dialog box.


Click the down arrow, then click Others to open the Select Color dialog box.


Customizing CorelDRAW

You can customize the CorelDRAW work environment to suit the way you work. Using the Options dialog box, you can specify where duplicated objects are placed, what action is performed when you start CorelDRAW, how often (and if) backups are created, how many Undo levels you can use, and much more.

Click Tools, Options to access the Options dialog boxes. Click the appropriate tab to display its page of customization controls. General is the default page.

Click View, Properties to gain access to the Object, Tool, and Styles Properties dialog boxes. These dialog boxes let you customize the objects you draw as well as the tools you draw with using CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


To change the offset for duplicated and cloned objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Specify offset values using the Horizontal and Vertical dialog boxes.

Notes

You can choose a new unit of measurement using the units list boxes provided you are using the default 1:1 scale in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. CorelDRAW automatically converts the displayed value to its equivalent in the unit you choose. If you are using a different scale, the Place duplicates and clones number boxes use the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


To change the nudge distance

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type the distance you want in the Nudge number box.

Notes

The nudge distance represents the distance a selected object moves when you press one of the arrow keys.

You can choose a new unit of measurement using the units list box provided you are using the default 1:1 scale in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. CorelDRAW automatically converts the displayed value to its equivalent in the unit you choose. If you are using a different scale, the Nudge number box uses the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


To change the constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	In the Constrain angle number box, type the constrain angle you want.

4.	Click OK.

Note

The constrain angle represents the increment by which an object rotates or skews when you perform either action with the mouse while holding CTRL.

 Related Topics


To control the appearance of corner joints

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type a value between 5 and 45 degrees in the Miter limit list box.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set the number of Undo levels

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Type a value in the Undo levels list box.

The number of Undo levels available is limited only by your system's available resources. As this number increases, however, your machine may operate more slowly.

 Related Topics


To specify a start-up action

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose an option from the On start-up list box.

 Related Topics


To assign a function to the right mouse button
To choose the first function displayed in the right mouse button menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Choose an option from the First Menu Item list box.

You can choose one of the following options.

None	Maintains the default pop-up menu selection.
2x Zoom	Magnifies the area under the cursor by a factor of two each time you press the right mouse button.
Character	Opens the Text Character dialog box.
Edit Text	Opens the Text dialog box when a text object is selected.
Full Screen Preview	Toggles between a full-screen preview and the drawing window.
Node Edit	Chooses the Shape tool.
Note

Regardless of the function you select, you can always click the right button to leave a copy of an object behind when dragging it with the mouse.

Swapping the left and right mouse button in the Windows Control Panel switches the right mouse button function in CorelDRAW to the left button.

 Related Topics


To optimize saving

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	In the Saving and opening section, enable Smaller File Size to optimize the storage efficiency or Quicker File Opening to optimize opening speed.

 Related Topics


To enable the AutoBackup feature

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Auto-backup check box.

4.	Type an interval time in the number box (from 1 to 120 minutes).

5.	Click Select Directory.

6.	Use the Select Directory dialog box, to choose the location where you want to store your backup files.

Note

During your work sessions, CorelDRAW automatically creates/updates a backup file with the extension *.ABK at the interval you specify.

Although it is not recommended, you can disable both file backup features.

 Related Topics


To enable the Backup on save feature

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Make backup on save check box.

CorelDRAW will now create a backup file, with the extension *.BAK, each time you save your file.

 Related Topics


To enable the Multiple-document Interface (MDI) feature
To enable the Multi-document Interface (MDI) feature

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

3.	Enable the Enable multitasking check box.

Note

MDI lets you open more than one CorelDRAW file in a single session.

 Related Topics


To enable or disable the Auto-Panning, Interruptible, and Manual Refresh features

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Auto-Panning, Interruptible refresh, or Manual refresh check boxes.

Note

If you enable Auto-panning, the drawing window automatically scrolls whenever you drag beyond its borders.

If you enable Interruptible Refresh, the screen stops redrawing when you click with the mouse or press a key. This lets you select a menu command or tool without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. Redrawing resumes after you perform another action.

With Manual Refresh, the screen does not redraw until you click the elevator button on your horizontal or vertical scroll bar or when you request a redraw with the Refresh Window command.

 Related Topics


To control the display of fountain fills

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	In the Preview fountain steps number box, type or select the number of stripes you want. Lower values produce coarser on-screen fountain fills but increase redrawing speed.

Notes

Changing the fountain step value affects the appearance of fountain fills in drawings exported into the following formats:

- Illustrator (AI, EPS)

- Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

- MAC PICT (PCT)

- Windows Metafile (WMF)

- all bitmap formats

The Steps setting in the Fountain Fill dialog box lets you override the settings in this dialog box and in the Print Options dialog box for selected objects.

The value you enter also determines the number of stripes used to represent fountains exported in certain formats.

 Related Topics


To specify preview colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

2.	Enable 256-color dithering to have CorelDRAW display color using its own dithering scheme.

Enable Windows dithering to have CorelDRAW display color using the screen driver's default dithering scheme. If you have a 256-color adapter, your screen may redraw faster with this option enabled. However, the dithering scheme uses only 15 of these colors.

Notes

Whenever you change these settings, update the palette along the bottom of the CorelDRAW screen by clicking on either of the palette's scroll arrows with the right mouse button.

Using these options has no effect on the printed output.

To use these settings, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that takes advantage of this capability.

 Related Topics


To turn the Tooltips on and off

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Tooltips option to display or hide Tooltips.

 Related Topics


To increase the printing speed of extrusions

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	In the Minimum extrude facet size number box, type a value between 0.00005 inches (approximately 1 micron) and 36 inches for the facet size used when CorelDRAW renders and prints extrusions.

Note

Facet size represents the distance between shades of color in extrusions. Set the Minimum extrude facet size between 0.01 inches and 0.5 inches. A higher value (0.5 inches) will reduce screen refresh time. For high-quality output, decrease the facet size when you are ready to print your illustration.

 Related Topics


To enable snapping feedback

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	Enable the Show snap location marks check box.

 Related Topics


To change the mouse pointer to a cross-hair cursor

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Pick from the Tools list box.

3.	Enable the Cross hair cursor check box.

Note

When you move off the drawing window, the normal pointer reappears allowing you to select commands and tools.

 Related Topics


To display moving objects

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Pick from the Tools list box.

3.	Enable the Draw objects when moving check box.

4.	Type a value in the Delay to draw when moving number box (from one-tenth of a second to thirty seconds).

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set line and curve drawing options

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Curve, Bezier from the Tools list box.

3.	Adjust the following as required:

Freehand tracking	Controls how closely CorelDRAW tracks the motion of the mouse when in Freehand mode. Low  numbers produce rougher curves.
Autotrace tracking	Controls how closely the Bezier curve follows the edges of a bitmap traced using CorelDRAW's autotracing feature. Low numbers (1 to 3 pixels) tend to produce more accurate results.
Corner threshold	Controls when CorelDRAW draws a smooth corner or a cusp when drawing in Freehand mode. Lower numbers tend to produce cusps.
Straight line threshold	Controls when CorelDRAW draws a straight or curve segment when drawing in Freehand mode. Lower numbers tend to produce curves.
AutoJoin	Determines how close the cursor must be to the end node of an existing segment in order for the next segment to join with it automatically. Applies to both Freehand and Bezier mode. Lower values mean that the segments must be closer before they join.
4.	In the Tools list box, choose Node Edit.

5.	Type a value in the Auto-reduce number box.

Auto-reduce controls the extent to which a curve's shape changes when you use the AutoReduce option in the Node Edit Roll-Up. If you enter a higher value, for example, Auto-reduce removes more nodes, and the curve's shape changes more. The default setting is 0.004 inches. This value determines how closely nodes must be before they are reduced in number when you choose Auto-reduce from the Node Edit Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To control the screen resolution (1:1 Zoom)

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Zoom, Pan from the Tools list box.

3.	Click Edit Resolution.

4.	Place a ruler under the on-screen Horizontal ruler. This ruler should use the same unit of measurement you set using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

5.	Use the up or down arrow on the Horizontal number box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

6.	Place the ruler beside the on-screen Vertical ruler.

7.	Use the up or down arrow on the Vertical number box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

Note

This setting is particularly useful if you are drawing in 1:1 Zoom mode, as it lets you work using actual world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen resolution.

 Related Topics


To customize the Clipboard

1.	Using the Windows Notepad or another ASCII text editor, open the CORELDRW.INI file in your COREL\DRAW directory.

2.	In the [Config] section, locate and make the changes you want to the following lines.

ClipboardFountains	0 = Enable high-quality cutting/copying
1 = Disable high-quality cutting/copying

CalligraphicClipboard	0 = Keep calligraphic outlines
1 = Ignore calligraphic outlines

TextOnClpMetafile	0 = paste text as curve objects
1= paste text as text

3.	Save the file.

4. Close and restart CorelDRAW to incorporate your changes.

 Related Topics


To reposition the ruler origin point

1.	Click View, Rulers to display the rulers.

2.	Move the cursor over the area where the rulers meet.

3.	Click and drag the cross hairs onto the drawing window. If Snap to Grid is on, the cross hairs are forced to the grid.

4.	Release the mouse button when the cursor is where you want the 0,0 points.

Notes

CorelDRAW uses the 0,0 points as the basis for determining the cursor and object position information you see in the status bar. The coordinate values you specify in some dialog boxes are also based on the position of the 0,0 points. In some instances, you may want to move the 0,0 points on the rulers from their initial position to the lower left corner of the Working page.

You can also use the Grid and Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu to reposition the 0,0 points.

 Related Topics


To change the ruler origin point using the Grid and Ruler Setup command
To change ruler origin point using the Grid and Ruler Setup command

1.	Click Layout, Grid and Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	Type the new origin points in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

Note

The default origin point is 0,0 (inches).

Tip

You can also access the Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box by clicking the right mouse button on either ruler.

 Related Topics


To change the color of the guidelines and grid markers
To change the color of guidelines and grid markers

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	In the roll-up, double-click the word Guidelines or Grid.

3.	Click the Layer color button.

4.	Choose a color.

 Related Topics


To change the unit of measurement on the rulers

1.	Click Layout, Grid and Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	Choose the unit you want from the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes.

Note

Each ruler can use a different unit.

Tip

You can also access the Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box by right-clicking one of the rulers.

 Related Topics


To display or hide the rulers

Click View, Rulers.

Note

If no check mark appears next to the command name, the rulers are hidden. If a check mark is there, the rulers are displayed.

 Related Topics


To display or hide the status bar

Click View, Status Bar.

Note

If no check mark appears next to the command name, the Status Bar is hidden.

 Related Topics


To hide the color palette

1.	Click View, Color Palette.

2.	Click None from the submenu.

 Related Topics


To display the color palette

1.	Click View, Color Palette.

2.	From the submenu, choose the desired palette.

 Related Topics


To make current settings the default for new documents

1.	Click Tools, Save Settings.

2.	Choose Yes from the dialog box that appears.

Note

This command changes the default settings for new CorelDRAW documents. CorelDRAW bases these settings on the current document.

 Related Topics


Working with dimension lines, callouts, and connector lines
Working with dimension, callout, and connector lines

Technical illustrators commonly use dimension lines to show the size of objects or the distance between them. In previous versions of CorelDRAW, you could choose from vertical, horizontal, and slanted dimension lines. CorelDRAW 6 adds a new dimensioning feature [image] angular dimension lines. An angular dimension line measures the angle between two points and an apex. This easy-to-use tool allows you to determine the start and end points of an arc, text position, and units in degrees, gradients, or radians. Precise measuring is made easy when you enable the Snap to Objects command.

Callout lines let you point to and label objects in a drawing. When you draw a callout, a text cursor appears at the end of the line. This cursor lets you enter text that describes the object at the other end of the callout line. You can format this text just as you format Artistic text. You can also alter the format of the callout line, for example, changing its width using the Outline tool. CorelDRAW lets you create one-segment and two-segment callout lines.

Connector lines link two objects together with a live link. These lines act much the same as dimension lines. To attach connector lines to an object you must enable the Snap To Objects command. If a line is not connected to any object, it becomes a plain line. If a line is connected to one object, the floating point of the line is stuck to the screen at its original location. You can only move a connector line by moving objects attached to it. Connector lines must have two control objects.

 Related Topics


To draw vertical dimension lines

1.	Establish a drawing scale for your drawing using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

2.	Click Layout and enable Snap to Objects.

Enabling Snap to Objects is not necessary but it makes precise measuring easier. You must enable Snap to Objects, however, to have the dimension lines remain linked to the object. If you resize the linked object, CorelDRAW updates the dimension line and object dimension accordingly.

3.	Hold the mouse button down on the Vertical Dimension tool.

4.	Choose [image] from the flyout menu.

5.	Click the point where you want to begin measuring, then drag.

6.	When you reach the point where you want to finish measuring, click. (If you have Snap to Objects enabled, the cursor snaps to the snap point of the object.)

7.	Move the cursor to where you want the dimension text to appear, then click again.

The dimension text appears where you clicked, provided you haven't specified a default dimension text location using the Dimension Roll-Up.

The dimension text value is expressed in the same units as the horizontal ruler, unless you specified otherwise in the Dimension Roll-Up. (The rulers use the unit specified for Horizontal Units in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box).

Note

If you use the Vertical Dimension tool to draw a line that is not vertical, you get a value of 0.00.

 Related Topics


To draw horizontal dimension lines

1.	Establish a drawing scale for your drawing using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

2.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

Enabling Snap to Objects is not necessary but it makes precise measuring easier. You must enable Snap to Objects, however, to have the dimension lines remain linked to the object. If you resize the linked object, CorelDRAW updates the dimension line and object dimension accordingly.

3.	Choose the Horizontal Dimension tool from the Dimension flyout menu.

4.	Click the point where you want to begin measuring, then drag.

5.	Click the point where you want to finish measuring. (If you have Snap to Objects enabled, the cursor snaps to the snap point of the object.)

6.	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

The dimension text appears where you clicked, provided you haven't specified a default dimension text location using the Dimension Roll-Up.

The dimension text value is expressed in the same units as the horizontal ruler, unless you specified otherwise in the Dimension Roll-Up. (The rulers use the unit specified for Horizontal Units in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box).

Note

If you use the Horizontal Dimension tool to draw a vertical line, you get a value of 0.00.

 Related Topics


To draw slanted dimension lines

1.	Establish a drawing scale for your drawing using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

2.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

Enabling Snap to Objects is not necessary but it makes precise measuring easier. You must enable Snap to Objects, however, to have the dimension lines remain linked to the object. If you resize the linked object, CorelDRAW updates the dimension line and object dimension accordingly.

3.	Choose the Vertical Dimension tool from the Dimension flyout menu.

4.	Click the point where you want to begin measuring.

5.	Click the point where you want to finish measuring. (If you have Snap to Objects enabled, the cursor snaps to the object’s snap point.)

6.	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

The dimension text appears where you clicked, provided you haven't specified a default dimension text location using the Dimension Roll-Up.

The dimension text value is expressed in the same units as the horizontal ruler, unless you specified otherwise in the Dimension Roll-Up. (The rulers use the unit specified for Horizontal Units in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box).

Notes

If you use the Slanted Dimension tool to draw a line that is not slanted, you get a value of 0.00.

Holding down the Ctrl key when you draw an slanted dimension line constrains the angle to increments of 15 degrees, or to the value you've specified for the Constrain Angle setting in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To draw angular dimension lines

1.	Choose the Angular Dimension tool ( [image]) from the Dimension flyout.

2.	Click where you want the start of the baseline.

3.	Click where you want the end of the baseline

4.	Move the mouse to the apex of the arc and click. (A text box appears.)

5.	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

The text box displays the angle of the dimension line.

Note

Holding down CTRL when you draw an angled dimension line constrains the angle to increments of 15 degrees, or to the value you've specified for the Constrain Angle setting in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To change the appearance of a callout line

1.	Select the callout line.

2.	Click a color in the color palette with the right mouse button to set the callout line color.

3.	Choose the Pen Roll-Up from the Outline flyout menu.

4	Use the controls on the Pen Roll-Up to change the callout line’s attributes.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To see an object's snap points

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

2.	Choose any of the Dimension tools from the Dimension flyout.

3.	Move the pointer over the object’s outline and interior.

The snap points appear as small squares when you glide over their respective locations.

 Related Topics


Working with linked dimension lines

Common operations performed on basic objects affect linked dimension lines uniquely.

Delete	If you delete a snap point to which you’ve linked a dimension line, you also delete the dimension line.

Duplicate	If you select the control object only and choose Duplicate, CorelDRAW duplicates only the control object.

If you select and duplicate a control object and linked dimension line, CorelDRAW creates a new rectangle and a new linked dimension line.

Separate	Use the Separate command to break the link between the dimension line and the object. Once separated, a link cannot be re-established, except by clicking Edit, Undo. However, if you pass the maximum number of Undo levels available, you must delete and re-construct the dimension line.

Multiple links	You can link more than one dimension line to one snap point.

Node edit	Node editing affects all dimensions linked to a node.

Special effects	You cannot apply special effects to a dimension line.

 Related Topics


To change the color of dimension text
To change the color of the line or text in a dimension line

To change the color of a dimension line, select it, then choose a color from the color palette using the right mouse button.

To change the color of the text, select it, then choose a color from the color palette using the left mouse button.

 Related Topics


To change the placement of the text in a dimension line
To change the placement of dimension text

Select the text and drag it to a new location.

The length of the extension lines changes accordingly.

 Related Topics


To change the point size and font of dimension text

1.	Click any toolbar with the right mouse button.

2.	Enable the Text option.

3.	Select the dimension text.

4.	Type the point size in the Font Size list box.

5.	Choose a typeface from the Font list box.

 Related Topics


To specify how units are displayed

1.	Click Tools, Dimensions, Linear.

2.	Choose a style using the Style list box. You can choose decimal, fractional, US Engineering, or US Architectural style.

3.	Choose the precision level you require using the Precision list box.

4.	Choose a unit of measurement using the Units dialog box. (If you want the units displayed next to the value on the dimension line, enable Show Units.)

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To specify how text is displayed

1.	Click Tools, Dimensions, Linear (or Angular).

2.	Click the Dimension Text tab ( [image] ).

2.	Type a text string for use as a suffix and/or prefix to the distance/angle value, or leave the fields blank.

3.	Specify where you want to place the dimension text relative to the dimension line. Click [image] to place text within the line, [image] to place it above the line, or [image] to place it below the line.

4.	Click [image] to have the text placed horizontally.

This option places the text is horizontally even if the dimension line is diagonal or vertical. If you don't choose this option, CorelDRAW places the dimension text at the same angle as the dimension line.

5.	Click [image] to have the text centered relative to the dimension line.

This option centers the text on the dimension line, provided you drag inside the extension lines when establishing the placement of the dimension text. If you drag outside the extension lines, CorelDRAW does not center the text. If you don't choose the Center option, CorelDRAW places the dimension text where you last clicked when you drew the dimension line.

6.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


Using dimension lines with Rotate, Skew, and Stretch

Rotating, skewing, and stretching have different effects on dimension lines and dimension objects. These effects depend on whether you create linked or unlinked objects.

Linked dimension lines

Rotate	Excepting angular dimension lines, rotating the linked dimension line and object (or the object only) has no effect on the dimension line. The dimension line rotates with the object. Horizontal dimensions remain horizontal; vertical dimensions remain vertical.

Skew	Skewing a linked dimension line and object (or the object only) does not skew the dimension line. CorelDRAW updates the dimension text to reflect the new distance.

Stretch	Stretching the linked dimension line and object (or the object only) in the direction being measured stretches the dimension line and object. CorelDRAW updates the dimension text to reflect the new distance.

Non-linked dimension lines

The dimension line	You cannot rotate or skew the dimension line. If you stretch a dimension line, its text automatically reflects your changes.

The control object	You can rotate, skew, or stretch the control object, but the dimension line will not reflect the change in measurement or angle.

 Related Topics


To draw a two-segment callout

1.	Choose the Callout tool from the Dimension flyout menu.

2.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

Enabling Snap to Objects is optional, but using it ensures that the callout and object are linked at the point you choose.

3.	Click where you want the first callout segment to start (at the chosen snap point on the object).

4.	Click the spot where you want the callout’s elbow (that is, the spot where the two segments join).

5.	Click the spot where you want to place the callout text.

6.	Type the callout text.

Notes

A callout is a dynamic feature: the text is linked to the line, which is linked to a snap point on the control object. If you move the snap point, the callout moves with it.

CorelDRAW lets you customize callouts. You can edit both the text and the callout line. Assign any font, size, style and color to the text, and assign a thickness, style, and color to the line. You can use the default arrowhead, choose one from the extensive list of arrowheads, or choose a line with no arrowhead.

 Related Topics


To draw a one-segment callout

1.	Choose the Callout tool from the Dimension flyout menu.

2.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

Enabling Snap to Objects is optional, but using it ensures that the callout and object are linked at the point you choose.

3.	Click where you want the callout to start.

4.	Double-click the spot where you want the callout to end.

5.	Type the callout text.

Notes

A callout is a dynamic feature: the text is linked to the line, which is linked to a snap point on the control object. If you move the snap point, the callout moves with it.

CorelDRAW lets you customize callouts. You can edit both the text and the callout line. Assign any font, size, style and color to the text, and assign a thickness, style, and color to the line. You can use the default arrowhead, choose one from the extensive list of arrowheads, or choose a line with no arrowhead.

 Related Topics


To draw connector lines between two objects

1.	Choose the Connector Line tool from the Dimension flyout menu.

2.	Click Layout and enable the Snap to Objects command.

3.	Click a snap location on the first object.

4.	Click a snap location on the second object.

Note

You can only move connector lines by moving either or both of the objects they connect.

 Related Topics


 The callout button allows you to create labels that are attached to objects.


 The dimension flyout provides access to the dimension tools.


 The connector line button allows you to draw a line between two objects that moves when you move the objects.


Working with envelopes

One way to change the basic shape of an object is by using the Shape tool to manipulate its nodes and control points. You can also change an object’s shape by applying an envelope to it.

An envelope is similar to the highlighting box that appears when you select an object with the Pick tool. It has handles that allow you to pull any part of the object in a particular direction. Changing an object’s shape using an envelope is comparable to the way you can distort an object on a piece of rubber by stretching it in any direction.

The Envelope Roll-Up provides four editing modes you can use to reshape the envelope and the object inside it. The first three modes [image] Straight Line, Single Arc, and Two Curves [image] let you change the shape of one side of the object. The fourth mode [image] Unconstrained [image] lets you make more dramatic changes, like when you fit text inside an irregular shape.

You can apply envelopes to any object you draw, including graphics and text.

 Related Topics


To shape an object with an envelope

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Effects, Envelope.

3.	Click Add New to put a basic rectangular envelope around the object.

The Shape Tool becomes selected and a bounding box with handles appears around the object.

4.	Choose the editing mode you want to use by clicking the appropriate button (they're located below the Create From button.)

5.	Select one of the handles and drag it in the direction you want. The handles move according to the editing mode:

With the first three editing modes, the side handles move in a single direction, while the corner handles move in two directions.

With the fourth mode, the handles move freely. They also have control points that you can move to fine-tune the shape of the object.

By holding down CTRL or SHIFT or both, you can move opposing handles by the same amount in the same or opposite directions.

6.	Drag other handles until the envelope is shaped the way you want.

If you are not getting the results you want with the current editing mode, you can click Reset Envelope and choose a different mode. You can also select a different Mapping Mode from the list below the editing mode buttons.

7.	Click Apply to fit the object to the envelope.

Note

The Add Preset button allows you to choose from a selection of preset envelopes.

 Related Topics


To clear an object's envelope

1.	Select the object with the envelope you want to clear.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Envelope.

Notes

If you applied more than one envelope, you'll need to repeat this procedure for each envelope you want to clear.

If you've added other effects to the object, you can’t clear its envelope without clearing the other effects first. If you want to keep the other effects, make a duplicate of the object. Then, after you clear the effects, use the Copy Effects From command to copy the duplicate's effects back to the original.

 Related Topics


To copy an object's envelope

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Envelope From.

The mouse pointer changes to an arrow.

3.	Click the object with the envelope you want to copy.

Note

You can’t copy an object's envelope if you've added another effect to it since you added an envelope.

 Related Topics


To change the shape of an envelope

1.	Click the object with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag the object’s nodes to attain the desired shape.

3.	Click Apply in the Envelope Roll-Up to fit the object to the envelope.

Note

You won't be able to select the object's envelope if you've added another effect to the object.

 Related Topics


To select different options for an envelope

1.	Click Effects, Envelope.

2.	Select the object whose envelope you want to edit.

3.	Choose the options you want to use.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To add, delete, or modify the nodes of an envelope

1.	Click Effects, Envelope.

2.	Select the object whose envelope you want to edit.

3.	Choose the [image] button in the Envelope Roll-Up to select the unconstrained editing mode.

4.	To add a node, select the Shape tool and double-click the envelope where you want the new handle. Then, click the Add Node button in the Node Edit Roll-Up. You can also click once on the envelope and press the + key on the numeric keypad.

5.	To remove a node, double-click it with the Shape tool, then click the Remove Node button in the Node Edit Roll-Up. Or, click once on the handle and press the - key on the numeric keypad.

6.	To make a handle smooth, cusped, or symmetrical, double-click on it to display the Node Edit Roll-Up. Then click Smooth, Cusp or Symmetrical.

7.	To change a segment of the envelope to a line or curve, double-click on it to display the Node Edit Roll-up. Then choose To Line or To Curve.

 Related Topics


To create an envelope from an object

1.	Click Effects, Envelope.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Click Create From.

4.	Click the object from which you want to create the envelope.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

The object must be a single curve object. You cannot create envelopes from curve objects created by combining multiple objects using the Combine command.

 Related Topics


Extruding objects

Extruding an object gives it the illusion of having three dimensions. When you apply an extrusion to an object, CorelDRAW projects points along the edges of the object and joins them to form surfaces. Extruded surfaces form a dynamically linked group with their control object. As a result, these surfaces automatically reflect any changes you make to the control object. Extruded objects are dynamic three-dimensional forms [image] you can change their shape and alter their orientation in space in three distinct planes of rotation. You can apply extrusions to any object you draw using CorelDRAW’s drawing tools.

You can use the Extrude Roll-Up to apply this three-dimensional look to objects in your drawings. The roll-up offers several controls organized on five pages. Click a tab to see a specific page and the controls it provides. These controls allow you to:

specify a parallel or perspective extrusion

rotate the extrusion

change the color of the extruded surfaces

apply light sources to enhance an extrusion’s three-dimensional effect

apply drape fills to extrusions

apply a preset extrusion

To increase the speed of the display and printing of extrusions, use the Minimum extrude facet size control in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

 Related Topics


To extrude an object

1.	Select the object you want to extrude.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Depth tab (( [image] )).

4.	Choose an extrusion type from the top list box.

5.	Choose a vanishing point option from the bottom list box.

6.	For a perspective extrusion, specify a value in the Depth number box.

7.	Click Edit and drag the X that appears in the Drawing Window to set the extrusion’s vanishing point.

8.	Click Apply.

Tip

Click [image] and use the Vanishing Point and Measured From controls to position the vanishing point more precisely.

 Related Topics


To apply a preset extrusion to an object

1.	Select the object you want to extrude.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Presets tab ( [image] ).

4.	Choose the extrusion you want from the list box. A preview of the preset appears in the display window.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To apply a locked vanishing point to an extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Depth tab ( [image] ).

4.	Choose a vanishing-point option from the second list box.

Choose VP Locked to Object to maintain the look of an extrusion when you move the extruded object.

Choose VP Locked to Page to maintain the original vanishing point when you move the extruded object.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To copy the vanishing point from one extrusion to another

1.	Select the extrusion to which you want to copy the vanishing point.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Choose the Depth tab( [image] ).

4.	Choose Copy VP From the second list box.

5.	Select the object from which you want to copy the vanishing point.

6.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To have multiple extrusions share one vanishing point

1.	Select an extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Choose the Depth tab ( [image] ).

4.	Choose Shared Vanishing Point from the second list box.

5.	Select the extrusion with which you want the first extrusion to share a vanishing point.

6.	Click Apply.

Note

You cannot share a vanishing point with an extrusion that you rotated using the Extrusion Roll-Up. You can, however, share a vanishing point with an extrusion that you rotated using the mouse or the Transform Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To rotate an extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion you want to rotate.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Rotate tab ( [image] ).

4.	Place the pointer over the arc ball (the Corel logo) in the display box.

5.	Drag the hand cursor to rotate the extrusion.

The arc ball rotates as you move the hand cursor to illustrate the rotation that would be applied to the extruded object. At the same time, a dotted wireframe version of the extrusion appears in the Drawing Window to show how the extrusion would be affected by the rotation.

6.	Click Apply.

Tips

To return the arc ball to its original position, click the X button.

Click [image] and use the Angle, Phi, and Theta controls to specify a precise three-dimensional rotation.

 Related Topics


To change the fill color of an object's extruded surfaces
To change the fill color of an object’s extruded surfaces

1.	Select the extrusion you want.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Color tab ( [image] ).

4.	Click the Use Object Fill, Solid Fill, or Shade buttons to specify the type of fill you want.

5.	For Use Object Fill, enable the Drape Fills check box to fill all extruded surfaces with the same fill as the control object.

For Solid Fill, click the color button and choose the color you want from the palette that appears.

For Shade, click the From color button and choose the color you want from the palette that appears. Repeat this step to specify the To color.

6.	Click Apply.

Notes

The effect of using Drape fills is most evident when the control object has a pattern or fountain fill. Clearing this option fills all extruded surfaces with the control object’s pattern or fountain fill.

 Related Topics


To apply light sources to an extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Click the Light tab [image].

4.	Click up to three of the light source buttons to apply one, two, or three light sources to your extrusion.

The sphere inside the preview box represents the extruded object, while [image], [image], and [image] represent the three light sources.

5.	Move the light sources by dragging one at a time to points at which lines on the wireframe box intersect.

6.	Click Apply.

Notes

You can adjust the intensity of individual light sources by dragging the Intensity slider. Shading on the numbered circles in the display box represents the intensity level of each light source. Low-intensity light sources appear as dark gray circles; high-intensity light sources appear lighter. Click an area away from all circles to see the intensity of the light sources. A black circle in the preview box shows the selected light source.

Enable the Use Full Color Range check box to enhance the appearance of the extrusion. Full Color Range combines precisely light and dark shades (brightness and saturation).

 Related Topics


To edit an extrusion using the Extrude Roll-Up

1.	Select the extrusion.

2.	Click Effects, Extrude.

3.	Edit the extrusion using controls on the Preset, Depth, Rotation, Light Source, and Color pages.

4.	Click Apply.

Notes

You can edit an extrusion by selecting different options from the Extrude Roll-Up, by using CorelDRAW tools to change its position, size, shape, outline, or fill, or by node editing the control object.

 Related Topics


To change the position, size, outline, or fill of the extrusion

1.	Select the extrusion.

2.	Edit the extrusion as you would any other object. The extrusion reforms automatically to incorporate your changes.

Notes

You can edit an extrusion by selecting different options from the Extrude Roll-Up, by using CorelDRAW tools to change its position, size, shape, outline, or fill, or by node editing the control object. With text, node editing changes the attributes of individual characters. With other types of objects, node editing changes only the shape of the control object.

You cannot node edit objects that you have rotated using the Extrude Roll-Up’s Rotation controls or altered using the Envelope and Perspective commands.

 Related Topics


To change the shape of the control object in an extrusion

1.	Click the Shape tool.

2.	Select the object you want to edit.

3.	Drag the object’s nodes to attain the shape you want.

Notes

To node edit the extruded surfaces in an extrusion group, you must first separate the control object from the extruded surfaces, then ungroup the extruded surfaces. You can then use the Shape tool to edit the individual extruded shapes. Click Related Topics for procedural help on Separating and Ungrouping extrusions.

You cannot node edit objects that you have rotated using the Extrude Roll-Up’s Rotation controls or have altered using the Envelope or Perspective commands.

Tip

Double-clicking a text node opens the Character Attributes dialog box. Use the controls on this dialog box to edit the selected character’s attributes.

 Related Topics


To clear an extrusion

1.	Select the extruded object.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Extrude.

 Related Topics


To separate a control object from its extruded surfaces.
To separate a control object from its extruded surfaces

1.	Select the extrusion.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

Note

The extruded surfaces remain grouped.

 Related Topics


To ungroup extruded surfaces

1.	Select the extruded surfaces.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

Note

You must first separate the control object from its extruded surfaces to ungroup the extruded surfaces.

 Related Topics


To create a new presets file

1.	Click Effects, Extrude.

2.	Click the Presets tab

3.	Click [image], New.

4.	Use the controls provided to choose or create the directory in which you want to put the new presets file.

5.	Type a name for the new file in the File name box. (The default extension is .pst.)

6.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To open a presets file

1.	Click Effects, Extrude.

2.	Click the Presets tab

3.	Click [image], Open.

4.	Use the controls provided to choose the directory and file you want to open.

5.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To save a presets file under a new name

1.	Click Effects, Extrude.

2.	Click the Presets tab

3.	Click [image], Save As.

4.	Use the controls provided to choose or create the directory in which you want to save the current presets configuration.

5.	Type a name for the file in the File name box.

6.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To merge two presets files using the Extrude Roll-Up

1.	Click Effects, Extrude.

2.	Click the Presets tab

3.	Click [image], Merge With.

4.	Use the controls provided to choose the file with which you want to merge the current presets configuration.

5.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


Working with lenses
{bmrt_ht_00.bmp}Working with lenses

CorelDRAW’s Lens Roll-Up provides eleven lenses that you can apply to objects in a drawing. By applying a lens to an object, you change its appearance as well as altering the way you perceive objects located behind it. For example, if you add a Magnify lens with a magnification factor of 2 to an object covering text, the text appears twice its original size. A lens does not change the objects behind it, only the way we see these objects through the lens.

You can also apply effects to any lenses you add. The Frozen effect, for example, creates a duplicate of the area covered by the lens. You can then move this duplicate anywhere in the drawing window. In addition, you can use the Viewpoint option to create a reference to another part of your drawing without having to move the lens over the referenced area.

There are some rules you should remember when you add a lens to a drawing. First, you can only apply a lens to an object with a closed path. Also, the object to which you apply a lens can’t be part of a group. You can apply a lens to an entire group, but the lens applies to each object separately.

Placing a lens over objects on different layers has no effect on the order of the layers.

 Related Topics


To add a lens

1.	Select the object to which you want to add a lens.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose a lens from the list box.

4.	Use the controls provided to specify the lens attributes.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

The object you select can be any size or shape, but it must have a closed path.

When you save a drawing containing lenses to a version of CorelDRAW earlier than 5.0, the lenses appear grayed out.

When you add a lens to an object filled with a non-uniform fill (for example, a fountain fill), the lens assumes the color displayed in the Color box in the Lens Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To copy a lens from one object to another

1.	Select the object to which you want to apply the lens.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Lens From.

3.	Select the object from which you want to copy the lens.

 Related Topics


To change an object's lens
To change an object’s lens

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose a lens from the list box.

4.	Use the controls provided to specify the lens attributes.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To remove a lens from an object

1.	Select the object from which you want to remove a lens.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Choose None from the list box.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To move the viewpoint of a lens

1.	Select the lens.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Enable the Viewpoint check box.

4.	Click Edit to display the viewpoint (represented by an X).

5.	Drag the X to the desired position.

6.	Click End.

7.	Click Apply.

Note

The viewpoint represents the center of the area covered by the lens.

 Related Topics


To freeze the contents of a lens

1.	Select the lens.

2.	Click Effects, Lens.

3.	Enable the Frozen check box.

4.	Click Apply.

Note

The area seen through the lens remains if you reposition the lens. To undo the frozen effect, select the lens, and disable the Frozen check box.

 Related Topics


To edit the shape of a lens

1.	Choose the Shape tool.

2.	Select the lens you want to edit.

3.	Drag the lens’s nodes to attain the desired shape.

 Related Topics


Moving, copying, and deleting objects

CorelDRAW provides many effective tools for manipulating objects in your drawings. Often, the simplest and most commonly used of these tools provide you with powerful ways to create and manage your drawings. The Duplicate and Clone commands, for example, provide useful ways to copy objects. Duplicate replicates an object, copying all of its attributes. Clone also creates a replica, but many changes that you make to the original object are also applied to the clone.

The Position Roll-Up provides controls that let you move an object relative to the page or to its original position. The roll-up also provides an Apply to Duplicate button, which copies the selected object and applies your position settings to the duplicate only.

The Copy and Paste commands in the Edit menu let you copy selected objects to the Windows Clipboard. From there, you can paste them into another drawing or Windows application.

If you make a mistake while performing any of these operations, you can click Edit, Undo to reverse the operation.

 Related Topics


To move objects a specified distance

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform Roll-Up, Position.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up. The H (horizontal) and V (vertical) fields show the coordinates of the selected object’s center relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Enable the Relative Position check box.

5.	Type the distance you want to move the object in the H and V fields. Positive values move the object up and to the right; negative values move it down and to the left.

6.	Click Apply.

Note

Click Apply to Duplicate to leave a copy of the original in place. CorelDRAW creates and moves a duplicate object according to your specifications.

You can also use the anchor points to move the object its full width or height in the specified direction. For example, clicking the right center anchor point causes the object to move to the right by the distance of its width.

 Related Topics


To move an object to an exact location

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Click View, Rulers to display the rulers.

3.	Click Arrange, Transform Roll-Up, Position.

4.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

5.	Disable the Relative Position check box.

6	Type the coordinates of the new location in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) fields. Positive values move the object up and to the right; negative values move it down and to the left.

7.	Click Apply.

Note

Click Apply to Duplicate to leave a copy of the original object in place. CorelDRAW creates and moves a duplicate object according to your specifications.

 Related Topics


To move an object using the mouse

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Drag the object to a new location.

Note

As you move the object, the status bar shows the distance the object has moved.

You can also use the numeric keyboard + key to move objects.

 Related Topics


To move an object using the mouse and leave a copy behind

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Press and hold the left mouse button.

3.	Drag the object to the location you want.

4.	Before releasing the left mouse button, click the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To constrain an object's movement

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag the object to the location you want. This forces the object(s) to move horizontally or vertically.

3.	Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL.

 Related Topics


To move an object in set increments

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Press an up, down, left, or right arrow key to move the object up, down, left, or right.

Note

Holding down an arrow key moves the object in continuous steps.

The default amount is 0.10 inches. You can change the default setting in the Options dialog box by clicking the General tab, and changing the value in the Nudge field.

 Related Topics


To leave a copy behind while moving an object in set increments

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Press the + key on the numeric keypad before pressing the up, down, left, or right arrow keys.

 Related Topics


To duplicate an object

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to move.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

Note

CorelDRAW offsets the copied object slightly from the original. The default offset is 0.10 inches. You can change this value in the Options dialog box by clicking the General tab and changing the value in the Place duplicates and clones field.

Pressing the + key on the numeric keypad also duplicates selected objects, but CorelDRAW places the copy on top of the original with no offset.

 Related Topics


To clone an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Edit, Clone.

Notes

You can change the amount of offset in the Options dialog box by clicking the General tab and changing the values in the Place duplicates and clones section.

Most changes you make to the original object (called the “master”) are automatically applied to the clone. However, if you change one of the clone's attributes, the attribute you changed will no longer be dependent on the master.

You can apply Blend, Extrude, Contour, and PowerLine effects to cloned objects provided they are applied before cloning. Envelope and Perspective effects are cloned regardless of when you apply them to an object.

 Related Topics


To determine which object is the master object

Click the object with the right mouse button, then click Select Master from the pop-up submenu that appears.

Note

Click Select Clones to select all of a master object’s clones when they are on the same page or on facing pages.

 Related Topics


To copy and paste an object

1.	Select the object (or group of objects) you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Open the file or application into which you want to paste the object.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Notes

You can also use the [image] icon to copy and the [image] icon to paste.

The object remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy another object onto it from CorelDRAW or from another Windows application.

 Related Topics


To cut and paste an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Open the file or application into which you want to paste the object.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Notes

You can also click the [image] in the toolbar to cut an object.

The object remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy another object onto it from CorelDRAW or from another Windows application.

 Related Topics


To delete an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

Notes

You can retrieve a deleted object by clicking Edit, Undo as long as the retrieval is within the amount of Undo Levels specified in the Options dialog box.

You should not confuse the Delete command with the Cut command, which removes the object, but places it on the Windows Clipboard and allows you to paste it back into the drawing.

Pressing DEL also deletes objects.

 Related Topics


Clipboard - Allowable Formats
 Clipboard [image] allowable formats

CorelDRAW allows you to cut/copy two formats to the Clipboard:

Corel Presentation Exchange format (CMX)

Windows Metafile

You can paste the following formats from the Clipboard into CorelDRAW:

Windows Metafile

ASCII text

Windows Bitmap

Rich Text Format (RTF)

 Related Topics


Clipboard - General Cutting/Copying Limitations
Clipboard [image] general cutting/copying limitations

You cannot paste objects containing the following effects into other applications:

PostScript textures

Pattern fills

 Related Topics


Clipboard - General pasting limitations
Clipboard [image] general pasting limitations

You cannot paste the following Windows Metafile features from other programs into CorelDRAW:

Background commands (SetBkMode and SetBkColor)

Pattern fills (only uniform fills are currently supported)

Clipping regions

Flood fills

Individual pixel manipulations

No ROP2 modes, other than R2_COPYPEN (i.e., no combining of pen colors)

WINDING polygon fill mode (ALTERNATE mode is supported)

Pasting Text

The amount, spacing, and attributes CorelDRAW assigns to text pasted from other applications varies for artistic and paragraph text.

	Artistic text	Paragraph text
Amount  (see Note)	250 characters	8000 characters
Spacing	Program defaults Inter-character = 0% of space width Inter-word = 0% of space width Inter-line = 100% of point size	Program defaults same as Artistic text, unless otherwise set in Text Spacing dialog box.
Text attributes (Fill, outline, typeface,  and point size)	Current defaults	Current defaults
Note

CorelDRAW treats text pasted in blocks of 250 characters or less as Artistic text. If you paste more than 250, the program treats it as Paragraph text. To transfer more than the limits for Artistic text allow, perform the Cut and Paste operation in a series of blocks, where each block of text is less than 250 characters.

RTF (Rich Text Format) text is always pasted as Paragraph text with formatting intact

 Related Topics


Windows screen capture

Pressing the PRINT SCREEN key while running any Windows application puts a bitmap representation of the entire screen onto the Clipboard. To capture just the active application window, press ALT+PRINT SCREEN.

If editing is required, paste the captured image into Windows Paintbrush or Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Save the modified image as a BMP, which can be imported into CorelDRAW.

Note

To produce more accurate screen captures, use CorelCAPTURE.


Working with multi-page documents

Each new drawing you begin is on a single page. Clicking Layout, Insert Page allows you to add as many as 998 new pages. CorelDRAW provides many features for creating multi-page documents. Some of these features are listed below.

Multi-page layouts

Layouts include standard layouts for books, booklets, brochures, and pamphlets.

Automatic imposition

Arranges the pages at printing time so that they appear in the proper order when bound.

Facing pages view

Displays two consecutive pages at once. In this view, you can draw objects that lie partially on both pages, or even blend objects across the pages.

Master layers

Creates a page with the elements you want to appear on each page. For example, you can create a master page that contains your company logo or headers and footers.

Automatic text flow

Links frames of paragraph text on separate pages so that the text flows between them automatically.

 Related Topics


To add pages

1.	Click Layout, Insert Page.

2.	Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert Page dialog box.

3.	Enable the appropriate button to specify where you want to add the pages (Before or After).

Tip

You can also add individual pages by clicking the [image] button. You’ll find this button in the bottom left corner of the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


To delete pages
To delete a page

1.	Click Layout, Delete Page.

2.	Type the number of the page you want to delete.

To delete a range of pages, type the number of the first page in the Delete Page number box, enable the Through to page check box, then type the number of the last page in the Through to page number box.

Tip

To delete the current page, disable the Through to page check box.

 Related Topics


To set up a master layer

1.	Create a new layer using the Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Enable the Master Layer check box.

4.	Enable other layer options as desired.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Create the repeating element(s) of your drawing and position them where you want them to appear on each page.

Note

If you change your page setup using the Page Setup command after you've set up a master layer, the master layer will not incorporate the changes. Specify your Page Setup options before you set up your master layer.

 Related Topics


To hide master-layer objects for selected pages

1.	Go to the page where you want to hide master-layer objects.

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Double-click the name of the master layer that contains the objects you want to hide.

4	Click [image], Settings.

5.	Enable Apply layer settings to the current page only.

6.	Disable the Visible check box.

 Related Topics


To view facing pages

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Facing Pages check box.

Note

This option is grayed out unless you have more than one page in your file.

 Related Topics


To move between pages

CorelDRAW displays the number of pages in a document in the page counter in the bottom left corner of the drawing window. You can go to a page using any one of the techniques described below:

Click the [image] and [image] buttons that appear in the bottom-left corner of the CorelDRAW window. Clicking with the right mouse button moves five pages at a time. Clicking the page buttons with the left mouse button while holding down the CTRL key takes you to the first or last page.

Tips

You can also move between pages by pressing the PgUp or PgDn keys (make sure the NUM LOCK key is off).

CorelDRAW automatically displays the Insert Page dialog box when you reach the first or last page. If you don't want to add pages, click Cancel or press ESC.

 Related Topics


To go to a specific page

1.	Click Layout, Go to Page.

2.	Type a number in the Go To Page field.

Tips

You can also go to a specific page by clicking its tab at the bottom of the CorelDRAW window (referred to as a page flipper).

You can also click the Page Number display in the bottom-left corner of the CorelDRAW window to open the Go To Page dialog box.

 Related Topics


Working with object data

CorelDRAW's Object Data Roll-Up lets you make a database containing information about your drawings. You use this feature to maintain data about individual objects or groups of objects in a drawing [image] for example, text, numbers, dates, and times. If you're creating a technical drawing, for instance, you might want to enter information about component names, part numbers, and cost. You can then use CorelDRAW’s Object Data Manager to organize and display the information on a datasheet.

Once you create a database, you can use the Object Data Roll-Up to view and edit information about specific objects in your drawing. You can use the Object Data Manager to view and edit your entire database.

The Object Data Manager provides the basic functions for formatting and manipulating object data in a datasheet. For example, you can add and delete columns, indent rows to show hierarchical relationships, and summarize data for selected objects. You can also print part or all of the database.

In addition, you can have the Object Data Manager assign a built-in format to each data category. For example, you could have any numbers you enter in a "Cost" field automatically appear with a preceding dollar sign. The Object Data Manager also provides formats for text, dates, time, percentages, and linear measurements.

The Object Data feature supports Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) between popular spreadsheet programs that support DDE, such as Microsoft Excel, Lotus 123, and Corel PRESENTS. By copying data from the Object Data Manager to the Clipboard, you can paste it into a spreadsheet program. When you change the information in the Object Data datasheet, the change automatically appears in the spreadsheet.

 Related Topics


Understanding data formats

You can produce your own custom numeric, linear, and date/time formats for the Object Data Manager by editing the built-in format codes or by creating your own customized codes. Except for the General format, the built-in formats consist of symbols that represent how the data looks when it is formatted.

Click Related Topics for more information on data formats.

 Related Topics


General formats

General formats display text just as you enter it. Numbers appear without leading or trailing zeroes and with no digit grouping symbol. For example, the value 123.456000 is displayed as 123.456.

You can use the & (ampersand) placeholder symbol with the General format to add a common string to another string. For example, the format string "Hello," & ". You may have already won $5,000,000.00!" would format the common string "John Doe" as:

Hello, John Doe. You may have already won $5,000,000.00!

Note the use of quotation marks around the strings and before and after the &. You must include such quotation marks when you create your own General formats.

 Related Topics


Date/time formats

You can use the symbols listed below to create date/time formats.

CorelDRAW bases the default date and time formats on the current Regional Settings. You can modify these settings using the Windows Control Panel.

Symbol	Meaning

d	Display the day of the month as a number with no leading zero (for example, the 5th day as 5).

dd	Display the day of the month as a number with a leading zero (for example, the 3rd day as 03).

ddd	Display an abbreviated name of the day of the week (for example, Sunday as Sun).

dddd	Display the full name of the day of the week (for example, Thursday).

M	Display the month as a number with no leading zero (for example, January as 1).

MM	Display the month as a number with a leading zero (for example, March as 03).

MMM	Display an abbreviated name of the month (for example, February as Feb).

MMMM	Display the full name of the month (for example, February as February).

yy	Display the year as two digits (for example, 1995 as 95).

yyyy	Display the year as four digits (for example, 1995 as 1995).

h	Display the hour as a number with no leading zero (for example, 5 AM as 5).

hh	Display the hour as a number with a leading zero (for example, 5 AM as 05).

mm	Display minutes with a leading zero, if necessary.

ss	Display seconds with a leading zero, if necessary.

am or AM	Display the hour as a 12-hour time, with an am or pm symbol, as determined by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel.

Other Symbols	CorelDRAW accepts certain symbols without alteration if they form part of a format. These include the space character, the tab character, the list separator from the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel, and anything enclosed in Quotation Marks. If you want to use a quotation mark within a string enclosed by quotation marks, you must use the escape character (\) before it.

 Related Topics


Numeric formats

You can use the following symbols to create numeric formats for displaying non-linear values, including currency.

Symbol	Meaning

0	Digit placeholder. CorelDRAW replaces each occurrence of the symbol with a digit from the value being formatted. If the number has fewer digits than there are zeros in the format, CorelDRAW displays extra zeros. For example, with the format 000.000, 1.23 is displayed as 001.230. If the number has more digits than there are zeros in the format, the extra digits are displayed on only the left side of the decimal. For example, the format 000.000 displays 12345.6789 as 12345.678.

#	Digit placeholder. Used to hold a space for the digit grouping symbol. For example, the format #,##0 displays 12345.678, as 12,345 and 1.2345 as 1.

, (comma)	Digit grouping symbol. You can specify the character you want to use by modifying the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel.

. (period)	Decimal symbol. You can specify the character you want to use by modifying the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel.

$	Currency symbol. You can specify the character you want to use by modifying the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel.

/?	Fraction. Used to express a number as a fraction of the denominator ?. CorelDRAW converts the number to a fraction with the specified denominator, then reduces it to the smallest fraction. For example, the format #,##0/81, displays 1.73 as 1 59/81.

K	Thousands abbreviation. Used to express a number in units of one thousand. For example, 123456.789 formatted with 0.0 K is displayed as 12.3 K.

M	Millions abbreviation. Used to express a number in units of one million. For example, 1,678,901.2 formatted with 0.0 M is displayed as 1.7 M.

%	Percentage. Used to represent a number in percentage points. For example, 1.23 formatted with 0.0% is displayed as 123.0 %.

E+00, e+00	Scientific notation. Used to represent a number in scientific notation. For example, 1234.56 formatted with 0.00 e+00 is displayed as 1.23 e+03.

- (dash)	Negative symbol placement. Used to indicate the placement of the negative symbol in the format string. For example, 33,333.33 formatted with #,##0- is displayed as 33,333-.

 Related Topics


Linear formats

You can create linear formats to display measurements in the imperial or metric system, or in picas or points. You cannot combine the systems. For each format, you can make one or two entries. You use the first entry for the major unit (for example, meters), and the second entry for the minor unit (for example, centimeters). If the first unit contains digits after the decimal or a fraction, you cannot enter a minor unit.

When you enter values for formats with major and minor units, you need to enter them in the minor units. If you have a format with miles as the major unit and feet as the minor unit, for example, you enter your data in feet.

You can use the following symbols to create linear formats:

Unit	Acceptable Symbols

miles	mi

yards	yds

feet	ft or ' (apostrophe)

inches	in or " (quotation marks)

kilometers	km

meters	m

centimeters	cm

millimeters	mm

picas	picas

points	points or pts

ciceros	ciceros

didots	didots

 Related Topics


To attach data to an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Choose the field for which you want to enter data.

If you don’t have a field for the data you want to enter, add a new field and choose it.

4.	In the text box, type the data you want to attach to the selected object.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each field to which you want to add data.

Note

Your data entry can be up to 250 characters including spaces; the text scrolls horizontally.

 Related Topics


To add new fields to an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click [image], Field Editor.

4.	Click Create New Field.

5.	Type the new field name in the text box.

6.	Enable and disable the All objects or List of default fields check boxes in the Add field to section, and the Summarize groups check box as desired.

7.	Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each field you want to add.

8.	Click Add Selected Field(s).

 Related Topics


To rename an object's field

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click [image], Field Editor.

4.	Click the name of the field you want to rename.

5.	Type the new field name.

 Related Topics


To reorder an object's data field
To reorder an object’s data fields

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click [image], Field Editor.

4.	Point to the name of the field you want to move and drag it to the desired place in the list.

5.	Repeat step 4 until the fields appear in the order you want.

 Related Topics


To clear data from a field

1.	Select the desired object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Choose the field from which you want to clear data.

4.	Click [image], Clear Field.

Tip

To delete data in all fields at once, click [image], Clear All Fields.

 Related Topics


To change a field's format

1.	Select the desired object.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click [image], Field Editor.

4.	Choose the name of the field for which you want to change the format.

If you want to change the format of several fields at once, hold down the CTRL key and click on the desired field names.

5.	Click Change.

6.	Enable the button that corresponds to the format type you want.

7.	Choose the format you want from the format list or type a new format in the Create box.

 Related Topics


To copy data from one object to another

1.	Select the object to which you want to copy data.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click [image], Copy Data From.

4.	Using the large pointer that appears, select the object from which you want to copy data.

Note

 You can also use the Copy Data From command to append new data to an object.

When copied to a group, data attached to an individual object in the group remains unchanged.

 Related Topics


To create a custom format

1.	Click Tools, Object Data.

2.	Click [image], Field Editor.

3.	If you want to create a custom format for an existing field, choose the field from the list box.

If you want to create a custom format for a new field, click Create New Field. Type the new field name in the text box.

4.	Click Change.

5.	Enable the button that corresponds to the format type you want.

6.	Type the new format in the Create box or select an existing format from the list and edit it in the Create box.

 Related Topics


To delete a custom format

1.	Click Tools, Object Data.

2.	Click [image], Field Editor.

3.	Click Change.

4.	Enable the button for the format type that contains the format you want.

5.	Choose the format from the list box.

6.	Click Delete.

Note

You can only delete formats that you have created. You cannot delete built-in formats.

 Related Topics


To open the Object Data Manager

1.	Click Tools, Object Data.

2.	Click the spreadsheet button ( [image]) that appears in the top left-hand corner.

 Related Topics


To select a single cell

Click the cell you want, or press the arrow keys to move to the cell you want.

 Related Topics


To select an entire row or column

Click the row or column heading.

 Related Topics


To select a range of cells

Drag from the first cell of the range you want to the last.

 Related Topics


To select non-adjacent cells

1.	Select the first cell or range of cells.

2.	Hold down CTRL and choose the next cell or range of cells.

3.	Repeat step 2 for each additional cell or group of cells you want to select.

 Related Topics


To select the entire worksheet

Click the blank square directly above the row headings and to the left of the column headings.

 Related Topics


To delete cells

1.	Select the range of cells you want to delete.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


To resize the width of a column

1.	Move the mouse pointer over the bar separating the column you want to resize and the adjacent column. (The cursor changes into a two-sided horizontal arrow.)

2.	Drag left or right.

 Related Topics


To cut or copy and paste cell data

1.	Select the cell or range of cells you want to cut or copy.

2.	Click Edit, Cut or Copy.

3.	Select the cell into which you want to paste the data.

This cell becomes the top-left cell of the range if you are pasting a range of cells.

4.	If you want to paste the data into another CorelDRAW file, open the Object Data Manager in that file and select the cell into which you want to paste the data.

If you want to paste the data into another Windows program, open the program.

5.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

The data remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy other data or exit CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


To disable auto-summing for a range of fields
To disable auto-summing for a range fields

1.	Select the fields for which you want to disable auto-summing.

2.	Click Field Options, Show Totals. The option is disabled if no check mark appears beside the command.

 Related Topics


To show subtotals for grouped objects

1.	Select the grouped objects for which you want to show subtotals.

2.	Click Tools, Object Data.

3.	Click the spreadsheet button ( [image]).

4.	Select the columns for which you want to show subtotals.

5.	Click Field Options, Summarize Groups. The option is enabled if a check mark appears beside the command.

 Related Topics


To indent data for selected groups

1.	Select the column you want to indent.

2.	Click Field Options, Show Hierarchy. The option is enabled if a check mark appears beside the command.

 Related Topics


To emphasize the cell contents of the highest level

Click Preferences, Highlight Top-Level Objects. The option is enabled if a check mark appears beside the command.

 Related Topics


To display data above a certain level

1.	Click Preferences, Show Group Details.

2.	Choose a row number from the submenu that appears.

 Related Topics


To print the datasheet

1.	From the Object Data Manager, click File, Print.

2.	Specify the options you want in the Print dialog box.

 Related Topics


To resize the Object Data Manager

1.	Point to the border around the Object Data Manager window.

2.	Drag the side, top, or bottom border to resize the window in one direction.

Tip

To resize the window horizontally and vertically at the same time, drag a corner of the border.

 Related Topics


Working with PowerClip objects
Working with PowerClips

The PowerClip command (found in the Effects menu) lets you paste an object (the contents object) inside another object (the container object). By doing so, you create a unit called a PowerClip object. A PowerClip object can be a closed path, a group of objects, or Artistic text. You cannot use paragraph text as a container object. Bitmaps can act as contents objects, but not as container objects.

The container object can be compared to a window. Just as a window’s frame limits your ability to see all of what’s behind it, a container object lets you see only the portion of a contents object (or group of objects) that fits inside its boundaries. For example, if you have an image that is larger than the container in which you put it, CorelDRAW automatically crops the image so that you see only the portion of the image that fits in the container.

PowerClip also lets you place an image into text or add a scanned texture into a PowerLine. This way, you can add special effects without altering the layering of objects around your PowerClip object. You can also use PowerClip in conjunction with other special effects, including extrusions, contours, blends, cloning, and fills.

Once you create a PowerClip object, you can move, rotate, resize, and stretch the entire object or any of the individual objects it includes.

Nested PowerClip objects

You can use a PowerClip object as a contents object and place it inside another container, creating a nested PowerClip object. You can then place the resulting nested PowerClip object into another container, and so on up to a maximum of 5 levels of nested PowerClips.

Using PowerClip with grouped objects

A grouped object can serve as the container or the contents in a PowerClip object. The container keeps grouped and layered images together, displaying them only within the boundaries of the container. If you use a grouped object for a PowerClip container, you can ungroup it once you place the contents inside it.

Note

When you save a drawing containing a PowerClip object to a version of CorelDRAW earlier than 5.0, the PowerClip object appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


Using PowerClips with bitmaps, grouped objects and clones
Using PowerClips with bitmaps, grouped objects, and clones

Using PowerClips with Bitmaps

Use PowerClip to create non-square bitmaps by placing the bitmap object into an irregularly-shaped container. A bitmap can be the contents object, but not the container object.

Using PowerClip with grouped objects

A grouped object can be the container or contents in a PowerClip object. If a grouped object is used for a PowerClip container, it can be ungrouped once the contents object is placed inside it.

A contents object cannot display through child object in a group. If you place a contents object inside a group that includes a control object and child objects, such as an extrusion, the contents object is placed inside the control object. If you click one of the child objects after choosing the Place Inside Container command, the contents object will still be placed inside the control object.

Cloning a PowerClip object

If you edit the container of a PowerClip object you've cloned, the clone(s) is updated with the changes you make. However, if you edit the contents of a PowerClip object you've cloned, the clone is not updated.

You cannot use a clone, or its master object, as a container.

 Related Topics


Using PowerClips with fills and special effects

Using PowerClip to create special effects

Many interesting effects can be created with PowerClips. When you separate a grouped object, an extrusion, or a contour, each separated object becomes a PowerClip object with all the contents that were inside the original object.

Using PowerClip with Extrusions

If you place a PowerClip contents object inside a container object which has been extruded with the Use Object Fill option selected, the Contents object will appear on top of the extrusion. If you place a PowerClip contents object inside a container which has been extruded with the Solid Fill option selected, the face of the extrusion becomes the PowerClip object, and the contents may appear cropped.

Using PowerClip with Contours

When using a contour as the container object in a PowerClip, the contour step lines show through the object you have used as the contents.

Using PowerClip with Blends

If you blend a PowerClip object, the contents fill the entire area of the blend. The blend objects appear as if they were a window that you can see the contents object through.

Using PowerClip with PowerLines

You can place an object inside a PowerLine.

Using PowerClip with Fills

An object's path must be closed before another object can be placed inside it. If an object is pasted inside a container with an open path, the container will take the contents, but the contents will not display until the path is closed. Use the node edit roll-up to close the path. Assign No Fill to a container to make it transparent. Underlying objects and contents will show through a transparent PowerClip object.

 Related Topics


To create a PowerClip object

1.	Select the object you want to place inside the container object. (This object will become the contents object.)

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Place Inside Container.

The pointer changes to a horizontal arrow.

3.	Click the object you want to use as the container.

Note

The contents object is centered inside the container object by default. You can change this default by opening the Options dialog box and clicking the General tab.

You cannot display a contents object through a child object in a group. If you place a contents object inside a group that includes a control object and child objects, such as an extrusion, CorelDRAW places the contents object inside the control object. If you click one of the child objects after choosing the Place Inside Container command, CorelDRAW will still place the contents object inside the control object.

An object must have a closed path before another object can be placed inside it. If you paste an object inside a container with an open path, the container accepts the contents, but the contents remain invisible until you close the path. Use the Node Edit tool to close the path. Assign the No Fill option to a container to make it transparent. Underlying objects and contents show through a transparent PowerClip object.

 Related Topics


To remove a contents object from its container

1.	Select the PowerClip object.

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Extract Contents.

 Related Topics


To edit the contents object of a PowerClip object
To edit the contents of a PowerClip object

1.	Select the PowerClip object that contains the object you want to edit.

2.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Edit Contents.

3.	Edit the contents object as required.

4.	Click Effects, PowerClip, Finish Editing This Level.

Notes

When you edit the contents of a PowerClip, the container object appears, for reference purposes only, as a transparent object with a blue outline. The contents objects are displayed with their fill attributes visible.

When you edit nested PowerClips, CorelDRAW provides information in the status bar to indicate the level in which you are working [image] for example, "Editing PowerClip Contents (Level 1)". To access lower levels, repeat steps 1 and 2 of the above procedure until you reach the level you want to edit. When you finish editing your PowerClip, repeat step 4 until the editing level information disappears. For example, if the container object is an ellipse holding three nested PowerClip objects, the scroll bar information line changes from "Editing PowerClip Contents (Level 3)" to "Editing PowerClip Contents (Level 2)" to "Editing PowerClip Contents (Level 1)" to "PowerClip Ellipse on Layer 1".

 Related Topics


To lock and unlock the contents object in a PowerClip
To reposition a PowerClip container without moving its contents

1.	Click the PowerClip object with the right mouse button.

2.	Disable the Lock Contents to PowerClip command.

3.	Reposition the container as desired.

4.	To lock the contents to the PowerClip container again, repeat step 1 and enable the Lock Contents to PowerClip command.

Note

When the Lock Contents to PowerClip check box is enabled, the contents of the PowerClip are locked to the container. As a result, when you move or rotate the PowerClip, the contents move or rotate with it. When the Lock Contents to PowerClip option is disabled, the contents are locked to the page. In this case, only the container moves or rotates.

Tip

When you duplicate, clone, copy, or use special effects with a PowerClip object, you should enable the Lock Contents to PowerClip option. By locking the PowerClip’s contents, you ensure that the contents retain their appearance within the container.

 Related Topics


To change the default placement of contents objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	To disable the centering default, click the Automatically center new PowerClip contents check box to remove the check mark. To enable the centering default, click the check box to make the check mark appear.

Note

The Automatically center new powerclip contents check box is enabled by default.

Once you disable the automatic centering option, new contents objects will maintain their position in the drawing even though you have placed them inside the container. If a contents object doesn't overlap the container object when you add it to a PowerClip, it appears invisible. To see the contents in this case, you need to unlock the contents object and reposition the container.

 Related Topics


Adding perspective to objects

CorelDRAW’s Add Perspective command lets you give objects a sense of depth by moving some of an object’s edges so they appear closer or further away. Although the object appears on a two-dimensional screen or page, you can use the Add Perspective command to simulate one-point and two-point perspective. You can add perspective to any object you draw, including graphics and text.

 Related Topics


To add perspective to an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Effects, Add Perspective.

The Shape tool is selected and a bounding box with four nodes appears around the object.

3.	Drag the nodes to achieve the desired perspective.

For one-point perspective, drag either horizontally or vertically. To constrain the handle's motion to one of these axes, hold down CTRL while dragging. Holding down CTRL and SHIFT moves opposing handles the same distance in the same or opposite directions.

For two-point perspective, drag diagonally toward or away from the center of the object. As you drag, vanishing points appear (represented by an X). You can also drag these to change the object's perspective.

4.	Release the mouse button to redraw the object in its new perspective.

 Related Topics


To clear an object's perspective

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Effects, Clear Perspective.

Notes

If you applied the Add Perspective command more than once, you need to repeat this procedure to clear each bounding box.

If you've applied other effects to the object since you applied perspective, you must clear the other effects before clearing perspective. If you want to keep the other effects but clear the perspective, make a duplicate of the object. After you clear the effects, use the Copy commands (found in the Effects menu) to copy the duplicate's effects back to the original.

 Related Topics


To copy an object's perspective

1.	Select the object to which you want the perspective copied.

2.	Click Effects, Copy, Perspective From.

3.	Using the large pointer that appears, select the object whose perspective you want to copy.

Note

 You cannot copy an object's perspective unless Add Perspective is the most recent effect applied to it.

 Related Topics


To edit an object's perspective

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click the Shape tool.

3.	Drag the object’s nodes to attain the desired perspective.

Tip

To experiment with perspective without altering the object permanently, choose the Add Perspective command a second time. CorelDRAW adds another bounding box over the existing one. Click Effects, Clear Perspective when you have finished experimenting.

 Related Topics


Working with PowerLines

CorelDRAW’s PowerLine effect lets you give your illustrations a hand-drawn look by creating lines of variable weight and thickness. PowerLines make an ordinary line look tapered, etched, or fuzzy by mimicking the drawing styles of traditional artistic tools like paintbrushes, calligraphic pens, and wood-etching tools.

The PowerLine Roll-Up contains controls that allow you to specify such attributes as the maximum width, nib shape, and ink flow of your PowerLine. The roll-up also provides 24 preset PowerLines that you can apply to lines in your drawings. As with other CorelDRAW presets (for example, those in the Extrude Roll-Up), you can experiment with existing PowerLines and save them for your future use. You can apply the PowerLine effect to a line after you create it or have each line you draw become a PowerLine.

PowerLines have their own outline and fill properties. As a result, PowerLines act as graphic objects rather than lines like those drawn with the Freehand or Bezier tools.

 Related Topics


To draw a PowerLine

1.	Click Effects, PowerLine.

2.	Click [image].

3.	From the list box, choose the PowerLine you want to use.

The preview box shows the basic line shape the selected PowerLine produces.

4.	In the Maximum Width number box, specify how wide you want the line to be at its widest point.

5.	Click [image] to display controls for adjusting the shape and thickness of the PowerLine's nib. You can make the adjustments by dragging a representation of the nib in the preview box.

6.	Using the Intensity slider, choose the percentage by which you want to increase the PowerLine's width along its entire length.

7.	Click [image] to adjust Pen Leakiness, Ink Spread, Ink Flow, and Scale with Image.

Leakiness	Increase or decrease to produce a corresponding increase/decrease in the width of the line at points where it changes direction. The sharper the change in direction, the more pronounced the effect.

Spread	Increase when Speed is greater than zero to produce a smoother line.

Ink Flow	Increase to produce a line with more coverage. Decrease to cause the line to dry up as it gets thinner.

Scale with Image	Maintains the proportions of the PowerLine when it's scaled.

8.	Select the Freehand tool and draw your line.

 Related Topics


To apply a PowerLine to an object

1.	Select the object to which you want to apply a PowerLine.

2.	Click Effects, PowerLine Roll-Up.

3.	Select the PowerLine you want to apply.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To draw pressure-sensitive PowerLines

1.	Click Effects, PowerLine Roll-Up.

2.	From the list box, choose Pressure.

3.	Adjust the settings as required to produce the effect you want.

4.	Select the Freehand tool and as you drag press the up arrow key to decrease the width of the line or the down arrow key to increase the width.

If you're using a pressure-sensitive stylus, apply more or less pressure to increase or decrease the width of the line.

5.	Release the mouse button or stylus to end the line.

 Related Topics


To save PowerLine settings

1.	Select the settings you want to save, then click the Save As button.

2.	Type a name in the PowerLine box.

CorelDRAW adds the name to the end of the Preset list in the roll-up.

Note

You can delete custom PowerLine settings by selecting the PowerLine settings from the Preset List, clicking Save As, then clicking Delete.

 Related Topics


Working with presets

CorelDRAW's Presets feature makes drawing even easier by allowing you to record, select, and apply ("play back") the operations you use most often. When you choose the Presets command, CorelDRAW opens the Presets Roll-Up. The Presets Roll-Up provides a series of built-in presets as well as controls that let you record, customize, and play back your own presets. You can even assign and update a thumbnail [image] a preview that reminds you of the product created from running a preset [image] for any built-in or original preset. The Presets Roll-Up also lets you work with collections of presets saved in files. You can manage these files to keep track of special presets or those you use most often.

You can use the Presets Roll-Up to record any one or combination of the operations in the following list.

create (rectangles and ellipses only)

delete

duplicate and clone

copy attributes from

move, stretch, skew, and rotate; clear transformations

align and order

group, combine, weld, intersect, and trim

add, copy, edit, or clear a perspective

create, copy, clone, or clear a blend

create, copy, clone, or clear an extrusion

create, copy, clone, or clear a contour

create, copy, or clear a lens

edit artistic and paragraph text

convert to curves

change fill and outline properties

overprint fill and outline

When you create Presets, you should consider the following information.

Transaction sequence

If you create an object with the first transaction, the size and placement of the object are fixed when you play back the preset.

If the first transaction is not the creation of an object, the size and placement of objects upon playback are proportional to the size and location of the seed object (the first object you act on after you start recording is the seed object). See "Proportional transactions" below.

Proportional transactions

Transactions are applied proportionately. This proportionality affects a created object's size and placement relative to the seed object.

When you play back a preset, the size and placement of any created object are relative to the seed object's bounding box.

If you make a duplicate of the seed object and then move the duplicate, CorelDRAW maintains the proportions of each transaction upon playback.

The proportionality feature is particularly helpful when you add drop shadows to objects of different sizes. With it, you can create drop shadows that are consistently proportional to the object they accompany.

Unsupported transactions

You cannot build certain transactions into a preset. Examples of unsupported transactions include:

 starting a recording session with more than one object selected, such as a regular group, a blend group or an extrude group. These groups cannot be used as seed objects.

assigning two-color and full-color pattern fills to objects

assigning arrowheads to lines and curves

transactions that require an editing stage (except Perspective Edit, where the result of the edit is saved, as explained earlier)

font changes to individual characters in a text string. You can only apply font changes to an entire text string.

Auto-grouping of objects upon playback

If you play back an existing preset and it creates more than one object, CorelDRAW automatically groups these objects. This grouping is reflected in the status bar.

 Related Topics


To apply a preset to an object

1.	Select the object to which you want to apply a preset.

2.	Click Tools, Presets.

3.	Choose a preset from the list box.

An thumbnail of the preset appears in the preview box as you scroll through the list of presets. If a preset has explanatory notes, they appear in a flyout box.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To add notes to a preset

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click the preset for which you want to add notes.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Type explanatory text in the Notes box as desired.

The notes you type are saved with the selected preset.

 Related Topics


To update the thumbnail for a preset

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Choose the preset for which you want to update the thumbnail.

3.	Select the object you want to use as the basis for the thumbnail.

4.	Click Thumbnail.

Notes

Changing the thumbnail does not affect how the preset functions.

If you make a mistake while updating the thumbnail (for example, choosing the wrong object, then clicking Thumbnail), you can restore it by applying the preset, selecting its product, then clicking thumbnail.

 Related Topics


To record a new preset

1.	Click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click Start Recording.

3.	Perform the desired transactions.

4.	Click Stop Recording.

5.	Type a name for the preset in the Name box, then type any accompanying notes you want in the Notes box. These notes appear in a flyout from the Presets Roll-Up each time you select this preset.

6.	Click the No Key Color button to select a key color for the new preset or keep the default setting of No Key Color.

Notes

The first object you modify during recording becomes the seed object. When you play back this preset, all transactions operate relative to the size and location of the seed object.

Once you're in recording mode, you can select multiple objects and apply supported transactions to them. These objects must be created within the recording session. If you select an object created before recording began, the transaction applies to it, but is not recorded. As a result, the object will not be part of any subsequent playback.

CorelDRAW tracks the following attributes when you record a preset on artistic and paragraph text: font type; underline, overline, strikeout, and placement; style (bold, italic, normal-italic, and bold-italic); point size; and spacing (inter-character, inter-word, inter-line, and inter-paragraph).

 Related Topics


To delete a preset

1.	Click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click Edit in the Presets Roll-Up.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Choose the preset you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


To create a new presets file

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click [image], New.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose or create the directory in which you want to put the new presets file.

4.	Type a name for the new file in the File Name box. The default extension is .pst.

5.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To open a presets file

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click [image], Open.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose the directory and file you want to open.

4.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To save a presets file under a new name

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click [image], Save As.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose or create the directory in which you want to save the current presets configuration.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To merge two presets files

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Click [image], Merge With.

3.	Use the controls provided to choose the file with which you want to merge the current presets configuration.

4.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To assign a key color to a preset

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Choose the preset for which you want to assign a key color.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Click the No Key Color button, then choose black or click Others.

5.	If you clicked Others, use the Select Color dialog box to choose or create a key color.

6.	Click OK.

Note

Once you've assigned a key color to a preset, you can modify it using the Key Color button on the Presets Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To modify the key color for a preset

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Choose the preset for which you want to modify the key color.

3.	Click the Key Color button (found immediately below the Presets list box), then click Others.

4.	Use the Select Color dialog box to choose or create a new key color.

5.	Click OK.

Tip

You can also modify a preset's key color using the Key Color button on the Edit Preset dialog box.

 Related Topics


To rename a preset

1.	If you haven't already opened the Presets Roll-Up, click Tools, Presets.

2.	Choose the preset you want to rename.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Type a new name for the preset in the Name box.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


Selecting Objects

Before you can do anything with an object on the screen, you need to select it with the Pick tool. Once selected, you can use menu commands or the tools to change the object's appearance or position.

CorelDRAW provides three techniques for selecting objects. The first involves selecting the Pick tool then clicking a particular part of the object. Which part you click depends on the view you are working in and whether the object has a fill:

In Editable Preview, click anywhere on the object's fill or outline. If the object is unfilled, click anywhere on its outline.

In Wireframe view, click the object's outline.

When you enable Treat all objects as filled in the Pick Tool Properties dialog box, however, you can select an unfilled object by clicking anywhere on its outline or interior.

The second selection technique involves selecting the Pick tool and dragging a box (called a marquee box) around the entire object you want to select. Holding the ALT key as you are marquee selecting allows you to select all objects touched by the marquee, even those that are not completely enclosed.

The final technique involves selecting objects based on their properties. For example, by using the Select by Properties Roll-Up, you can select all rectangles with fountain fills.

When an object is selected, eight sizing handles appear at the corners and midpoints of an otherwise invisible rectangle. This rectangle is called a highlighting box.

Note

If the MultiLayer option is enabled in the Layers Roll-Up, you can select objects on any layer that isn't locked. If the MultiLayer option is disabled, you can only select objects on the active layer.

 Related Topics


To select an object

1. Click the Pick tool.

2. In Wireframe view, click anywhere on the object's outline. In Editable preview, click anywhere on a filled object or anywhere on an unfilled object's outline.

Note

When you enable the Treat all objects as filled option, you can select an unfilled object by clicking anywhere on its outline or interior. To do this, click View, Properties, Tool, select Pick tool from the Tools list box; enable the Treat all objects as filled check box, then click OK.

 Related Topics


To marquee select an object

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down the mouse button and drag the marquee box until it completely encloses the object.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Note

Holding down ALT while you drag selects any object that intersects with the marquee box. If you release the ALT key before releasing the mouse button, only the objects completely enclosed by the marquee box will be selected.

 Related Topics


To marquee select an object without surrounding the entire object

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down ALT.

3.	Click and drag the marquee box until it intersects with the object (or objects) you want to select.

Note

Do not release ALT before you release the mouse button , otherwise the objects will not be selected.

 Related Topics


To select multiple objects

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click the objects one at a time.

Note

In Wireframe view, click anywhere on the object’s outline. When you enable the Treat all objects as filled option, you can select an unfilled object by clicking anywhere on its outline or interior. To do this, click View, Properties, Tool, select Pick tool from the Tools list box; enable the Treat all objects as filled check box, then click OK.

Selecting more than one object lets you apply the same commands, transformations, or attributes to all of them. When you select multiple objects, a single highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

 Related Topics


To marquee select multiple objects

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down the mouse button and drag the marquee box until it completely encloses the objects you want selected.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Note

Selecting more than one object lets you apply the same commands, transformations, or attributes to them. When you select multiple objects, a single highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

When you hold down ALT while you drag, any object that intersects with the marquee box is selected. If you release the ALT key before releasing the mouse button, only the objects completely enclosed by the marquee box will be selected.

 Related Topics


To select all objects

Click Edit, Select All.

Note

Selecting more than one object lets you apply the same commands, transformations, or attributes to all of them. When you select multiple objects, a single highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

Double-clicking the Pick tool also selects all objects.

 Related Topics


To select a group of objects

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2. In Wireframe view, click the outline of any object that is included in the group.

Note

In Editable Preview, click anywhere on the object’s fill or outline.

When you select a group, a highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

 Related Topics


To marquee select a group of objects

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down the mouse button and drag the marquee box until it completely encloses all objects in the group.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Note

When you select a group, a highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

Holding down ALT while you drag allows you to select any group that intersects with the marquee box. You must release the mouse button before releasing ALT.

 Related Topics


To select multiple groups

Hold down SHIFT and click an object in each group.

Notes

You can also drag a marquee box around all objects in the groups to select them.

When you select a group, a highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

 Related Topics


To deselect an object from several selected objects

In Wireframe view, hold down SHIFT and click anywhere on the object's outline.

Notes

When you enable Treat all objects as filled option, you can select an unfilled object by clicking anywhere on its outline or interior. To do this, click View, Properties, Tool, select Pick tool in the Tools list box; enable Treat all objects as filled check box, then click OK.

In Editable Preview, hold down SHIFT and click anywhere on the object's fill or outline.

 Related Topics


To deselect all objects

Click any open space in the drawing window, or press ESC.

 Related Topics


To select the next object

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Press TAB.

3.	Repeat Step 2 until the object you want is selected.

Tip

If you’re not sure which object is selected, look at the status bar for information about the currently selected object.

 Related Topics


To select the previous object

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Press SHIFT and TAB.

3.	Repeat Step 2 until the object you want is selected.

Note

If you’re not sure which object is selected, look at the status bar information about the currently selected object.

 Related Topics


To select objects based on object properties

1.	Click Edit, Select By Properties.

2.	Click the New Selection button.

3.	From the General box, choose a search criteria (e.g., Object Types, Colors).

4.	From the Detail box, choose the specific features you wish to search for.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have defined all the necessary search criteria for the objects you want to select.

6.	Click Select.

 Related Topics


To add objects to a selection based on object properties

1.	Click Edit, Select By Properties.

2.	Click the Add to Selection button.

3.	From the General box, choose a search criteria (e.g., Object Types, Colors).

4.	From the Detail box, choose the specific features you wish to search for.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have defined all the necessary search criteria for the objects you want to add.

6.	Click Add To Selection.

Note

If no objects are selected, this procedure has no effect.

 Related Topics


To remove objects from a selection based on object properties

1.	Click Edit, Select By Properties.

2.	Click the Remove from Selection button.

3.	From the General box, choose a search criteria (e.g., Object Types, Colors).

4.	From the Detail box, choose the specific features you wish to search for.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have defined all the necessary search criteria for the objects you want to remove.

6.	Click Unselect.

Note

If no objects are selected, this procedure has no effect.

 Related Topics


To select objects from a selection based on object properties

1.	Click Edit, Select By Properties.

2.	Click the Select from Selection button.

3.	From the General box, choose a search criteria (e.g., Object Types, Colors).

4.	From the Detail box, choose the specific features you wish to search for.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have defined all the necessary search criteria for the objects you want to select.

6.	Click Edit Selection.

Note

If no objects are selected, this procedure has no effect.

 Related Topics


To select unfilled objects as filled objects

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Pick from the Tools list box.

3.	Enable Treat all objects as filled.

4.	Click OK.

Note

This option allows you to select unfilled objects by clicking inside the object (as opposed to clicking the outline); however, this option only affects objects with closed paths (i.e., objects that could be filled).

 Related Topics


The New Selection button


The Add to Selection button


The Remove from Selection button


The Select from Selection button


The Select from Group button


Creating basic objects

CorelDRAW provides a variety of tools that you can use to create shapes. The Freehand and Bezier tools allow you to create shapes line by line, or curve by curve. For example, you can draw irregular shapes or sign your name with these tools. The Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Spiral, and Graph Paper tools allow you to create shapes by clicking and dragging. For example, you can create a circle with the Ellipse tool or a ten-sided star with the Polygon tool.

 Related Topics


To draw a rectangle

1.	Click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle to appear.

3.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

4.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the rectangle from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a square

1.	Click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want one corner of the square to appear.

3.	Press and hold down the CTRL key, then click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

4.	Release the mouse button.

5.	Release the CTRL key.

The CTRL key constrains the rectangle to a square.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the square from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw an ellipse

1.	Click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want one corner of the ellipse's highlighting box to appear.

3.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

4.	Release the mouse button.

As you drew, a solid line indicated where the object would appear on the screen. The status bar displayed the cursor's location on the grid, as well as the object's name and size. This helps you draw objects exactly as you want them.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the ellipse from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a circle

1.	Click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want one corner of the circle's highlighting box to appear.

3.	Press and hold down the CTRL key, then click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

4.	Release the mouse button.

5.	Release the CTRL key.

Note

The CTRL key constrains the ellipse to a circle. Always release the mouse button before you release the CTRL key.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the circle from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a polygon

1.	Open the Shape flyout.

2.	Click the Polygon tool.

3.	Double-click the Polygon tool to open the Tool Properties dialog box.

4.	Type the number of sides desired in the Number of points number box.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Position the cursor where you want one corner of the polygon to appear.

7.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

8.	Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size.

Note

Polygon is the default shape.

The default setting is five sides.

You can change the properties (e.g., star or polygon, number of points) of a shape created with the Polygon tool after the shape is placed.

Tips

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the polygon from the center.

Press CTRL while dragging to stop the polygon from distorting.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the polygon. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool, don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To draw a star with the Polygon tool

1.	Open the Shape flyout.

2.	Click the Polygon tool.

3.	Double-click the Polygon tool to open the Tool Properties dialog box.

4.	Click the Star button.

5.	Type the number of points in the Number of points number box. (If the star has 7 or more points you may adjust the sharpness.)

6.	Click OK.

7.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

8.	Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size.

Note

Polygon is the default shape.

The default setting is five points.

You can change the properties (e.g., star or polygon, number of points) of a shape created with the Polygon tool after the shape is placed.

Tips

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the star from the center.

Press CTRL while dragging to stop the star from distorting.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the star. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To draw a Polygon As Star object with the Polygon tool

1.	Open the Shape flyout.

2.	Click the Polygon tool.

3.	Double-click the Polygon tool to open the Tool Properties dialog box.

4.	Click the Polygon As Star button.

5.	Type the number of points in the Number of points number box. (If the star has 7 or more points you may adjust the sharpness.)

6.	Click OK.

7.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

8.	Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size.

Note

Polygon is the default shape.

The default setting is five points.

You cannot change the properties of a Polygon As Star object. You can only change a Polygon As Star to a polygon or to a star.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the star from the center.

Press CTRL while dragging to stop the star from distorting.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the star. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To change the properties of a polygon

1.	Click the polygon with the right mouse button, then click Properties.

2	Change the settings as desired in the Object Properties dialog box that is presented.

3	Click Apply (directly under the preview box) to apply your changes to the current object.

4.	Click OK to make these changes the default settings for all polygons created in the future.

Note

You can change a polygon to a star but you cannot change a polygon to a Polygon As Star.

Tip

If the lock button above the preview box is enabled, the settings on the Polygon page of the Object Properties dialog box will not change when you click another object created with the Polygon tool. You can apply the locked settings to the new object.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the polygon. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To change the properties of a star

1.	Click the star with the right mouse button, then click Properties.

2	Change the settings as desired in the Object Properties dialog box that is presented.

3	Click Apply (directly under the preview box) to apply your changes to the current object.

4.	Click OK to make these changes the default settings for all stars created in the future.

Note

You can change a star to a polygon, but you cannot change a polygon to a Polygon As Star.

Tips

If the lock button above the preview box is enabled, the settings on the Polygon page of the Object Properties dialog box will not change when you click another object created with the Polygon tool. You can apply the locked settings to the new object.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the star. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To change a Polygon As Star object to a polygon or to a star

1.	Click the star with the right mouse button, then click Properties.

2.	Click the Polygon tab (if it is not already selected).

3.	Click either the Star of the Polygon button.

4	Click Apply (directly under the preview box) to apply your changes to the current object.

5.	Click OK.

Note

You cannot change the properties of a Polygon As Star. You can only change a Polygon As Star to a polygon or to a star.

Tips

If the lock button above the preview box is enabled, the settings on the Polygon page of the Object Properties dialog box will not change when you click another object created with the Polygon tool. You can apply the locked settings to the new object.

To create different patterns, use the Shape tool to mirror edit the nodes of the star. When mirror editing an object created with the Polygon tool don't convert the object to curves first.

 Related Topics


To draw a spiral with the Spiral tool

1.	Open the Shape flyout.

2.	Click the Spiral tool.

3.	Double-click the Spiral tool to open the Tool Properties dialog box.

4.	Type the number of revolutions in the Number of revolutions number box.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

7.	Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size.

Note

The default setting is four revolutions.

Tips

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the spiral from the center.

Press CTRL while dragging to stop the spiral from distorting.

 Related Topics


To draw graph paper

1.	Open the Shape flyout.

2.	Click the Graph Paper tool.

3.	Double-click the Graph Paper tool to open the Tool Properties dialog box.

4.	Type the number of cells wide in the Number of cells wide number box.

5.	Type the number of cells high in the Number of cells high number box.

6.	Click OK.

7.	Click and drag the cursor up or down and off to one side.

8.	Release the mouse button when the object is the desired size.

Note

The default setting is 3 x 4 cells.

Tips

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the graph paper from the center.

Press CTRL while dragging to stop the graph paper from distorting.

 Related Topics


To draw curves with the Freehand tool

1.	Click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click and drag along the desired path.

Note

To erase part of the path you have drawn, hold down SHIFT while continuing to drag backwards. When you release SHIFT, you will resume drawing your line.

 Related Topics


To draw a curve connected to another with the Freehand tool

1.	Click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click and drag from the endpoint of another curve.

Note

To connect the line segments, you must click within five pixels of the endpoint. You can adjust this five-pixel threshold by changing the pixel value in the AutoJoin box on the Curve, Bezier tool properties sheet.

 Related Topics


To draw curves with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the curve segment to start and drag.

As you drag, two control points move in opposite directions from the node. The distance between the control points and the node determines the height or depth of the curve. The angle of the control points determines the slope of the curve.

4.	Click where you want the curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear. These allow you to change the curve further.

5.	Click where you want the next curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear.

6.	Repeat step 5 to draw more connected curves.

7.	Press SPACEBAR twice or choose another tool to stop drawing connected curves.

Note

Curves created with the Bezier tool have symmetrical nodes.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you position the control points to move in 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

To draw a curve with no change of direction (i.e., a curve with one bump) drag in the direction the curve is moving through the end node. Dragging in the opposite direction creates a curve with a smooth change in direction (i.e., a curve with two bumps).

 Related Topics


To draw unconnected curves with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the curve segment to start and drag.

As you drag, two control points move in opposite directions from the node. The distance between the control points and the node determines the height or depth of the curve. The angle of the control points determines the slope of the curve.

4.	Click where you want the curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear. These allow you to change the curve further.

5.	Press SPACEBAR twice.

6.	Repeat steps 3 to 5 to create the next curve.

Note

Curves created with the Bezier tool have symmetrical nodes.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you position the control points to move in 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

To draw a curve with no change of direction (i.e., a curve with one bump) drag in the direction the curve is moving through the end node. Dragging in the opposite direction creates a curve with a smooth change in direction (i.e., a curve with two bumps).

 Related Topics


To draw a straight line with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click where you want the line to begin.

3.	Click where you want the line to end.

Note

To draw another line connected to the first, click the endpoint of the last line and continue drawing. You can streamline this action by double-clicking to finish each line segment and start the next. Remember to click, not double-click, when you finish the final segment.

To connect the line segments, you must click within five pixels of the endpoint. You can adjust this five-pixel threshold by changing the pixel value in the AutoJoin box on the Curve, Bezier tool properties sheet.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you draw the line to constrain it to 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To draw connected straight lines with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Bezier tool from the flyout.

3.	Click where you want the line to start.

4.	Click where you want the line to end.

5.	Click where you want the next line to end.

6.	Repeat step 5 to draw more lines.

7.	Press SPACEBAR twice or choose another tool to stop drawing connected lines.

 Related Topics


To draw unconnected lines with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Bezier tool from the flyout.

3.	Click where you want the line to start.

4.	Click where you want the line to end.

5.	Press SPACEBAR twice

6.	Repeat steps 3 to 5 to draw another line.

 Related Topics


To draw a closed shape with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Bezier tool from the flyout.

3.	Draw the shape segment by segment.

4.	When placing the final node, click the start node of the first segment.

 Related Topics


To set the constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2. Click the General tab (if it is not already selected).

3. Type a value in the Constrain angle number box (the default value is 15).

 Related Topics


To set line properties

1.	Double-click the Freehand tool or the Bezier tool.

2.	In the Tool Properties dialog box, change the values desired.

 Related Topics


The Freehand tool allows you to create a curve by dragging the mouse along the path of the curve.


The Bezier tool allows you to create a curve by placing and manipulating Bezier nodes.


The Polygon tool allows you to create complex shapes by clicking and dragging.


The Spiral tool allows you to create spirals by clicking and dragging.


The Graph Paper tool allows you to create a lined grid by clicking and dragging.


The Shape flyout allows you to choose between the Polygon tool, Spiral tool, and Graph Paper tool. To open the flyout, hold down either of these tools in the toolbox (only one will be displayed).


The Curve flyout allows you to choose between the Freehand tool and the Bezier tool. To open the flyout, hold down either of these tools in the toolbox (only one will be displayed).


Working with styles

The ability to create and store instructions that determine the appearance of text has long been a feature of word processing and desktop-publishing programs. Called styles or tags, these instructions reduce layout time and make it easier to create documents with a consistent look. Styles and tags also make it easier to incorporate design changes.

CorelDRAW's Styles Manager brings the benefits of styles to graphics creation. You can define graphic styles that include fill and outline attributes, transformations, and certain special effects. Text styles can include graphic style attributes and text attributes such as font, spacing, alignment, and so on.

Once you define a style, you can use the Styles Manager to apply it to any object. The Styles Manager also allows you to save collections of styles in templates which permit you to have different sets of styles for different types of design projects.

CorelDRAW comes with a default template (coreldrw.cdt) that has one style each for graphics and Artistic text and four for Paragraph text. You can use the Styles Manager to edit these styles and add new ones.

 Related Topics


To create a style based on an object

1.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

2.	Click Styles, Save Style Properties.

3.	Type a name for the style (up to 31 characters including spaces).

4.	Enable and disable the style attributes as desired.

CorelDRAW adds the style to the current template and to the list of styles in the Styles Manager.

Note

Each paragraph in a paragraph text frame can have its own style. You can select a paragraph by clicking it while using the Paragraph text tool. Then, follow the steps outlined above to define the style and its attributes.

 Related Topics


To create a style by editing an existing style

1.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

2.	Click Style, Save Style Properties.

3.	Enable and disable the style attributes as desired.

4.	Type a new name (up to 31 characters including spaces) for the style in the Name box.

CorelDRAW adds the style to the current template and to the list of styles in the Styles Manager.

 Related Topics


To apply a style to an object

1.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

2.	Click Styles, Apply, then the name of the style.

3.	Click More to open a dialog box that shows the styles in the current template.

4.	Choose the style you want.

 Related Topics


To apply a style to an object using the Styles Manager

1.	Using the Pick tool, select the object to which you want to apply a style.

2.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

3.	If the style you want is in another template, click [image], Template, Load, then choose the appropriate template.

4.	Choose a style from the list in the Styles Manager.

5.	Click [image], Apply Style.

 Related Topics


To edit a style based on changes applied to an object

1.	Make the desired changes to the object.

2.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

3.	Click Styles, Save Style Properties.

4.	Ensure that the style attributes you want are enabled.

 Related Topics


To edit a style using a dialog box

1.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

2.	Click Styles, Save Styles Properties.

3.	Enable and disable the style attributes as desired.

4.	Keep the existing style name or type a new name in the Name box.

 Related Topics


To restore an object's previous style

1.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

2.	Click Style, Revert to Style.

 Related Topics


To find objects that use a specific style

1.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

2.	Click the style assigned to the objects you want to find.

3.	Click [image], Find.

A highlighting box appears around the first object with the specified style.

4.	Click [image], Find Next.

 Related Topics


To create a new template

1.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

2.	Create text and graphics with the style attributes you want.

Use the Clipboard to add objects with styles you want to save in your new template.

Load an existing template with styles you want and apply them to objects on the page.

3.	Click [image], Template, Save As.

4.	Type a name in the File name list box to save the template in the current drive and directory.

5.	Enable the With Contents check box to include objects on the current page in the template. For a multi-page document, the template includes only the objects on the first page of the drawing.

6.	Click OK.

Note

You can also save a new template by clicking File, Save As. Choose a CorelDRAW template from the List Files of Type box, then type a new name in the File Name box.

 Related Topics


To change the current drawing's template
To change the current drawing’s template

1.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

2.	Click [image], Template, Load.

3.	Choose the desired template from the File Name list box.

4.	Click OK.

Note

If objects in your drawing use styles with the same names as those in the new template, CorelDRAW asks whether you want to apply the new styles to those objects.

You can also open a template by clicking File, Open. Choose CorelDRAW Template from the Files of Type list box and type the template name in the File Name box.

 Related Topics


To delete a style

1.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

2.	Choose the style you want to delete.

3.	Click [image], Delete.

 Related Topics


To assign or change hotkeys

1.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

2.	Choose a Paragraph text style.

3.	Click [image], Set Hotkeys.

4.	Choose the paragraph style for which you want to assign or change a hotkey.

5.	Enable a Hotkey button to select the new hotkey.

Enable Unassigned to clear the selected style's hotkey.

Click the Auto Assign button to assign hotkeys to all styles at once.

Choose an option in the Sort By list box to sort the styles by name or font size.

Enable Cluster Bullet Styles to group styles that include bullets.

 Related Topics


To change the fill attributes of a default style
To change the outline attributes of a default style

1.	Click and hold down the Outline tool from the toolbox.

2.	Choose the outline attributes you want from the Outline tool flyout menu.

3.	Enable the appropriate check boxes to apply the outline attributes to new graphics, artistic text, or paragraph text.

Note

No object should be selected when you change the outline.

 Related Topics


To change the outline attributes of a default style
To change the fill attributes of a default style

1.	Click and hold down the Fill tool from the toolbox.

2.	Choose the fill attributes you want from the Fill tool flyout menu.

3.	Enable the appropriate check boxes to apply the fill attributes to new graphics, artistic text, or paragraph text.

4.	Choose the fill attributes you want from the dialog box or roll-up that appears.

Note

No object should be selected when you change the fill attributes.

 Related Topics


Transforming objects

Transforming an object in CorelDRAW means you change its orientation or appearance without altering its basic shape. CorelDRAW provides two ways of transforming objects: using the mouse and using the Transform commands. You can use the mouse to transform objects visually, orienting them by sight. The Transform commands, on the other hand, let you transform objects with numeric precision. The Transform commands are:

Position

Rotate

Scale and Mirror

Size

Skew

CorelDRAW also lets you create and transform a copy of an object rather than the object itself. You can perform any number of transformations on an object or group of objects.

With the exception of position, you can use the Clear Transformations command to clear any transformations you make to an object. The Clear Transformations command applies to transformations performed with the mouse or with the Transform commands.

 Related Topics


To rotate an object using the Rotation Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Rotate.

3.	Type an angle of rotation. Negative values rotate the object clockwise from its current position; positive values rotate it counterclockwise.

4.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

5.	Type a value in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) fields to set the point around which you want to rotate the object. This stationary point is measured relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.

6.	Click Apply.

Notes

Enable the Relative Center check box to rotate the object around a point defined from the center of the selected object. Use the H and V fields to specify this value.

You can also choose to rotate the object around one of the handles on its highlighting box. Click [image] to expand the roll-up, then enable one of the nine handle buttons to choose a rotation point. These buttons correspond to the eight handles on the highlighting box and the object’s actual center.

If you want to experiment with rotation without changing the position of the original object, click Apply to Duplicate. CorelDRAW creates a duplicate object and rotates it according to the current rotation settings. You can choose to keep the rotation and delete the original, delete the rotation and keep the original, or keep both objects.

 Related Topics


To rotate an object around a handle on its highlighting box using the Rotation Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Rotate.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Select one of the handle buttons. These buttons correspond to the handles on the object’s highlighting box.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

The center handle button corresponds to the object’s actual center.

 Related Topics


To reset the rotation point to an object's center using the Rotation Roll-Up
To reset the rotation point to an object’s center using the Rotation Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Rotate.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Select the center handle button.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

The eight buttons around the center button correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box.

 Related Topics


To rotate an object using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

2.	Drag one of the corner arrows in a circular motion to attain the desired rotation.

Note

If the object is unfilled or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click (or click) its outline to select it.

Tip

Hold down CTRL while dragging to force the object to rotate in 15-degree increments. Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL to maintain the increments.

 Related Topics


To leave a copy of an object when rotating it with the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

2.	Drag one of the corner arrows in a circular motion to attain the desired rotation.

3.	Before releasing the left mouse button, click the right mouse button.

Note

If the object has no fill or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click its outline to display its two-way arrows.

Tip

Hold down CTRL while dragging to force the object to rotate in 15-degree increments. Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL to maintain the increments.

 Related Topics


To move an object's center of rotation using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows. The center of rotation marker appears in the middle of the box.

2.	Drag the center of rotation marker to the desired location.

Notes

If the object has no fill or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click its outline to display its two-way arrows.

By default, an object rotates around a point (called the center of rotation) in the middle of its bounding box.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you drag to constrain the movement to the handle positions.

 Related Topics


To reset the rotation point to an object's center using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag the center of rotation marker towards the middle of the object.

Note

As you drag, the marker automatically moves to the object’s actual center.

 Related Topics


To skew an object using the Skew Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Skew.

3.	Type the number of degrees by which you want to skew the object in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes. Negative values skew the object clockwise from its current position; positive values skew it counterclockwise.

4.	Click Apply.

Notes

By default, an object skews around a point in the middle of its bounding box.

If you want to experiment with skewing without changing the position of the original object, click Apply to Duplicate. CorelDRAW creates a duplicate object and skews it according to the current skew settings.

Enable the Use Anchor Point check box to skew the object around one of the handles on its highlighting box. Click [image] to display the entire roll-up, then enable one of the nine handle buttons. These buttons correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box and its absolute center. The handle you select becomes the skew anchor.

 Related Topics


To change an object's skew anchor point using the Skew Roll-up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Skew.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Enable the Use Anchor Point check box.

5.	Choose one of the nine handle buttons. These buttons correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box and its absolute center. The handle you select becomes the skew anchor.

6.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To reset the skew anchor to an object's center using the Skew Roll-Up
To reset the skew anchor to an object’s center using the Skew Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Skew.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Choose the center-anchor point.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To skew an object using the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

2.	Drag one of the side arrows to skew the object.

Note

If the object has no fill or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click its outline to see its two-way arrows.

 Related Topics


To leave a copy of the object behind when skewing with the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

1.	Drag one of the side arrows to skew the object.

2.	Before releasing the left mouse button, click the right mouse button.

Note

If the object is unfilled or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click its outline to see its two-way arrows.

Tip

Hold down CTRL while dragging to skew the object in 15-degree increments. Release the mouse button before releasing CTRL to maintain the increments.

 Related Topics


To constrain an object's movement when skewing with the mouse

1.	Double-click the object. The handles on the object's bounding box appear as two-way arrows.

1.	Hold down CTRL and drag one of the side arrows to skew the object.

3.	Release the mouse button, then release CTRL.

Notes

Click Tools, Options, General to specify a different constraining angle.

If the object has no fill or you are working in Wireframe view, double-click its outline to see its two-way arrows.

 Related Topics


To size objects using the Size Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Size.

3.	Type H and V values to change the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the object.

To maintain the object’s aspect ratio, click the Proportional check box. If the H and V values entered are not proportional to the object’s current aspect ratio, enabling the proportional option overrides the H and V values entered. As you change one value, the other changes automatically to maintain the aspect ratio.

4.	Click Apply.

Notes

The units of measure reflect those specified in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

By default, CorelDRAW sizes an object around its actual center. You can also size the object from a handle on its highlighting box using the size reference buttons at the bottom of the roll-up. These buttons correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box and its center point. Enable a button to select it.

If you want to experiment with sizing without changing the position of the original object, click Apply to Duplicate. CorelDRAW creates a duplicate object and sizes it according to the current skew settings. Move the sized object to see the original object.

 Related Topics


To resize an object from a specific point using the Size Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Size.

3.	Type H and V values to specify the new horizontal and vertical dimensions of the object.

To maintain the object’s aspect ratio, enable the Proportional check box.

4.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

5.	Enable one of the nine size reference buttons The nine size reference buttons correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box and its center point.

6.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To scale an object using the Scale & Mirror Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Scale & Mirror.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Type the scale factor as a percentage in the H (horizontal) and V (vertical) boxes. A value of 100% leaves the object unchanged, 200% doubles the size of the object, 50% halves the size of the object, and so on.

5.	Click Apply.

Notes

If you have enabled the Scale with Image option (Outline Tool), CorelDRAW automatically scales the thickness of the outline. However, when you stretch an object, DRAW does not maintain the outline thickness, even if you’ve enabled the Scale with Image option. When you stretch an object, you change its aspect ratio; DRAW scales the object’s outline in only the direction of the stretch.

By default, an object scales around a point in the middle of its bounding box. You can scale the object around a different point by changing its scale anchor point.

If you want to experiment with scaling without changing the position of the original object, click Apply to Duplicate. CorelDRAW creates a duplicate object and scales it according to the current skew settings. Move the scaled object to see the original object

 Related Topics


To set an object's scale anchor point using the Scale & Mirror Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Scale & Mirror.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Enable one of the nine anchor buttons These buttons correspond to the eight handles on the object’s highlighting box and its center point. When you scale the object, the anchor you select remains stationary.

5	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To reset the scale anchor to an object's center using the Scale & Mirror Roll-Up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Transform, Scale & Mirror.

3.	Click [image] to display the entire roll-up.

4.	Click the center anchor box. This button represents the object’s actual center point.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale an object using the mouse

1.	Select the object.

2.	Drag one of the side handles to stretch the object.

Drag one of the corner handles to scale the object.

Note

Stretching an object changes its aspect ratio. Scaling an object maintains its aspect ratio.

The status bar shows the percentage by which the object is scaled or stretched. When stretching an object, the percentage shown in the status bar is preceded by the X or Y letter, indicating a horizontal or vertical stretch.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale in 100% increments

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag one of the side handles to stretch the object.

Hold down CTRL and drag one of the corner handles to scale the object.

3.	Release the mouse button, then release CTRL.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale and keep a copy of the original object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Drag one of the side handles to stretch the object.

Drag one of the corner handles to scale the object.

3.	Before releasing the left mouse button, click the right mouse button.

Tip

Stretching an object changes its aspect ratio. Scaling an object maintains its aspect ratio.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale in multiple directions

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and drag one of the side handles to stretch the object in two directions (horizontally or vertically).

Hold down SHIFT and drag one of the corner handles to scale the object in four directions (horizontally and vertically).

3.	Release the mouse button, then release SHIFT.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale in 100% increments from the object's center

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down CTRL and SHIFT and drag one of the side handles to stretch the object.

Hold down CTRL and SHIFT and drag one of the corner handles to scale the object.

3.	Release the mouse button, then release CTRL and SHIFT.

Note

Stretching an object changes its aspect ratio. Scaling an object maintains its aspect ratio.

 Related Topics


To mirror an object using the Scale & Mirror Roll-Up

1. Select the object.

2. Click Arrange, Transform, Scale & Mirror.

3. Click the horizontal mirror button to mirror an object horizontally.

Click the vertical mirror button to mirror an object vertically

4.	Type H and/or V values to set the size of the mirrored object as a percentage of the object’s original size.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

If you want to experiment with scaling without changing the position of the original object, click Apply to Duplicate. CorelDRAW creates a duplicate object and scales it according to the current skew settings. Move the scaled object to see the original object

 Related Topics


To mirror an object using the mouse

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down CTRL and drag one of the side handles across the object. A dotted outline of the object appears when you reach the opposite side of the object.

3.	Release the mouse button and then release CTRL.

4.	To leave a copy of the object behind, click the right mouse button before releasing the left mouse button.

Note

Drag a corner handle to mirror an object from the opposite corner or from one of the opposing sides.

 Related Topics


To clear transformations

1.	Select the object for which you want to clear transformations.

2.	Click Arrange, Clear Transformations.

Note

The Clear Transformations command clears all transformations, with the exception of position, you applied using Transform commands or the mouse.

 Related Topics


Viewing drawings

CorelDRAW provides two modes for viewing your drawings on the screen [image] Editable Preview and Wireframe.

Wireframe displays your drawing in outline form. In other words, when you view your drawing in Wireframe, you don’t see any fills or outline attributes. Using Wireframe allows for quick redrawing, making it particularly useful when you’re working on a complex drawing. You can apply fill and outline attributes in Wireframe, but you need to switch to Editable Preview mode to see them.

CorelDRAW also provides tools you can use to control how you view your drawings. Examples of these tools include:

Zoom tool

Lets you magnify parts of your drawing, bring all objects on the screen into view, show only objects on the working page, show objects at printed size, and zoom-out by factors of two.

Auto-panning

Scrolls the drawing window automatically when you drag beyond the edges of the window.

Scroll bars

Let you move the drawing window horizontally and vertically.

Layers Manager

Lets you organize your drawing in layers. Making certain layers (and, therefore, objects on them) invisible saves screen redrawing time.

Interruptible display

Saves time by allowing you to select a menu command or tool without waiting for the screen to redraw completely.

Full-screen preview

Lets you view your drawing using the entire screen with none of the CorelDRAW tools showing.

Preview selected only

Gives you a full-screen preview of specific objects in your drawing.

Panning tool

Lets you scroll the drawing window in precise distances and directions. You’ll find the Panning tool especially useful when you zoom in on an object in a drawing.

 Related Topics


To display drawings in Editable Preview mode

Click View and disable the Wireframe command.

When Wireframe is enabled, a check mark appears beside its menu command.

Tip

If you’re using Wireframe view, you can also click the Wireframe button ( [image]) on the toolbar to return to Editable Preview mode.

 Related Topics


To display drawings in Wireframe mode

Click View and enable the Wireframe command.

When Wireframe is enabled, a check mark appears beside its menu command.

Note

If you’re using Editable Preview mode, you can also click the Wireframe button( [image]) on the toolbar to access Wireframe view.

 Related Topics


To preview a drawing

Click View, Full-Screen Preview.

Note

The Full-Screen Preview command removes everything but your drawing from the screen. You cannot edit your drawing in preview mode.

Tip

To return to the CorelDRAW window, press the SPACEBAR or click the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To preview selected object(s) only

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	Click View and enable the Preview Selected Only command.

When Preview Selected Only is enabled, a check mark appears beside its menu command.

3.	Click View, Full-Screen Preview.

Note

The Full-Screen Preview command removes everything but your drawing from the screen. You cannot edit your drawing in preview mode.

Tip

To return to the CorelDRAW window, press the SPACEBAR or click the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To magnify the view of a drawing

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Position the magnifying glass at a corner of the area you want to magnify.

3.	Drag diagonally until the area is enclosed in the marquee box.

4.	Release the mouse button.

Note

You can continue magnifying until you reach the magnification limit for your screen.

Tip

For easier access to the Zoom tool options, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

You can revert to the Zoom flyout used in Corel 5.0. Click View, Properties, Tools and select Zoom, Pan from the tools box. Enable Use traditional zoom flyout, then click OK.

 Related Topics


To reduce the view or return to the previous view

1.	If you haven’t already displayed the Zoom toolbar, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

2.	Click the Zoom Out button.

Note

When you click the Zoom Out button, your view zooms out by a factor of two, or you return to the previous view.

 Related Topics


To return to normal view

1.	If you haven’t already displayed the Zoom toolbar, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

2.	Click the Zoom to Page button.

 Related Topics


To zoom in on selected objects

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	If you haven’t already displayed the Zoom toolbar, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

3.	Click the Zoom to Selected button.

 Related Topics


To view all objects in the drawing window

1.	If you have not already displayed the Zoom toolbar, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

2.	Click the Zoom to Page button.

 Related Topics


To view objects at actual size

1.	If you haven’t already displayed the Zoom toolbar, click the right mouse button on any toolbar and enable the Zoom option.

2.	Click the Zoom Actual Size button.

 Related Topics


To scroll the drawing window

1.	Click the arrow that appears in the bottom right corner of the Zoom tool to open the Zoom flyout.

2.	Click the Panning tool.

3.	Point to an area of your drawing and drag in any direction.

Note

You can also click a scroll bar elevator to scroll the window to the area next to the spot you clicked on, or drag a scroll bar thumb to scroll the window by an arbitrary amount in any direction.

 Related Topics


To interrupt and resume a redraw in the drawing window

Click with the mouse or press any key. CorelDRAW resumes redrawing after you release the mouse button or key.

 Related Topics


To refresh the screen

Click View, Refresh Window.

Note

You can also press CTRL + W, or click a scroll bar thumb.

 Related Topics


To increase the redrawing speed of fountain fills

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Display tab.

3.	Type a lower value in the Preview Fountain Steps field.

4.	Click OK.

Note

The setting you select determines the number of stripes CorelDRAW uses to represent fountain fills on the screen. A lower setting uses fewer stripes and results in faster redrawing. You can override this setting for individual objects by using the Fountain Steps setting in the Fountain Fill dialog box.

Tip

To save time and screen-redrawing time, organize your drawing in layers and make some layers invisible, turn off the display of bitmaps in Wireframe view, and/or increase the Greek Text Below value for Paragraph text.

 Related Topics


To add color to the preview screen

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Paper Color button.

3.	Select a color from the palette that appears.

You can also click Others to open the Paper Color dialog box. You can use this dialog box to choose or create a color.

Note

To remove the color, use the same procedure and choose white as the paper color.

 Related Topics


To disable automatic panning

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Choose the Display tab.

3.	Disable the Auto-Panning check box.

4.	Click OK.

Tip

You can also click a scroll bar elevator to scroll the window to the area next to the spot you clicked on, or drag a scroll bar thumb to scroll the window by an arbitrary amount in any direction.

 Related Topics


No related topics were found.


No procedure topics were found.


Function keys

Press	To

F1	Get help on the currently selected command or open dialog box

Shift+F1	Get help on screen item or active command

F2	Select the Zoom In option from the Zoom tool menu

Ctrl + F2	Open the Text Roll-Up

Alt + F2	Open the Dimension Roll-Up

Shift + F2	Zoom in on selected object(s)

F3	Select the Zoom Out option from the Zoom tool menu

F4	Change the current view to fit all objects in the drawing window

F5	Select the Pencil Tool

F6	Select the Rectangle Tool

Shift+F6	Open the Fill Roll-Up

F7	Select the Ellipse Tool

Alt + F7	Open the Transform Roll-Up

Ctrl + F7	Open the Envelope Roll-Up

Shift + F7	Open the Pen Roll-Up

F8	Select the Artistic Text Tool

Shift+F8	Select the Paragraph text tool

Ctrl + F8	Open the PowerLine Roll-Up

F9	Toggle between the Preview screen and the normal display mode

Ctrl + F9	Open the Contour Roll-Up

Shift+F9	Toggle between Editable Preview and Wireframe views

F10	Select the Shape Tool

Alt + F10	Align selected text to the baseline

F11	Open the Fountain Fill dialog box

Shift+F11	Open Uniform Fill dialog box

Ctrl+F11	Open the Symbols Roll-Up

F12	Open Outline Pen dialog box

Shift+F12	Open Outline Color dialog box

 Related Topics


Menu command Keys

 File menu

 Edit menu

 View menu

 Layout menu

 Arrange menu

 Effects menu

 Text menu

 Tools menu

 Related Topics


File menu command keys

Ctrl+N	New Document
Ctrl+O	Open
Ctrl+S	Save
Ctrl+P	Print


Edit menu command keys

Alt+Backspace	Undo
Ctrl+R/Ctrl+Enter	Repeat
Ctrl+X / Shift+Del	Cut
Ctrl+C / Ctrl+Ins	Copy
Ctrl+V / Shift+Ins	Paste
Del	Delete
Ctrl+D	Duplicate


View menu command keys

Shift+F9	Wireframe View
Ctrl+W	Refresh Window
F9	Full-Screen Preview


Layout menu command keys

Ctrl+F3	Layers Roll-Up
Ctrl+F5	Style Roll-Up
Ctrl+Y	Snap To Grid


Arrange menu command keys

Ctrl+A	Align & Distribute
Shift+PgUp	To Front
Shift+PgDn	To Back
Ctrl+PgUp	Forward One
Ctrl+PgDn	Back One
Ctrl+G	Group
Ctrl+U	Ungroup
Ctrl+L	Combine
Ctrl+K	Break Apart
Ctrl+Q	Convert to Curves


Effects menu command keys

Alt+F7	Transform - Position Roll-Up
Alt+F8	Transform - Rotation Roll-Up
Alt+F9	Transform - Scale and Mirror Roll-Up
Alt+F11	Transform - Size Roll-Up
Alt+F12	Transform - Skew Roll-Up
Ctrl+F7	Envelope Roll-Up
Ctrl+B	Blend Roll-Up
Ctrl+E	Extrude Roll-Up
Ctrl+F9	Contour Roll-Up
Ctrl+F8	PowerLine Roll-Up
AltF3	Lens Roll-Up
Alt+F5	Presets Roll-Up


Tools menu command keys

Ctrl+J	Options
Ctrl+F2	View Manager
Alt+F1	Multimedia Manager
Ctrl+F11	Symbols
Alt+F5	Presets


Toolbox keys

 Pick Tool

 Shape Tool

 Pencil Tool

 Rectangle Tool

 Ellipse Tool


 Pick Tool Keys

Hold down	To

CTRL	Constrain move vertically or horizontally

Stretch or scale in 100% increments

Rotate and skew in increments of user-
specified degrees

CTRL+SHIFT	Stretch in 100% increments in two directions

Scale in 100% increments in four directions

Press	To

ESC	Deselects all objects

TAB	Select objects successively

SHIFT+TAB	Select objects in reverse order

SPACE BAR	Select the Pick Tool

Nudge selected object(s) left

Nudge selected object(s) right

Nudge selected object(s) up

Nudge selected object(s) down

+ NUM Key	Leave copy of original when stretching,
scaling or skewing an object

Place duplicate behind original object


 Shape Tool Keys

Hold down	To

SHIFT	Select multiple nodes

Change complement of nodes selected when you marquee select nodes

Move opposing Envelope handles in opposite directions

CTRL	Constrain the movement of a node or control point to multiples of 90 degrees

Constrains movement of characters to nearest baseline

Moves opposing Envelope handles in opposite directions

Constrains movement of Perspective handles to vertical or horizontal

SHIFT+CTRL	Selects all nodes on the path or subpath

Moves corner or side Envelope handles in opposite directions

Moves opposing Perspective handles equal distance in opposite directions

Press	To

HOME	Select the start node of a curve

SHIFT+HOME	Toggles selection of start node on and off

CTRL+HOME	Selects the first subpath in the selected curve

SHIFT+CTRL+HOME	Toggles selection of first subpath on and off

END	Select the end node of a curve

SHIFT+END	Toggles selection of end node on and off

CTRL+END	Selects the last subpath in the selected curve

SHIFT+CTRL+END	Toggles selection of last subpath on and off

DEL	Delete the selected node

+ (plus key)	Adds a node to the selected point on the path

- (minus key)	Deletes selected nodes

TAB	Shifts current node selections forward along the curve

SHIFT+TAB	Shifts current node selections backward along the curve

Nudge selected character(s) left

Nudge selected character(s) right

Nudge selected character(s) up

Nudge selected character(s) down


 Pencil Tool Keys

Hold down	To

Shift	Erase as you backtrack over a path being drawn

Ctrl	Constrain the movement of control points to increments of user-specified degrees when drawing in Bezier mode
Constrain Freehand, Bezier and Angular dimension lines to horizontal, vertical or a user-specified angle


 Rectangle Tool Keys

Hold down	To

Ctrl	Draw squares

Ctrl+Shift	Draw squares from the center out

Shift	Draws rectangles from the center out


 Ellipse Tool Keys

Hold down	To

Ctrl	Draw circles

Ctrl+Shift	Draw circles from the center out

Shift	Draws ellipses from the center out


Dialog box shortcuts

To open this dialog box	Do this

Page Setup	Double-click on Page Border

Guideline Setup	Double-click on a guideline

Grid Parameters	Double-click on a ruler

Character Attribute	Double-click on character node

Fountain Fill	Press F11 with object selected

'New Object' Fountain Fill	Press F11 with no object selected

Uniform Fill	Press Shift+F11 with object selected

'New Object' Uniform Fill	Press Shift+F11 with no object selected

Outline Pen	Press F12 with object selected

'New Object' Outline Pen	Press F12 with no object selected

Outline Color	Press Shift+F12 with object selected

'New Object' Outline Color	Press Shift+F12 with no object selected


Dialog box keys

Press	To

TAB	Move to next list box, text box, check box, command button or group of option buttons

SHIFT+TAB	Moves to previous list box, text box, checkbox, command button or group of option buttons

Arrow Keys	Moves and selects within active group of option buttons

SPACE BAR	Turns on or off active check box or chooses active command button

Letter Keys	Moves to next item beginning with that letter in an active list box

ALT+Underlined letter	Selects item with that underlined letter

ENTER	Chooses active command button

ESC	Cancels command and closes dialog box


CorelDRAW 6 Tutor Notes

CorelDRAW’s Tutor Notes provide quick access to help for tools and functions that may be new or unfamiliar to you. Although not a substitute for CorelDRAW Help, the Tutor Notes provide valuable help on some of CorelDRAW’s most useful tools.

Click the topic for which you’d like more information.

Drawing

Editing

Text

WorkingSpecial effects

Color and printing

Customizing CorelDRAW


Drawing

Adding clipart to an illustration

Drawing a polygon

Drawing a spiral

Drawing dimensioning lines

Vertical

Horizontal

Slanted

Angled

Drawing callouts

Drawing connector lines


Editing

Editing the shape of a polygon

Editing the shape of a curve object

Cutting or slicing an object

Erasing part of an object

Finding objects with similar attributes

Distributing objects evenly on the page

Joining two nodes together

Welding objects

Intersecting objects

Trimming an object


Text

Fitting text to a path

Converting Artistic Text to Paragraph Text

Breaking text apart

Changing the case of text

Creating a new Artistic Text style

Creating a new Paragraph Text style


Special effects

Creating a 3D effect

Blending objects together

Adding perspective

Pasting one object inside of another

Warping shapes using envelopes

Creating a hand-drawn look

Adding contours to an object

Adding a lens to an object

Recording special effects for future use


Color and printing

Using the color management system

Applying an overprint

Setting a custom print style

Positioning an illustration for printing

Printing as grayscale or black and white

Printing several documents on one page

Printing a page of useful information


Customization

Customizing CorelDRAW

Customizing the keyboard accelerators

Working with macro scripts

Creating two-color pattern fills

Creating full-color pattern fills

Customizing arrowheads

Speeding up the display of 3D effects


Managing files

Corel MULTIMEDIA MANAGER is a visual file manager that lets you scan through thumbnail views of your files and images in the Clipart libraries. When you locate the graphic you want, double-click on it to load it into CorelDRAW.

Other features that make working with your files easier include:

Sorting	Sorts files by name or date saved.

Annotating	Lets you attach notes to your files.

Automatic Backup	Creates backup files at regular intervals and whenever you save a file.

Version	Lets you save your files in a format that CorelDRAW 6.0 can use.

 Related Topics


To assign keywords to your files

1.	Open the Save Drawing or Open Drawing dialog box.

2.	If you are using the Open Drawing dialog box, choose the name of the file to which you want to assign keywords

3. Click Find.

4.	In the Keywords box, type the keywords you want to assign to the file.

When typing more than one keyword, separate each with a comma. You can type as many keywords as you want.

 Related Topics


To add notes to a file

1.	Click File, Save if you are saving the file for the first time, or Save As if you want to add notes to a previously-saved file.

2.	In the Notes box, type the information you want to record about the file.

Note

Once you've added notes to a file, you can edit them either in the Open Drawing or Save Drawing dialog boxes. In the Open Drawing dialog box, select the file by clicking the file name in the folder listing, then edit the notes in the Notes box.

 Related Topics


To make a copy of an open drawing

1.	Open the drawing you want to copy

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	In the File Name box, type a new name for the drawing.

To save the file in a different folder, choose the folder in the Save in box.

 Related Topics


To save a drawing in CorelDRAW 5.0 format

1.	Open the drawing.

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	Choose 5.0 in the Version list box.

To keep the original drawing, type a different name or choose a different folder.

Note

The Version box in the Save As dialog box allows you to save your drawing so that it can be used in version 5.0 of CorelDRAW.

If your drawing contains text in a typeface not supplied in version 5.0, convert the text to curves using the Convert to Curves command in the Arrange menu before you save the file.

 Related Topics


To save selected objects only

1.	Select the objects you want to save.

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	Click Selected Only.

To keep the original drawing, type a different name or choose a different folder.

 Related Topics


To change the thumbnail of an open file

1.	Click File, Save if you are saving the file for the first time or Save As if you want to change the thumbnail of a file you previously saved.

2.	Choose the type of thumbnail from the Thumbnail list box.

Note

{bmc bullet.bmp)	Choosing a larger size creates a higher resolution bitmap.

{bmc bullet.bmp)	To dislplay thumbnails in the Open dialog box, enable the Preview checkbox.

{bmc bullet.bmp)	Thumbnails allow you to see a bitmap representation of a file's contents before you open it. By default, CorelDRAW adds a color header to a file when you save it. You can specify a monochrome header instead, or turn the header off.

 Related Topics


Introduction to Scripts and Corel SCRIPT

A script is a computer program that executes a series of instructions with a single command. Generally, scripts are used to automate repetitive tasks or simplify complicated actions, but they can also prompt for user input, display messages, and interact with other applications.

Scripts can significantly increase your productivity with Corel applications by automating repetitive tasks. For example, a script could be used to open a group of files, perform a set of editing actions, or set an application's default properties. In their simplest form, scripts replicate a Corel application's keystrokes, and toolbar, menu, and mouse commands. In a more complex form, scripts can include the commands and constructs of a programming language. For example, you could create a script that only replicates an application's commands once a series of logical requirements have been met.

A Corel script is a Windows text file that lists the Corel SCRIPT commands that will perform a particular task. These instructions are all part of the Corel SCRIPT programming language, which is partially based on Corel applications' menu commands. For example, the FileClose command corresponds to the menu command (click File, Close) on an application's menu system.

The rest of the Corel SCRIPT programming language is based on the BASIC programming language. If you're already familiar with a version of BASIC, you'll find the Corel SCRIPT programming language easy to read and understand.

Computer programming experience isn't a prerequisite for using Corel SCRIPT to create and edit scripts. However, the more knowledge, experience, and desire you have to delve into the mechanics of your Corel application, the more you'll be able to take advantage of the power of Corel SCRIPT.

Your Corel SCRIPT online Help file contains information covering instructions for novice script writers to reference material for experienced script writers and programmers. The following information categories are available in this online Help file:

Corel SCRIPT introduction and overview

Programming and running Corel SCRIPT scripts

Debugging scripts

Using the Corel SCRIPT Editor

Using dialog boxes and the Corel SCRIPT Dialog Editor

Advanced Corel SCRIPT techniques

Corel SCRIPT programming lanugage syntax reference

Corel SCRIPT reference information

The amount of information you'll need to know about scripting will depend on the complexity of your scripts.

Note

Most large computer applications have a built-in programming language of some form but some call their programs macros instead of scripts.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT on-line help.


How to start the Corel SCRIPT Editor

Click Tools, Scripts, Corel SCRIPT Editor.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT on-line help.

 Related Topics


How to run a Corel SCRIPT script

1.	Click Tools, Scripts, Run.

2.	If the Corel SCRIPT script is not in the default folder, chose the drive and folder where the Corel SCRIPT script is stored.

3.	Double-click the Corel SCRIPT script you want to run.

Note

You can use wild cards (* and ?) if you're not sure of the name of the file you want to run. For example, typing script*.csc in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CSC files in the selected folder beginning with script. Typing sc?.csc in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CSC files in the selected folder that begin with sc and are followed by only one more character.

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT on-line help.

 Related Topics


How to access Corel SCRIPT on-line help

Click the Corel SCRIPT icon to open Corel SCRIPT on-line help.

 Related Topics


Shaping objects

Objects created in Corel DRAW are constructed from basic elements called paths. A line, for example, is a path drawn between a start point and an end point. Each point is called a node. A line is an open path that cannot be filled. A closed path (e.g., a circle) can be filled. A path must have at least two nodes, and can have a virtually unlimited number of nodes. An object can consist of several separate paths, called subpaths (e.g., a donut created from a circle within a circle).

The Shape tool and Node Edit Roll-Up allow you to change the characteristics of a path and its nodes. Doing this allows you to reshape an object. To edit the paths and nodes of an object, convert the object to curves using the Convert to Curves command in the Arrange menu. This step isn't necessary for objects drawn with the Freehand tool or Bezier tool because they are already curve objects.

Three special types of shaping don't require converting the object to curves:

rounding the corners of rectangles and squares

creating arcs and pie wedges from ellipses and circles

mirror editing objects created with the Polygon tool

Note

You cannot edit text after you convert it to curves.

You cannot convert groups of objects to curves.

When you use the Knife tool or the Eraser tool on an object, it automatically converts the object to curves.

 Related Topics


To round the corners of a rectangle or square

1.	Select the rectangle or square with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag one of the corner nodes along the outline of the rectangle or square.

As you drag, the four corner nodes each divide into two nodes with a round corner forming in between. As you continue to drag, the corners become increasingly round.

3.	Release the mouse button when the rectangle/square is shaped the way you want.

Note

The amount of rounding (the corner radius) is displayed on the Status Line.

 Related Topics


To convert an ellipse or circle into an arc or pie wedge

1.	Select the ellipse or circle with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag the node at the top or bottom of the ellipse or circle around the outside to create an arc, or around the inside to create a pie wedge.

As you drag, the node divides into two nodes with the arc or pie wedge forming in between.

3.	Continue dragging until the arc or pie wedge is the shape and size you want.

Note

 The Status Line shows the position of the two nodes and the distance (the total angle) between them in degrees.

If you are creating the arc or pie wedge from an ellipse, the word "distorted" appears after the total angle. This means, for example, that a 45-degree angle will be an eighth of the way around the ellipse rather than actually being at 45 degrees.

Holding down the CTRL key as you drag the arc or pie wedge constrains the movement to 15-degree increments.

 Related Topics


To mirror edit objects created with the Polygon tool

1.	Select the object created with the Polygon tool using the Shape tool.

2.	Mirror edit the object using the features of the Shape tool and Node Edit Roll-Up.

Note

You cannot mirror edit an object if it has been converted to curves.

 Related Topics


To convert an object to a curve object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

Note

The object looks the same, but it is now a curve object that you can reshape by manipulating its nodes and control points with the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


To select the first or end node in a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Press HOME to select the first node and END to select the end node.

Note

On a closed curve, the first and last nodes are the same.

In an object with subpaths, HOME selects the first node of the first object and END selects the last node of the last object.

 Related Topics


To select a single node or segment on a curve object

Click the node or segment with the Shape tool.

Note

 Selected nodes becomes highlighted in one of two ways: hollow if the associated segment is a line; solid if it's a curve.

If the node is on a curve, control points extending from the selected node and those on either side of it appear.

The Status Line shows the type of node (smooth, cusped or symmetrical) and segment (line or curve).

If you click the segment, a dot appears.

Once you select a node or segment, you can change its characteristics by applying commands from the Node Edit Roll-Up. You can also move a selected node and its associated control points.

 Related Topics


To select multiple nodes

 Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to select.

Note

You can also drag a marquee box around the nodes to select them.

 Related Topics


To deselect one or more nodes

Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to deselect.

Note

You can also hold down SHIFT and drag a marquee box around the nodes you want to deselect. This method also selects any nodes inside the marquee box that are not selected.

To deselect all of the nodes, click any white space away from the outline of the curve.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its segments

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag the segment.

Note

You cannot move line segments in this fashion.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag a node.

Note

As you drag, the segments on either side of the node move. If the node is on a curved segment, the control points also move so that the angles at which the curve enters and leaves the node remain unchanged.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving several nodes at once

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to select.

3.	Enable Elastic Mode (optional).

4.	Click and drag any of the selected nodes.

Note

Elastic Mode changes the way several nodes move when dragged with the mouse. If left unchecked, all nodes move by the same amount. When checked, nodes move in proportion to their distance from the base node (i.e., the node you are dragging). The end result is that the curve appears to behave like an elastic, expanding and contracting in response to the movement of the mouse.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its control points

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to manipulate.

3.	Click and drag the control points.

Note

Control points only extend from the selected node and those on either side of it if the node is on a curved segment.

 The control points move differently depending on whether the node they are associated with is smooth, cusped or symmetrical. This, in turn, affects the shape of the curve.

 Related Topics


To constrain the movement of a node or control point

Pressing CTRL while dragging forces the node or control point to move horizontally or vertically from its starting point.

 Related Topics


To open the Node Edit Roll-Up

Double-click the Shape tool or double-click any node with the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


To add a single node to a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the spot along the curve where you want the node added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Add Node button.

Note

If you clicked a node, the new node appears midway along the adjacent segment.

Adding more nodes to a curve  is useful when you are shaping a curve object, especially if the existing segments, and control points are not giving you the results you want.

 Related Topics


To add several nodes at once to a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes between which you want further nodes added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Add Node button.

 Related Topics


To delete a node or segment from a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to delete.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Remove Node button.

Note

The position of the deleted node determines the change in the curve's shape.

Tips

Deleting closely bunched nodes and segments helps to simplify complex curve objects. You can also delete them to smooth unwanted bumps along a curve.

You can delete several nodes at once by selecting multiple nodes.

 Related Topics


To delete all extraneous nodes
To simplify a curve object using Auto-reduce

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select all the nodes in the portion of the object that you want to simplify.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Auto-reduce button.

Note

The Auto-reduce setting on the Node Edit tools property sheet controls the extent to which the curve's shape changes when nodes are removed.

 Related Topics


To change the level of auto-reduction

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose Node Edit from the Tools box.

3.	Change the Auto-reduce settings.

 Related Topics


To break subpaths into separate paths

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select a node from the subpath you want to separate.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Separate button.

 Related Topics


To align nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes you want to align.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Node Align button.

5.	Disable any options you do not want.

Note

All three Node Align options must be selected to align the shape of the curves as well as the nodes.

 Related Topics


To break a path

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the spot where you want to break the path.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Break Path button.

Note

When you break a path, any subpaths and nodes that are created remain a part of the original curved object.

Two superimposed nodes appear at each break.

To break the path at several nodes at once, select all of the nodes.

 Related Topics


To split an object using the knife tool

1.	Open the Node Edit flyout.

2.	Click the Knife tool.

3.	Click where you want to make the first cut.

The first cut will break a closed path.

4.	Click where you want to make the second cut.

The second cut creates two closed objects.

Note

The knife tool can be set to create a single object with several subpaths. To do this enable the Leave as one object option in the Knife Tool Properties Sheet.

If you disable the Auto-Close option, in the Knife Tool Properties Sheet, the Knife tool always breaks closed paths.

 Related Topics


To erase portions of an object

1.	Select the object you want to erase.

2.	Open the Node Edit flyout.

3.	Click the Eraser tool.

4.	Click and drag the eraser over the portions of the object you want to erase.

Note

Erratic movements with the Eraser tool can have unpredictable effects.

The eraser does not break closed paths.

You can adjust the Eraser tool's thickness on the Eraser Tool Properties Sheet.

 Related Topics


To change a segment to a curve or line
To change curve or a segment to a line

1.	Click the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the segment you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the To Line button or the To Curve button.

Note

If you chose To Line, the curve segment redraws as a straight line.

If you chose To Curve, the line segment appears unchanged. However, if you select a node at either end of the segment, control points appear, indicating that it is now a curve.

You can also change a segment to a curve or line by selecting a node on the end of the segment.

To change several segments at once, select them or their associated nodes.

 Related Topics


To determine whether you need to add or delete nodes

A curve requires more nodes if you cannot shape it the way you want by moving the existing nodes. You need to delete nodes to remove unwanted dips or bumps associated with them.

There are three rules of thumb for determining whether you need to add or delete nodes on a curve.

For curves moving in one direction, you need a node every 120 degrees.
For curves changing direction smoothly, you need a node for at least every two points at which the curve changes direction.
For curves changing direction at a cusp (pointed corner) you need a node at every cusp.
 Related Topics


To join two nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes you want to join.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Join button.

Note

You cannot join nodes of two separate objects. You must first combine the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.

If you join nodes that are not in the same place, the new node is placed in the middle.

 Related Topics


To connect two nodes with a line

1.	Select the curve object.

2.	Select the nodes you want to connect.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Extend button.

Note

You cannot connect nodes of two separate objects. You must first combine the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.

 Related Topics


To make a node smooth, cusped or symmetrical

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Choose Smooth, Cusp or Symmetrical.

Note

Unless the curve passed through the node on a fairly sharp angle, changing the node's type will not noticeably affect its shape. It will, however, affect the way in which you can reshape the curve by adjusting the node's control points.

Tip

You can change several nodes at once, select them by dragging a marquee box around them or by holding down SHIFT and clicking them.

 Related Topics


To move a control point hidden under a node

1.	Deselect all nodes on the curve object.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click and drag the control point out from under the node.

 Related Topics


To stretch or scale parts of a curve

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes along the curve you want to stretch or scale.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Stretch button. Eight sizing handles appear.

5.	Click and drag the corner handles to scale the curve, or the side handles to stretch it.

 Related Topics


To rotate or skew parts of a curve

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes along the curve you want to rotate.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Rotate button. Eight rotating/skewing handles appear.

5.	Click and drag the corner handles to rotate the curve and the side handles to skew it.

 Related Topics


To change the width of a PowerLine with the Shape tool

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment (part of the core line) to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Click and drag a PowerLine node.

Note

You can click and drag the line that extends from the node to move it along the path of the PowerLine.

You can move two or more handles at once by multiple-selecting or marquee-selecting them. Clicking on a handle while pressing CTRL selects all handles on one side of the PowerLine. Pressing CTRL and SHIFT selects all handles.

You can increase the width of the PowerLine beyond the Maximum Width setting in the roll-up provided the Speed and Intensity settings in the roll-up are set to zero.

You can also shape PowerLines with the Shape tool and the Node Edit Roll-Up the same way you would an ordinary line drawn with the Freehand tool.

 Related Topics


To add a PowerLine node to a PowerLine

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Click where you want to add the PowerLine node.

5.	Click the Add PowerLine Node button.

Note

PowerLine nodes are always added in pairs.

 Related Topics


To remove a PowerLine node from a PowerLine

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Click the PowerLine node you want to remove.

5.	Click the Remove PowerLine Node button.

 Related Topics


To simplify a PowerLine using PowerLine Auto-reduce

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Select all the PowerLine nodes in the portion of the object that you want to simplify.

5.	Click the Auto-reduce button.

Note

The Auto-reduce setting on the Node Edit tools property sheet controls the extent to which the curve's shape changes when nodes are removed.

 Related Topics


To change a PowerLine Segment to a curve or line

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Select all the PowerLine nodes in the segment (or segments) that you want to convert to a curve or to a line.

5.	Click the To Curve button or the To Line button.

 Related Topics


To make a PowerLine segment convex or concave

1.	Select the PowerLine with the Shape tool.

2.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

3.	Click Edit Width.

4.	Select all the PowerLine nodes in the segment (or segments) that you want to make convex or concave.

5.	Click the Convex button or the Concave button.

 Related Topics


The Add Node button allows you to add nodes to a path.


The Remove Node button allows you to remove nodes from path.


The Auto-reduce button allows you to automatically reduce the number of nodes on a path.


The Align button allows you to align selected nodes.


The Break button allows you break a path. Two unconnected nodes will appear at the break.


The To Line button allows you to convert curve segments to line segments.


The To Curve button allows you to convert line segments to curve segments.


The Join button allows you to connect two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


The Stretch button allows you to stretch and size selected nodes.


The Rotate button allows you to rotate and skew selected nodes.


The Extend button allows you to draw a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


The Shape tool allows you to manipulate nodes and paths.


The PowerLine Auto-reduce button allows you to reduce the number of PowerLine nodes in a PowerLine.


The Add PowerLine Node button allows you to add a pair of PowerLine nodes to a PowerLine.


The Remove PowerLine Node button allows you to remove a PowerLine node from a PowerLine.


The PowerLine To Curve button allows you to change a straight PowerLine segment to a curved PowerLine segment.


 The PowerLine To Line button allows you to change a curved PowerLine segment to a straight PowerLine segment.


 The PowerLine Convex button allows you to make a PowerLine segment Convex.


 The PowerLine Concave button allows you to make a PowerLine segment Concave.


 The knife tool allows you to break paths.


 The Eraser tool allows you to erase portions of objects.


 The Node Edit flyout can be opened by clicking on any of the three tool buttons it contains. One of these is visible in the Toolbox.


The Smooth Node button allows to make a node smaooth. A smooth node is a bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, but allows you to vary the length of the control points independantly. Use when you want a smooth transition between line segments.


The Cusp Node button allows you to make a node cusped. A cusped node is a bezier node that allows you to edit the line segments on either side of the node independantly. Use when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


The Symmetrical Node button allows you to make a node symmetrical. A symmetrical node is a bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, and keeps both control points equal lengths. Use when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


The Separate button allows you to separate a subpath from an object to create a separate path.


New features

Angular Dimension Lines

Polygon tool

Spiral tool

Graph Paper tool

Node editing

Panning tool

Connector Lines

Snapping feedback

Slanted guidelines

Persistant thumbnail

Selecting unfilled objects

Selecting multiple objects

Selecting guidelines

Selecting nodes

Distribute command

Increased group level limit

Object ordering

Postscript textures

Preset dialog box

Extrude Roll-Up: Arc Ball

Select by Properties command

Open command

Undo

Label formats

Lens Roll-Up

Multiple Document Interface

View Manager

Customizing your work environment

Customizing the 1:1 Zoom setting

Editing a bitmap

File save and restoration preferences

Save All command

Knife tool

Eraser tool

Bar codes

Properties sheets


Angular dimension lines

Dimension lines are commonly used in technical illustrations to show the size of objects or the distance between them. In previous versions of CorelDRAW, you could choose from vertical, horizontal, and slanted dimension lines. CorelDRAW 6 adds a new dimensioning feature [image] angular dimension lines. An angular dimension line measures the angle between two points and an apex. This easy-to-use tool allows you to determine the start and end points of an arc, text position, and units in degrees, gradients, or radians. Precise measuring is made easy when Snap to Objects from the Layout menu is enabled.

 Related Topics


Polygon tool

The Polygon tool is an easy way to create multi-sided enclosed objects. With a simple click and drag you can create a pentagon. Or, you can use the Polygon Properties Sheet to change the number of sides to create octagons, hexagons, and more. Using mirror editing you can create complex polygon-based graphics.

You can also create a star using the Polygon tool. Using mirror editing, all nodes will move in the same direction, allowing you to create star-based designs such as flowers, pinwheels, or kaleidoscopes.

The Polygon Properties Sheet allows you to customize the point setting, type of polygon, number of points, fill, and outline of the polygon.

 Related Topics


Spiral tool

Drawing a spiral is no longer a time-consuming process. With the spiral tool, you can click and drag to create a spiral. For more precise control use the Spiral Settings to define the number of revolutions and the starting point. For example, you can use the tools settings to create a spiral with eight revolutions.

 Related Topics


Graph Paper tool

The Graph Paper tool makes an otherwise time-consuming task easy. With a simple click and drag, you can create a grid of lines similar to graph paper. Or, for more precise control, use the Graph Paper Settings to define the number of cells.

 Related Topics


Node Editing

Two new features have been added to node editing: extend line segment and mirror editing.

When you select two end nodes and click the Extend button, a line is drawn between the two nodes. This feature ensures that nodes are connected, not just close together.

Mirror editing is a type of node editing that allows you to maintain the symmetry of an object created with the Polygon tool. Each node of an object created with the Polygon tool is associated with other nodes. All the corner or point nodes are associated with one another, and all the side or interior nodes are associated with one another. When you edit the node of an object created with the polygon tool (e.g., move it, change it to a curve, etc.), all the associated nodes reflect this edit. For example, if you move a corner node towards the center of a pentagon, all the corner nodes will also move towards the center.

 Related Topics


Panning tool

The panning tool in the main Zoom tool allows you to move the page view without using the scroll bars.

 Related Topics


Connector lines

Connector lines link two objects together with a live link. These lines act much the same as other dimension lines. To attach connector lines to an object, Snap To Objects must be enabled. If a line is not connected to any object, it becomes a plain line. If a line is connected to one object, the floating point of the line is stuck to the screen at the location it was created. The line can only be moved by moving objects attached to it. Connector lines need to have two control objects.

You can keep the objects connected with the original nodes where they attached the line to the object, or, you can use a "shortest line" algorithm that always places the line at nodes that have the shortest distance between them. For instance, when you move one of the objects, the line automatically reconnects to the nearest node, unless you tell it otherwise. You can enable and disable this option by using the Connector Tool Properties Sheet.

 Related Topics


Snapping feedback

The Snap To command in the Layout menu lets you make the grid, guidelines, and stationary objects behave like magnets, causing objects to align vertically, horizontally, or diagonally to the nearest marker. CorelDRAW 6 has enhanced this feature by providing visual feedback to ensure that your objects are attracted to the correct location.

Snapping feedback for guidelines:

When Show snap location marks is enabled in the Options dialog box and Snap to Guidelines is enabled, the cursor highlights a section of the "snapped" guideline. This feature is useful when you are not sure whether you are snapping to a guideline or object.

Snapping feedback for objects:

When Show snap location marks is enabled in the Options dialog box and Snap to Objects is enabled, a small blue box highlights the snap point.

 Related Topics


Slanted guidelines

Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the Drawing Window to align objects. In CorelDRAW 6, you’re no longer limited to vertical or horizontal alignment. New angled guidelines provide a quick and easy method of diagonal alignment. You can create angled guideline manually or via a dialog box. Also, you can use Snap to Guidelines to ensure precise alignment.

 Related Topics


Persistent thumbnail option

CorelDRAW 6 can update the thumbnail associated with your graphic file. This feature saves time and memory when you make a minor change to a complicated drawing.

 Related Topics


Selecting an unfilled object

Previously, only filled objects could be selected by clicking inside their boundary. In CorelDRAW 6, you can change this default setting so that you can select unfilled objects by clicking anywhere on their outline or interior. This makes it easier to select objects that are close to one another or have very thin exterior lines. Enable this option on the Pick Tool Properties Sheet.

 Related Topics


Selecting multiple objects

The marquee box has always been a quick and easy method of selecting multiple objects. In CorelDRAW 6, selecting multiple objects is made even easier with a new accelerator key. When you use ALT and the pick tool together, any object that intersects the marquee box is selected. You can still use the Pick tool alone; however, only objects enclosed by the marquee box will be selected.

Note

If ALT is not still pressed when the mouse is released, only objects contained in the marquee box will be selected.

 Related Topics


Selecting guidelines

To make it is easier to see when you've selected a guideline, the cursor changes to a move arrow when you click and drag.

 Related Topics


Selecting nodes

The cursor changes shape when the pointer tool passes over a node.

 Related Topics


Distribute command

The Distribute command in the Align and Distribute Roll-Up allows you to distribute objects vertically, horizontally, or both. You can distribute objects over the area defined by the selection or over the entire page. Objects can be distributed based on the distance between the center of each object, the left or right edges of each object, and the top or bottom edges of each object.

 Related Topics


Increased group level limit

The Group command lets you bind objects so that they can be selected and manipulated as a single entity. In CorelDRAW 6, the group level limit has increased from 10 to 99. For example, one group can contain a maximum of 98 sub-groups (the main group plus 98 sub-groups equals 99).

 Related Topics


New object ordering commands

To make placement faster, CorelDRAW 6 adds In front of and Behind commands to the Order sub-menu. Instead of repeatedly moving through an object stack, you can immediately place an object where you want it. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you would like to move object 2 in front of Object 18, use Order, In front of.

 Related Topics


PostScript Textures improvements

CorelDRAW 6 adds a time-saving preview window to the PostScript Textures dialog box. Now, you no longer have to print to see the results of your PostScript Textures selection. You simply select your textures, adjust your parameters, and, if the preview option is enabled, the effects will be displayed in the Preview window.

 Related Topics


Presets dialog box additions

CorelDRAW 6 adds five new features to the Presets dialog box:

Merge Preset File	Merges multiple presets together from other files
Load alternate preset files	Loads additional preset files if they are not listed
Key colors	Changes key colors
Editable preset colors/outlines	Modifies the color or outline associated with the set of recorded actions
Thumbnail edits	Modifies, adds, or deletes the thumbnail associated with the Preset file


Extrude Roll-Up: Arc Ball

By manipulating the arc ball, you can select the rotation for an extruded object.

 Related Topics


Select by Properties Roll-Up

The Select by Properties Roll-Up allows you to search for specific object characteristics. For example, you can search for all rectangles with an outline or simply search for all rectangles. The Find Command searches for specific object types and fills, outlines, and special effects. Also, you can add or remove search criteria, search within selections, and search within groups.

 Related Topics


New features of the Open command

The network access option lets you connect to network drives without switching to the File Manager.

The template contents option lets you choose whether to open a template with the contents or not.

 Related Topics


Undo

CorelDRAW 6 has enhanced the Undo command. You can undo guideline movements and setups.

 Related Topics


Labels formats

Choosing a label format from the Page Setup dialog box allows you to create labels quickly. CorelDRAW comes with over 800 label formats from the United States, Germany, and Great Britain.

 Related Topics


Lens Roll-Up

The folowing three new lenses have been added to the Lens Roll-Up:

Wireframe	Changes the fill or outline color.

Custom Color Map	Creates the appearance of a negative photographic image.

Fish Eye	Magnifies and distorts the area within the lens.

Also, two new effects can be applied to lenses:

Freeze Frame	Freezes the contents of the lens area. The lens can be moved anywhere and the contents will remain the same unless the lens is changed.

View Point	References another portion of the illustration. This referenced area can be moved anywhere on the drawing window.

 Related Topics


Multiple Document Interface (MDI)

With a Multiple Document Interface (MDI), you can display more than one drawing window simultaneously. This feature is useful when copying or moving objects from one file to another, or when you need multiple views of the same file. For example, to edit a small portion of an illustration while maintaining a global perspective, set one window as your "working" window, and another at page preview.

 Related Topics


View Manager

The View Manager allows you to set different views for each page. The custom view settings are useful when you have different types of information on pages. For example, to make reading easier, you can set a 50% magnification level for a text page.

 Related Topics


Customizing your work environment

With CorelDRAW's customizable features you can create your own working environment.

Ribbon Bar	You can position the ribbon bar anywhere on the screen, add and remove functions, add more tool bars.
Hotkeys	Modify current hotkey assignments or add frequently used commands as hotkeys.
Toolbox	Move your toolbox anywhere on the screen, or tear off frequently used tools for easier access.
Status Bar	Place your status bar on the top or bottom of your screen or set display options.
Color Palette	Move your color palette anywhere on the screen.
Menus	You can add and remove items from menus.
 Related Topics


Customizing the 1:1 Zoom setting

Using CorelDRAW's Edit Resolution command in the Zoom Tool Properties Sheet, you can change the default 1:1 zoom setting and ensure that one inch on your screen is actually one inch.

 Related Topics


Editing bitmaps

CorelDRAW 6 offers two new bitmap editing features: irregular bitmap cropping and bitmap color masking.

Use the Shape tool to change the shape of bitmap outlines.

With the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up, you no longer need to create a separate PowerClip container to clip an image. For example, if you have a bitmap of a person standing against a blue backdrop and want to clip the image to the exact shape of the person, you simply mask the color blue. For more artistic effects, you can mask colors to allow other background images and colors to show through. With the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up, you can clip as many as seven colors from a bitmap. Plus, you can use the color tolerance settings to define the sensitivity of the color clipping.

 Related Topics


File Save and Restoration preferences

When you enable the Interruptible file save and restoration options, you can discontinue a Save command by pressing ESC. Also, you can choose whether to save for speed (faster save time, larger file) or storage (smaller file, longer save time).

 Related Topics


Save All command

In one quick step you can save all open drawings, templates, and layers. Simply click Save All in the File Menu. If any open items haven't been saved previously, CorelDRAW will display the appropriate save dialog boxes so that you can name them.

 Related Topics


Knife tool

Use the Knife tool to break an object into separate objects. For example, when you cut a circle in two places, you create two separate pie-shaped objects. The Knife tool can also be set to break up an object into subpaths rather than into separate objects.

 Related Topics


Eraser tool

Use the Eraser tool to erase portions of an object without breaking any closed paths. For example, if you drag the Eraser tool across a filled square, you create an object with two closed subpaths.

 Related Topics


Bar Codes

The Bar Code wizard, found in the Edit menu, allows you place seven types of industry-standard bar codes that standard bar code readers can read on your CorelDRAW objects.

 Related Topics


Properties sheets

Each tool, object, and style has a properties sheet that allows you to change its properties. These properties sheets often contain options that were previously available in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Dublin: This file is newly created for Draw 6.


Corel Bar Code overview

You can create and edit your own bar codes in CorelDRAW using the Bar Code Wizard.

To start, choose Insert Bar Code from the Edit menu. When you choose CorelBarCode Object from the resulting Insert New Object dialog box, the Bar Code Wizard guides you through the process of creating your bar codes.

Using industry-standard bar-coding formats, you can enter your bar code string, choose a corresponding font and point size, and set readability.

Note

Bar code fonts installed with the Bar Code Wizard do not display in CorelDRAW's Character dialog box because they are special fonts used for bar code generation only. Fonts in imported bar codes do not display in the document window and Character dialog box.

 Related Topics


Wizard context-sensitive topics


Choose a bar code type

Enables you to choose from the industry-standard bar coding systems.

 Related Topics


Enter your bar code string

Enables you to enter the code you want to use. Two examples are shown below:

 Related Topics


Choose a bar code font

The fonts displayed are those commonly used for the type of bar code you chose in step one.

 Related Topics


Choose bar code attributes

Choose the attributes you want for your bar code.

You can set up the code by font name or by bar code attributes. If you choose Font Name, the next screen displays the fonts associated with the type of bar code you selected in step one.

If you choose Bar Code Attributes, you can select TrueType and the next screen presented contains readability and bar width reduction options.

 Related Topics


Set bar code readability or bar width reduction

In option 1, choose whether you want your bar code to be readable to the human eye. Deselect this option if you want the bars to be read by bar-code readers only.

Click the second option if you want to reduce the space between bars.

 Related Topics


Choose bar code point size

Choose a font for your bar code.

 Related Topics


Set bar code density

Choose a density for your bar code, measured in characters per inch.

 Related Topics


Bar code preview

Preview the numbers in your bar code and click Back if you want to make changes.

 Related Topics


To create bar code objects

1.	Click Edit, Insert Bar Code.

2.	Click CorelBarCode Object from the resulting Insert New Object dialog box.

The Bar Code Wizard appears to guide you through the following steps to create a bar code:

3.	Choose one of the industry-standard bar coding formats and click Next.

4.	Enter the number you want to give your bar code and click Next.

5.	Choose one of the following:

By Font Name: Enables you to choose a font for your bar code.

By Bar Code Attributes: Enables you to set readability and bar width reduction options.

6.	Click Next to move to the next step.

7.	Choose the font and point size as required and click Next.

8.	Preview your bar code and make changes if required.

Note

You can click Back at any time to make changes to a previous step.

 Related Topics


To open bar code objects

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Open from the flyout.

The Bar Code Wizard opens with the 11-digit number in the window.

Tip

You can also double-click any bar code object with the mouse button to open the Bar Code Wizard to edit the currently selected bar code.

 Related Topics


To edit bar codes

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Edit from the flyout.

The Bar Code Wizard opens with the 11-digit number in the window.

Tip

You can also double-click any bar code object with the mouse button to open the Bar Code Wizard to edit the currently selected bar code.

 Related Topics


To convert a bar code to an icon

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Convert from the flyout.

4.	Click Display as Icon to convert your bar code to an icon.

Tip

You can right-click on any object to display a context menu you can use to make your changes.

 Related Topics


To restore bar code icons back to images

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Convert from the flyout.

4.	Deselect Display As Icon to convert your bar code from an icon back to a bar code.

Tip

You can right-click on any object to display a context menu you can use to make your changes.

 Related Topics


To change the icon display of a bar code

1.	Select a bar code object you want to open.

2.	Click Edit, CorelBarCode Object.

3.	Click Convert from the flyout.

4.	Make sure that Display As Icon is checked and click Change Icon.

5.	Choose an icon from the preview area or Browse to select a new one from .ICO or .EXE files.

Tip

You can right-click on any object to display a context menu you can use to make your changes.

 Related Topics


PANOSE Font Matching Preferences

The PANOSE Font Matching dialog box, opened from the Text Options dialog box, matches missing fonts with similar fonts available on your system. PANOSE font matching also occurs when you import text or graphic formats that support text.

Allow font matching

Enables font matching. Font matching occurs when you open a Corel file from another user and when you import text or a graphics file that supports text.

Show mapping results

When you open a Corel file from another user and you do not have the required font, the PANOSE Font Matching dialog box will open. The missing fonts will be listed along with a Substituted font suggestion. You can add or edit the suggested Substituted font list using the Add and Edit buttons.

Mapping results are not shown when you import text or a graphic format that supports text.

Note

If you do change font mapping to something other than what the program offers as an alternative, save the override as an exception by choosing Yes in the resulting Save Changes dialog box. If you do not save your changes the exception will be lost.

Substitution tolerance

Move the slider to the left to make the font substitution tolerance more exact. Moving the slider to the right makes font substitution easier for your system but less exact.

Default font

This is a user-definable default font. If PANOSE font matching cannot find a reasonable facsimile of the missing font, it substitutes the default font that you specify here.

Spellings

Click to open the Alternate Spellings dialog box, which enables you to match fonts that may be the same but are spelled differently. (This is quite common when opening Macintosh files in Windows.) Add, Remove or Edit the list from this dialog box.

Exceptions

Click this button to open the Font Matching Exceptions dialog box, where you can specify a font substitution by editing the file list in this dialog box. This is handy when you have to do global font replacements. Add, Remove or Edit the list from this dialog box.

 Related Topics


Alternate Spellings dialog box (Panose Font Matching)

The Alternate Spellings dialog box, available from the PANOSE Font Matching dialog box, enables you to match fonts that may be the same but whose names are spelled differently.

Windows name

Displays the Windows name for the font.

Macintosh name

Displays the Macintosh name for the font.

Add

Enables you to add a font name to the alternate spellings list. Click Add to open the Add Alternate Spelling dialog box.

Edit

Enables you to edit a font name in the alternate spellings list. Select the font name and click Edit to open the Edit Alternate Spelling dialog box.

Remove

Eliminates the selected font from the font list.

 Related Topics


Add Alternate Spelling dialog box (Panose Font Matching)

The Add Alternate Spelling dialog box, available from the Alternate Spelling dialog box, adds an alternate font name to the Alternate Spellings dialog box.

Windows name

Enter the name of the Windows name for the font.

Macintosh name

Enter the name of the Macintosh name for the font.


Edit Alternate Spelling dialog box (Panose Font Matching)

The Edit Alternate Spelling dialog box, available from the Alternate Spelling dialog box, edits alternate font names in the Alternate Spellings dialog box.

Windows name

Enter the name of the Windows name for the font.

Macintosh name

Enter the name of the Macintosh name for the font.


PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box

The PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box, available from the PANOSE Font Matching Preferences dialog box, enables you to specify a font substitution by editing the file list. This is handy when you have to do global font replacements. This dialog box enables you to match fonts that may be the same but are spelled differently.

Missing font

Displays the fonts missed by the Panose Font Matching process.

Substituted font

Displays a list of the fonts replaced by the Panose Font Matching process.

Add

Enables you to add a font name to the exceptions list. Click Add. Opens the Add Matching exception dialog box.

Edit

Enables you to edit a font name in the exceptions list. Select the font name and click Edit. Opens the Edit Matching Exception.

Remove

Removes the selected font from the exceptions list.

 Related Topics


Add Matching Exception dialog box

The Add Matching Exception dialog box, available from the PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box, adds to the exception list.

Missing font

Enter the name of the missing font.

Substituted font

Enter the name of the substituted font.

 Related Topics


Edit Matching Exceptions dialog box

This dialog box enables you to edit fonts in the PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box.

Missing font

Enter the name of the missing font.

Substituted font

Enter the name of the substituted font.

 Related Topics


Following has been changed Aug. 8, 1995 for use as what's this help. The dialog does not have a help button. --Gordon x1126


The Paragraph Attributes dialog box appears when you choose the Character or Paragraph command with no text objects selected. The dialog box enables you to set default character attribute text styles for Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text for the current document.

If you change the defaults, they remain in effect for the current document until you change them again.

If you want to apply new defaults to all documents, from the Styles Manager Roll-Up, click [image], Template [image], Save As Default for New Documents.


When checked, enables you to change the default Artistic Text.


When checked, enables you to change the default Paragraph Text.


 Character command

Opens the Character Attributes dialog box, which you can use to edit font and alignment.

The Character Attributes, Font dialog box controls your font or typeface, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript), effect (e.g., small caps), size, text style, underline, and range kerning.

The Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box controls text character, word, and line spacing, and alignment or justification. To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them with either text tool or select character nodes with the Shape tool. Selecting characters individually enables you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically. You can also use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to rotate selected characters or shift the characters horizontally and vertically.

Choosing the Character Attributes command with no text objects selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text attributes.

Notes

Spacing changes apply to all text in the current string or paragraph, not just selected text.

Bar code fonts installed with CorelDRAW's Bar Code Wizard do not display in the Character dialog box because they are special fonts used for bar code generation only. Fonts in imported bar codes do not display in the document window and Character dialog box.

 Related Topics


Character Attributes, Font options

Use the Character Attributes, Font dialog box to control your font or typeface, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript), effect (e.g., small caps), size, text style, underline, and range kerning.

To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them with either text tool or select character nodes with the Shape tool.

To change the text attributes of multiple text objects at the same time, select them with the Pick tool before you open the dialog box.

Choosing the Character Attributes command with no text objects selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text styles.

Note

Bar code fonts installed with CorelDRAW's Bar Code Wizard do not display in the Character dialog box because they are special fonts used for bar code generation only. Fonts in imported bar codes do not display in the document window and Character dialog box.

 Related Topics


Displays the names of the available fonts you can choose from. If necessary, use the scroll bar to the right to scroll through the list.


Converts selected text to subscript or superscript.


Converts selected text to SmallCaps or AllCaps.


Sets the size of the current font (available sizes are 0.72 to 4,000 points).


If you prefer a different unit of measure from the default, pick one from the list box.


Lists the type styles available for the chosen font.


Underlines selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.

If you want to underline each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Underline dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Applies overlines to selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.

If you want to overline each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Overline dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Applies strikeout to (draws a line through) selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin, and Double Thin Word.

If you want to strike out each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Strikeout Line dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Adjusts the amount of space, or range kerning, between selected characters.


Displays sample characters in the selected font and text style. The type of font you have selected, for example TrueType or PostScript Type 1, is indicated below the Preview area.


Applies Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin, or Double Thin Word underlining, overlining, or strikeout formatting.

If you want to apply formatting each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Provides choice of unit of measure.


Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes

Use the Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes if you want to change default line thicknesses or baseline shift. You can also use the Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes to change unit of measure if required.

 Related Topics


You can use the list boxes below to the default text line thicknesses.


You can use the list boxes below to set default baseline shift for the current type of line attribute you are editing.


Sets thickness for Single Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Single Thick lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Sets the amount of Baseline Shift applied for line effect.


 Character Attributes, Alignment options

Use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to control character, word, and line spacing, justification, shift, and angle.

Selecting characters individually enables you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically. You can also use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to rotate selected characters or shift the characters horizontally and vertically.

Notes

The Horizontal Shift, Vertical Shift and Angle controls appear only when you have selected text by dragging with the Insertion Point or selected character nodes with the Shape tool.

Spacing changes apply to all text in the current string or paragraph, not just selected text.

 Related Topics


Sets spacing between Artistic Text and Paragraph Text characters as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between words as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between lines of text in points or percentages of character height or point size.


Provides choice of unit of measure.


Moves selected text along the baseline. Increments are measured in percent of point size.


Moves selected text above the baseline. Increments are measured in percent of point size.


Rotates selected text from the baseline. Increments are measured in degrees.


Use the character alignment controls to set text alignment, or justification options [image] Left, Center, Right, Full Justify, Force Justifiy or None. Choose None if you want to use the Shape tool to change the position of individual characters, adjust kerning or rotate a character without automatically repositioning remaining text.


Paragraph command (Text menu)

Opens the Paragraph dialog box, used to apply spacing, tabs, indents, hyphenation, and bullet effects to Paragraph Text. You can open each section of the dialog box by clicking the appropriate tab at the top.

Choosing the Paragraph command with no text selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text styles for the current document.

 Related Topics


Paragraph Spacing options (Text menu)

The Paragraph, Spacing dialog box sets Paragraph Text character, word, line, and inter-paragraph spacing, alignment, and hyphenation options.

 Related Topics


Sets Paragraph Text spacing between characters as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between words as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between lines of text in points or percentages of character height or point size.


Sets spacing before paragraphs in percentages of character height; uses the same measurement type set for Line spacing.


Sets spacing after paragraphs in percentages of character height; uses the same measurement type set for Line spacing.


Provides choices for the unit of measure for spacing before and after paragraphs. Choose % of Char. height, points, or % of Pt. size.


Turns off Alignment, so that if you can use the Shape tool to change the position of individual characters, adjust kerning or rotate a character without automatically repositioning remaining text.


Aligns text to both the left and right margins of the Paragraph Text frame.


Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right frame margin.


Aligns text to the left margin, resulting in a "ragged" or uneven right margin.


Aligns text to the center of the Paragraph Text frame.


Aligns text to the right margin, resulting in a ragged left margin.


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the settings for Maximum Word Spacing (0-999 %).


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the settings for Minimum Word Spacing (0-999 %).


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the default settings for how far apart you can set characters, the Maximum Character Spacing (0-999 %).


Enables the International Hyphenator. You can choose between various language databases for hyphenation in the International Proofreader's Advanced Options dialog box.


Enables hyphenation of capitalized words if required.


Sets how far the end of a line must be from the right margin before hyphenation of the first word of the next line occurs.

A smaller hot zone results in more hyphens and better word spacing along the margin.


Choose alternate units of measure from the list as required.


Sets the minimum length of words to be included for automatic hyphenation.


Sets the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the Hot Zone before a hyphen.


Sets the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the Hot Zone after a hyphen.


Paragraph Tabs options (Text menu)

The Paragraph, Tabs dialog box controls Paragraph Text tab stop position and alignment for selected paragraphs.

You can use the ruler at the top of the dialog box to set tab stops or enter their positions in the Add box for more precision. You can also adjust tabs in Paragraph Text edit mode if the rulers are enabled. The zero point on the ruler becomes the left corner of the text. The dialog box also contains controls for creating leader tabs.

 Related Topics


Displays the current tab settings and unit of measure selected. Drag tabs along the ruler if you want to move them. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Change the number if you want to change the distance between evenly spaced tabs along the ruler.


Inserts tab stops at evenly spaced intervals.


Choose another unit of measure from the list box if required.


Click a tab to select it or type in a tab stop above.


Click to place a new tab on the ruler at the tab stop location selected in the tabs list. The new tab assumes current alignment options.


Clears a tab stop selected from the list or ruler.


Clears all tab stops.


Sets leadered tab stops.


Sets the character used for leadered tab stops.


Sets the spacing for leadered tab stops. You can also enter a value from 0 (tight) to 10 (loose) to set leader spacing numerically.


Enables you to choose leader characters for leadered tab stops by their symbol numbers.


Drag the slider left or right to make leader tab spacing tighter or looser.

You can also enter a value from 0 (tight) to 10 (loose) to set leader spacing numerically.


Sets leadered tab stops close together.


Spreads leadered tab stops apart.


Text flows from the tab stop to the right


Centers text at the tab stop.


Text flows from the tab stop to the left.


Aligns decimal points in the text to the tab stop. Text without decimal points extends to the left of the tab stop.


Paragraph Indents options (Text menu)

You can use the Paragraph, Indents dialog box to create space between the text and the left and right margins of text frames. You can also set a different left indent for first-line and the rest of lines in the paragraph, and specify a right margin.

 Related Topics


Use the Indents group box to set Paragraph Text indents.


Displays the current indent settings and unit of measure selected. You can drag the markers along the ruler to change indents as required or use the Indents area below to make precise changes. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Sets the distance the first line of a paragraph is set from the left side of the text frame.

Drag the top marker along the ruler if you want to change your first-line indent visually.


Sets the distance of lines coming after the first line from the left side of the text frame.

Drag the bottom marker along the ruler if you want to change your indent visually.


Sets the distance of lines coming from the right side of the text frame. Drag the right-side bottom marker along the ruler if you want to change your right margin indents visually.


Choose another unit of measure from the list box if required.


Paragraph Effects options (Text menu)

Use the Paragraph, Effects dialog box to apply bullets to your text. The dialog box contains controls for setting or turning off the following:

bullets

bullet indent

indents

baseline shift

The dialog box also lists the available symbol sets installed on your computer system. The dialog box also includes a preview area to help you make your choice.

 Related Topics


Disables bullet effects.


Enables bullet effects. You can choose from all of the symbol sets included with your software.


Sets the size of the current bullet, from 0 to 360 points.


List units of measure for bullet indents.


Sets how far the bullet is set from the left margin of the text frame.


Sets the distance of the bullet from the baseline.


Lists all of the available bullet categories (symbol sets). Choose a bullet type from the preview area.


Displays all of the bullet symbols available in the selected symbol set.


You can use this box to type the Index number for the symbol listed in the Symbol and Clipart Catalog.


Columns command (Text menu)
Columns command

Opens the Columns dialog box, which enables you to format the selected Paragraph Text frame into newspaper-style columns. You can set the number of columns, and column and gutter width.

Note

The columns command is not available for Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


Columns dialog box (Text menu)

The Columns dialog box enables you to format the selected Paragraph Text frame into newspaper-style columns. You can set the number of columns, and column and gutter width.

Note

The columns command is not available for Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


Enter a number to divide the selected text frame into columns The maximum number of columns for one frame is eight. If you want to add more columns you can drag out more text frames.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Displays the number of the column currently shown in the Width and Gutter boxes at right.

You can scroll through the Column number list to show other columns when you want to edit column and gutter widths. Column width editing is disabled if the Equal column width option is selected.


Displays a preview of your changes as you make them.


Sets the size of the column. Width also controls the overall frame width if you choose Automatically adjust frame width. Column width is adjustable from 0.25 to 1,000.00 inches.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Sets the spacing between columns. The maximum spacing is 200.00 inches.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Specifies the unit of measurement. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Sets the same column and gutter widths for all columns. Disable this option to set individual column and gutter widths.


Ensures frame width remains unchanged and adjusts column and gutter widths automatically, preventing settings that exceed the frame or page size.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Adjusts frame, column, and gutter widths automatically.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Text Options command (Text menu)

Opens the Text Options dialog box, which enables you to customize how the text controls work.

Use Options to turn on or off On-screen editing, the font preview drop-down lists, set Clipboard text formatting, Minimum line width, greek text size, and Panose Font Matching.

Click the Formatting tab to set frame formatting and non-printing character options.

 Related Topics


Text Options dialog box (Text menu)

The Text Options dialog box enables you to customize how the text controls work.

Use Options to turn on or off On-screen editing, the font preview drop-down lists, set Clipboard text formatting, Minimum line width, greek text size, and Panose Font Matching.

Click the Formatting tab to set frame formatting and non-printing character options.

 Related Topics


Enables on-screen text editing. When disabled, the Edit Text dialog box opens whenever you select a text object with a text tool or click in the drawing window or pasteboard area with a text tool.


Enables display of a font for drop-down list boxes. Disable this command if you want to turn the sample off.


Sets the minimum number of characters permitted in lines of Paragraph Text shaped to fit into odd-shaped envelopes. When set to the default value of three, lines must have at least three characters to appear.


Simplifies the appearance of text below a certain size to increase screen redraw speed. This option does not affect the appearance of printed text. You can make greeked text readable again by choosing a higher Greeking level or using Zoom.


Specifies whether calligraphic pen outlines are transferred to the Clipboard or exported using any of the vector graphics export filters. If your file contains many calligraphic outlines, excluding them during cut and paste operations reduces the size of the exported file and time required to transfer the file through the Clipboard.

Some export filters retain calligraphic outlines regardless of the setting chosen.


Specifies whether text cut or copied to the Clipboard should be pasted as text or curves. When enabled, text is pasted as text; when disabled, text is pasted as curve objects. When text is pasted as text, font, point size and other text attributes are copied along with the text string.


Enables PANOSE font matching. Font matching occurs when (a) you open a Corel file from another user or computer system, or (b) import text or graphics files that supports text and your current system does not have the same fonts.


Applies the same text formatting to all connected Paragraph Text frames.


Applies the same text formatting only to selected Paragraph Text frames.


Applies the same text formatting only to selected and succeeding linked Paragraph Text frames.


Toggles display of non-printing characters you want to appear in your document while in text editing mode.

To display, the Text menu's Show non-printing characters command must be enabled.


Fit Text To Path command

Opens Fit Text to Path, which enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and path become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

If you want to fit the text to a character, convert the character to a curve object using the Arrange menu's Convert to Curves command.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Fit Text To Path

Enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and path become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

If you want to fit the text to a character, convert the character to a curve object using the Arrange menu's Convert to Curves command.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Determines the orientation of the letters on the path.

	Rotate Letters	rotates individual characters to follow the contours of the path.
	Vertical Skew	vertically skews each character, creating the impression that the text is standing upright on the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.
	Horizontal Skew	similar to Vertical Skew, but with an added effect that makes letters appear to turn into the screen as they wrap around the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.
	Center Base	centers the base of each letter on the path.


Determines the vertical placement of text with respect to the path.

	Baseline	aligns the text baseline with the path.
	Top	aligns the text ascender line with the path.
	Bottom	aligns the descender line of the text with the path.
	Center	Centers the text on the path.
	Variable	allows you to move the text off the path by dragging with the mouse.


Flips the text to the opposite side of the path and reverses the path's start and end nodes.


Displays a dialog box you can use to specify text placement on the path.


Fit Text to Path Offsets dialog box

Provides precision Horizontal Offset and Distance From Path controls for text shaped to paths.

 Related Topics


Specifies how far along the path you want to position the text.


Specifies how far above or below the path you want to position the text.


Align to Baseline command (Text menu)

Returns characters in selected text to the baseline.

Use Align to Baseline if you want to remove vertical shift changes.

Align to Baseline does not affect character angle or horizontal spacing.

 Related Topics


Straighten Text command (Text menu)

Returns selected text to the baseline and resets Vertical and Horizontal Shift and Angle to zero.

Straighten Text does not affect text spacing options (Inter-Character, Inter-Word, and Inter-Line spacing) specified with the Edit Text or Paragraph commands.

Note

Straighten Text is used for removing Horizontal Shift, Vertical Shift, and Angle. If you want to return a text object rotated with the its rotation handles to the baseline, click Arrange, Clear Transformations.

 Related Topics


Non-Printing Characters command (Text menu)

Toggles display of Soft Return, Hard Return, Tab, and Space characters in text mode. The characters displayed can be changed in the Text Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Statistics command (Text menu)

Opens the Statistics dialog box, which counts text elements in your document. If no objects are selected Statistics counts the text in the entire document, including tab and space characters. If you select one or more objects, Statistics returns data about the selected objects only.

Artistic Text statistics displayed include number of objects, lines, words, and characters, as well as spaces and tab characters.

Paragraph Text statistics displayed include number of linked frames (if applicable), paragraph text frames, paragraphs, lines, words, and characters, as well as spaces and tab characters.

 Related Topics


Statistics dialog box (Text menu)

The Statistics dialog box counts text elements in your document. If no objects are selected Statistics counts the text in the entire document, including tab and space characters. If you select one or more objects, Statistics returns data about the selected objects only.

Artistic Text statistics displayed include number of objects, lines, words, and characters, as well as spaces and tab characters.

Paragraph Text statistics displayed include number of linked frames (if applicable), paragraph text frames, paragraphs, lines, words, and characters, as well as spaces and tab characters.

 Related Topics


Describes what text objects in the document have been counted. If objects are selected, they are listed.

If no objects are selected, all text in the document is counted, including tab and space characters.


Lists all text object types counted and displays totals for each.


Proofreading command

Displays a flyout from which you can choose the Spelling, Quick Proofreading, Full Proofreading, and Advanced Options commands.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, an office worker who considers speed paramount might want to check only for spelling and mechanical errors. Meanwhile, a journalist writing an article for publication might want to check for stylistic problems. The same journalist, however, having carefully polished and checked the article's style, might want to check the spelling quickly once again before submitting the article. Lastly, an academic or another journalist might be so confident as to consider it unnecessary to check for items such as confused words, clichés, or wordy expressions.

The International Proofreader's checking is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by widely accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The International Proofreader's checking and correction function is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Proofreading

Corel's International Proofreader has three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading. These modes serve users with varying needs. For example, an office worker who considers speed paramount might want to check only for spelling and mechanical errors. Meanwhile, a journalist writing an article for publication might want to check for stylistic problems. The same journalist, however, having carefully polished and checked the article's style, might want to check the spelling quickly once again before submitting the article. Lastly, an academic or another journalist might be so confident as to consider it unnecessary to check for items such as confused words, clichés, or wordy expressions.

The International Proofreader's checking is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by widely accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The International Proofreader's checking and correction function is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Spell Checking

The Spell Checking dialog box detects and corrects numerous types of spelling errors, including those related to complex, language-specific phenomena such as clitics in the Romance languages and compound words in the Germanic languages. Spelling mode corrects errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

Tip

By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks.

 Related Topics


Quick Proofreading

The Quick Proofreading dialog box provides all the functionality of Spelling mode, in addition to correcting errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

Confused words

Double negatives

Format

Homonyms

Inappropriate prepositions

Misspelled expressions

Misspelled foreign expressions

Noun-phrase agreement (Romance languages)

Punctuation

Spacing between words and sentences

Ungrammatical expressions

Uppercase/lowercase spellings of words, depending on their function or context (German)

 Related Topics


Enables you to choose between checking the current text object or the full document if necessary.


Highlights unrecognized words. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.


Describes errors when found. The type of rule shown depends on the proofreading level you choose.


Opens a dialog box you can use to add words to your personal dictionary.


Displays a menu you can use to undo or explain errors, set advanced options or formality levels, open the Rule Manager, or create or apply personal dictionaries.


Lists all alternative spelling words found in the International Proofreader's databases.


Moves the International Proofreader to the next sentence.


Leaves the current word unchanged and continues checking.


Ignores all subsequent words or phrases during the current proofreading session.


Replaces the currently flagged error with the word or phrase in the Change To box.


Replaces all instances of the currently flagged error and continues the proofreading session.


Stops the checking session and closes the International Proofreader.


Full Proofreading

The Full Proofreading dialog box provides all the functionality of Spelling mode and Quick Proofreading mode in addition to identifying many categories of stylistically questionable expressions and offering assistance in eliminating them. The words and expressions flagged in Full Proofreading mode are not grammatically incorrect, but they are ones that careful writers avoid in most contexts or use only for intentional effect. The error messages displayed in Full Proofreading mode are designed to provide you with the stylistic guidelines you need to make a subjective decision about including or omitting such words and expressions. The categories include the following:

Archaic expressions

Clichés

Contractions

Gender-specific expressions

Informal expressions

Jargon expressions

Overused phrases

Pretentious words

Redundant expressions

Sexist expressions

Stock phrases

Unnecessary prepositions

Vague quantifiers

Wordy expressions

 Related Topics


Advanced Options dialog box

This dialog box enables you to set the languages you want the Proofreader to check in your document. You can also set up which language rules and errors are displayed in, whether alternative spellings are displayed when an error is found, use of personal dictionaries, and maximum sentence elements.

 Related Topics


Lists all installed International Proofreader checking languages.


Lists all available International Proofreader Rule languages.


Lists all available International Proofreader Error languages.


Causes the International Proofreader to search the current language database for alternative spellings when an error is encountered.


Enables the creation of personal dictionaries.


Enables you to turn off your personal dictionary or the International Proofreader's dictionary.


Opens the New Personal Dictionary dialog box, where you can save Advanced Option settings in a file for reuse.


You can set the maximum number of sentence elements for each language that you initialize. Sentence elements are words or punctuation that International Proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.


Opens the Rule Manager, where you can customize the International Proofreader's rules.


Rule Manager dialog box

As International Proofreader processes text, it distinguishes between sentence text and non-sentence text and uses appropriate rules to check each type of text. With the Rule Manager, you can customize your proofreading environments by turning off specific rules or categories of rules (called rule types).

The Rule Manager gives you the ability to turn individual rules or entire rule types off and to use different combinations of rules or rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rules and rule types you have turned off, and of whether you want to do this for the current writing session and/or for future writing sessions. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. If you turn off a rule or rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when selected in the Rule Manager dialog box.

 Related Topics


Opens a dialog box where you can enter a name for a new user profile, a file containing personal rule settings.


Lists all personal user profiles created.


Enables you to choose between Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading modes for your user profile changes.


Enables you to choose between Formal, Standard, and Informal modes for your user profile changes.


Restores the default settings for the Check Mode selected.


Describes the error type highlighted in the Rules Types box.


New User Profile dialog box

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own rule changes for the Proofreader. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. By default these settings are kept in the user profile "USERPF." Type in a new name if you want to create one. Type in a new name if you want to create a new file.

Note

If you turn off a rule or rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

 Related Topics


New Personal Dictionary dialog box

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own additional spellings for the Spell Checker. By default these settings are kept in the personal dictionary "USERPD." Type in a new name if you want to create a new personal dictionary.

 Related Topics


Thesaurus command

Opens the Thesaurus, which suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use one of the text tools to highlight the word you want a synonym for and then choose the Thesaurus command.

Tip

You can use the Thesaurus to look up any word, not just the current selection or document.

 Related Topics


Thesaurus

Suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use one of the text tools to highlight the word you want a synonym for, and then choose the Thesaurus command.

Tip

You can use the Thesaurus to look up any word, not just the current selection or document.

 Related Topics


Displays the currently selected word. You can type in any word you want if you did not select one. Click the down arrow to display previously looked up words.


Displays a list of found definitions of the word shown in the Looked up box.


Displays all of the text in the definition of the word in the Looked up box.


Displays the first synonym for the word you looked up.


Lists all synonyms for the word you looked up. Double-click any word in the list to look up its definition.


Click to look up a word.


Click to replace the word you looked up with the word in the Replace with box.


Click to see the previous word.


Type Assist command

Opens the Type Assist dialog box, which has automatic controls for text capitalization [image] the first letter of sentences, two initial consecutive capitals and names of days [image] and changing straight quotes to typographic quotes.

Type Assist also enables you to replace text strings automatically if you want to, replacing "teh" with "the" for example, and includes a number of presets.

If you enable the Replace Text While Typing option, correction takes place after you finish typing the word, either by entering a punctuation mark or a space.

 Related Topics


Type Assist

Opens Type Assist, which has automatic controls for text capitalization [image] the first letter of sentences, two initial consecutive capitals and names of days [image] and changing straight quotes to typographic quotes.

Type Assist also enables you to replace text strings automatically if you want to, replacing "teh" with "the" for example, and includes a number of presets.

If you enable the Replace Text While Typing option, the Replacement Text operation occurs after you finish typing the word, either by entering a punctuation mark or a space.

 Related Topics


Capitalizes the first letter following a sentence end. A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.


Changes the standard quotation marks (") included in most font sets to curly, typographical quotes typically used in newspapers and books.


Changes the second capital to lowercase if by mistake you hold down the SHIFT key too long and start a word with two capitals. No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period or the word contains other capital letters.


Automatically capitalizes the names of days.


Enables the Replacement Text option, shown below. Text replacement occurs when you press the Spacebar or press ENTER.


Type the code you want Type Assist to use to replace longer text strings automatically .


Type the full word, phrase or text string you want to replace the abbreviation.


Click to add Replacement text to the list.


Deletes replacement options, including the defaults provided in Type Assist if you choose.


Lists the preset strings included with your software and any new ones you've created.


Find command

Opens the Find dialog box, which searches for specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool is active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

If you want to limit your search to text with specific capitalization, enable Match case and enter the capitalized text string you want to find.

 Related Topics


Find dialog box

Searches for specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool is active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

If you want to limit your search to text with specific capitalization, enable Match case and enter the capitalized text string you want to find.

 Related Topics


Finds and selects each occurrence of the specified text. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.


Select this option if you want to find only text that matches the combination of upper and lowercase letters you type in the Find What box.


Closes the dialog box.


Replace command

Opens the Replace dialog box, which searches for and replaces specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.


Replace dialog box

Searches for and replaces specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

 Related Topics


Type the text you want to find. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.


Type the replacement text. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.

If you want to delete the text in the Find What box from the document, leave the Replace With box empty.


Finds and selects each occurrence of the specified text.


Choose this button if you want to confirm the replacement of each occurrence of the text you are searching for. For long documents, it is recommended that you use Replace for a few occurrences of the text you want to replace. When you are sure that no similar text strings you do not want to include will be replaced, you can click Replace All.


Choose this button if you want to replace all instances of the text you are searching for.

You can press ESC to cancel replacing. To reverse changes made before you pressed ESC, choose the Undo command from the Edit menu.

For long documents, it is recommended that you use Replace for a few occurrences of the text you want to replace. When you are sure that no similar text strings you do not want to include will be replaced, you can click Replace All.


Select this option to find only text that matches the combination of upper and lowercase letters you type in the Find What box.


Change Case command

Opens the Change Case dialog box, which provides the following options for changing the case of selected text:

Sentence case (capitalizes the first word of the selection)

lowercase (makes all letters lower case)

UPPERCASE (converts all letters to upper case)

Title Case (capitalizes each word)

tOGGLE cASE (changes the case of all selected letters)

 Related Topics


Change Case dialog box

Changes the case of selected text. The available options are as follows:

Sentence case (first word initial capped)

lowercase (all letters lower case)

UPPERCASE (all letters upper case)

Title Case (each word initial capped)

tOGGLE cASE (changes the case of all selected letters)

 Related Topics


Capitalizes the first word of each sentence.


Changes all capitals in the selection to lower case.


Changes all capitals in the selection to UPPER case.


Capitalizes the first letter of all words in the selection.


Toggles the case of all letters in the selection.


Convert command (Text menu)

Changes Paragraph Text to Artistic Text and vice versa.

 Related Topics


Edit Text command (Text menu)

Opens the Edit Text dialog box, which enables you to type and edit Artistic Text or Paragraph Text as text.

Select the text before you make character attributes changes to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text. Changes made with the Alignment or Paragraph controls from this dialog box apply to the entire string or paragraph whether you select the text first or not.

If you want to edit all text in the Edit Text dialog box, disable the Edit text on screen option in the Text menu's Options dialog box. Then, whenever you select text, the Edit Text dialog box opens automatically.

 Related Topics


Edit Text dialog box (Text menu)

The Edit Text dialog box enables you to type and edit Artistic Text or Paragraph Text as text.

Select the text before you make character attributes changes to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text. Changes made with the Alignment or Paragraph controls from this dialog box apply to the entire string or paragraph whether you select the text first or not.

If you want to edit all text in the Edit Text dialog box, disable the Edit text on screen option in the Text menu's Options dialog box. Then, whenever you select text, the Edit Text dialog box opens automatically.

 Related Topics


Opens the Character Attributes dialog box, where you can apply special font and alignment effects to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text.


Opens the Paragraph dialog box, which controls Paragraph Text spacing, tabs, indents, and bullet effects.


Provides an editing window you can use to enter text without waiting for screen redraws.


 Scrolls the text window up and down.


Applies boldface text style. If no text is selected, boldfacing begins at the insertion point.


Applies italic text style to selected text. If no text is selected, italics begin at the insertion point.


Applies underline text style to selected text. If no text is selected, underlining begins at the insertion point.


Aligns lines of text down an imaginary center line down the middle of the current page or frame.


Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin.


Automatically adjusts inter-word spacing to align text to both right and left margins


Aligns text to the left text frame margin, removing any shift effects you may have applied.


Like left justification, No justification causes text to align along a straight left margin, with "ragged right" margins. With this option, however, shifted or kerned characters are unaffected.


Causes text to align along a straight right margin, with uneven left margins.


Applies bullets to the selected text.


Text Object Properties

You can use Text Object Properties, available from the right-mouse button, to change your fonts, text styles and size, and justification. You can also use the to open the Character Attributes, Paragraph or Columns dialog boxes for further edits. The buttons for the Paragraph and Columns dialog boxes are available only for Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


Locks current changes.


Makes your changes without closing the dialog box.


Opens the Columns dialog box.


Provides options for which frames your changes apply to.


Enables you to enter Artistic Text directly on the screen.


Enables you to enter Paragraph Text directly on the screen.


New and enhanced text features

CorelDRAW's new and enhanced text features:

Text toolbar

New effects

New Proofreading tools

Customizable hotkeys for extended characters

Enhancements


Text toolbar

The Text Roll-Up is now a text toolbar, featuring the following:

Font

Point Size

Text Styles

Justification, including Force Justification

 Related Topics


New effects

Text Styles even for fonts not installed on your system

ALL CAPS and SMALL CAPS as a keyboard toggle setting. The new Change Case dialog box includes options for Sentence case., lowercase, UPPERCASE, Title Case and tOGGLE cASE.

Auto Wrap Text: Automatically flows text around objects; a new Padding option enables you to create spacing on the outside of the objects.

 Related Topics


New Proofreading tools

CorelDRAW 6 features the International Proofreader, a new integrated grammar and spelling checker. You can use the Proofreader to check your writing at three formality levels.

Also included is a module designed to identify common English-language errors for German and French writers.

 Related Topics


Customizable hotkeys for extended characters

You can also use the keyboard to enter extended characters using mnemonic keystrokes. For example, to create an accented e (é), you would type "CTRL + ’ e."

 Related Topics


Feature and performance enhancements

Break Apart/Combine: Artistic text breaks apart first into separate lines, then as far as separate words. Paragraph text includes Break Apart for separate paragraphs. Both Artistic and Paragraph Text can now be re-combined to their original states.

Kerning: You can now use keyboard hotkeys to edit selected text and kern whole ranges of characters.

Underlining: Ability to set distance from the baseline and a range of thickness settings, either absolute or relative to point size. You can now also edit multiple underlines/baseline spacing at the same time.

Character Attributes dialog box: Preview area now improved.

Artistic Text: Editable directly on wrap paths

Force Line Breaks

Force Justification

Bullets: Now available in color with CMX

Character limits are increased to 32,000 characters per paragraph or Artistic text object.

With Paragraph Text, you can have many sets of connected frames, with each set containing up to 32,000 frames linking up to 32,000 paragraphs of 32,000 characters each.

Text shaped to a path can now be edited directly in the document window.

Bullets, Tabs, and Leader Tabs are accessible from the text toolbar.

In addition to the preset hotkeys (updated to match Windows conventions) shipped with CorelDRAW, you can customize your setup (click Tools, Customize) to create your own text hotkey combinations.

 Related Topics


Dublin: This rtf is new in ver. 6. Source doc IPRP012.DOC from InfoSoft, the vendor

Formatting and editing for Corel: Gordon Brown


International Proofreader overview

The proofreading system, International Proofreader, provided with your Corel program is a powerful proofreading system that addresses complex writing errors and style issues.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, you might do a quick check for spelling errors only, a check for spelling and mechanical errors, or a detailed check for stylistic problems, depending on the context and time constraints of your project.

The International Proofreader's functionality is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The checking and correction functionality of the International Proofreader is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Spelling mode overview

The International Proofreader's Spelling mode detects and corrects numerous types of spelling errors, including those related to language-specific phenomena such as compound words in the Germanic languages. Spelling mode corrects errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

 Related Topics


Quick Proof mode overview

Quick Proof mode provides all the functionality of Spelling mode, in addition to correcting errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

Confused words

Double negatives

Format

Homonyms

Inappropriate prepositions

Misspelled expressions

Misspelled foreign expressions

Noun-phrase agreement (Romance languages)

Punctuation

Spacing between words and sentences

Ungrammatical expressions

Uppercase/lowercase spellings of words, depending on their function or context (German)

 Related Topics


Full Proof mode overview

Full Proof mode provides the functionality of Spelling mode and Quick Proofreading mode, identifies many categories of stylistically questionable expressions, and offers assistance in eliminating them. The words and expressions flagged in Full Proofreading mode are not grammatically incorrect, but style and grammar guides suggest that they be avoided in most contexts or used only for intentional effect. The error messages displayed in Full Proofreading mode are designed to provide you with the stylistic guidelines you need to make a subjective decision about including or omitting such words and expressions. The flagged categories include the following:

Archaic expressions

Clichés

Contractions

Gender-specific expressions

Informal expressions

Jargon expressions

Overused phrases

Pretentious words

Redundant expressions

Sexist expressions

Stock phrases

Unnecessary prepositions

Vague quantifiers

Wordy expressions

 Related Topics


Rule Manager overview

As International Proofreader processes text, it distinguishes between sentence text and non-sentence text and uses appropriate rules to check each type. With the Rule Manager, you can customize your proofreading environments by turning off rule types.

The Rule Manager gives you the ability to turn off rule types and to use different combinations of rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rule types you have turned off, and of whether you want to do this for the current writing session and/or for future writing sessions. If you turn off rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. If you turn off a rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when highlighted in the Rule Manager dialog box or when an error is found during proofreading.

 Related Topics


A/An use (English Spelling mode)
A/An use (English) (Spelling mode)

an European country	a European country
 Related Topics


Capitalization errors (Spelling mode)

In addition to flagging all capitalization errors flagged during a spelling check (including errors in proper nouns), the International Proofreader flags errors in the following categories:

Compass points

English	in the South of France	in the south of France
	in the north	in the North
First word in a sentence

Because the International Proofreader processes text sentence by sentence, it recognizes the first word in each sentence and flags it if it is not capitalized.

Language-specific capitalization

English	Summer	summer
French	Mardi	mardi
	Janvier	janvier
German	Montags	montags
Word groups

English	mount Everest	Mount Everest
	New Year’s day	New Year’s Day
	New York state	New York State
	State of New York	state of New York
Portuguese	dia das mões	Dia das mões
 Related Topics


The following text was removed from the next topic--CorrectSpell is not part of the package.

International Proof Reader incorporates International CorrectSpell's algorithms, which reflect the cliticizing rules of each language. International Proof Reader uses International CorrectSpell to draw on grammatical information in the language databases and verify that clitics and stems are correctly paired.


Clitic errors (Romance languages--Spelling mode)
Clitic errors (Romance languages) (Spelling mode)

Clitics are articles, pronouns, or prepositions that are attached to other words (called stems when clitics are attached) for grammatical reasons. The use of clitics in the Romance languages supported by the International Proofreader involves language-specific changes in spelling and accents.

In French, for example, certain grammatical constructions require that articles or pronouns called preclitics be attached to the beginnings of words in specific ways, while other constructions require that pronouns or other forms called postclitics be attached to the ends of words. The French words le 'the' and enfant 'child', for example, are combined in the cliticized form l'enfant 'the child', and donnez-le-moi 'give it to me' has two postclitics, -le 'it' and -moi 'me'. In Spanish, equivocarse 'to be mistaken' combines the verb equivocar 'to mistake' with the pronoun se 'oneself'. In Italian, ciascun'amica 'each (girl) friend' combines the adjective ciascuna 'each' with the noun amica '(girl) friend'.

Strict and complex rules govern the combination of stems and clitics in each Romance language. These rules take into consideration the part of speech of the clitic (article, pronoun, or preposition); its position (preceding or following the stem); the phonetic value (vowel or consonant) of the initial or final letter of the stem; and the gender, number, and grammatical role of the stem. Consequently, spelling verification for these languages requires special checking. International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify correct clitics

All of the following are correct and are verified as such by the International Proofreader:

French	envoyez-les-lui [envoyez + les + lui]
	l’ordinateur [le + ordinateur]
Italian	portarglielo [portare + glie + lo]
	senz’alzarsi [senza + alzare + si]
Portuguese	aprendê-lo-ei [aprenderei + o]
Spanish	dámela [da + me + la]
Flag incorrect clitics

In these examples, the stem is correct, but the attached clitic is not. The International Proofreader detects these errors:

French	s’ordinateur (an error for l’ordinateur) is flagged as having an inappropriate preclitic
	veut-t-il (an error for veut-il) is flagged as having an inappropriate postclitic
Flag and correct unmodified stems

In these examples, the stems should have been modified when the clitic was attached:

Italian	senz’alzaresi	senz’alzarsi
Portuguese	dás-lo	dá-lo
Spanish	mostrémosselas	mostrémoselas
	aislémosnos	aislémonos
Flag and correct apostrophe errors

In these examples, an apostrophe should have been inserted or omitted:

French	lenfant	l’enfant
	l’ettre	lettre
Italian	lormai	l’ormai
	l’aureato	laureato
Flag and correct accent errors [image] In these examples, an accent should have been inserted or omitted:

Portuguese	faz-lo	fá-lo
Spanish	aíslemonos	aislémonos
Flag and correct stems with clitics [image] These examples contain errors in the stems:

French	n’appèl	n’appelle
	appellez-vous	appelez-vous
Italian	t’arabiare	t’arrabbiare
Portuguese	escreber-nos	escrever-nos
 Related Topics


Compounding errors (English and the other Germanic languages (Spelling mode))
Compounding errors (English and the other Germanic languages) (Spelling mode)

In English, International Proofreader flags and corrects errors that occur when writers mistakenly hyphenate a word, as in the following example:

blue-prints	blueprints

In the other Germanic languages supported by the International Proofreader (Dutch and German), two or more words can be joined to form a single word, or compound. German Lebensfreude 'joy of living', for example, is a compound of Leben and Freude.

Some compounds are well established and commonly used; however, new compounds that follow language-specific rules are constantly formed. Spelling software for Germanic languages must account for this productive and rule-governed process. The International Proofreader lists the most frequently used compounds in its databases. Less frequently used compounds are verified by confirming that they consist of grammatically valid elements. This processenables the International Proofreader to verify most two-part compound words. Also, because the database stores many common two-part compound words as valid compound components, the International Proofreader can also verify many three-part compounds. The International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify newly formed compounds

Dutch	bondsbureau	financieringsondernemingen
German	Textverarbeitung	Computerrevolution
Verify compounds formed with acronyms

Dutch	KLM-piloten
German	ASCII-Format
Flag and correct misspellings of compounds

Dutch	bondsgenootscha	bondgenootschap
German	Mietkasernen	Mietskasernen
 Related Topics


Doubled-word errors (Spelling mode)

Dutch	flags doubled words other than dat dat, die die, je je, and other personal pronouns
English	flags doubled words other than that that and had had
French	flags doubled words other than vous vous, nous nous, and en en
German	flags doubled words other than der der, die die, das das, and sie sie
Italian	flags doubled words other than via via, passo passo, and sotto sotto
Portuguese	flags doubled words other than se se and agora agora
 Related Topics


Hyphenation errors (Spelling mode)

International Proofreader's hyphenation processing enables it to detect the following types of hyphenation errors:

Soft-hyphen errors

A soft hyphen is a hyphen that is not part of the spelling of a word but is used only to divide the word onto two lines. (A hard hyphen, in contrast, is part of the word's spelling and is therefore always used.) The International Proofreader generates hyphenation points by using pattern-matching technology (rather than retrieving stored hyphenation points from a database) to ensure that soft hyphens divide words correctly into syllables, as in the following example:

Entry	The musician who played the last piano concerto is a child pro-
digy.

Compound	The musician who played the last piano concerto is a child prod-
igy.

Hyphenation-dependent spelling errors (Germanic languages)

The use of a soft hyphen to divide a word onto two lines sometimes results in spelling changes in Dutch and German. For example, when a German compound formed by linking two or more words would contain the same consonant three times in succession, the third consonant is omitted if the letter immediately following it is a vowel and the compound appears on one line. However, when such a compound is divided by an end-of-line hyphen at the point where the compound words are joined, German spelling rules mandate a spelling change: the word is then spelled with all three consonants.

In addition, when words containing certain combinations of letters (such as ck in the German word backen) are divided by soft hyphens, their spelling may change (backen becomes bak-ken).

The International Proofreader detects and corrects errors in these two types of hyphenation-dependent spelling changes as shown below:

Language	Word	Incorrect Soft-Hyphen Spelling	Correct Soft-Hyphen Spelling
Dutch	speculatieïnstelling	speculatie-ïnstelling	speculatie-instelling
	autootje	autoo-tje	auto-tje
German	Schiffahrt	Schif-fahrt	Schiff-fahrt
	Glocken	Gloc-ken	Glok-ken
 Related Topics


Spelling errors

International Proofreader corrects the following types of spelling errors:

Abbreviation errors

English	O.C.R.	OCR
German	us.w.	usw.
Spanish	Sr	Sr.
Portuguese	Ltda	Ltda.
Apostrophe errors

English	wo’nt	won’t
Cognitive misspellings

These occur when the writer does not know the standard spelling of a word. Cognitive misspellings may be phonetic, such as seekwell for sequel in English or étudiet for étudié in French, or they may be morphological (wrong ending attached to a stem). The International Proofreader corrects language-specific, cognitive misspellings such as the following:

English	effishent	efficient
French	émisfere	hémisphère
	achetrice	acheteuse
German	Säson	Saison
	Filosofie	Philosophie
	Kinden	Kindern
Portuguese	cabeleirero	cabeleireiro
	atráz	atrás
Spanish	peremne	perenne
	lagrimógeno	lacrimógeno
Open vs. closed spelling errors

Dutch	dank zij	dankzij
English	anyone of	any one of
French	avoir à faire à	avoir affaire à
German	ab zu sein	abzusein
	abist	ab ist
Portuguese	rosa claro	rosa-claro
	alto relevo	alto-relevo
	pré-concebido	preconcebido
Spanish	al pormenor	al por menor
Typographic errors

These are the most common variety of spelling errors. In typed text, most misspellings result from errors such as transposing characters (hte instead of the), pressing the wrong key, inserting an unnecessary character, or omitting a character. The International Proofreader corrects typographic errors in all supported languages. It handles errors of transposition, substitution, insertion, and omission regardless of their position in a word. The International Proofreader’s correction technology enables it to correct words that contain multiple errors and words that start with the wrong letter or letters. For example

English	hsa	has
	unessecery	unnecessary
	dvantage	advantage
French	prnd	prend
	kivre	ivre
German	bneutzt	benutzt
	rurmstichig	wurmstichig
	geraschvlol	geräuschvoll
Portuguese	mieo	meio
	caresentar	acrescentar
Spanish	msi	mis
	ortogáfico	ortográfico
	auotmático	automático
 Related Topics


Confused words (Quick Proof mode)
Confused words (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	uninterested	vs.	disinterested
	semimonthly	vs.	bimonthly
Portuguese	compreensivo	vs.	compreensível
	comprimento	vs.	cumprimento
Spanish	apóstrofe	vs.	apóstrofo
	bimensual	vs.	bimestral
 Related Topics


Double negatives (Quick Proof mode)
Double negatives (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	can’t help but	can’t help
French	il n’y a pas personne	il n’y a personne
Spanish	tampoco no	tampoco
 Related Topics


Format errors (Quick Proof mode)
Format errors (Quick Proofreading mode)

International Proofreader checks for consistent and correct use of formatting conventions in all supported languages. Its rules handle formatting for the following types of material:

Closings and salutations in letters

English	dear mr. Doe:	Dear Mr. Doe:
	sincerely yours,	Sincerely yours,
	Yours sincerely	Yours sincerely,
Portuguese	Estimada doutora	Estimada Doutora: or Estimada Doutora,
Spanish	estimada Sra. López:	Estimada Sra. López:
	Atentamente	Atentamente,
Time and date notation

English (US)	May 10 1993	May 10, 1993
French	3 h. 15	3 h 15
Portuguese	4, Julho de 1776	4 de Julho de 1776 (European)  4 de julho de 1776 (Brazilian)
Spanish	10 de mayo 1993	10 de mayo de 1993
Cardinal and ordinal numbers

English	3nd in line	3rd in line
French	soixante-onze	soixante et onze
German	5,000,000.00	5 000 000,00
Portuguese	trezentos e trinta nove	trezentos e trinta e nove
Spanish	treintiuno	treinta y uno
Fractions

English	1 and ¼	1¼
French	3½ l de vin blanc	3,5 l de vin blanc
Portuguese	1e ¼	1¼
Spanish	3 y ½	3½
Currency notation

English	45,000 £	£ 45,000
German	DM 20.50	20,50 DM
Spanish	500ptas.	500 ptas.
Postal addresses

English	Portland, ME, 04321	Portland, ME 04321
French	23 avenue Louise	23, avenue Louise
Portuguese	Rua Santa Helena 31	Rua Santa Helena, 31
Units of measure

English	34 °	34°
Portuguese	34 °	34°
Spanish	34°C	34 °C
 Related Topics


Homonyms (Quick Proof mode)
Homonyms (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	acclimation	vs.	acclamation
	assent	vs.	ascent
Portuguese	assento	vs.	acento
Spanish	basto	vs.	vasto
	brasa	vs.	braza


Inappropriate prepositions (Quick Proof mode)
Inappropriate prepositions (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	accompanied with	accompanied by
Portuguese	defronte a	defronte de
Spanish	a vapor	de vapor


Misspelled expressions (Quick Proof mode)
Misspelled expressions

English	baited breath	bated breath
	slight of hand	sleight of hand
	spinal chord	spinal cord
French	de plein-pied	de plain-pied
Portuguese	dar a luz a	dar à luz
Spanish	a campo través	a campo traviesa


Misspelled foreign expressions (Quick Proof mode)
Misspelled foreign expressions (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	a dente	al dente
	en mass	en masse
Portuguese	sin qua non	sine qua non
Spanish	curriculum vita	curriculum vitae


Noun-phrase agreement errors (Romance languages (Quick Proof Mode))
Noun-phrase agreement errors (Romance languages) (Quick Proofreading mode)

International Proofreader flags errors of number and gender agreement between nouns, adjectives, and articles in the Romance languages:

French	Je déclare la séance ouvert.	Je déclare la séance ouverte.
	Ce sont les voitures les plus grande qu’on n’ait jamais vues.	Ce sont les voitures les plus grandes qu’on n’ait jamais vues.
	Elle s’est toujours méfié de ces gens-là.	Elle s’est toujours méfiée de ces gens-là.
Italian	un grande casa	una grande casa
Portuguese	as estradas sobre os quais	as estradas sobre as quais
Spanish	la agua	el agua
 Related Topics


Punctuation errors (Quick Proof mode)
Punctuation errors (Quick Proofreading mode)

The correct placement of quotation marks and other punctuation varies from language to language. International Proofreader flags errors in the following uses of punctuation and explains the correct punctuation with examples and tutorials:

Paired punctuation

English	May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal from you?	May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal" from you?
Ellipsis and suspended discourse

English	The brave men .... have consecrated it, far above our poor power to add or detract.	The brave men ... have consecrated it, far above our poor power to add or detract.
Portuguese	E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas....	E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas...
Spanish	"Su gestión diplomática (...) se vio recompensada con el tratado de 1679."	"Su gestión diplomática [...] se vio recompensada con el tratado de 1679."
Order of punctuation

English	Marie asked, "Was anyone there that day"?	Marie asked, "Was anyone there that day?"
Portuguese	Maria perguntou: "Tinha alguém em casa"?	Maria perguntou: "Tinha alguém em casa?"
Spanish	La agencia estará cerrada el próximo lunes (25 de diciembre.)	La agencia estará cerrada el próximo lunes (25 de diciembre).
Punctuation combinations

English	Our manager will be at a conference on her birthday (May 1.).	Our manager will be at a conference on her birthday (May 1).
Portuguese	Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: ‘Você está com a rozão!"	Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: ‘Você está com a rozão!’"
Punctuation in combination with certain words

English	i.e.,	, i.e.,
German	daß	, daß
Spanish	etc.	, etc.
Punctuation in abbreviations

English	She completed her B.A. degree last year.	She completed her BA degree last year.
 Related Topics


Stock phrases (Quick Proof mode)
Stock phrases(Quick Proofreading mode)

These rules flag stock phrases that can often be deleted without changing the meaning or emphasis of a sentence.  Unlike clichés, these expressions are not worn-out metaphors or conventional descriptive phrases.  Instead they are introductory or parenthetical expressions often used as "filler:"

it goes without saying that

in fact

Use sparingly

Consider omitting or rephrase with

of course

 Related Topics


Ungrammatical expressions (Quick Proof mode)
Ungrammatical expressions (Quick Proofreading mode)

English	anyways	anyway
	irregardless	regardless
Portuguese	abridas	abertas
Spanish	celebrísimo	celebérrimo
	hubieron conciertos	hubo conciertos
 Related Topics


Archaic expressions (Full Proof mode)
Archaic expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	oftentimes	often
 Related Topics


Clichés (Full Proof mode)
Clichés (Full Proofreading mode)

English	a far cry from	very different from
German	blutjung	sehr jung
Spanish	perder los estribos	enfadarse or encolerizarse
Portuguese	De cabo a rabo	Do princípio ao fim
 Related Topics


Contractions (Full Proof mode)
Contractions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	Everyone’s happy.	Everyone is happy.
Portuguese	procê	para você
 Related Topics


Gender-specific expressions (Full Proof mode)
Gender-specific expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	manpower	personnel or work force or staff
	anchorman or	anchor or newscaster or
	anchorwoman	commentator
 Related Topics


Informal expressions (Full Proof mode)
Informal expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	still and all	still
French	des fois	parfois or quelquefois
German	ein Haufen	viele
Spanish	un montón de	muchos, muchas
 Related Topics


Jargon expressions (Full Proof mode)
Jargon expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	to eyeball	to look over
 Related Topics


Overused phrases (Full Proof mode)
Overused phrases (Full Proofreading mode)

English	bare essentials	essentials
Portuguese	apoio incondicional	apoio total
Spanish	altamente improbable	muy improbable
 Related Topics


Pretentious words (Full Proof mode)
Pretentious words (Full Proofreading mode)

English	author a report	write a report
 Related Topics


Redundant expressions (Full Proof mode)
Redundant expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	ask a question about	ask about
Portuguese	acabamento final	acabamento
Spanish	regalo gratis	regalo
 Related Topics


Sexist expressions (Full Proof mode)
Sexist expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	the little woman	spouse or partner or wife
 Related Topics


Unnecessary prepositions (Full Proof mode)
Unnecessary prepositions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	divide up	divide
Portuguese	comentar sobre	comentar
Spanish	opinar de que	opinar que
 Related Topics


Vague quantifiers (Full Proof mode)
Vague quantifiers (Full Proofreading mode)

English	a lot of	many
 Related Topics


Wordy expressions (Full Proof mode)
Wordy expressions (Full Proofreading mode)

English	a sufficient number	enough
French	arriver à une décision	décider
German	angeblich soll	angeblich or soll
Portuguese	fazer uma chamada pelo telefone	telefonar
Spanish	dar comienzo a	comenzar
 Related Topics


Formality levels

Documents and writing styles vary in degree of formality. Because informal documents may not require adherence to such stringent rules as formal documents, International Proofreader’s Rule Manager allows you to choose from three levels of formality. You can set the formality level for the current session only or customize it, save it in a user profile, and load the user profile in future sessions. The Table below summarizes the features and suggested uses of the three formality levels.

Formality Level	On/Off Status of Rules	Types of Documents
Formal	All rules are on.	Contracts
	Job applications
	Doctoral dissertations
	Correspondence to a board of directors
	Correspondence to a head of state
Standard	Some rules are off (in English,
	for example, rules that
	flag contractions).	Most business correspondence
	Press releases
Informal	The following rule types are off:	Personal letters
	Archaic expressions	Informal memos between colleagues
	Clichés
	Contractions
	Gender-specific expressions
	Informal expressions
	Jargon expressions
	Overused phrases
	Pretentious words
	Stock phrases
	Vague terms
	Weak modifiers and quantifiers
	Wordy expressions
The Rule Manager can display the on/off status of each rule type for the chosen formality level at any time.

 Related Topics


Languages supported by the International Proofreader

The International Proofreader, Hyphenator, and Thesaurus support the languages indicated below.

With the exception of Spanish and Portuguese, you can display error messages in the language of the current dictionary or U.S. English.

Languages supported	Database file names
Proofreader
Danish	PDN2S152.DAT
Dutch	PDU1M111.DAT
U.K. and U.S. English	PEN3M111.DAT
Finnish	PFN2S111.DAT
French	PFR1M111.DAT
German	PGR1M111.DAT
Italian	PIT1M140.DAT
Norwegian	PNO2S120.DAT
European and
Brazilian Portuguese	PPO3M140.DAT
Spanish	PSP3M150.DAT
Swedish	PSW2S131.DAT
Hyphenator
Danish	HDANIS10.DAT
Dutch	HDUTCH11.DAT
English	HENGLI16.DAT
Finnish	HFINNI14.DAT
French	HFRENC05.DAT
German	HGERMA06.DAT
Italian	HITALI09.DAT
Norwegian	HNORWE13.DAT
European and
Brazilian Portuguese	HPORTU12.DAT
Spanish	HSPANI08.DAT
Swedish	HSWEDI07.DAT
Thesaurus
Danish	RDNTF300.DAT
Dutch	RDUTF300.DAT
English U.K.	REKTF400.DAT
English U.S.	REUTF410.DAT
Finnish	RFNTF400.DAT
French	RFRTF300.DAT
German	RGRTF400.DAT
Italian	RITTF310.DAT
Norwegian	RNOTF313.DAT
Brazilian Portuguese	RPBTF331.DAT*
Spanish	RSPTF302.DAT
Swedish	RSWTF300.DAT
Note

Thesaurus support for Portuguese is available in Brazilian Portuguese only.


Personal Dictionary

To check the spelling in your document, International Proofreader compares each word in the document with the words in the database and returns an error message when a word is not found there. For users who want to save specialized terms that are not in the database, the International Proofreader provides the Personal Dictionary. If you select a personal database before or during proofreading, the International Proofreader compares each word in your document with the words in that personal database. If the word is found in the personal database or International Proofreader database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled.

The International Proofreader’s Personal Dictionary component also allows you to do the following:

Add words to a personal database.

Specify whether a given personal database should be opened for the current language only or for all languages.

 Related Topics


Language and dialect options

The International Proofreader includes rules, error messages, and descriptions specific to each dialect of English 	U.S. and U.K. and Portuguese [image] European and Brazillian.

 Related Topics


Spelling correction options

For each language that you initialize, you can specify whether you want International Proofreader to retrieve and display all possible corrections for words not found in the spelling database. You can also specify whether you want The International Proofreader to compare each word in your document with the words in any initialized personal databases during proofreading. If the word is found in the personal database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled (unless the word has been assigned a negative flag).

 Related Topics


Error language

For all languages except Portuguese and Spanish, you can display error messages in either the current language or in US English.

 Related Topics


Rule language

For all languages except Portuguese, and Spanish, you can display the descriptions of rule types in either the current language or in US English.

 Related Topics


Maximum sentence elements

You can set the maximum number of sentence elements for each language that you initialize. Sentence elements are words or punctuation that International Proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.

Language-Specific Options

You can choose options that customize the International Proofreader’s processing to reflect your preferences for specific languages.

 Related Topics


Topics taken from Draw 5, F2--p_text.rtf


Artistic and Paragraph Text overview

Adding Artistic and Paragraph Text

Corel's powerful text-handling capabilities let you add and manipulate text with ease, entering Artistic Text or Paragraph Text directly on the screen. In CorelDRAW, you can also add text in the Edit Text dialog box.

Editing and formatting text

As long as you don't convert it to curves, text remains editable even after you transform or apply special effects to it. Some of the formatting you can apply to text includes changing the font, point size, and spacing.

Using Paragraph Text, you can:

flow text into columns (CorelDRAW only);

choose a font and set its point size and attributes

set tabs and indents (CorelDRAW only)

create bulleted lists

adjust character, word, line, and paragraph spacing

hyphenate text automatically (CorelDRAW only)

You can change text formatting using commands in CorelDRAW’s Text menu and Corel PRESENTS Format menu, or the text toolbar.

Symbols (CorelDRAW only)

You can also add symbol from the Symbol Library, which is a collection of graphic symbols relating to business, transportation, sports and many other subjects.

Outline and fill

As with other objects, text and symbols are given a default outline and fill. You can change the defaults using the Outline and Fill tools.

Proofreading text

The new International Proofreader helps you improve your writing by finding spelling errors, correctly hyphenating words, and listing synonyms.

Using special text features

Some of the special text features let you:

fit text to the outline of another object

reshape and wrap Paragraph Text frames around other objects  (CorelDRAW only)

create your own Adobe Type 1 and TrueType-compatible fonts and symbols and use them in other Windows programs

extract text from a CorelDRAW document, edit it in a word processor, then merge it back into the document

 Related Topics


Adding text


To add Artistic Text

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Artistic Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click the document window.

4.	Type the text.

Note

Once the text is on the page, you can use the text toolbar or Character Attributes command to change the font, point size, and other character attributes.

 Related Topics


To add Paragraph Text

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3	Click the document window.

4.	Type the Paragraph Text into the resulting text frame.

Notes

For projects that rely heavily on text, use Paragraph Text, which offers more formatting options than Artistic Text.

Once the text is on the page, you can use the text toolbar or the Character Attributes command to change the font, point size and other character attributes. To change paragraph formatting, use the Paragraph and Columns commands in the Text menu or toolbar.

 Related Topics


To flow Paragraph Text to another frame on the same page

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Drag to create another text frame.

4.	Click the frame filled with text. with the Pick tool.

5.	Click the text flow tab [image] on the top or bottom middle of the frame

6.	Click the empty frame to flow the text into it.

Notes

The frames are linked, so that if you shrink one frame (or change the size of the text), the amount of text in the next frame adjusts automatically. Similarly, if you enlarge a frame, text can flow in from the next linked frame.

You can use the Text menu's, Options, Formatting dialog box to apply formatting in the current frame to all linked frames, selected frames only, or selected and subsequent frames.

Changing the point size or font in the linked frame causes text to reflow, which can change the location of text in linked frames that follow.

For frames that have been previously linked, the previous link is broken and a new one is established with the new text.

 Related Topics


To link Paragraph Text in frames on different pages
To link text in frames on different pages

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click to select the text flow tab [image] on the top or bottom middle of a frame of text.

4.	Open or go to another page.

5.	Click the page to flow your text into the frame.

Note

Selecting the top text flow button removes the text from the selected frame. Selecting the bottom text flow button flows text from the bottom of the frame

When you import text files longer than a single page, the new pages are generated automatically and your text flows into them.

 Related Topics


To change text flow to another frame

1.	Click the text flow tab [image] at the bottom of the frame from which you want to change the text flow.

2.	Click in the page or a new frame where you want continue your text flow.

Note

When you change the text flow of a frame, the link to subsequent text frames is broken and text is removed from them.

To break text flow between frames, you can also click Arrange, Separate with a linked frame active.

 Related Topics


To import text

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the file format from the Files of Type box.

3.	From the Look in box, choose the drive and directory where your file is located.

4.	Type the name of the file in the File Name box.

Note

A new text frame appears, sized according to the page size specified in the file. If the frame can't hold all the text, additional frames and pages are created.

 Related Topics


To paste Artistic Text

1.	Cut or copy the text to the Clipboard.

2.	Open the document you want to paste the text into.

3.	Click where you want the text to appear.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

If you paste the text before clicking the Artistic Text tool, the text will appear in the center of the page.

 Related Topics


To paste Paragraph Text

1.	Cut or copy the text to the Clipboard.

2.	Open the document you want to paste the text into.

3.	Click the Paragraph Text tool and drag to draw a frame.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To enter special characters using mnemonic hotkeys

1.	Press and hold down the CTRL key.

2.	Press the mnemonic symbol (e.g., ‘`~:,^@) associated with the letter you want accented.

Note

You can use the Character Reference Chart supplied with your software for a list of all mnemonic hotkeys.

 Related Topics


Adding and Creating Symbols


To add a symbol to a document

1.	Click Tools, Symbols.

2.	Click a font from the list box.

3.	Click a symbol set from the sample window.

3.	Type the symbol height in the Size box.

4.	Click and drag a symbol onto the page.

Notes

Symbols are assigned the default outline and fill attributes set for graphic objects.

You can choose a symbol by entering its index number in the Symbol Number box. Symbol index numbers are listed in the in the DRAW 6 Libraries Catalog.

 Related Topics


To create a pattern from a symbol

1.	Click Tools, Symbols.

2.	Choose the symbol category from the list box.

3.	Type the symbol height in the Size box.

4.	Click Tile.

5.	Click the Tile Options button to specify the spacing between the symbols.

6.	Type new values in the horizontal and vertical number boxes to define the grid size.

7.	Click the Proportional sizing checkbox to maintain the symbol's aspect ratio.

8.	Click OK.

8.	Drag the symbol onto the page.

Notes

The symbols in the pattern are clones of symbol at the top left of the page.

You can also choose a symbol by typing its index number in the Symbol No. box. Index numbers are listed in the DRAW 6 Libraries Catalog.

 Related Topics


To add a symbol to a symbol set

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Tools, Create [image] Symbol.

3.	Type the name of the symbol category to which you want the symbol added.

Note

You can also use Corel's font export filters to create new symbol sets and add symbols to existing symbol sets.

 Related Topics


Selecting Text


To select text with a Text tool

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Click and hold the mouse button to the left of the first character you want to select.

4.	Drag the mouse pointer over the characters you want to edit to select.

Notes

To select one character at a time, hold down the SHIFT key and press an Arrow key.

 Related Topics


new topic:


To select a Text tool

If the Text tool you want to use is not active, hold the mouse button down on the tool button and choose either Artistic Text or Paragraph Text from the flyout.

Tip

Press F8 to activate the Artistic Text tool, or Shift+F8 for the Paragraph Text tool. For a complete list of the default hotkeys, click Default Hotkeys.

 Related Topics


To select text with the Pick tool

Click inside a Paragraph Text frame or on any Artistic Text character with the Pick tool.

Notes

To select Artistic Text while working in CorelDRAW's wireframe view, click anywhere on the outline of the text.

To select Paragraph Text while working in CorelDRAW's wireframe view, click anywhere on the outline of the frame.

 Related Topics


To select characters with the Shape tool

1.	Click the text with the Shape tool [image]. For Paragraph Text, click anywhere inside the frame. Character nodes appear next to each character along with a pair of handle for adjusting spacing.

2.	To select a single character, click the node to the left of the character.

Note

To select multiple characters, hold down the SHIFT key and click the nodes of each character you want selected. Or, drag until the marquee box encloses the characters' nodes.

 Related Topics


To deselect a character with the Shape tool

Hold down the SHIFT key and click the node to the left of the character.

 Related Topics


Editing Text


To type or edit text on screen

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to edit.

4.	Position the insertion point and make changes.

Notes

In CorelDRAW, use the Edit Text dialog box or wireframe view for word processing where system resources are heavily taxed.

You can edit text on screen provided none of the following CorelDRAW effects have been applied to it: Perspectives, Envelope, Extrude, Contour or PowerLine.

You can edit Artistic Text shaped to paths and Paragraph Text shaped with envelopes on-screen.

 Related Topics


To edit text in the Edit Text dialog box

1.	Select the text you want to edit.

2.	Click Text, Show Non-Printing Characters if you want to see spaces, tabs, soft returns, and paragraph markers in the editing window.

3.	Click Text, Edit Text.

4.	Type your changes.

Notes

If you do not select the text first, changes take effect at the insertion point.

You can directly edit text shaped to a path.

Text that you have rotated, skewed, or blended in CorelDRAW can be edited on screen, but can be done more easily in the Edit Text dialog box.

With the exception of Blends which can be edited on screen. If you are using text with special effects applied in CorelDRAW, you must use the Edit Text dialog box to make changes. The exception to this is blended text which can be edited on screen.

 Related Topics


Dublin: new topics to next note


To choose a new font

1.	Select the text you want to change.

2.	Choose a font from text toolbar.

Note

If you have created new Text Styles, select the text you want to change and click a new text style from the Styles list.

 Related Topics


To change font size

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click the Font Size list on the text toolbar.

Tip

In text editing mode, select the text in the current object, click the Font list, and select a new font size or type in a new one.

 Related Topics


To choose a new font style

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click a Text Style button [image] Bold, Italic, or Underline on the text toolbar.

Note

{bmc bullet.bmp	If a font does not support a text style, the button for that text style is grayed out.

 Related Topics


To edit font placement

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text, Character.

5.	Click one of the Font Placement options [image] Superscript or Subscript.

 Related Topics


To change font effect

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text, Character.

5.	In the Effects list box, click AllCaps, SmallCaps, or none to remove capitalization.

Tip

You can also add the Font Effect buttons to the text toolbar.

 Related Topics


To edit line and strikeout thickness

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to edit.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Edit button next to the attribute type you want to change.

6.	Type a new underline or strikeout thickness as required.

Tip

To remove text underlining, overlining or strikeout, select None from the list box.

 Related Topics


To edit Baseline Shift

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Type new values in the Vertical or Horizontal Baseline Shift number boxes.

Tip

To remove Vertical or Horizontal Baseline Shift, select the text and click Text, Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


To edit text character angle

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text, Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Type a new value in the Angle number box.

Tip

To remove text Angle, reset the angle to 0, or on the Text menu, click Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


To convert Artistic Text to Paragraph Text

1.	Select the Artistic Text you want to change.

2.	Click Text, Convert to Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


To convert Paragraph Text to Artistic Text

1.	Select the Paragraph Text you want to change.

2.	Click Text, Convert to Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To straighten shifted or angled text

1.	Select the vertically or horizontally shifted or angled text.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


Dublin: back to old topics


To find text

1.	Click Text (Edit in PRESENTS), Find.

2.	In the Find What box, type the text you want to search for.

3.	Click the Match Case checkbox to find words that have a particular captilization.

4.	Click Find Next to begin searching. The first occurance of the search text is highlighted.

5.	Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence of the text.

Note

You can enter as many as 100 characters into the Find list box; the text will scroll horizontally as you type.

Click Close to edit the found text on-screen.

 Related Topics


To find and replace text

1.	Click Text (Edit in PRESENTS), Replace.

2.	In the Find What box type the text you want to search for.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace With box.

4.	Click the Match Case checkbox to find words that have a particular captilization.

5.	Click Replace to confirm the replacement of each occurrence.

Notes

If the string of text that you want to replace is unique (that is, it does not occur in any other text strings in the document) you can click the Replace All button to make the apply the change to the entire document.

You can type as many as 100 characters into the Find and Replace boxes; the text will scroll horizontally as you type.

 Related Topics


To copy and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Place the cursor where you want the text copied to.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To cut and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Place the cursor where you want the text moved to.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To change text case with the Change Case command

1.	Select the text you want to change.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Change Case.

3.	Click a text case option.

 Related Topics


Formatting Text


new topic:


To apply or remove underline, overline or strikeout formatting
To apply or remove underline, overline, or strikeout formatting

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to format.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Underline, Overline, or Strikeout list box.

6.	Click a line style option.

Note

 To remove underline, overline, or strikeout formatting, Click none from the option list

 Related Topics


To apply character attributes to selected text

1.	Drag the insertion point over some characters.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	Choose the attributes you want.

Note

Click Text, Paragraph to set up spacing, tabs, indents, and bullets for Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


To format a text frame in equal columns
To format text in equal columns

1.	Select the Paragraph Text frame.

2.	Click Text, Columns.

3.	Type a value in the Number of columns box.

4.	In the Gutter box, type the amount of space you want between columns.

5.	Click the Equal Column Width checkbox.

6.	Click the Maintain current frame width button to retain the current text frame width, or click the Automatically adjust frame button to adjust the frame width to your spacing settings.

 Related Topics


To format text in columns of different sizes

1.	Select a text frame.

2.	Click Text, Columns.

3.	Type a value in the Number of columns box

4.	Disable the Equal Column Widths checkbox.

5.	Type a value in the Width number box for each column.

6.	In the Gutter boxes, type the amount of space you want between columns.

7.	Click the Maintain current frame width button to retain the current text frame width, or click the Automatically adjust frame button to adjust the frame width to your spacing settings

Tip

You can also edit column widths visually by dragging the margin markers along the Tabs ruler, which appears when you're editing Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


To add a tab

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click anywhere in the paragraph.

4.	Click Text, Paragraph.

5.	Click the Tabs tab.

6.	Click the place on the ruler where you want to set the tab or type the tab position numerically at the top of the tab list.

7.	If you want to adjust the spacing between tabs, you can change the number in the Apply Tabs Every box.

Notes

You can also move tabs by clicking the Tabs ruler, which appears when you're editing Paragraph Text.

You cannot add tabs to Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To move a tab

1.	Click anywhere in the Paragraph Text.

2. Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

5.	Drag the tab marker along the ruler or select the tab from the listing and change its position by typing in a new number.

Notes

In the Tabs page, you can also select a tab from the listing and type a new value, or you can move tabs by dragging them along the Tabs ruler, which appears when you're editing Paragraph Text.

You can’t add tabs to Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To clear a tab

Click the tab marker and drag if off the Ruler or click Delete.

Note

You can’t add tabs to Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To clear all tabs in a paragraph
To clear all tabs

1. Click anywhere in the Paragraph Text.

2. Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4. Click Delete All.

 Related Topics


To indent a paragraph

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click anywhere in a paragraph.

4.	Click Text, Paragraph.

5.	Click Indents.

6.	To indent the first line, type a value in the First Line box and leave the Rest of Lines box set to 0, or type the same value in the First Line and Rest of Lines boxes to indent the whole paragraph.

7.	If you want to indent the right margin of the paragraph, type a value in the Right Margin box.

Notes

You can also indent paragraphs by dragging the margin markers along the Tabs ruler, which appears when you’re editing Paragraph text.

You can’t indent Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To indent a paragraph using the mouse

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click anywhere in the paragraph.

4.	Drag the indent markers along the Tabs ruler to set your new indents.

Notes

You can indent all lines, only the first line, or all but the first line in a paragraph.

You cannot indent Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To change text alignment

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want change alignment, or justification for.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Click an Alignment option.

Note

Alignment changes apply to all text in the selected Artistic Text or Paragraph Text objects.

 Related Topics


To copy text attributes

1.	Select a text object or frame using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Copy Properties From.

3.	Enable the Text Attributes checkbox.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click the text object or frame whose attributes you want to copy.

Tip

If you use a particular set of attributes often, you can make it easier to apply them to other text by saving them as a style.

 Related Topics


To set automatic hyphenation

1.	Select the Paragraph Text frame containing the words you want to hyphenate.

2.	Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Click the Spacing tab.

4.	Enable Automatic Hyphenation.

5.	Type a value in the Hot Zone number box to specify how far the end of a line must be from the right margin before the hyphenator tries to hyphenate the first word in the next line.

6.	Enable the Break Capitalized checkbox to hyphenate words with initial capital letters.

7.	Type a value in the Minimum Word Length number box to set the minumum size for words to be considered for hyphenation.

8.	Type a value in the Minimum Characters Before number box to set the minumum number of characters the hyphenator requires before a hyphen.

9.	Type a value in the Minimum Characters After number box to set the minumum number of characters the hyphenator requires after a hyphen.

 Related Topics


Using Bullets with Paragraph Text


To add a bullet

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click Text, Paragraph.

4.	Click the Effects tab.

5.	Click Bullet.

6.	Choose a bullet category from the list at right.

7.	Select a symbol in the display box.

8.	Type a bullet size in the Bullet Size box.

9.	Set Bullet indent and Baseline shift as required.

Notes

You can also choose a bullet by entering its index number in the Symbol # box. Index numbers are listed in the Symbol and Clipart Libraries Catalog.

You can adjust the space between the bullet and text by clicking Indents and entering a value for First Line Indent. If you want the rest of the lines in the paragraph to align with the text in the first line, enter the same value for Rest of Lines.

You can’t add bullets to Artistic Text.

The default size is the size of the text in the selected paragraph.

 Related Topics


To remove a bullet

1.	Select the bulleted paragraph.

2.	Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Click the No effect button.

 Related Topics


To change the bullet style

1.	Select the bulleted paragraph.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Paragraph.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

4.	Click the Bullet button.

5.	Choose a bullet category.

6.	Select a symbol in the display box.

7.	Type a bullet size in the Bullet Size box.

8.	Set Bullet indent and Baseline shift as required.

 Related Topics


Adjusting spacing


Changing spacing numerically


To edit spacing with the Paragraph, Spacing dialog box

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click the drawing window to select a text frameglos_frame@glossary.hlp or drag with the pointer to create a new one.

4.	Click Text, click Paragraph.

5.	Change the Character, Word, Line, Before Paragraph or After Paragraph spacing as required.

 Related Topics


To adjust spacing with the Character Attributes dialog box

1.	Click a text object or paragraph.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	Click Alignment.

4.	Under Spacing, make changes to Character, Word, or Line Spacing as required.

 Related Topics


To kern text with the Character Attributes dialog box

1.	Select two or more characters with either text tool.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	In the Range kerning box, Enter a Percent of Space Width value.

Notes

You can also kern selected text using hotkeys.

Negative values shift the characters closer together, while positive values shift them farther apart.

You can also select the text using the Shape tool and apply the same changes indicated above.

 Related Topics


Changing Spacing On Screen


To adjust character spacing on screen

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Click and drag the node at the left of the character.

Notes

To adjust character spacing for all the selected text, click and drag the Kerning arrow [image] to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease spacing.

If you have two or more lines of Artistic Text, you can click and drag the Interline spacing arrow [image] up or down to adjust spacing as required.

 Related Topics


To kern text precisely with the Shape tool

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Select two or more consecutive characters you want to shift.

3.	Click Text (Fomat in PRESENTS), Character.

4.	Click the Alignment tab.

5.	In the Characters number box, type the percent of space width you want to shift the selected characters.

Notes

Adjusting spacing for two or more consecutive characters is called range kerning. Inter-character spacing, set in the Paragraph, Spacing dialog box, applies to the entire paragraph.

You can also adjust the kerning of selected text manually using hotkeys.

 Related Topics


To adjust word spacing on screen
To adjust word spacing on-screen

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Hold down the CTRL key.

3.	Click the kerning arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


To adjust line spacing on screen
To adjust line spacing on-screen

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the Interline spacing arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


To adjust paragraph spacing on screen
To adjust paragraph spacing on-screen

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the paragraph or text object you want to edit.

3.	Hold down the CTRL key.

4.	Click the Interline spacing arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


Using text styles


To create a new Artistic Text style

1.	Select an Artistic Text object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Character.

3.	Edit the font style or size, spacing or justification as required

4.	Change the object's fill and outline as required.

5.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

6.	Click Styles [image] Save Style Properties.

7.	In the Save Style As dialog box, deselect any elements you do not want to include.

8.	Type a name for your new style.

Note

Tabs, Indents, Bullets and Hyphenation are set in Paragraph Text only.

 Related Topics


To create a new Paragraph Text style

1.	Select a Paragraph Text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Change the fill, outline, font style or size, spacing, justification, tabs, indents, bullets, or hyphenation as required.

4.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

5.	Click Styles [image] Save Style Properties.

6.	In the Save Style As dialog box, deselect any elements you do not want to include.

7.	Type a name for your new style.

 Related Topics


To apply a style to text

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Layout, Styles.

4.	Click Apply [image] More.

3.	Choose a style.

 Related Topics


Dublin: Following topic taken from p_custom.rtf


To change the default text attributes for the current document

1.	With no object selected, click Text, Character, or Paragraph.

2.	Enable the appropriate checkbox to determine whether the new defaults apply to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text.

3.	Choose the Font and Alignment attributes you want to assign as the new text defaults.

Note

The new defaults apply to the current document only.

 Related Topics


To change the default text attributes for all new documents

1.	With no object selected click Text, Character, or Paragraph.

2.	Enable the appropriate checkbox to determine whether the new defaults apply to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text.

3.	Choose the Font and Alignment attributes you want to assign as the text defaults.

4.	Click Layout, Styles Manager.

5.	Click [image], Template.

6.	Click [image],Save As Default for New Documents.

 Related Topics


Special text features


To fit text to a path

1.	Draw a graphic object (ellipse, box, line, etc.) that has the shape you want to fit your Artistic Text to.

2.	Select the graphic object.

3.	Holding down the SHIFT key, select the Artistic Text you want to shape to the path.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Fit Text to Path.

5.	Choose the text orientation in the first list box.

6.	Choose the vertical placement in the second list box.

7.	For objects with open paths, choose the horizontal placement in the third list box.

8.	For objects with closed paths, the following graphic appears [image]. Click the side you want to fit the object.

9.	Click Apply

Tips

You can edit Artistic Text strings directly on paths.

Enable the Place on other side checkbox to move the text to the opposite side of the path.

Click Edit if you want to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From the Path by typing in numbers.

 Related Topics


To make changes to text shaped to a path

1.	Select the text/path group you want to edit.

2.	Click Text, Fit Text to Path.

3.	Select the text orientation in the first box.

4.	Select the vertical placement in the second box.

5.	Select horizontal placement when fitting text to an open path.

6.	For objects with closed paths, the following graphic appears [image]. Click the side of the graphic you want to fit the text object to.

7.	Click Apply.

9.	Enable the Place on other side checkbox to move the text to the opposite side of the path.

8.	Click Edit if you want to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From the Path by typing in numberes

Tip

You can edit Artistic Text strings directly on paths.

 Related Topics


To edit the shape of a text path with the mouse

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the path (or object) you want to edit.

3.	Move selected character nodes and control points.

 Related Topics


To move Artistic Text along a path

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the Artistic Text you want to move. The Shape tool's spacing arrows appear and character nodes (empty to indicate they are not selected) appear.

3.	Marqee select the text you want to move.

4.	Drag in the desired direction.

 Related Topics


To adjust the distance of text from a path

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold the CTRL key down and click the text on the path.

3.	Drag away from the path in the desired direction. A slide control appears.

4.	Release the mouse button when the slide control is the distance you want the text to appear from the path.

Tip

If you prefer to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From Path by typing in numbers, click Edit on the Fit Text to Path Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To detach text from a path

1.	Select the text/path group.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

 Related Topics


To convert Artistic Text to curves

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

3.	Click Break Apart.

Note

After you convert text to curves, you can no longer edit it as text, or change its character or text attributes.

 Related Topics


To shape Paragraph Text with an envelope

1.	Select the text object.

2.	Click Effects, Envelope.

3.	Click Add New.

4.	Click an editing mode (one of the four buttons under Create From).

5.	Drag the handles until the Envelope is shaped the way you want.

6.	Click Apply.

Notes

Artistic Text stretches inside an envelope; Paragraph Text flows to fit the margins of the envelope, but individual characters do not change shape.

You can use Add Preset to use one of a selection of preset envelopes.

By holding down the CTRL and/or SHIFT keys, you can move opposing handles the same amount in the same or opposite directions.

If you are not getting the results you want with one mode, click Clear Envelope from the Effects menu and use a different mode. You can also choose a different Mapping Mode from the list below the editing mode buttons.

 Related Topics


To extract text from a document

1.	Open the document with the text you want to extract.

2.	Click Tools, Extract.

3.	Accept the suggested name, or type a new one. A .TXT extension is applied.

Tip

Extracting text from a document can be useful if you need to edit text from large document files whose redraw times or system demands are high.

 Related Topics


To merge extracted text back into a document

1.	Use the Windows Notepad or another text editor to open the text file you created when you extracted the Corel text.

2.	Edit the text, making sure not to change the file name at the top and the codes before and after each Artistic Text string or paragraph.

3.	Save the file as an ASCII text file, then go back to CorelDRAW.

4.	Open the document from which you extracted the text.

5.	Click Tools, Merge-Back.

6.	In the File Name box, type the name of the text file and click OK.

7.	Click File, Save As to keep a copy of the original file.

Caution

You must use a text editor to edit the text. Programs, such as word processors, insert codes that are not recognized using Merge-Back.

Your merged back text will appear just as the original text did provided you did not change the attributes of individual characters or apply any of the following commands: Extrude, Blend, Contour, PowerLine, or Fit Text to Path.

 Related Topics


Proofreading Text


Checking Statistics


To check statistics for selected objects

1.	Select the text objects.

2.	Click Text, Statistics.

3.	Enable the Show style statistics checkbox to display style statistics.

Note

If no objects are selected, Statistics counts the text in all objects in your document, including tab and space characters. If you select one or more objects, Statistics returns data about the selected objects only.

 Related Topics


To check statistics for your entire document

1.	Make sure no text objects are selected.

2.	Click Text, Statistics.

Note

If no objects are selected Statistics counts the text in the entire document, including tab and space characters. If you select one or more objects, Statistics returns data about the selected objects only.

 Related Topics


Checking spelling


To run a spelling check

1.	Select the text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

3.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

4.	Click an option in the Check range list box to determine the scope of the spelling check.

5.	For each unknown word, you can choose from the following options:

Edit the word in the Sentence box. The unrecognized word is highlighted. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.

Click Change if the Change To box shows the word you want.

Click Change All if you want to change all instances of the word as shown.

Click Ignore to leave the current word unchanged.

Click Ignore All if you want to leave all such words unchanged.

Click Add Word when you want to include unrecognized words in the current personal dictionary.

Tip

By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks.

Click the Options button to customize you spelling check.

 Related Topics


To correct a misspelled word during a spelling check

Type the correct spelling in the Sentence display box and click Change.

Tip

You can also select one of the alternative spellings from the Change To list box and click Change, or to correct all occurrences of the word, click Change All.

 Related Topics


To create a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options, Create New Dictionary when the Spell Checker selects an unknown word or name that you'd like to add to the spelling database.

4.	Type a name in the Dictionary Name box.

Note

After you create a personal dictionary, you can have the Spell Checker refer to it along with the standard dictionary during a spelling check.

By default the International Proofreader adds all new words to a personal dictionary called USERPD.

 Related Topics


To add a word to a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	When the Spell Checker displays a word you want to add to a personal dictionary click the Add Word button.

 Related Topics


To open a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options [image] Personal Dictionary.

4.	Choose the dictionary you want to use.

 Related Topics


Checking Grammar


To check grammar

1.	Select the text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

3.	Click Quick Proofreading or Full Proofreading from the flyout.

4.	Click Options, Explain Error if you want an explanation of the grammatical errors.

5.	Change the Check range from Current Text Object to Full Text if necessary.

6.	For each unknown word, you can choose from the following options:

Edit the word in the Sentence box. The unrecognized word is highlighted. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.

Click Change if the Change To box shows the word you want.

Click Change All if you want to change all instances of the word or phrase as shown.

Click Ignore to leave the current word unchanged.

Click Ignore All if you want to leave all such words unchanged.

Click Add Word when you want to include unrecognized words in the current personal dictionary.

Tip

Click the Options button to customize your grammar check.

 Related Topics


To set the Proofreader's formality level

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options  [image]  Rule Manager.

4.	Choose an option in the Formality Level list box.

 Related Topics


Setting Proofreading Options


To set advanced proofreading options

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Choose a new language from the Language box list box.

4.	Disable the Always provide alternative spelling checkbox if you do not want the International Proofreader to retrieve and display all possible spellings for words not listed in its spelling database.

5.	Enable the Use personal dictionaries checkbox if you want the International Proofreader to use personal dictionaries for the check.

Note

Change the Maximum sentence elements only if you want to reduce memory demands made by the International Proofreader.

 Related Topics


To set up the Rule Manager

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options  [image]  Rule Manager.

4.	Choose an option in the User Profile or click New if you want to create and attach a new one to your file.

5.	To make changes to the rules for another proofreading mode, choose the mode in the Check Mode list box

6.	To set the checking level, choose an option in the Formality Level.

7.	Select or deselect Rule Types by clicking the asterisks as required. Options you change in the Current column apply to the current session only. Options changed under Long-Term are changed for all future sessions.

Tip

You can restore the original Rule Types settings at any time by clicking Defaults in the Rule Manager.

 Related Topics


To restore Rule Manager defaults

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click Rule Manager.

4.	Click Defaults to restore the original rule settings.

 Related Topics


To choose proofreading language options
To choose language options

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Choose a language you want the International Proofreader to display rules in.

4.	Choose a language you want the International Proofreader to display errors in.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose another proofreading language

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

2.	Click Languages.

3.	Choose a new proofreading language.

Note

U.S. English is the default language dictionary installed when you choose Full Install during your program setup. If you want to add another language, run Setup, click Custom installation, and choose the language database you want under Utilities.

 Related Topics


To choose spelling correction options

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click the language for which you want to choose spelling correction options.

4.	Under Spelling correction, enable the Always Provide Alternative Spellings check box if you want the International Proofreader to display suggested replacements for words that are misspelled.

5.	Under Spelling Correction, enable the Use Personal Dictionaries check box if you want to use a personal dictionary.

 Related Topics


To install another proofreading language
To install another proofreading language database

1.	Close all programs.

2.	Click Start, Run.

3.	Type Setup and click OK.

4.	Choose Custom installation and select the language databases you want to install under Utilities.

5.	Reopen your Corel program.

6.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading, Advanced Options.

7.	Click Languages.

8.	Choose a new proofreading language.

Notes

U.S. English is the default language dictionary installed when you choose Full Install during your program setup.

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose a proofreading error language

1.	Click Text, Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Under Error Language, click the name of the language in which you want error messages displayed.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose a proofreading rule language

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Under Rule Language, click the name of the language in which you want descriptions of rule types displayed.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To turn proofreading rule types off or on
To turn rule types off or on

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click Rule Manager.

4.	Under Check mode, click Full Proofreading.

5.	In the Rule Types box, click the name of the rule types that you want to turn off or on.

6.	If the rule types are not visible in the Rule Types box, make sure you chose Full Proofreading under Check mode to list all rule types, and if necessary, use the vertical scroll bar to make the desired rule type visible.

7.	Under Current Status (for the current writing session), click the check mark to enable or disable the rule type for the current session.

8.	Under Long-Term (for future writing sessions), click the check mark to enable or disable the rule type for future sessions.

Note

The Rule Manager accordingly modifies the long-term status of the rule and reloads it for the next International Proofreader session.

 Related Topics


Using Type Assist


To change straight quotes to typographic quotes
To change straight quotes to typographic quotes automatically

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable Change straight quotes to typographic quotes checkbox.

 Related Topics


To correct consecutive capitals

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Correct two initial, consecutive capitals checkbox.

Tip

No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period, or the word contains other capital letters.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the first letter of sentences

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize first letter of sentences checkbox.

Notes

A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.

You can also use the Change Case command to change selected text to Sentence case.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the names of days

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize names of days checkbox.

Tip

You can also use the Change Case command to change the case of selected text.

 Related Topics


To replace abbreviations while typing

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Replace text while typing checkbox.

3.	In the Replace box, type the code you'll use for your replacement string, for example, "H!".

4.	In the With box, type the replacement string of text.

In this case "H!" might become "Human Resources".

 Related Topics


Using the Thesaurus


To use the Thesaurus

1.	With the text tool active, click the word you want to look up synonyms for.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Thesaurus.

3.	Click the synonym you want to replace the selected word.

4.	 Click Replace.

Note

You can also click other definitions to see their synonyms.

 Related Topics


Setting Text Options and Defaults


Dublin: Following topics (to the next note to you) are taken from p_custom.rtf


To display the text toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Text.

 Related Topics


To copy calligraphic outlines to the Clipboard

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	In the Clipboard group box, make sure Calligraphic Text is enabled.

Notes

Copying calligraphic pen outlines to the Clipboard significantly increases the size and time required to cut and paste data.

Some export filters retain calligraphic outlines regardless of the setting specified.

If calligraphic text is disabled (no check box), calligraphic pen outlines are ignored when transferred to the Clipboard, or exported using any of the vector export filters.

 Related Topics


To paste text as text or curves

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Enable the Text in metafile checkbox to paste text as text, or disable to paste text as curves.

Notes

When you paste text as text into another program, the program you paste into may substitute font and spacing attributes different from those assigned to it in your Corel program.

If Text in Materiel is disabled, the text will be pasted from the Clipboard as curves. It retains the look and placement it had in your Corel program, but can not be edited as text [image] attributes such as font and spacing can no longer be altered.

 Related Topics


To increase the redraw speed of text using Greek Text

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	In the Greek text below number box, type the value at which text will display as small rectangles.

 Related Topics


To set Minimum Line Width

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Type a number in the Minimum line width value number box.

Note

The Minimum Line Width value represents the lowest number of characters permitted in lines of Paragraph Text shaped to fit into the curves or corners of odd-shaped Envelopes. When set to the default value of three characters, lines must have at least three characters to appear.

For example, if you draw an envelope with a sharp peak, the top line in the pyramid would contain three characters. If you set minimum line width to one, the first line would contain only one character.

 Related Topics


To edit text in the Edit Text dialog box only

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Disable the Edit Text On Screen checkbox.

Note

Now when you click a text tool, the Edit Text dialog box appears and text cannot be edited directly on-screen.

 Related Topics


To disable the font sample in the text toolbar

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Disable the Show font sample in drop-down font lists checkbox.

 Related Topics


Dublin: Following topic taken from p_defaul.rtf


To change the default tab stops in a paragraph

1.	Select the Paragraph Text you want to set default tab stop for.

2.	Click anywhere in the paragraph or select the frame with the Pick tool.

To change tab stops for consecutive paragraphs, drag to highlight the paragraphs or select the frame with the Pick tool.

3.	Click Text, Paragraph.

4.	Click Tabs.

5.	In the box next to Apply Tabs Every, type the distance you want between tab stops.

To use a different unit of measurement, choose one from the units box. The Tab Stop value is converted to its equivalent in the unit you choose.

6.	Click Apply Tabs Every to implement your changes.

 Related Topics


To apply formatting to linked text frames

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Click the Formatting tab.

3.	Click a frame formatting option.

 Related Topics


To set up display of non-printing characters

1.	Click Text, Text Options.

2.	Click the Formatting tab.

3.	Click the appropriate checkbox in the non-printing character display window.

Notes

By default, the non-printing characters shown above are set to display when enabled with the Text menu's Show Non-Printing Characters command.

To display non-printing characters click Show Non-Printing Characters on the Text menu.

 Related Topics


To display non-printing characters

Click Text, Non-Printing Characters.

Note

If you want to change which non-printing characters are displayed, use the Text Options, Formatting dialog box.

 Related Topics


Working with Fonts


To convert an object to a font character

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Choose Custom size, with 750 points for the vertical and horizontal dimensions.

3.	Use Guidelines Setup on the Layout menu to set up vertical and horizontal guidelines 30 points from the left side of the page border, and 30 points from the bottom of the page border.

4.	Disable Snap to Guidelines on the Layout menu.

5.	Create or import your object.

6.	Use the Pick tool to drag the selection handles and scale the object to a height and width of 720 points.

7.	Align the bottom and leftmost edges of the object to the guidelines.

8.	Click Arrange, Convert to Curves.

9.	Set up guidelines to establish references as follows:

If the object is an uppercase character, establish a cap-height reference by placing a guideline on the topmost edge of the character.

If the object is a lowercase character, establish an X-height reference by placing a guideline on the topmost edge of the character.

If the object is a lowercase character with a descender, establish a reference for the descender line by placing a guideline on the lowermost edge of the character.

10.	Use the Shape tool [image] to modify the object.

11.	Click File, Export.

12.	Choose either TrueType Font or Adobe Type 1 Font from the Save as type box.

13.	In the File name box, type the name you want to assign the font.

If the font you're creating is a new one, type a Family Name in the Options dialog box. You can also specify Text Style, Space Width and whether to class the typeface as a Symbol Font.

14.	Type the desired ANSI Character Number, Design Size and Character Width (turn off Auto) in the Export Adobe Type 1 or TrueType Export dialog box.

Note

To add your new character to an existing font family, make a copy of the font and store it under a new name in the same directory as the existing font. The character you created will be added to the renamed font.

 Related Topics


To change the match on missing fonts

1.	Open your file.

If the file contains a font not installed on your system, the PANOSE Font Matching Exceptions dialog box opens.

2.	Choose the Missing Font.

3.	Choose a new Substituted font from the list.

4.	Click OK.

5.	PANOSE Font Matching will ask you if you want to save your changes to the Font Matches Exceptions file; choose the answer that best suits your needs.

 Related Topics


To build a list of missing font-match preferences

1.	Click Text, Options.

2.	Click PANOSE Font Matching.

3.	Click Exceptions.

4.	Click Add.

5.	Enter the name of the missing font or the font you want to remap.

6.	From the Substituted font list, choose a replacement font.

Notes

You can also edit your list of missing font matches to modify or remove a font match preference by clicking Edit or Remove.

To accurately map fonts that are the same but spelled differently, edit the list of Alternate Spellings.

 Related Topics


To edit the list of font spellings

1.	Click Text, Options.

2.	Click PANOSE Font Matching.

3.	Click Spellings.

4.	Click Add, Edit, or Remove.

Note

The PANOSE Font Matching feature does not work on files which you open or import into CorelDRAW programs using the drag and drop method.

 Related Topics


Displays the names of the available fonts you can choose from. If necessary, use the scroll bar to the right to scroll through the list.


Sets the size of the current font (available sizes are 0.72 to 4,000 points).


Lists the type styles available for the chosen font.


Applies boldface text style. If no text is selected, boldfacing begins at the insertion point.


Applies italic text style to selected text. If no text is selected, italics begin at the insertion point.


Applies underline text style to selected text. If no text is selected, underlining begins at the insertion point.


Aligns lines of text down an imaginary center line down the middle of the current page or frame.


Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin.


Automatically adjusts inter-word spacing to align text to both right and left margins


Aligns text to the left text frame margin, removing any shift effects you may have applied.


Like left justification, No justification causes text to align along a straight left margin, with "ragged right" margins. With this option, however, shifted or kerned characters are unaffected.


Causes text to align along a straight right margin, with uneven left margins.


Changes the selected text to capital letters.


Changes the style of the selected text to superscript.


Changes the style of the selected text to subscript.


Sets/resets the bullet for the text object.


Changes the line spacing of the text to 1.


Changes the line spacing of the text to 1.5.


Changes the line spacing of the text to 2.


Increases the text indent.


Decrease the text indent.


Where to start

Plan and prepare your work

Whether you are preparing existing artwork for output, or creating new material from scratch, there are questions to ask and considerations to bear in mind at the outset. There are decisions to be made early on that will affect your project at print time. See Related Topics for an item-by-item discussion of these considerations.

Note

Overlooking this initial step can lead to costly mistakes and re-runs, disappointing results, and missed deadlines.

Work closely with your service providers

From the outset of your project, and throughout its development, consult with the service bureau and printing shop representatives who will be handling your print job. Their expertise is essential to the success of your project.

Printing and color management are complex and fast-evolving fields. Creating color separations in particular is a precise, unforgiving step. Consultation with your service bureau and printing shop from the outset of the project and through its development is critical. It will help you to avoid costly mistakes and ensure that the finished product is as close to what you envisioned as is feasible.

A handy checklist has been drawn up for your convenience (see related topics). You may want to print it and use it as a mind jogger when you are talking to your service bureau and printing shop representatives.

Learn more

A basic understanding of the printing process (e.g., how photographs and colors are reproduced) will be of great help when you are talking with your service bureau and printing shop reps. We suggest that you check your local library or bookstore for relevant books and magazines.

 Related Topics


Output

What are the choices?

There are several different methods for producing your final work:

Print everything on a laser printer. Depending on the printer (high resolution?, color?) the final product can look quite good. However, this option is impractical for more than a few copies. If more copies are needed, some photocopiers are capable of quality output. This might be a good choice for an internal report or a small newsletter. This method is inappropriate if you require high-quality color output (e.g., color photographs or fine art), special paper stock (e.g., different sizes or glossy paper), or if you want "professional" output.

Create camera-ready art on a laser printer and send it directly to a printing shop. If you have a postscript laser printer, and do not require complicated color work, you may be able to produce material that a printing shop can photograph, make printing plates from, and print. This method may be appropriate for a small newspaper. This method is inappropriate if you require high-quality color output (e.g., color photographs or fine art).

Send everything on disk to a service bureau. A service bureau will produce a high-resolution output on an imagesetter which is then used to produce printing plates. The only limits here are the service bureau's facilities and your budget.

When deciding which method to use, you will have to consider the desired quality of your output and the size of the job. Whatever you choose, make sure you use the appropriate settings (e.g. halftone screens, color separations).

Quality

What level of quality do you need? Would output from a desktop color printer be sufficient? Or do you need to go to press? Note that the higher the output device's resolution (dpi), the better the images and colors will be reproduced.

Job size

Job size should also be considered. How many pages and how many copies are involved? A large volume may dictate going to press.

 Related Topics


Page layout
Page layout and printing

Size

What size will the final product be? Set up your artwork to those dimensions and work in “actual size” to avoid the problems inherent to resizing images (e.g., bitmap reproduction suffers when bitmaps are enlarged). If you wish to print the same material at different sizes, however, you may resize your image when you print.

Proper planning and layout of your work will also save on expensive film. Remember that you can define a custom page to accommodate your job if it will be of non-standard dimensions.

The paper size and the working page size will not necessarily be the same. For instance, you can fit two pages that are 8.5 by 11 inches on one 11 by 17 inch piece of paper.

Layout

Are you creating greeting cards, handbooks, a full-fledged book? There are ready-made layout styles available in the print options dialog box. Choose from Full Page, Book, Booklet, Tent-Card, Side-Fold Card, Top-Fold Card , and Tri-Fold Card or you can create your own custom styles.

Warning

If you chose a layout style  before you open the Print dialog box (i.e. using Page Setup) then the appropriate layout style will automatically be selected in the Print Options dialog box. If you change the layout style (with the exception of Full Page) your work will not print correctly.

Orientation

What page orientation best accommodates your work? Portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal)? The orientation you choose when you print should match the orientation of the artwork.

Bleed

Must certain areas of your artwork extend to the edge of the final page? Then, you must allow for a "bleed", that is, ensure your artwork "overflows" the edge of your final page. To accomplish this you must print your work on paper that is larger than the paper size you ultimately want. This paper is then trimmed to the appropriate size. A bleed of .125 to .25 inches is usually sufficient. Any object extending beyond that needlessly uses up memory and may cause problems when you are printing more than one final page on a single sheet of paper.

 Related Topics


Paper and printing

Stock

Will you be using coated or uncoated paper? Matte or glossy coated?
Newsprint? Textured paper? Recycled paper?

The paper stock you choose will significantly affect the quality of your final product. It will also determine your halftone screen settings and dictate the maximum amount of ink, or total area coverage (TAC), you can use to create your process colors.

Talk to your service bureau and printing shop reps!

Colored paper

Will you be using white or colored paper? The colors in your artwork will look different against a colored background. You must take this into consideration.

 Related Topics


Printing text and graphics

Fonts

Make sure the typefaces and point sizes you choose are suitable for the paper stock you will be printing on. For example, delicate typefaces or small point sizes may not reproduce well on textured papers, or they may be difficult to read on colored or speckled paper.

Number of colors

Pay attention to the number of colors used, especially if you are importing clipart. Make sure you only use the colors you have chosen (i.e., process or spot).

Fills

Use fills judiciously; avoid complex fills (fountain, texture, PostScript, etc.) on small objects that aren't big enough to warrant intricate details. If you are using a Level 1 PostScript device avoid complex fills with complex outlines and complex fills in text objects. When you set the postscript options you can enable tests that will warn you if there are any potential problems with your fills.

If you use fountain fills, be aware that too many steps may cause errors or slow down printing, and too few steps may cause banding (the appearance of strips across a fountain fill). You can optimize your fountain fills when you set the PostScript options.

Nodes

Keep the number of nodes per object to a minimum, especially when using a Level 1 PostScript device. When you set the PostScript options you can enable tests that will warn you if there are any potential problems with your objects.

Lean and clean

Keep file size manageable by deleting all unnecessary elements. Get rid of redundant objects hidden behind other objects, and any leftover objects outside the working page.

 Related Topics


Scanning

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

If you have a scanner you can scan directly from Corel PHOTO-PAINT, retouch your image if need be, and then bring it into CorelDRAW or any other application.

Quality

The end result will depend as much on the quality of the scanner as on the quality of the image being scanned. Corel PHOTO-PAINT can be used to enhance the image, but it is always a good idea to start with a high-quality image (i.e., good contrast, etc.).

Dynamic range

If you are preparing a full-color job, note that drum scanners offer a wider dynamic range (that is, range of possible color values) than most flatbed scanners. On the other hand, the dynamic range of a flatbed scanner should be sufficient for most lower-budget jobs.

Size

Scan according to the size of the final output. A small scan will not maintain its integrity if enlarged too extensively. Conversely, a scan that is needlessly large will make for huge files and will slow down processing.

Resolution

Scan at a resolution related to the final output. As a rule of thumb, the scanning resolution, measured in dots per inch (dpi), should be twice the resolution of the halftone screen used for output, measured in lines per inch (lpi). For example, if you will be printing with a 150 lpi screen, set the scanning resolution to 300 dpi. Scanning at a higher resolution may be required to pick up enough detail in a poor original.

OPI

Corel now offers Open Prepress Interface (OPI) support. Here's how it works: Your service bureau professionally scans your images on a high-end scanner. They keep the high-resolution version of the scans and give you low-resolution equivalents. You import the low resolution images into your documents, using them "for position only" (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your document size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send your artwork back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high resolution files are automatically substituted.

Note

You must import FPO images correctly or they will not be replaced at print time

You can only scale, crop, and rotate FPO images. You can not use any other effects.

 Related Topics


Printing bitmaps

Size

The larger the bitmap, the more RAM it will use and the larger the file will be. Aim to keep your bitmaps small.

Resolution

Will your work of art be silk-screened onto a T-shirt? Or are you producing a coffee table art book? A high resolution would be wasted on the former, but is definitely called for in the case of the latter.

 Related Topics


Color printing

How many colors? Process color versus spot color

The number of colors you plan to use will be the main factor in deciding whether to use process color or spot colors.

Process color

Does your project call for full color (e.g., does it contain scans of color photographs)? If so, you will need to use process colors, which simulate virtually any color using only the four ink colors, cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (known as CMYK).

Spot color

Does your project make use of only one, two or three colors (including black)? Then you'll want to use spot colors, such as those offered by Pantone. Spot color uses a different ink for each color. If your budget is limited:

Obtain a two-color look by printing on colored stock and using only one spot color.

Use tints (percentages) of spot colors to create shadows or highlights, thus giving the impression of a broader color range.

Both

Your project can call for both spot and process colors. For example, a marketing brochure may require the use of a spot color to faithfully render the corporate color and the use of process color to reproduce scans of photographs. Remember, though, that the greater the number of colors used, the more film, plates and ink will be required, which adds to the cost of the job.

A word about palettes

CorelDRAW allows you to work on different elements of your artwork from different palettes and different color models. Ultimately however, all colors must be printed with process and spot color inks. Colors defined in the RGB or HSB models are translated automatically into CMYK (process) values. As for spot colors, CorelDRAW allows you to convert them to CMYK at printing time if that's what you require.

 Related Topics


Color trapping

What is it for?

Trapping is necessary to compensate for poor color registration (i.e., when color separations are not aligned). Poor registration causes unsightly white slivers between adjoining colors.

How is it done?

Trapping is accomplished by intentionally overlapping colors. When printing there are three ways to create color trapping. You can

"overprint" individual objects in the application you are working in

use Auto-spreading (automatic color trapping) on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box

use Advanced Settings on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box

When is trapping not needed?

You don't have to worry about trapping if

your service bureau creates color trapping by using a specialized trapping program

there are no adjoining or overlapping objects in your artwork

When is trapping needed?

Trapping is necessary if two colors touch.

 Related Topics


Ensuring predictable color when printing

Color management

Before you embark on any project where the finished product is to be a color print of some sort, it is essential that you ensure accurate and consistent color rendition from device to device. All components of your publishing system—scanner, monitor, and printer—must exchange color data in a manner that give a predictable end result. This is accomplished by calibrating your various devices and establishing a System Profile. This is done from the Color Manager.

Color correction

For the colors on your screen to approximate as closely as possible the colors as they will appear in print, you must enable the Color Correction facilities. These options will call the chosen System Profile to ensure predictable color rendering.

 Related Topics


PostScript

What is it?

PostScript is a page description language used to send instructions to a PostScript device about how to print each page. All the objects in a print job (e.g., curves and fills) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printer uses to produce your work.

PostScript is not the only method for sending a printer instructions, and some printers are not compatible with PostScript; however, there are several functions that are unavailable if you are not using the PostScript printer language. For example, without PostScript, you cannot adjust color separations and halftone screens.

There are two levels of PostScript available. PostScript level 2 is the most recent version of PostScript and it is more powerful than its predecessor, PostScript level 1.

Tip

When purchasing a printer or choosing a service bureau you should find out which type of PostScript you will be using. Where you have a choice, choose level 2.

Limitations of PostScript level 1

There are certain problems that may arise when you are using PostScript level 1 that have been largely eliminated in level 2.

To create curves, a PostScript device prints a series of short straight lines at varying angles. Each of these lines is a segment. Also, any straight line between two nodes is a segment. Level 1 devices can't print Corel Draw objects with more than 1500 segments. This limits the allowable number of nodes in any Corel DRAW object to approximately 500.

If you use a complex fill (e.g., a texture fill, a PowerClip, or a PostScript fill) in an object, the allowable number of nodes is reduced to approximately 300.

If you fill a text object with a texture fill then a level 1 PostScript may not be able to print it.

If you use a texture fill in an object with any subpaths (e.g., a donut made from a circle within a circle), a level 1 PostScript device will not be able to print it.

There are several ways around these limitations.

Wherever possible, break complex objects up into several less complex objects. This may not be possible if you are using complicated line attributes or complex fills.

Use the PostScript features designed to reduce complexity (click How to for a list of help topics about how to use these features).

Note

If you are printing to a level 1 PostScript device, you should try to avoid including any of the problematic objects mentioned above into your design.


Service bureaus and print shops
Service bureaus and printing shops

Who's who

If your job will be printed on a commercial press, you will most likely be dealing with a service bureau and a printing shop. These can be separate or affiliated businesses. Some larger establishments may offer both services under one roof.

The service bureau will take your file and image it onto film. The printing shop will take either film from a service bureau (or camera ready output that you've created yourself), make printing plates from it, and print your job.

Talk to them

Read the checklist provided with this help and make certain you have an understanding of the concepts on the list (see related topics). Talk to your service providers about these issues. They will point out special considerations to bear in mind given the nature of your job.

 Related Topics


Sending your print job to a service bureau

Proof your work in-house

Before sending the final files to your service bureau, verify all elements of your artwork that your in-house equipment allows. Keep in mind that desktop printers do not allow you to check halftone screens and trapping.

Prepare the soft copy

Your files can be sent by disk, modem, or removable hard disk cartridge. Check with your service bureau to find out what they are equipped to handle. Service bureaus will need either .PRN, .CDR, or .EPS files.

PRN file

CorelDRAW allows you to exercise full control over prepress settings and save the artwork and color separation instructions in a .PRN file. This print file will be sent directly to an output device by your service bureau.

Note

Be sure to review and confirm all settings with your service bureau reps! They will not be able to verify or fix a .PRN file. Any mistake you make will only be apparent on output, which could be costly!

CDR file

If you don't have the time or knowledge to prepare the color separations yourself, service bureaus equipped with CorelDRAW can take your .CDR files and apply the required prepress settings themselves. Some bureaus may actually prefer to take on the prepress issues themselves.

EPS file

Other bureaus may accept .EPS files (as exported from CorelDRAW). These Encapsulated PostScript files can be taken into other applications by the service bureau and handled from there.

Print a hard copy

Always provide a final printout of your work to the service bureau, even if it's only a black and white representation. This will help them identify and assess what they're working with.

Include print job information

If you are sending .PRN files, include all the prepress settings that you have specified. This can be done automatically from the Options page in the Print Options dialog box. If you have any doubts, check with your service bureau reps. They usually have an order form that you can use.

 Related Topics


Ordering proofs

Determine which type of proof you will use

Time, cost, and quality are all factors to consider when you are deciding on a proofing method. Discuss your project with your service bureau reps. They will help you choose the most appropriate proofing method.

There are three categories of color proofs to choose from: digital proofs, off-press proofs, and press proofs.

Digital proofs

This category includes proofs generated from laser, thermal wax, ink-jet, phase-change, and dye sublimation printers. Data is imaged directly from your file onto paper. This method is fast and economical, but it is not usually accepted by printing shops as being a good representation of what they are expected to match because the proof is not made from the film that will be used to make the printing plates.

Keep in mind:

Digital proofs cannot reproduce press conditions such as screen frequencies and angles, dot gain, etc.

Not all desktop printers are PostScript compatible.

Not all printers can reproduce spot colors.

Dye sublimation printers are especially well-suited to proofing scans of photographs.

Off-press proofs

These are made from the film separations that will ultimately be used to make the printing plates. This category includes blueprints, overlay proofs (e.g., Color Key) and laminate proofs (e.g., Cromalin, Matchprint, Agfaproof).

Note

Laminate proofs are more accurate and more expensive than overlay proofs. Blueprints are used to check 'fit' and to proof for imperfections such as broken letters.

Press proofs

Because press proofs are produced using the very plates, inks, and paper that will be used for the final print, they are the most accurate and also the most expensive. They are generally reserved for high-end projects.

Review and approve the proofs

When you receive the proofs, review them carefully. Adjustments or corrections may be in order. You may have to go through more than one proofing cycle. When you arrive at a satisfactory proof, sign it off.

Turn the approved proofs over to the printing shop

These will be considered "contract proofs", which means that this is the output the press operators will strive to match.

 Related Topics


What happens at your service bureau

Your .PRN files will go through a RIP

The service bureau will process each .PRN file through a Raster Image Processor (RIP) where your file's PostScript instructions will be rasterized.

Your rasterized files will go to an imagesetter

Your rasterized files will be sent to an imagesetter to produce the film separations which in turn will be developed in a film processor.

Film proofs will be generated

The service bureau will provide you with blueprints, overlay proofs, or laminate proofs made from your film, depending on your preference and budget. Cost varies: inquire! Depending on the complexity of your project, the level of quality you require, and the expertise of the service bureau staff, you may be able to sign off immediately on the first proofs or you may need to go through a few more iterations before approving final proofs.

 Related Topics


Sending your print job to a print shop
Sending your print job to a printing shop

Sending film to the printing shop

If you are using a service bureau, they will send the film to the printing shop or to you. Either way, make sure that the printing shop has proofs of the final product and instructions about the print job (e.g., number of copies, type and size of paper). You must also make sure that the service bureau provides your film in the form that the printing shop wants (i.e., positive or negative film, emulsion up or down, etc.)

Sending camera-ready art to the printing shop

If you are producing paper output for the printing shop to photograph, you must make sure that you send them output they can use. For example, if you make a mistake setting halftone screen frequencies, the printing shop may not be able to print any of your photographs. Talk to the printing shop before you send your output. When you send your camera-ready art, include instructions about the print job (e.g., number of copies, type and size of paper).

 Related Topics


What happens at your print shop
What happens at your printing shop

Your film or camera-ready art will be used to make printing plates

The final, approved film separations or camera-ready art will be made into printing plates. These will be mounted on the press, and the printing of your job will begin.

Your approved proofs will be used to regulate the press

The press operators will set up and adjust the press so that the printed output matches as closely as possible your contract proofs.

You may be called upon for press proofing

Where color quality and accuracy is crucial (such as in reproducing works of fine art), you may be asked to be present at the printing shop when your job is run to approve any color adjustments that may need to be made.

 Related Topics


Print dialog box

The Print dialog box allows you to set basic print settings, to set more complex print settings, and to print. Use the dialog box to indicate:

which device driver to use

whether to print to the device or to a file instead

which pages or objects to print

how many copies you require

whether to collate the pages

which printer color profile to use

which printing style to use

You can also choose the following:

To change or to review your printer settings

To set more complex parameters, including color separation specifications, and preview your print job

To print using the settings you have chosen

 Related Topics


Print Options dialog box

The Print Options dialog box allows you to set more complex parameters, including color separation specifications and to preview your print job.

Printing style

Use Printing style to select, create, edit, and delete printing styles. Printing style allows you to save the Print Options settings for later use.

Preview box

Use the Preview box to position and size your artwork. The Preview box also allows you to review color-separated jobs separation by separation.

Reference tools

Use reference tools to add reference marks to your print job (e.g., crop marks and page number), as well as to specify whether you wish to print a negative or positive image and whether you wish to print with the film emulsion up or down.

Layout page

Use Layout page options to position and size your artwork.

The Layout style options allow you to print your work in different forms. For example, you can create a greeting card or a booklet with your work by properly applying layout styles.

Separations page

Use the Separations page to print color separations and to specify color separation parameters, including enabling automatic color trapping. You can also enable Use advanced settings. Once this option is enabled, click Advanced to set advanced color separation settings (i.e., halftone screen settings and color trapping).

Options page

Use the Options page to set various advanced options.

The Fountain steps option allows you to specify how many steps your linear fountain fills will contain when printed.

The Screen frequency option allows you to specify what halftone screen frequency you will use.

Note

If you are using color separations and advanced settings, set the screen frequency in advanced settings

The PostScript Preferences button allows you to change your PostScript settings if you are using a PostScript device driver.

The Proofing options allow you to specify specific types of objects to print (e.g., text only). They also allows you to print colors as black or grayscale, to print text as black, and to fit printer's marks (such as crop marks and calibration bars) and layout to the page.

The Print job information sheet option prints a report with information about your print job. Use the Info Settings to customize the information sheet.

The Special settings option allows you to change settings that were previously edited in CORELPRN.INI.

 Related Topics


Print Job Information dialog box

The Print Job Information dialog box allows you to specify what type of information you want included in the print job report. You can direct the report to a printer or text file or both.

 Related Topics


PostScript Preferences dialog box

The PostScript Preferences dialog box allows you to set advanced PostScript options. You can optimize object outlines and fills for printing, and control the way your PostScript driver handles fonts and bitmaps.

 Related Topics


Save Print Style dialog box

The Save Print Style dialog box allows you choose a name for the current print style (i.e., the current settings in Print Options). You can also change any settings you wish in Settings to save in style.

 Related Topics


Print Setup dialog box

The Print Setup dialog box allows you to select a device driver. Click Properties to change or review your printer settings.

 Related Topics


Edit Layout Style dialog box

The Edit Layout Style dialog box allows you to create custom layout styles. By increasing the Across and Down values, you allow space for several working pages on a single sheet of paper. The options in this dialog box allow you to place the working pages in any order.

Note

When you create a custom style you are creating a template for the entire print job. If your document has a lot of pages, Corel will place subsequent pages in an order based on the page order of the template. For example, if page seven is place on the right page of a booklet, page fourteen will appear on the next right page.

 Related Topics


Edit Positioning dialog box

The Edit Positioning dialog box allows you to place several existing printable pages on a single printable page, or to place several copies of an existing printable page on a single page. You can also set page margins in this dialog box.

 Related Topics


Advanced Separations Settings dialog box

The Advanced Separations Settings dialog box allows you to customize the color separations. You can specify screen technology, adjust individual color separations, create color trapping for individual color separations, and select a halftone type.

Consult your service bureau to ensure that all options are set properly.

 Related Topics


To print all pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose All.

 Related Topics


To print only the current page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Current Page.

 Related Topics


To print only certain pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Pages.

3.	Choose Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even and Odd from the pages list box.

4.	Type the pages you want printed in the pages box.

Note

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 through 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print the following pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example,1~6 will print the following pages: 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

 Related Topics


To print only selected objects

1.	Select the objects to print.

2.	Click File, Print.

3.	Choose Selection.

 Related Topics


To print only vectors, bitmaps or text

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Enable Vectors, Bitmaps, Text, or a combination of these.

5.	(Optional) Enable Print All Text In Black if you want to print text in black instead of in color.

 Related Topics


To print only certain layers

1.	Click Layout, Layers Roll-Up.

2.	Enable or disable the Printable option for each layer, as required.

 Related Topics


To immediately print the sheet being previewed

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button, click Print This Sheet Now.

 Related Topics


To print a memo

1.	Select the memo you want to print.

2.	Click Edit, Note object, Open.

3.	Click File, Print from inside the Memo window.

4.	Choose a printing device.

 Related Topics


To select a device

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer or imagesetter from the Name list box. If the device driver you need is not listed, install it following the usual Windows procedure.

Tip

If you're proofing or printing a job in-house, choose the driver for your local device.

If you're sending a file to a service bureau, choose the device driver that's specified by the service bureau.

 Related Topics


To set the device properties

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Properties.

3.	If printing to a PostScript device, set only the Page Size, Orientation, Tray, and Resolution here. Leave all other options at their default and set them from Print options instead.

or

If printing to a non-PostScript device, set all relevant options here.

Note

As these are Windows-controlled options, see your Windows documentation for more information.

Tip

To verify the extent of the unprintable area for the selected device, click Unprintable Area.

To print on both sides of the page (duplex printing), click More Options.

 Related Topics


To print to file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Print to File.

3.	Enable For Mac if your print file is being sent to a service bureau with Macintosh equipment.

PostScript files created using the Print to File option contain two Control-D (^D) characters that prevent them from printing on any PostScript device controlled by Macintosh computers. Enabling the For Mac option removes the ^D characters from the files.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Type a filename and choose a destination. The appropriate extension (.PRN) will be appended to your filename.

 Related Topics


To select a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a print style from the Style list box.

 Related Topics


To edit an existing print style or create a new one

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	(Optional) Choose an existing print style to edit from the Style list box.

4.	Change the print options.

5.	Click [image].

6.	Choose a name for the style.

Tip

When you click Cancel instead of OK in the Print dialog box, all of the changes you have made in print options are discarded. If you do not want to lose these changes and you need to click Cancel (i.e. you need to change your work before you print), save your settings as a print style.

 Related Topics


To delete a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Select a print style to delete from the Style list box.

4.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print color artwork in black or grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click All Colors As Black or All Colors As Grayscale.

 Related Topics


To use a printer color profile

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Printer Color Profile if you want your print job processed using the profile that is shown.

Note

If you want your print job to be processed through a different profile, you must go back to the Color Manager and select another printer profile.

 Related Topics


To print multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Type the number of copies you need in the Number of copies number box.

 Related Topics


To collate multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Collate.

Note

Choosing Collate allows you to print one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a set of pages 1 to 10 will print before a second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on). Otherwise the requested number of copies of each selected page will print going on to the next page (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print, before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).

 Related Topics


To preview your print job

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Preview Image.

Tip

You can choose whether you prefer the preview to be on or off by default. Click the Options tab, and from Special Settings choose Preview Image Default. Set to On By Default or Off By Default.

You can also toggle the preview on or off by clicking the Preview box with the right mouse button and then clicking Preview Image on the pop-up menu.

Preview Image is a handy feature. We recommend that you enable it unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will indicate the position and size of your image.

 Related Topics


To preview your color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Preview Image.

4.	Choose composite (all color separations together) or a single color separation (e.g., cyan) from the list box.

Note

You can only view individual Color separations if you have enabled color separations in Print Options.

Tip

You can choose whether you prefer the preview to be on or off by default. Click the Options tab, and from Special Settings choose Preview Image Default. Set to On By Default or Off By Default.

You can also toggle the preview on or off by clicking on the Preview box with the right mouse button and then clicking Preview Image on the pop-up menu.

Preview Image is a handy feature. We recommend that you enable it unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will indicate the position and size of your image.

 Related Topics


To specify a color or grayscale print preview

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button. Enable Preview In Color to specify a color preview. Disable this option to specify a grayscale preview.

Tip

Displaying individual color separations in grayscale instead of color can be helpful when you are attempting to study color distribution. Yellow in particular can be difficult to discern against a white background. Even magenta and cyan, if sparse, can be easier to discern when displayed in grayscale.

 Related Topics


To enlarge the preview box

Click the enlarge icon at the top-left corner of the Preview box.

 Related Topics


To move from page to page in print preview

Click one of the page-flipper buttons. The button pointing left flips back through the pages and the button pointing right flips forward.

 Related Topics


To specify full image or marquee drag in print preview

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button. Enable Full Image Drag to keep the image visible while it is being repositioned. Disable this option to change the image to a marquee box while it is being repositioned.

Tip

The default is Full Image Drag. To make the default drag marquee, click the Options tab, and in Special Settings, and choose Print Preview Drag Mode. Change the setting to Drag Marquee.

 Related Topics


To size your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	(optional) Enable (or disable) Maintain Aspect.

5.	Assign the height and width values in the unit of measurement you want

or

Drag the handles in the Preview box.

Note

You can only size your artwork this way when you are using the Full Page layout style with no rows or columns, or when you are using the Manual layout style.

If you enabled Maintain Aspect, you can only resize the image proportionally.

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To fit your artwork to the page when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	(optional) Enable (or disable) Maintain aspect ratio.

5.	Click Fit to Page.

Note

Your artwork is automatically scaled (up or down) so that it fits the printable page. Your image will be distorted if you do not enable Maintain Aspect.

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To maintain the aspect ratio of your artwork when sizing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Maintain aspect ratio.

Note

This is the default setting.

This option does not affect your artwork. When you are finished printing you will still be able to change the aspect ratio of your work.

Tip

The height and width ratio of an image is known as its "aspect". If you are resizing or scaling your artwork using the print preview, it is a good idea to enable Maintain Aspect to prevent image distortion.

 Related Topics


To manually position your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Change the Top value (distance from the top of the printable area) and the Left value (distance from the left side of the printable area).

or

Drag the graphic in the Preview box.

Note

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

If you select the Manual Layout style, you can place several working pages on a single printable page. Each of these pages can be sized and positioned individually. You can also use the Clone Page option to place several copies of the same working page on a single sheet of paper.

 Related Topics


To automatically center your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Center image.

Note

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To set a bleed limit

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Bleed Limit.

6.	Enter a bleed limit value. This value represents the distance the artwork will be allowed to bleed beyond the crop marks (i.e. the edge of final paper size).

Note

This setting has no effect unless the working page size is smaller than the printable page and your artwork extends beyond the edge of the working page (see Page layout (and printing) in related topics).

Consult your service bureau or printing shop to determine the appropriate bleed limit for your job. Excessive bleeds waste film and may cause other problems.

 Related Topics


To print large artwork as tiles

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Print tiled pages.

5.	Indicate by how much you want the tiles to overlap. Enter a value (e.g., a quarter of an inch) or a percentage of the page size.

 Related Topics


To apply position and size settings to all pages when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Apply Settings to All Pages.

 Related Topics


To choose a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Choose a layout style from the Layout Styles list box.

Note

If you chose a layout style  before you open the print dialog box (i.e. using Page Setup) then the appropriate layout style will automatically be selected in the print dialog box. If you change it (with the exception of Full Page)your work will not print correctly.

Tip

If you have created your work in a Full Page layout then you may choose to print this work using a different layout style. For example, if you have designed a four-page document set up as Full Page, but would like to print it as a top-fold or side-fold card, you can choose the appropriate card style here. Or you may have designed a business card as full-page document and elect to print it using the labels layout.

 Related Topics


To edit a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Choose a layout style to edit from the Layout style list box.

5.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

6.	Indicate the number of working pages from the Corel document to include on each printable page in the Across and Down number boxes.

7.	Indicate the size of the gutters (space between pages) in the Horizontal and Vertical number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

8.	Click each box on the model of the of the printable page and choose a page number and an angle.

9.	If you will be printing on both sides of the paper, enable Double sided layout. Click Flip Page to see each side.

Note

When you select Double sided layout and you print on a non-duplex printer, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the pages.

 Related Topics


To save a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

5.	Edit a layout style (see related topics).

6.	Click [image].

7.	Choose a name for the layout style.

 Related Topics


To delete a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

5.	Choose a layout style from the Layout style list box.

6.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print several pages on a single sheet of paper

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button

5.	Indicate how many rows and columns of the chosen layout you want printed per sheet.

6.	Indicate the size of the gutters (space between rows and columns) in the Horizontal and Vertical number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

or

Enable Auto Spacing.

7.	(Optional) Enable Clone frame.

8.	(Optional) Enable Maintain document page size.

Note

When you use Rows and Columns without enabling Clone Frame or Maintain document page size, each page of your work will be reduced in size and placed into a single frame (the intersection of one row and column). Each frame is placed starting with the first page at the top left and then each succeeding page is placed from left to right and down.

If you enable Clone Frame, only one page of your work is placed in all of the frames for that sheet. In this way you can print multiple copies of one piece of artwork on a single sheet.

If you enable Maintain document page size each frame will be the same size as the page size specified in the document. For example, if you create a document on an 8.5 inch by 11 inch page, the frames will be constrained to that size. Thus, if you choose 11 inch by 17 inch paper, and specify 2 rows by 2 columns, some of the frames will not fit on the page.

When you use Rows and Columns with a layout style that places several working pages on a single printable page (e.g., Tent-Card) each printable page is treated as a frame.

 Related Topics


To change the margins of the printed sheet of paper

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button

5.	Indicate the size of the margins in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

or

Enable Auto Margins.

6.	If you want the left and right margins to be equal, and you want the top and bottom margins to be equal, enable Equal Margins.

 Related Topics


To save settings in the Edit Positioning dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button.

5.	Change the settings (see related topics).

6.	Click [image].

7.	Choose a name for the settings.

 Related Topics


To delete settings in the Edit Positioning dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button.

5.	Choose a saved settings name from the Positioning list box.

6.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print file information

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable File Info Button.

4.	(Optional) Enable File info within page.

Note

To see the file information, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work, or you must indicate that the file information should be printed within the page. If you do print the file information within the working page, make sure the artwork is positioned so that the file information does not overlap it.

 Related Topics


To print crop marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Crop Marks.

4.	(Optional) Enable Exterior crop marks only.

Note

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

If you are printing multiple pages per sheet (e.g., 2 rows by 2 columns), and you will not be cutting these pages into individual sheets, you may want to enable Exterior crop marks only. If you disable this option there will be crop marks around each row and column.

 Related Topics


To print registration marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Registration Marks.

Note

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

Tip

Corel offers a variety of registration mark styles. Look up what's available under Registration Mark Type in Special Settings on the options page in Print options. Choose a different style if you prefer. This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To print page numbers

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Page numbers.

Note

To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print a calibration bar

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Calibration Bar.

Note

To see the calibration bar, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print a densitometer scale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Densitometer Scale.

Note

To see the densitometer scale, you must defined a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print negative film

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Negative Film.

Tip

Do not choose negative film if you are outputting to a desktop printer.Check with your service bureau. Be especially careful if you require negative film: if you enable Negative Film and the service bureau's equipment is also set to negative, you will end up with positive film.

 Related Topics


To specify emulsion down

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Emulsion Down

Note

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film. Normally, images printed to a laser printer are printed with the emulsion up (button not enabled). Other types of reproduction may call for either emulsion up or down. Check with your service bureau.

Printing with the emulsion down produces a backwards image.

 Related Topics


To set the screen frequency

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Choose a screen frequency, expressed in lines per inch (lpi). Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your job.

Note

When the screen frequency is set to Default, your artwork is printed using the default screen frequency of the output device.

If you are using the Advanced settings, found on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box, set the screen frequencies for each color separation here. These settings override the settings on the Options page.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To set Level 2 usage

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Use PostScript Level 2 Features.

Note

This option is only available to Level 2 PostScript devices. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a Level 2 PostScript device, DO NOT enable this option.

 Related Topics


To test for complex objects

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Complex Objects Warnings.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Increase the flatness value manually

or

enable Auto Increase Flatness.

Note

If you enable Auto Increase Flatness, the printer increases the flatness of curves in each object which is too complex by increments of 2. If the object is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds the value in the Set Flatness To box by 10, the printer will skip the problematic object and go on to the next object. With this option enabled, the PostScript program is far less likely to cause errors on complex printing jobs.

If the printer skips an object because Auto increase flatness is enabled then the object will NOT appear in the final output. You will not be informed that this has happened while you print. The problem will only become evident when the print job is imaged to paper or film. Therefore it is important to inspect proofs before your job is printed.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To reduce curve complexity by limiting control points

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enter a value for Maximum points per curve.

Note

Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex. A lower number of points per curve will not reduce quality but it will increase printing time.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To verify fountain fills for banding

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Banded fountain fill warnings.

Note

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To automatically increase fountain steps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Auto increase fountain steps.

Note

This option will increase the number of steps that are used to render fountain fills to avoid banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fountain fill). This may increase printing time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

You can enable both Auto increase fountain steps and Optimize Fountain Fills. Fountain steps will be increased in fountain fills that require more steps and fountain steps will be reduced in fountain fills that have too many.

 Related Topics


To optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Optimize fountain fills.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

You can enable both Auto increase Fountain steps and Optimize Fountain Fills. Fountain steps will be increased in fountain fills that require more steps and fountain steps will be reduced in fountain fills that have too many.

 Related Topics


To download type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Click Download Type 1 Fonts.

Note

If you enable the Download Type 1 Fonts , by default Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

Generally, you will want to leave this option enabled and let the driver download the Type 1 fonts to the output device. If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download, or not download at all, because of sheer size.

 Related Topics


To limit the number of bitmap fonts created

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Bitmap Font Limit.

5.	Enter a number between 0 and 250.

Note

This option applies to text that will be printed on a PostScript printer.

If the font used meets certain criteria, a bitmap version of the font is created in the printer's memory. Bitmap character descriptions are used because they look better at small point sizes and they print faster than the normal character outline descriptions. The fonts created in this way consume a large amount of PostScript memory. As a result, you may need to limit the number of such fonts created to avoid a PostScript error when you are printing.

The following criteria must be met for a bitmap version of the font to be created in printer memory:

The printed character size is no larger than 75 pixels. This corresponds to a point size of 18 at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi, and so on.

The text is not scaled or skewed.

The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

The text does not have any envelopes (non-linear transformations) applied to it.

The drawing is not being printed using the Sizing options or Fit To Page option in the Print Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To set a bitmap font size threshold

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From Special Settings choose Bitmap Font Size Threshold.

5.	Enter a number between 0 and 1000. This value represents the bitmap height in pixels.

Note

The value set here determines if a Bitmap representation of the font can be created by the printer if the specific font is not loaded on the printer. The value represents the bitmap height in pixels. The higher the value, the bigger the bitmaps. If a bitmap cannot be created, the text can be sent to the printer as curves.

This option applies to text that will be printed on a Postscript printer.

 Related Topics


To control bitmap conversion to grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Color Bitmap Output.

5.	Choose Send Color Bitmaps As Grayscale or Send Color Bitmaps As Color.

Note

The default setting calls for color bitmaps to be reduced to grayscale if they are going to a grayscale device. Transmission time is much faster this way and the file size is smaller. If you switch this setting to Send As Color the device will do the conversion which results in slower transmission and a larger file size.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To output color bitmaps in RGB

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Output Color Bitmaps in RGB.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

PostScript output normally uses the CMYK color model. If outputting color bitmaps to an RGB or CMY device, enable the Output Color Bitmaps in RGB option. RGB devices will then receive ready-to-use RGB values (instead of CMYK). CMY devices will have an easier time translating RGB to CMY (3-color model to 3-color model) than CMYK to CMY (4-color model to 3-color model).

 Related Topics


To maintain OPI links

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Maintain OPI links.

Note

To use OPI links, you must enable the "Link to high resolution file for output using OPI" option when importing your TIFF (or CT) files. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.

Maintain OPI links is enabled automatically if you import your bitmaps correctly.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

To proof a file that contains OPI images on a device that doesn't have the high-resolution files (e.g., your desktop printer), disable the Maintain OPI Links option.

 Related Topics


To request color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

Tip

For special purposes, you may need to print separations in color. To do so, enable the In Color option.

 Related Topics


To convert spot colors to process colors

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Convert Spot Colors to CMYK.

Note

This does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To select specific color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Choose the color separations to be printed.

Note

Colors created in a process color model break down into cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K) separations. Each spot color also has its own separation, identified by its color name and number. When you enable Print Separations, the list of colors displays all separations that are used in your artwork. You can choose to create a .PRN file that includes all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations, depending on the complexity of your artwork.

Tip

Generally, you should be able to save all the color separation information in one .PRN file. However, if your artwork is heavily loaded with special effects and several color separations (e.g., CMYK plus a number of spot colors), saving all color separation information in one .PRN file might result in an unwieldy file. In such a case create a .PRN file for each separation. Include the seperation name in the filename for easier identification of your files.

 Related Topics


To print empty plates

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Print Empty Plates.

Tip

This option forces the printer or imagesetter to produce a sheet of paper or film even when there is nothing on them (e.g., there may be only yellow and black on a page but the cyan and magenta plates will be printed anyway if you are using process color). Normally, you would leave this option disabled to avoid wasting costly film. However, there may be instances when you want to force plates that are blank to print anyway.

 Related Topics


To customize a halftone screen

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Use Advanced Settings.

6.	Click Advanced.

7.	Change any of the following settings:

screen technology

halftone type (e.g., Line or Diamond)

printer or imagesetter resolution

the screen frequency and angle of any or all of the color separations.

8.	Click OK

Note

Setting the halftone screens correctly is critical. Screens that are improperly set can result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. Consult your service bureau before you change any of these settings. If you are uncertain, use the default settings.

Tip

You can now set the screen frequency, screen angle and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can now set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

 Related Topics


To trap by overprinting selected objects

1.	Choose the pick tool.

2.	Point to the object that requires color trapping.

3.	Click the right mouse button, click OverPrint.

4.	Enable Fill or Outline or both.

Note

Overprint Fill causes the top object to print over the underlying object (instead of the underlying object being knocked out), which makes "white gaps" impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

Overprint Outline causes the top object's outline to print over the underlying object. The most common and safest choice is to assign the color of the top object's fill to the outline. When setting the outline thickness, bear in mind that the outline straddles the path that defines the object's shape. Therefore, an outline of 0.30 points actually creates a trap of 0.15 points.

Note

Using color trapping effectively requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


To trap by overprinting selected color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Use Advanced Settings.

6.	Click Advanced.

7.	Click the color separation to overprint.

8.	Enable Overprint color.

9.	Indicate whether you want graphics, text, or both to overprint.

Note

Using color trapping effectively requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


To trap by always overprinting black

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Always Overprint Black.

Note

Any object that contains 95% black or more will overprint any underlying objects. It is a useful option for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics contents.

Using color trapping effectively requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

Tip

If your service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%, click the Options tab, choose Overprint Black Threshold from the Special Settings Option list, and change the setting as required.

 Related Topics


To trap by auto-spreading

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Separations tab.

4.	Enable Print Separations.

5.	Enable Auto-Spreading.

6.	(Optional) Enter a maximum trap value.

7.	(Optional) Enter a value for Text Above (i.e., the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied).

Note

Auto-Spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to the object that is the same color as its fill, and having it overprint underlying objects. (Color trapping will be created for all objects in your file that meet three conditions: they don't already have an outline, they are filled with a uniform fill, and they haven't already been designated to overprint.)

The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

Applying auto-spreading to small text can make it illegible.

Note

Using color trapping effectively requires a solid understanding of the many variables involved in color printing. To ensure satisfactory results, it is important that you seek your service bureau's advice.

 Related Topics


To specify fountain steps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Specify the number of steps to be used when rendering fountain fills.

Note

Fountain steps set from the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills display on your monitor. To control how they actually print, you must set the fountain steps on the Print Options page.

A low value will print faster but the transition between shades may be rather coarse, causing what is known as "banding". A higher value will result in a smoother blend but the printing times will be longer.

Tip

You can assign a custom fountain fill to one particular object. Select the object and 'open' the lock in the Fountain Fill dialog box (if the lock is closed then the number box is grayed out). Objects that are locked will print according to the number of steps assigned in the Print facilities. For example, you might want to set a high number of fountain steps for the one or two big objects in your drawing and leave the smaller items locked into the printer settings to be printed at a smaller step setting.

 Related Topics


To print a job information sheet

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Enable Print job information sheet.

5.	(Optional) To customize this report, click Info Settings and indicate which categories of information are to be included. Also specify whether the job information is to be saved to a file or printed or both.

 Related Topics


To define special settings

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Special Settings group box.

5.	Choose a new setting for it.

Note

In previous versions of Corel products, these options were only changed by editing the CORELPRN.INI file. This new feature in the Print Options dialog box allows you to customize these options directly from the Corel program.

This is a list of all of the special settings:

Bitmap Font Limit (PostScript only)

Bitmap Font Size Threshold (PostScript only)

Composite Crop Marks (PostScript only)

Conform to DSC (PostScript only)

Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output (PostScript only)

Overprint Black Threshold (PostScript only)

Postscript 2 Stroke Adjust (PostScript only)

Registration Mark Type (PostScript only)

Bitmap Printing

Drive Banding

Fill Clipping

Page Orientation Warning

Preview Image Default

Print Preview Drag Mode

Text Output Method

 Related Topics


To print bitmaps in small chunks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Bitmap Printing.

5.	Choose Output In 64K Chunks.

Note

This switch determines whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64K). Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can or cannot handle. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try forcing bitmaps to be output in a number of smaller blocks.

 Related Topics


To assign control over printer bands

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Driver Banding.

5.	Choose Let Driver Handle Banding (the printer driver creates the bands) or Send Bands to Driver (the Corel application splits the print job into bands before sending it to the printer driver).

Note

This option applies to non-PostScript printers only.

Tip

Some printers can't hold a full page in memory; therefore they must print the page in multiple passes, or "bands". The default setting lets the driver split the page into bands before sending them to the printer. If this proves too slow, or you encounter problems, request that Corel send the page to the driver already split into bands.

 Related Topics


To assign control over fill clipping

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Fill Clipping.

5.	Choose Use Driver Clipping For Fills or Use Software Clipping For Fills.

Note

This option applies to non-PostScript printers only.

Tip

Any fill other than Uniform fill (including Lenses and PowerClips) requires clipping if the object is not rectangular. The default setting is clipping controlled by the driver, because that usually means faster processing. If you encounter a problem printing non-Uniform fills, switch to clipping controlled by the software.

 Related Topics


To print to a black and white desktop printer

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer and make sure its properties are set correctly.

3.	Make sure the Printer color profile and the Print to file options are NOT selected.

4.	Indicate which pages or objects to print.

5.	Indicate how many copies you need and whether to collate them.

6.	(Optional) Click Options.

If required, enable file information, page numbering and crop marks.

Enable Preview Image and adjust the size and position of your artwork.

Click OK.

Note

The above procedure applies to printing a black and white composite to a black and white desktop printer. If you are printing color separations to a black & white desktop printer, also set the appropriate options under the Separations tab.

 Related Topics


To print to a color desktop printer

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose the printer and make sure its properties are set correctly.

3.	Verify that the Print to file option is NOT selected.

4.	Make sure the printer color profile that matches your printer is identified and enabled. If the profile identified is not the correct one, go to Tools, Color Manager and select the appropriate profile. Enable the correct profile in the Print dialog box.

5.	Indicate which pages or objects to print.

6.	Indicate how many copies you need and whether to collate them.

7.	(Optional) Click Options.

If required, enable file information, page numbering and crop marks.

Enable Preview Image and adjust the size and position of your artwork.

Click OK.

Note

The above procedure applies to printing a color composite to a color desktop printer. If you are printing color separations to a color desktop printer also set the appropriate options under the Separations tab.

 Related Topics


To print to a color press

1.	Prepare your project.

It is crucial that you start off on the right foot. Make sure you understand the importance of color management and color correction. Also, consult your service bureau and printing shop AT THE VERY BEGINNING of your project. They will provide you with invaluable information. Skipping this preparatory step can result in costly errors or omissions.

Once you have all the necessary information from your service bureau and printing shop, and your artwork is ready, you will need to create a "print file"(.PRN). This is the file you will send to your service bureau.

For a better understanding of what will happen to your file once you send it out, review the information about going to press (see related topics).

To begin creating the .PRN file, click File, Print.

2.	Set up the basics of the print job.

Enable Print to File. (You will enter a name for the file later, at step 7.)

Choose the imagesetter driver specified by your service bureau.

Make sure the printer color profile that matches the above imagesetter is selected. If it isn't, go to File, Color Manager and select the appropriate profile.

Specify a print range.

Set the number of copies to 1.

3.	Set up the printable page.

Click Options and enable Preview Image.

Adjust the size and position of your artwork, if required.

Set the bleed limit, if required.

Choose a layout style, if required.

4.	Set up the reference tools (below the Preview box).

Set the printers' marks as specified by your service bureau: file information, crop marks, registration marks, calibration bar, and densitometer scale.

Choose negative or positive film and emulsion up or down, according to your service bureau's specifications.

5.	Set the advanced options (Options tab).

If required, adjust the number of fountain steps.

Set the screen frequency. You can fine-tune this setting at step 6, if required.

Click PostScript Preferences and set all options that apply.

(optional) Enable Print job information

6.	Set the color separation parameters (Separations tab) if applicable.

Enabled Print Separations. Make sure the In Color option is NOT enabled.

If required, enable Convert Spot Colors to CMYK.

Choose all the color separations; indicate whether you want empty plates printed.

Customize your halftone screen, in consultation with your service bureau, if required.

Choose the appropriate trapping strategy, in consultation with your service bureau, if required.

7.	Click OK.

At the prompt, enter a name for your print file.

8.	Send out, proof, and approve your job for printing.

 Related Topics


To print Object Data

1.	In the Object Data Manager dialog box, click File, Print.

2.	(Optional) To print only the highlighted range of cells, choose Selection for Page Range.


To prepare a drawing for print merge

1.	Create your drawing in CorelDRAW, keeping in mind the following:

Each text string to be replaced must be unique.

Text strings must be entered as Artistic text, not Paragraph text.

Allow enough space for the substitute text. For instance, "Name" doesn't take up much room but when "Christopher Smith-Weinderflein " is substituted, it will require more space.

The substituted text will take on the same attributes (typeface, point size, spacing, etc.) and alignment (left, right, center) as the original text.

Any transformations applied to the original text will be applied to the substituted text (except Blend, Extrude and Fit to Path).

2.	Save your drawing as you would any .CDR file.

 Related Topics


To prepare a text file for print merge

1.	Launch your word processor and open a new file.

2.	On the first line, indicate how many text strings will be replaced. The example at step 4 below indicates that there are 3 text strings (in the drawing) that will be replaced by substitute text (from the text file).

3.	Starting on the second line, enter the text strings exactly as they appear in your drawing. This includes entering capital letters, spaces, line breaks, blank lines, etc. wherever they occur. The text string MUST end with a character; blank spaces or lines after the text string will prevent the merge from working.

4.	You must delineate each text string with back slashes. The text strings can be entered on separate lines, such as the examples below (where "3" identifies the number of text strings):

3

\Name\

\Date\

\Instructor\

Or they can be entered back-to-back on the same line, as shown below. Note that you still need one back slash to mark the beginning of each text string and another to mark the end, which is why there are two "\" between Name and Date, and two "\" between Date and Instructor.

3

NAME \\Date\\Instructor\

5.	Enter the text to be substituted for the above text strings. Note that because back slashes serve as markers to indicate the beginning and end of text strings, there can be no back slashes in the text to be substituted. There MUST be an entry for each text string. Your text file should look like this:

3

\Name\

\Date\

\Instructor\

\Jon von Wolf\

\18 August 1995\

\Mr. Donald Smith\

\Katie MacBear\

\18 August 1995\

\Ms. Maria Santana\

Or like this, if you are using the linear approach:

3

\Name\\Date\\Instructor\

\Chris van Wolf\\18 August 1995\\Mr. Donald Smith\

\Kelly MacBear\\18 August 1995\\Ms. Maria Santana\

6.	Save the file as a .TXT file

 Related Topics


To merge a text file with a drawing

1.	Open the text file, verify that it has been properly prepared, then close it. CorelDRAW needs to access the text file to do a Print Merge, but it cannot do so while the text file is open in your word processor. Therefore, the text file MUST be closed before you attempt a merge.

2.	Open the drawing. Verify that it has been properly prepared.

3.	Click File, Print Merge.

4.	Choose the text file.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Print (see related topics for help on printing)

Tip

When you're preparing to merge, remember that CorelDRAW neither saves nor displays the results of the merge. It prints them directly, in sequence. Therefore, you should check both the text file and your drawing for mistakes before merging. Also, make sure there's enough space in the drawing to accommodate the text you plan to substitute.

 Related Topics


The printer icon is in the second column from the left. When it is not grayed out (as in the fourth row), the layer will print.


The Enlarge Print Preview button allows you to switch from a regular to a full-screen print preview and back again.


These two arrow buttons allow you flip through the pages of your document. They are located at the lower-right corner of the Preview box.


The File Information button allows you to print the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the sheet.

If applicable, color separation information (color, screen frequency and angle, plate number) is printed at the top of the sheet.


The Crop Mark button allows you to print crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.


The Registration mark button allows you to print registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.


The Page Number button allows you to place page numbers on the printed sheets.


The Calibration bar button allows you to print a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue; cyan, magenta, yellow) beside your artwork. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.


The Densitometer Scale button allows you to print a Densitometer Scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This is an advanced feature that allows you to check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with an instrument called a densitometer.


The Negative button allows you to print a negative image.


The Emulsion Down button allows you to specify that the film emulsion faces down.


Opens a Windows dialog box which allows you to set printing options not controlled by Corel.


Opens the Print Options dialog box which allows you to set advanced printing parameters such as sizing and positioning, halftone screening, color separations, etc.


Indicates which device driver is selected. Click the arrow to access a list of other available printer and imagesetter drivers.

If the driver you need is not listed, install it by using the usual Windows procedure.


Ensures that colors will print as expected.

The printer color profile shown here matches the printer that was chosen in the System Profile (Color Manager).

If you want your print job to be filtered through a different profile, you must go back to the Color Manager, select the appropriate printer, and generate a new System Profile.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Saves the current print settings as a new style.


Deletes the selected style.


Creates a .PRN file from your print job (instead of actually printing).


Prepares the .PRN file for printing from a Macintosh computer.


Identifies the number of copies that will be printed.

Note

When printing to file, request one copy only, with no collation.


Prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).

If you do not enable Collate, the requested number of copies of each selected page will print before the next page will print (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).


Prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).

If you do not enable Collate, the requested number of copies of each selected page will print before the next page will print (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).


Print all pages in your document.


Prints only the objects that are currently selected.


Prints only the page currently displayed.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Allows you to specify whether odd, even, or both odd and even pages will be printed.


Displays your file as it will print and allows you to size and reposition your image. Right click on the preview window to choose one of four options: Preview Image, Preview in Color, Full Image Drag, and Print This Sheet Now.

Note

For your image to appear, you must enable Preview image. Otherwise your image will be represented by a bounding box.


Displays your file as it will print and allows you to size and reposition your image. Right click on the preview window to choose one of four options: Preview Image, Preview in Color, Full Image Drag, and Print This Sheet Now.

Note

For your image to appear, you must enable Preview image. Otherwise your image will be represented by a bounding box.


Allows you to move back in a multi-page document.


Allows you to move forward in a multi-page document.


Changes to a full screen preview. Click it again to return to a normal preview.


Displays your file in the Preview box as it will print.

Preview Image is a handy feature. Enable it, unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will still indicate the position and size of your image.


Allows you to choose whether the Preview box will display a composite view of your print job or only a specific color separation.

Note

This feature is only available when Print Separations is enabled.


Prints the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the sheet.

If applicable, color separation information (color, screen frequency and angle, plate number) is printed at the top of the sheet.

Note

To see the file information, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work. If not, you can request that the file information be printed within the page.


Places page numbers on the printed sheets.

Note

To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Causes the file information to print within the page.

Tip

If the working page size is identical to the paper or film size, enable File Info Within Page. Make sure the artwork is positioned so that the file information does not overlap it.


Prints crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.

Note

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints crop marks only along the outer edge of the sheet.

Tip

This option is often preferable when you are printing multiple layouts per sheet.


Prints registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.

Note

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue; cyan, magenta, yellow) beside your artwork. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.

Note

To see the calibration bar, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints a Densitometer Scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This is an advanced feature that allows you to check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with an instrument called a densitometer.

Note

To see the densitometer scale, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work


Prints a negative image when enabled.


Specifies that the film emulsion faces down when enabled.

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film.


These options allow you to resize and reposition your artwork.

Note

These options do not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.


Applies positioning and sizing to all pages.


Identifies the unit of measurement that is used when you specify the layout of your artwork.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Top value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Top value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Scales the width of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the width of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Automatically centers your artwork on the page.


Automatically scales your artwork so that it fits the printable page.

Note

Unless Maintain aspect ratio is enabled, Fit to Page will distort your image.


Constrains resizing and scaling so that the height and width ratio of the artwork is maintained.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Allows you to print large artwork on multiple sheets, or tiles, that can later be assembled to form the whole picture.


Indicates the level of flatness that will be applied to curves when you print.

Tip

Increasing the flatness reduces printing time and therefore is useful when you need to produce quick proofs. Be careful however as a flatness level set too high will produce distorted curves.


Causes Corel to automatically increase the flatness in increments of 2, as needed. Attempts to print an object will stop when the flatness value exceeds the value set in the Set Flatness To box by 10. At this point, the printer skips the problematic object and goes on to the next object.


Specifies the maximum allowable number of control points per curve. Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex.


Allows one or more warnings to be issued if objects that are too complex and could cause printing problems are detected.


This value reflects the number of steps that will be used to render any fountain fills in your artwork. A low value (less than 20) will print faster but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes what is known as banding. A higher value (over 40) will result in a smoother blend but longer printing times.

Note

Fountain steps that are set in the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills display on your monitor. To control how the fountain fills actually print, you must set the value for fountain steps here or in the Fountain Fill dialog box.


Warns you of potential banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fill) which is caused by to few steps in a fountain fill, when it is enabled.

Note

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.


Prints a job information sheet with your print job. This report contains information about the application that produced the job, the driver that was used, the print settings, the font information, and the file links.


Opens the Job Information Sheet dialog box, which allows you to specify which categories of information you want included in the report.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Identifies the basic halftone screen frequency that your job will print at.

Screen frequency is expressed as a number of lines per inch (lpi). This value refers to the number of lines of dots (or other shapes) that make up a halftone screen. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes of various sizes that is used to simulate a continuous tone image.

Note

Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your print job.


Enables the use of PostScript level 2 features.

Note

This option is only available to level 2 PostScript devices. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a level 2 postscript device, DO NOT enable this option.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified, and, if necessary, automatically increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills to avoid banding.

Note

This option may increase print time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified. If the number of steps in a fountain fill is greater than the number that your output device can render, the number of steps used to render the fountain fill is decreased automatically.


Downloads Type 1 fonts to the output device. Generally, this option is enabled because it is particularly beneficial when you want to print large tracts of text that use only a few fonts. Printing is faster as each font is first downloaded, and then only referenced by text that uses it.

If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take longer to download, or not download at all, because of sheer size.


Converts True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts. If you enabled the Download Type 1 Fonts option, by default the Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.

Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.


Tells the service bureau's OPI server to substitute the corresponding high-resolution images for the low-resolution ones in your file. This substitution is done before your print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Defines bitmaps in RGB values instead of the usual CMYK values that are found in PostScript files.

Tip

Use this option when you are outputting to RGB devices (e.g., slidemakers).

Also use this option when you are printing to CMY devices. It is easier for these devices to translate from RGB to CMY than from CMYK to CMY.


Separates color artwork into its component colors, causing each component color to print out on a single sheet.

If you used a process color model (which uses four colors to simulate any color), you'll get up to four sheets per page.

If you used spot colors, one sheet per color is printed.


Allows you to print the separations in color (i.e., on a color printer). Separations are usually printed in black, with a screen to represent shading. This option allows you to print the separations in color instead.


Converts any spot colors present in your artwork to process colors.

Note

This does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.


Prints all plates, including those that contain no image.

Note

Printing empty plates wastes film and adds to the cost of your job. Generally, you'll want to leave this option disabled.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your artwork. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Allows you to adjust the advanced settings of your color separations, which includes setting halftone screens and creating color trapping.

Note

Do not adjust these settings without first talking to your service bureau or printing shop.


Opens the Advanced Separations Setting dialog box that allows you to set advanced screening parameters such as screening technology, screen frequency and angle per color plate, overprinting per plate, halftone dot type, etc.


Identifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


Identifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


Identifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") the job will be printed at.


Identifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") the job will be printed at.


Identifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") the job will be printed at.

Note

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Identifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") the job will be printed at.

Note

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Identifies the screen frequency the selected color separation will be printed at. The default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note

Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Shows the screen angle for the selected color separation. Screen angles are used to offset the different films in process color separations to avoid moiré patterns. The default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note

Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Allows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Causes any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint underlying objects.

Note

This is a useful option for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Opens the Edit Layout dialog box.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Places the current layout in each frame of the printable page.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Opens the Positioning dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify positioning settings that can be save in Positioning styles.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Prints only vector graphics unless combined with Print bitmaps or Print text.


Prints only bitmaps unless combined with Print vectors or Print text.


Prints only text unless combined with Print vectors or Print bitmaps.


Prints all text in black.


Prints using the full color capabilities of the selected printing device.


Prints all colors in black.


Prints all colors in grayscale.


Opens the Postscript Preferences dialog box.


Scales everything that will be printed so that it fits within the printable page of the current printer. Use this setting to proof a large layout on your desktop printer.

This option is only intended for proofing, and should be disabled for the final output. If you wish to scale your artwork to fill the printable page, you should use the fit to page option. Position and size measurements reflect the size of the final output, not the size of the proof.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device's location.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Displays a list of documents that you can print.


Allows you to choose what to print.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Displays a list of the current device's mode settings.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Displays a list of the current device's capabilities.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your artwork. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Shows all separations used in your artwork. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Shows all separations used in your artwork. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Displays the present print style, or a name you have typed for a new style.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Allows you to save this dialog box's settings.


Makes the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Automatically sets the gutters.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Displays a model of the printable page based on the positioning settings.


Automatically sets the margins.


Specifies the number of rows of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Specifies the number of columns of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Saves the present positioning settings.


Deletes the selected positioning style.


Specifies the number of rows of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Specifies the number of columns of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Specifies the number of working pages to position across the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position across the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position down the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position down the printable page.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


Keeps the frame size equal to the working page size.


Displays a model of how the pages will be arranged on the printed sheet.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Shows the other side of a double sided layout.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page.

Note

When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, Corel automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Saves the present layout settings.


Deletes the selected layout style.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Shows the contents of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a .TXT file.


Allows you to specify the .TXT file the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a printer.


Allows you to specify the printer the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


BOO


Allows you to choose proofing options.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device's location.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device, and allows you to change devices.


Allows you to specify the number of copies and whether to collate them.


Allows you to specify color trapping settings.


Allows you to change screening options for the selected color separation.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Sets PostScript font handling.


Sets PostScript bitmap handling.


Allows you to enable PostScript warnings.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to choose the output format and destination of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Align & Distribute command (Arrange menu)

Aligns and/or distributes selected objects.

Objects are aligned with respect to the handles on their highlighting box.

Select each object you want to align individually, rather than using the Select All command in the Edit menu or the marquee select option.

The last object you select maintains its position; all others move to align with this object.

To align to the grid or the center of the page, click the center button from the group of buttons that appears below the preview window, then click the center button from the group of buttons that appears to the right of the preview window and click Apply.

 Related Topics


Order - To Front command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object to the front of the stacking order on a single layer.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - To Back command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object to the back of the stacking order on a single layer.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - Forward One command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object forward one in the stacking order on a single layer.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - Backward One command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object back one in the stacking order on a single layer.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - In Front Of command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object in front of a specified object on a single layer.. When this command is clicked, the mouse cursor changes to an arrow. The arrow cursor is used to identify the object that you want to move the selected object in front of.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - Behind command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object behind a specified object on a single layer. When this command is clicked, the mouse cursor changes to an arrow. The arrow cursor is used to identify the object that you want to move the selected object behind.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Order - Reverse Order command (Arrange menu)

Reverse the order of all of the objects in the stacking order on a single layer.

Note

You can move any object in the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the In Front Of and Behind commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the In Front Of command to place it precisely where you want it.

 Related Topics


Group command (Arrange menu)

Groups all selected objects together so they can be selected and manipulated as a single object.

When an object in a group is selected, a single highlighting box appears around the entire group. Except for those listed below, any command or operation applied to the group affects all objects in the group.

Combine and Break Apart (Arrange menu)

Edit Text (Text menu)

Character, Fit Text To Curve, Straighten Text, and Align to Baseline (Text menu)

Blend, Extrude, Contour, and PowerLine (Effects menu)

Any operations using the Shape tool

You can also collect groups into larger groups with other objects and/or groups. A single group can have as many as 99 sub-levels of grouping.

To break a group apart to make changes to an individual object, use the Ungroup command (or press CTRL + U).

Grouping objects in a multi-layer drawing puts them on the same layer (the currently active layer). The objects will still maintain their stacking order relative to other objects in the active layer, but not necessarily to other objects in other layers in the drawing.

 Related Topics


Ungroup command (Arrange menu)

Breaks up the selected group into its individual objects. If you have more than one sub-level of grouping, Ungroup breaks up one level of grouping at a time.

 Related Topics


Combine command (Arrange menu)

Combines the selected curve/line segments into a single curve object. If you use Combine on rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text, CorelDRAW converts them to curves before converting them into a single curve object. When text is combined with other text, however, they are not converted to curves, but into larger blocks of text.

Use Combine when you want to:

join nodes on two different curve objects;

create clipping holes or masks;

conserve memory for drawings which contain many lines and curves that share the same outline attributes.

Combined objects assume the outline and fill attributes of the last object selected before the Combine command was implemented.

You can combine objects on different layers. The combined object will be assigned to the currently active drawing layer.

 Related Topics


Break Apart command (Arrange menu)

Converts an object made up of multiple subpaths into individual curve objects. Use Break Apart when you want to:

change an object that you previously combined with others using the Combine command in the Arrange menu

assign different fill or outline attributes to characters in a text object previously converted to curves

fill transparent regions that occur when you combine overlapping objects

change text objects into multiple text objects

 Related Topics


Weld command (Arrange menu)

Joins overlapping objects at points where their paths intersect to make one object. While not always apparent in editable preview, welding also removes sections of the path between those intersect points. The resulting curve object assumes the fill and outline attributes of the bottom object of the selected group of objects. If you marquee select the objects, CorelDRAW will outline and fill the welded object with the attributes of the most recently created object.

You can also weld single objects with intersecting lines. While its appearance won't change, the object breaks into several subpaths. You then delete the interior subpaths to remove the holes in the overall object.

There's no limit to the number of objects you can weld at one time. You can even weld objects on different layers as long as you have MultiLayer selection turned on.

It is not possible to weld a PowerLine, dimension line, group of objects, or the master object of a clone.

 Related Topics


Intersection command (Arrange menu)
Intersection command (Arrange command)

Creates a new object using the area common to two or more overlapping objects. Intersection joins their paths at the points where they intersect. The resulting curve object assumes the fill and outline attributes of the last object you selected. It is possible to intersect lines, text, and elements on different layers as long as the MultiLayer selection turned on.

It is not possible to intersect a PowerLine, dimension line, group of objects, or the master object of a clone.

 Related Topics


Trim command (Arrange menu)

Trimming two or more overlapping objects reshapes the last object selected. Trimming separates the paths at points where the objects overlap. Initially, the trimmed object may appear no different than it did before trimming. Closer inspection, however, shows that new nodes appear where the object has been trimmed. Move the trimmed objects apart to see the full effect of the trim.

If the Target Object or Other Object(s) check box is enabled in the roll-up, the command creates a copy of the appropriate original object(s) before performing the trim; an exact replica of the original object remains on screen.

It is not possible to trim a PowerLine, dimension line, group of objects, or the master object of a clone.

 Related Topics


Separate command (Arrange menu)

Separates the original objects from intermediate shapes created by the Blend and Contour command and the extruded surfaces created by the Extrude command. Also separates text from a path, after the Fit Text to Path command was implemented.

 Related Topics


Convert To Curves command (Arrange menu)

Converts the selected rectangle, ellipse, or text object to a series of curves and/or lines that you can shape with the Shape tool. Objects converted to curves are called curve objects.

Once an object is converted to curves, it is not possible to return it to its original object type, except with the Undo command in the Edit menu.

Text converted to curves cannot be edited using the Text tool or any of the text editing commands.

If you convert text with overlapping characters to curves, the overlapping areas will be transparent. To fill in the entire character, click Arrange, Break Apart after the conversion.

If you applied different outlines and/or fills to individual characters in a string of Artistic text, converting the string to curves creates a group of objects (one object for each different fill/outline combination).

 Related Topics


Blend Roll-Up command (Effects menu)

Blends one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes. Controls in the Blend Roll-up let you specify the number of intermediate shapes created and the range of colors blended. You can also fit objects you've blended to a path.

The intermediate shapes are linked dynamically. This means you can edit either of the blended objects and the blend will re-form automatically to incorporate your changes.

When blending objects with unequal numbers of subpaths, some or all of the intermediate shapes may be drawn as open paths rather than as closed ones. In such cases, the intermediate shapes may not print, or may print as outlined shapes rather than as filled ones.

You cannot blend objects on different layers.

Fills blend according to the following rules:

Object fill	Intermediate shapes

No fill in one object	No fill

Uniform fill with fountain	Blend from uniform fill to fountain

Uniform fill with pattern	Uniform fill

Radial fountains to Linear fountain	Radial fountain

Conical fountains to Linear fountain	Conical fountain

Conical fountains to Radial fountain	Fountain in start object

Custom fountains in both objects	Blends To and From colors in start object

Same fountain type in both objects	Fountain

Pattern in one object only	Other object's fill

Pattern in both objects	Start object's pattern

Bitmap texture in one object only	Other object's fill

Same bitmap texture style in both objects	Blends textures

Different bitmap texture styles	Start object's texture

Spot color with process color	Process color

Two different spot colors	Process color

 Related Topics


The text from this file has been deleted because there is no longer a Control menu.


Contour Roll-Up command (Effects menu)

Creates a series of concentric shapes radiating into or out from an object. The shapes will have the same outline and fill as the object.

You cannot apply contours to grouped objects, bitmaps, or linked and embedded objects.

 Related Topics


Dimension Roll-Up
 Dimension Roll-Up (Tools menu)

Click Tools, Dimension, Linear, or Angular or double-click dimension text to open the Dimension Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


Undo command (Edit menu)

The Undo command reverses actions performed during the current session. Use Undo after making a change you do not want implemented. Immediately after selecting Undo, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you just undid.

The Undo command changes depending on the last action. For example, Undo Fill if your last action was a fill operation, or Undo Rotate if your last action was a rotation. If the action cannot be undone, or if there are no action to be undone, the command is grayed. If the action cannot be undone, the Undo command changes to "Can't Undo".

The Undo Levels setting in the Options dialog box determines how many consecutive actions you can undo and redo. The default setting is four, but you can enter any number. The number of Undo levels is limited only by your machine's available resources. As this number increases, however, your machine's performance will be affected.

Note

You cannot Undo the following operations:

any change of view (Zoom-in, Zoom-out, etc.)

any file operations (Open, Save, Import, etc.)

any object selection operations (Marquee select, Node select, etc.)

any operation with the Grid or Guidelines

 Related Topics


Redo command (Edit menu)

Restores changes reversed by the Undo command. Redo becomes available immediately after you select the Undo command. The name of the Redo command changes depending on the last action [image] for example, Redo Fill or Redo Rotate.

 Related Topics


Repeat command (Edit menu)

Applies, if possible, the most recent command or action to the currently selected object. Useful when you want to rotate objects to the same angle.


Cut command (Edit menu)

Removes selected object(s) from the current drawing and places it onto the Clipboard. From the Clipboard, you can paste it into another Windows application or CorelDRAW file.

Objects cut from another CorelDRAW file are pasted into the current drawing at the same size and location as the original. If the pasted object is not visible, use the Zoom tool.

Objects cut from other programs are usually pasted onto the center of the working page.

To permanently remove an object or group of objects, select it with the Pick tool and click Edit, Delete (or press the DELETE key). Keep in mind that the DELETE key behaves differently when used in other circumstances. When editing text on screen, pressing DELETE deletes the character immediately to the right of the cursor. When node editing a curve, it deletes the selected node.

 Related Topics


Copy command (Edit menu)

Places a copy of the selected object(s) or text onto the Clipboard. Once on the Clipboard, you can paste the object into another Windows application or CorelDRAW file.

Objects copied from another CorelDRAW file are pasted into the current drawing at the same size and location as the original. If the pasted object is not visible, use the Zoom tool.

Objects copied from other programs are usually pasted onto the center of the working page.

Objects pasted from one application into another sometimes undergo unexpected alterations.

 Related Topics


Paste command (Edit menu)

Places a copy of the object(s) currently on the Clipboard into your drawing. The original remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut another object, or end the current Windows session.

Objects cut/copied from another CorelDRAW file are pasted into the current drawing at the same size and location as the original. If the pasted object is not visible, use the Zoom tool.

Objects cut/copied from other programs are usually pasted onto the center of the working page.

Objects pasted from one application into another sometimes undergo unexpected alterations.

 Related Topics


Paste Special command (Edit menu)

Inserts information from the Clipboard into your drawing. You can specify the format the information will be in and, optionally, create a link to the source file.

 Related Topics


Delete command (Edit menu)

Deletes selected objects or nodes. If no further action has been performed, you can restore a deleted object or node using the Undo command.

To delete an object (or a group of objects), select it with the Pick tool, then click Edit, Delete.

To delete a node (or a group of nodes), select it with the Shape tool, then click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


Duplicate command (Edit menu)

Adds a copy of selected object(s) to the current drawing. By default, the copy is placed on top of the original and offset down and to the right. It is also selected automatically. You can change the amount of offset by clicking Tools, Options.

Pressing the + key on the numeric keypad duplicates objects, but places them on top of the original with no offset.


Clone command (Edit menu)

Copies the selected object and offsets the copy from the original. Most changes applied to the original object (called the master) are automatically applied to the copy (called the clone). For example, if you change the master's fill, the clone's fill will change as well. If you change the attributes of the clone, the attribute you changed will no longer be dependent on the master's attributes. For example, after you change a clone's fill, its fill will no longer change when you change the master's fill. Likewise, if you stretch a clone, it will no longer stretch when you stretch its master.

If you click a master object with the right mouse button, the pop-up menu appears with a command for selecting its clone(s).

If you click a clone with the right mouse button, the pop-up menu appears, with commands for selecting its master and restoring the master's attributes to the clone.

Except for Envelope and Perspective, effects applied to a master object are not applied to the clone. However, if you clone an object that has one of the other effects, the effect will be applied to the clone. Only changes to a master object's Envelope or Perspective will be applied to the clones.

Clones and masters revert to regular objects when individually copied or cut to the Clipboard. However, they remain clones/masters if copied or cut as a complete set.

You can set the amount of offset for cloned objects in the Options dialog box, accessed by clicking Tools, Options.

 Related Topics


Select All command (Edit menu)

Selects every object on the current page of your drawing, including any not currently in view. Once the objects are selected, you can apply any command or operation to them.

Note

Double-clicking the Pick tool also selects every object on the current page.


Copy Properties From command (Edit menu)

Copies the properties of another object to the selected object. When you choose the command, a dialog box appears so that you can specify which of the following properties you want to copy:

Outline Pen

Outline Color

Fill

Text attributes (text objects only)

PowerLine attributes

Lens attributes

 Related Topics


Find command (Edit menu)
Select by Properties (Edit menu)

Searches for object types and fills, outlines, color models, and special effects based on the criteria you specify.


Select Across Frames command (Edit menu)

Selects all objects on every slide. The Select Across Frames command is only on the Edit menu when CorelDRAW has been opened from Corel PRESENTS. The tabs at the bottom of the screen display the Slide 1, Slide 2, etc. rather than the Page 1, Page 2 displayed when CorelDRAW has been opened.


Insert New Object command (Edit menu)

Inserts a linked or embedded object, such as a chart, graphic, or spreadsheet data created in another application. Also lets you insert the contents of another file as an embedded or linked object.

 Related Topics


Insert Bar Code command (Edit menu)

Opens the Insert New Object dialog box. When you choose BarCode from the Object Type list and click OK, the Corel Bar Code Wizard is displayed allowing you to create a bar code.

 Related Topics


Insert CorelMEMO command (Edit menu)

Opens the CorelMEMO dialog box which allows you to insert notes and bitmapped images into any program that supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Use a CorelMEMO when you want to leave yourself a reminder, note a change in a document, or place a comment into a program. Add one of the bitmapped images provided with CorelMEMO, or include your own bitmapped image to customize your CorelMEMO.


CorelBarCode Object - Edit command (Edit menu)

Opens the Corel Bar Code Wizard allowing you to edit the bar code. The Wizard opens with the digits of the bar code number displayed.

Note

This command is not available unless you have inserted a bar code in your drawing and the bar code is selected.

 Related Topics


CorelBarCode Object - Open command (Edit menu)

Opens the Corel Bar Code Wizard allowing you to replace the selected bar code with a new one. Unlike the Edit command, the Wizard opens at the beginning letting you select a another type of bar code, rather than editing the existing one.

 Related Topics


CorelBarCode Object - Convert command (Edit menu)

Opens the Convert dialog box allowing you to display the bar code as an icon.

 Related Topics


Edit Object command (Edit menu)

Opens the application in which the selected linked or embedded object was created, allowing you to make changes to it. When you finish making changes and close the application window, the revised object is incorporated into your CorelDRAW file. For example, suppose your file contained a bitmap created with Corel PHOTO-PAINT. To edit the bitmap, select it, then click Edit, Edit Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel PHOTO-PAINT will open with the BITMAP displayed for editing.

Note

The command name changes depending on the type of object you select.

 Related Topics


Links command (Edit menu)

Lists all the links in the current file. This list includes internal links to other CorelDRAW files and external links to other Windows applications.

 Related Topics


Clear Effect command
Clear Effect command (Effects menu)

Removes the last effect you applied to the selected object. The name of the command changes depending on which effect was applied, such as, Clear Blend or Clear Envelope.

 Related Topics


Bitmap Color Mask command (Effects menu)

Displays the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up. The Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up allows you to clip as many as ten colors from a bitmap. The color tolerance settings can be used to define the sensitivity of the color clipping. Clicking the Eyedropper, on the Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up changes the cursor to an eyedropper which when clicked on the bitmap, picks up the color.


Copy - Perspective From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's perspective to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an object selected.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - Envelope From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's envelope to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an object selected.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - Blend From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's blend to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have two objects selected.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - Extrude From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's extrude to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an existing object which been extruded.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - Contour From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's contour to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an existing object which has contours.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - PowerLine From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's PowerLine to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an existing PowerLine object.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - Lens From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's lens to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an existing object with a lens effect.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Copy - PowerClip From command (Effects menu)

Copies another object's PowerClip to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to copy. The command is not available unless you have an existing PowerClip object.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

 Related Topics


Clone - Blend From command (Effects menu)

Clones other objects' blend to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to clone. The command is not available unless you have two objects selected.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

A master-client relationship exists between the original effect and the cloned effect. The cloned effect in the client object will change to reflect any alterations made to the effect in the master object. If you change the effect on the master object, it is automatically applied to the clone. If you change the effect on the clone, that attribute is no longer dependent on the master object.

 Related Topics


Clone - Extude From command (Effects menu)
Clone - Extrude From command (Effects menu)

Clones another object's extrusion to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to clone. The command is not available unless you have an existing extruded object.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

A master-client relationship exists between the original effect and the cloned effect. The cloned effect in the client object will change to reflect any alterations made to the effect in the master object. If you change the effect on the master object, it is automatically applied to the clone. If you change the effect on the clone, that attribute is no longer dependent on the master object.

 Related Topics


Clone - Contour From command (Effects menu)

Clones another object's contour to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to clone. The command is not available unless you have an existing object with a contour.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

A master-client relationship exists between the original effect and the cloned effect. The cloned effect in the client object will change to reflect any alterations made to the effect in the master object. If you change the effect on the master object, it is automatically applied to the clone. If you change the effect on the clone, that attribute is no longer dependent on the master object.

 Related Topics


Clone - PowerLine From command (Effects menu)

Clones another object's PowerLine to the selected object. When you choose the command, an arrow appears. Use the arrow to click the object whose effect you want to clone. The command is not available unless you have an existing PowerLine object.

Note

The command is unavailable if the selected object cannot have an effect copied to it. If the object you clicked has an effect which cannot be applied to the other object, a message box will appear.

A master-client relationship exists between the original effect and the cloned effect. The cloned effect in the client object will change to reflect any alterations made to the effect in the master object. If you change the effect on the master object, it is automatically applied to the clone. If you change the effect on the clone, that attribute is no longer dependent on the master object.

 Related Topics


Envelope Roll_Up command (Effects menu)
Envelope Roll-Up command

Use this command to apply and edit envelopes. You can apply envelopes to any object except bitmaps. Applying them to Paragraph text lets you reshape the frame to flow text around or inside objects.

Text reshaped with an envelope remains as text. This means you can edit it and change its attributes. You cannot, however, change attributes of individual characters.

Once you have applied an envelope to a curve object, you cannot select its nodes without clearing the envelope or converting the object to curves again.

 Related Topics


Extrude Roll-Up command (Effects menu)

Adds surfaces to the selected object, making it appear three-dimensional. CorelDRAW links the object and its surfaces, allowing you to manipulate them as a single entity.

When you click Effects, Extrude, CorelDRAW opens the Extrude Roll-Upand applies a default wireframe extrusion on the selected object. Use the roll-up to adjust the direction and depth, and other extrusion parameters.

 Related Topics


New - Document command (File menu)

Creates a new drawing. If you have a drawing open, the new drawing opens over the current drawing. You can display more than one drawing simultaneously using the Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically commands from the Window menu.

The new drawing uses the same program settings that were in effect for the previous drawing (Page Setup, View options, New Object Fill, and Outline attributes, etc.). Change the settings as required.

 Related Topics


New - From Template command (File menu)

Displays the Open dialog box allowing you to choose a template (.cdt). A template file contains a collection of text, objects, and styles you can use on the new drawing. You can display more than one drawing simultaneously using the Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically commands from the Window menu.

Note

You can also use a .cdr file as your template.

 Related Topics


Open command (File menu)

Loads a drawing or style template into CorelDRAW. If you already have a drawing open, CorelDRAW opens the drawing over the original. You can display more than one drawing simultaneously using the Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically commands from the Window menu.

 Related Topics


Close command (File menu)

Closes the current drawing. If you've made any changes since you last saved your file, CorelDRAW prompts you to save the file before closing.


Save command (File menu)

Saves your drawing under the name displayed in the title bar. If you have not saved the drawing yet, the Save Drawing dialog box appears prompting you to enter a name. If you are altering an existing drawing, but want to keep the original version, use the Save As command.

When you save a drawing, the following settings are saved with the file:

Page size, orientation, and layout

Paper color

Show Page Border setting

Facing Pages View setting (on/off)

Grid frequency, origin, and units

Guidelines

Scale settings for dimensioning (set in Grid Setup dialog box)

 Related Topics


File Backup Features

CorelDRAW creates a backup copy of a drawing every time you save it. The backup copy is stored in the same directory as the original, but with the filename extension .BAK. You can turn this feature off by disabling the Make backup on save setting check box in the Options, Advanced dialog box.

CorelDRAW also has an auto-backup feature to save work in progress. CorelDRAW saves the current drawing every ten minutes. You change the interval and the directory the backup files are stored in by changing the Auto Backup Directory and Auto-backup minutes settings in the Options, Advanced dialog box. Auto-backup files have an .ABK file extension and are deleted when you exit CorelDRAW or click File, New, Save, or Save As.

 Related Topics


Save As command (File menu)

Saves a new drawing or a new version of an existing drawing. Also lets you save the contents of the currently displayed page as a style template or as a pattern fill. If you are altering an existing drawing, but want to keep the original version, use the Save As command.


Save All command (File menu)

Saves all of the open drawings. If one or more of the drawings has not been previously saved, the Save dialog box is displayed prompting you to enter a name.


Import command (File menu)

Brings graphics into CorelDRAW from other programs. You can also use this command to merge other CorelDRAW (.CDR or .CMX) files with the current drawing. You can have CorelDRAW choose the import filter type for you by choosing All Files in the List Files of Type box.


Export command (File menu)

Saves the current drawing in a format that other programs can read.

In a multi-page document, only objects on the currently displayed page (or facing pages if Facing Pages is enabled in the Page Setup, Display dialog box) are exported.


Print command (File menu)

Opens the Print dialog box. This dialog box allows you to print your work, change the print options, and change the printer and printer properties.

 Related Topics


Print Merge command (File menu)
Print merge

Opens the Print Merge dialog box. This dialog box allows you to combine properly formatted text files with properly formatted CorelDRAW files during printing.

 Related Topics


Print Setup command (File menu)

Opens the Print Setup dialog box. This dialog box allows you to change the printer and printer properties.

 Related Topics


Recent File command (File menu)
Recent File command

Opens any one of the last four files you closed. Type the number next to the file you want to open, or click its filename.


Exit command (File menu)

Ends the current CorelDRAW session. If you've made any changes since you last saved your file, CorelDRAW prompts you to save the file before exiting.

Shortcut

Pressing ALT + F4, or clicking the close button that appears in the top right corner of the title bar, also exits CorelDRAW.

If you've made any change to your template and its styles, CorelDRAW prompts you to save the modified template before exiting.

The next time you run CorelDRAW, the program will use the same settings in effect during the last session. These settings are as follows:

Default template;

Page Setup settings;

All Grid Frequency and Origin settings;

All Snap To settings (Objects, Guidelines, and Grid);

All settings in the View menu;

All settings in the Preferences dialog box;

All Scale settings for dimensioning (set in the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box);

Disk drive and directory for Open, Save, Export, Import, and Print to File dialog boxes.

 Related Topics


Send command (File menu)

Lets you send drawings to other users via the Microsoft Exchange. The Inbox Setup Wizard will help you setup your mailbox so you can send and send images through e-mail.


Help Topics command (Help menu)

Opens the CorelDRAW Help Contents screen. From this screen, you can choose the type of Help you want. When you are in Help, clicking on the Contents button takes you back to the opening screen.


Technical Support command (Help menu)

Opens the Technical Support help file, which provides details on product support for Corel applications; including available support services, Import and Export filters information, error messages, and troubleshooting tips.


What's This? command
What's This? command (Help menu)

Changes the cursor to the What's This cursor. When you click a component of the application, a help topic about the object you clicked is displayed.


Tutorial command (Help menu)
Tutorial (Help menu)

Opens the CorelDRAW Tutorial.


About CorelDRAW command (Help menu)

Opens a dialog box with information about which version of CorelDRAW you are running, the number of objects and groups of objects in the current drawing, and the amount of space available on the drive last used to save or open a file.

Clicking the System Info button opens the System Info dialog box.


Insert Page command (Layout menu)

Using the Insert Page dialog box you can add blank pages to the current drawing. Pages can be added either before or after the current page.

A page counter displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen shows the total number of pages and the number of the currently displayed page. Buttons next to the page counter, referred to as page flippers, let you move through the pages.

Note

When you use the page flippers to move through the pages, the Insert Page dialog box will open when you reach the first or last page.

 Related Topics


Delete Page command (Layout menu)

Deletes pages inserted with the Insert Page command, and deletes the objects on the pages.

 Related Topics


Go To Page command (Layout menu)

Opens a dialog box that lets you go to another page in the document. The Go To Page dialog box shows the current page number.

 Related Topics


Page Setup command (Layout menu)

Opens the Page Setup dialog box, which lets you set the page size, layout, orientation, and color of your file. The Page Setup dialog box also contains controls for creating folded booklets, cards, and custom-sized labels.

When you save a drawing, the Page Setup settings are also saved.

The settings affect the positioning of the crop marks, and the dimensions of the Working Page.

The page orientation you choose here should match the orientation specified with the Print Setup command.

 Related Topics


Layers Manager command (Layout menu)

Helps you organize your drawing by assigning elements to different layers. A drawing can have any number of layers, as well as a guides and grid layer. Controls in the Layers Roll-Up let you create, copy, and delete layers, as well as hide, lock, and print selected layers.

You can also use the Layers Manager to:

select the active layer on which you draw objects;

move selected objects to a different layer;

move a layer and its objects in front of or behind other layers;

make a layer a master layer so that objects on it appear on all pages in a multi-page document.

 Related Topics


Styles Manager command (Layout menu)

Displays a roll-up with controls for applying styles and managing style templates. CorelDRAW comes with a default template containing redefined styles which you can apply to objects in your drawing. You can design your own styles and add them to the default template or to new ones you create.


Template, Load command (Styles Manager, Layout menu)

Use this dialog box to specify the style template you want to attach to a drawing.

If objects in your drawing use styles with names as those in the new template, CorelDRAW asks whether or not you want to apply the new styles to those objects.

 Related Topics


Template, Save As command (Styles Manager, Layout menu)

Use this dialog box to name a new styles template you have created or to update an existing one.

 Related Topics


Styles - Apply - More command (Layout menu)

Displays the Apply Style dialog box. This dialog box allows you to apply styles currently saved with the drawing to selected objects. An object must be selected before opening the Apply Style dialog box.

 Related Topics


Styles - Save Properties command (Layout menu)

Use this command to save specified attributes of the selected object as a style. If you do not change the name of the style when the Save Properties dialog box appears, the selected style is updated. If you do change the name of the style when the Save Properties dialog box appears, a new style is created with the specified name.

Note

CorelDRAW recognizes the type of object you selected (Graphic, Artistic text, or Paragraph text) and makes the appropriate attribute options available.


Style - Revert to Style command (View menu)
Style - Revert to Style command (Layout menu)

Restores the object to the previous style.

 Related Topics


Grid Setup command (Layout menu)

A grid is a series of evenly spaced dots that appear on the screen. You can specify the spacing, frequency, and other options in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

When you save your drawing, the Grid settings are saved with it.

If you change the grid spacing, objects in your drawing retain their position even if they do not line up with the new grid line positions.

When you change Grid Frequency units, the values in the dialog box are not converted. Each time you change units, you must specify the frequency you want to use with that unit.

 Related Topics


Guidelines Setup command (Layout menu)

Guidelines are non-printing characters that are used to align objects. The Guidelines Setup dialog box allows you to choose between Horizontal, Vertical, and Slanted guidelines. It also lets you move and delete existing ones.

You can add, move, and delete guidelines by dragging them with the mouse.

With Snap To Guidelines, enabled, an object drawn or moved close to a guideline snaps to it.

You can add as many guidelines as you need.

 Related Topics


Snap To Grid command (Layout menu)

Toggles Snap To Grid on and off. Working with the grid on makes it easy to align and position objects accurately. It also allows you to draw precisely sized objects. The grid is non-printing.

When Snap To Grid is on, the cursor is forced to stay on the grid points, except when you are:

Selecting an object with the Pick or Shape tools, or with the Copy Attributes From mouse pointer;

Drawing in Freehand or Bezier mode;

Rotating/skewing an object with the Pick tool;

Modifying ellipses with the Shape tool;

Zooming in with the Zoom tool.

When moving objects with Snap To Grid on, the handles on the object's highlighting box are forced to the grid points.

Text snaps to the grid along its baseline when moved vertically. When moved horizontally, the text snaps according to the Justification option assigned with the Character or Edit Text commands. For example, with Right Justification selected, text snaps to the grid along the right edge of its highlighting box.

When moving rotated text, the handles on its highlighting box snap to the grid.

The Constrain feature always overrides the grid.

The Grid Setup command allows you to display the grid and to set the spacing of the grid points.

Snap To Objects and Snap To Guidelines have priority over Snap To Grid. When all three are on, an object being moved will snap to a snap point on a stationary object no matter how close that point is to a guideline or grid point.

Turning Snap To Grid on will not affect the position of objects already on the screen.

 Related Topics


Snap to Guidelines command (Layout menu)

Toggles Snap To Guidelines on and off. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the drawing window. With Snap To Guidelines on, an object drawn or moved close to a guideline snaps to it. Guidelines are useful for aligning objects with precision.

The position of objects already on the screen does not change when you turn Snap To Guidelines on.

Snap To Objects has priority over Snap To Guidelines and Snap To Grid. When all three are on, the object being moved will snap to a snap point, indicated by small blue square, on a stationary object no matter how close that point is to a guideline or grid point. With Snap To Objects off, Snap To Guidelines has priority.

You can position guidelines by dragging them from the rulers, or by using the Guidelines Setup command.

 Related Topics


Snap to Objects command (Layout menu)

Toggles Snap To Objects on and off. With Snap To Objects on, you can align any part of a moving object to a snap point on a stationary object. The location of the snap points varies with the type of object. Click the [image] button next to the object type for information about the location of its snap points.

Rectangles

Ellipses

Lines and curves

Text

Bitmaps

Extrusions and blends

Linked and embedded objects

If the location used to select the moving object is within the snap range of one of its own snap points, the moving object will align with the stationary object on that point, not the actual point of selection.

Snap To Objects has priority over Snap To Grid and Snap To Guidelines. If all three are on, an object being moved will snap to a snap point on a stationary object no matter how close that point is to a guideline or grid point.

Turning Snap To Objects on will not affect the position of objects already on the screen.

 Related Topics


Snap to All command (Layout menu)

Turns Snap to Grid, Snap to Guidelines, and Snap to objects commands on.

 Related Topics


Snap to None command (Layout menu)

Turns all snapping commands off.

 Related Topics


Rectangles

Simple rectangles and those with rounded corners have nine snap points.


Ellipses

Closed ellipses have five snap points: one at each end of the major and minor axes, and one in the center.

Open ellipses can have as many as seven snap points: one at the ends of the major and minor axes, one in the center, and one at each termination point of the arc.

If the outline of the open ellipse does not pass through the end of a particular axis, then no snap point will exist there.


Lines and curves

Lines and curves drawn with the Pencil tool have snap points at the endpoints and at each node in between.


Text

Artistic text has nine snap points, including one in the center.

Paragraph text has snap points at each corner of its frame.


Bitmaps

Bitmaps have snap points at each corner and in the center. Rotated bitmaps have two additional snap points.


Extrusions and blends

The extruded object and the two original objects in a blend have the same snap points they had before they were extruded or blended.

Each extruded surface and intermediate shape in a blend has a snap point at its center and at the nodes along its outline.


Linked and embedded objects

Snap points for linked and embedded objects occur at each corner of the object, in the center of its highlighting box, and at either end of the slash used to represent the object in wireframe view.


Lens Roll-Up command (Effects menu)

The Lens Roll-Up contains eleven lenses which you apply to objects in your drawing. Applying a lens to an object causes the object to display through the lens. For example, adding the Magnify lens to an object and specifying a Magnify factor of two causes the object to be magnified by a factor of two. You can only apply a lens to objects with closed paths.

The object you use as the lens cannot be a grouped object. However, you can apply a lens to a group of objects. When a lens is applied to a group of objects, it is applied to each object individually.

Applying a lens to objects on different layers has no effect on the layers.

Note

 When you apply a lens to an object filled with a non-uniform color (for example, a fountain fill), the lens assumes the color displayed in the Color box in the Lens Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


Complimentary Color

The color opposite to a specified color on a color wheel.


Object Data Roll-up command (Tools menu)
Object Data command (Tools menu)

Displays a roll-up for attaching information to the selected object or group of objects. Once attached, you can use the roll-up to view and edit the selected object's information. To view/edit information for a grouped object, click on it while holding down CTRL. Then, if it isn't already open, choose the Object Data Roll-up command to open the Object Data Roll-Up window.

The roll-up will appear empty when no objects or multiple ungrouped objects are selected.

You can resize the roll-up window by dragging its border.

 Related Topics


Object Data Manager

Use the Object Data Manager to manage large amounts of data for multiple-selected objects and groups.

Click the area of the Object Data Manager you want to learn more about.

 Related Topics


Title bar (Object Data Manager)

The bar along the top of a window or dialog box that displays its name. You can move a window or dialog box by dragging its title bar.


Maximize button (Object Data Manager)

When clicked, enlarges a window so that it fills the entire screen.


Minimize button (Object Data Manager)

When clicked, reduces the window to its smallest size so that it appears only on the task bar.


Close button (Object Data Manager)

When clicked, closes the window.


File menu (Object Data Manager)

Contains commands for setting up the datasheet, for printing, and for exiting the Object Data Manager.

Click any command below to learn more about it.


Page Setup command (Object Data Manager)

Opens a dialog box with options for controlling how the datasheet appears when printed. For example, you can have the datasheet print with or without grid lines between cells. You can also center the datasheet on the page and include page numbers and the name of the drawing.


Print command (Object Data Manager)

Opens a dialog box where you can specify how you want the datasheet to print. For example, you can choose to print selected cells only, compress the datasheet to fit the paper it’s printing on, and specify the number of copies to print.


Print Setup command (Object Data Manager)

Opens a dialog box where you can select the printer and printer options you want to use to print the datasheet.


Close Data Manager
Close Data Manager command (Object Data Manager)

Select this command to close the Object Data Manager and return to the Object Data Roll-Up. You can also use the Close button or press ALT + F4.


Edit menu (Object Data Manager)

Contains commands for cutting, copying, and pasting cell information and undoing changes to your datasheet.

Click any command below to learn more about it.


Undo command (Object Data Manager)

Reverses the last series of changes to your datasheet. Immediately after selecting Undo, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you just undid.

The Undo Levels setting in the Options dialog box determines how many consecutive actions you can undo and redo.


Redo command (Object Data Manager)

Restores changes reversed by the Undo command. Redo becomes available immediately after you select the Undo command.


Cut command (Object Data Manager)

Use this command to remove information from selected cells and place it on the Clipboard.

The information you cut replaces information previously placed on the Clipboard.


Copy command (Object Data Manager)

Use this command to copy information in selected cells and place it on the Clipboard.

The information you copy replaces information previously placed on the Clipboard.


Paste command (Object Data Manager)

Use this command to insert the contents of the Clipboard into the selected cell or the Data Entry bar.

If the contents include a range of cells, the data will be pasted into cells down and to the right of the selected cell.


Delete command (Object Data Manager)

Deletes information in the selected cell or range of cells.


Field Options menu (Object Data Manager)

Contains commands for formatting and adding data in your datasheet.

Click any command below to learn more about it.


Change Format command (Object Data Manager)

Opens a dialog box which lets you change the format of data in the selected column. CorelDRAW provides several built-in formats that determine the way information is displayed in the cell. They include a variety of number formats for expressing currency values, linear measurements, and percentages, as well as a selection of date and time formats. You can also create your own formats.


Summarize Groups command (Object Data Manager)

Selecting this command when the datasheet contains data for multiple groups of objects will show subtotals for each group. The command becomes available when you select a column by clicking its Field name.


Show Hierarchy command (Object Data Manager)

Select this command to indent data for individual objects in a group from the group's data. The command is dimmed until you select a column. The command becomes available when you select a column by clicking its Field name.


Show Totals command (Object Data Manager)

Select this command to add numbers in the selected column. The command becomes available when you select a column by clicking its Field name.


Field Editor command (Object Data Manager)

Opens a dialog box for creating and deleting columns and changing the format of the data that appears in them.


Preferences menu (Object Data Manager)

Contains commands for formatting selected cells.

Click any command below to learn more about it.


Show Group Details command (Object Data Manager)

If you have grouped objects selected, you can use this command to display data only for the group or for the specified number of groups in the case of nested groups.


Highlight Top-level Objects command (Object Data Manager)

Bolds data assigned to the selected group so you can distinguish it from the data for objects in the group.


Italicize Read-only Cells command (Object Data Manager)

Select this command to italicize data in non-editable cells. A total is an example of a non-editable cell.


Data bar (Object Data Manager)

The Data bar is used to enter or edit data in datasheet cells. The Data bar also displays the name and the number of the Field the selected cell is in.

To enter data, select a cell, type the data, and press ENTER. The data appears in the formula bar as you type.

To edit data in a selected cell, click the Data bar with the mouse. Then type your changes and press ENTER.

To cancel your changes, press ESC.


Datasheet (Object Data Manager)

A datasheet is a type of document used to store, organize, and manipulate data. It consists of columns (called fields) and rows. Each field contains a different category of data. Each row is associated with an object or group of objects.

The area at the intersection of a column and a row (called a cell) is where data is stored. You fill in a datasheet by entering text and numbers in the cells.


Object Data Field Editor
Object Data Field Editor (Object Data Manager)

Lets you create and delete fields and change the format of the data that appears in them.


Format Definition dialog box
 Format Definition dialog box (Object Data Manager)

This dialog box determines how data is displayed in the selected cell. You can use one with the formats provided or create your own.


PowerClip - Place Inside Container command (Effects menu)

Places the selected object inside another object. The cursor changes to an arrow allowing you to select the container object. This command is only available if you have an object selected.

 Related Topics


PowerClip - Extract Contents command (Effects menu)

Removes the contents object from the selected container object. The objects remain in the same position, but the contents object can be selected and moved. This command is available only if you have a PowerClip object selected.

 Related Topics


PowerClip - Edit Contents command (Effects menu)

Allows you to edit the object inside (contents object) of the selected PowerClip object. When this command is clicked, the contents object can be selected and edited. This command is available only if a PowerClip object is selected.

While editing the contents of a PowerClip, the container object appears, for reference purposes only, as a transparent object with a blue outline.

 Related Topics


PowerClip - Finish Editing This Level command (Effects menu)

Finishes the editing and locks the contents object back to the container object

 Related Topics


Add Perspective command (Effects menu)

Puts a bounding box with handles at each corner around the selected object(s). Dragging the handles allows you to create one and two-point perspective views of the object.

If the object already has a perspective bounding box, choosing Add Perspective will apply a new box on top of the existing one without changing the object's perspective. This allows you to experiment with the positioning of the handles without permanently altering the object. To reverse changes made with the most recently applied bounding box, click Effects, Clear Perspective.

When you apply this command to a text object, it remains as text. This means you can edit it and change its text attributes. You cannot, however, change the attributes of individual characters.

Once you have added perspective to a curve object, you cannot select its nodes without clearing the perspective or converting the object to curves again.

Depending on the way you move the handles, you will see as many as two vanishing points (represented by X's) on the screen. Dragging these also lets you change the object's perspective.

 Related Topics


PoweLine Roll-Up command (Effects menu)
PowerLine command (Effects menu)

Draws a line that varies in thickness along its length. CorelDRAW supplies a large selection of preset PowerLines that look like they were created with traditional artists' tools like paintbrushes, calligraphic pens, and wood-etching tools. Controls in the roll-up let you design your own PowerLines and add them to the selection of presets.

In addition to drawing them with the Pencil tool, you can also use PowerLines to outline existing objects.

PowerLines are closed paths that have fill and outline attributes.

You can manipulate PowerLines with the Shape tool and the Node Edit Roll-up. The roll-up displays additional controls for adjusting the width and shape of your PowerLines.

 Related Topics


Preset Roll-Up command (Tools menu)
Presets command (Tools menu)

The Presets Roll-Up allows you to add preset effects like drop shadows and unique fountain fills to a selected object. It also lets you record operations you apply to objects, such as moving, stretching, filling, etc. Use the controls in the roll-up to change the selected preset or to create your own.

 Related Topics


Create - Arrow command (Tools menu)

Lets you create your own arrowheads and line-ending shapes.

Those you create are added to the selection in the Outline Pen dialog box and the Pen Roll-Up. CorelDRAW limits the number of arrowheads to 100. If you already have this many and want to create new ones, you must delete some of the existing ones first.

When you draw the arrowhead, do not be concerned with how large or small it will look when it’s applied to a line. You can adjust the size later using the Arrowhead Editor.

If the arrowhead consists of more than one object, combine the objects by clicking Arrange, Combine before creating the arrowhead.

To create an outlined arrowhead instead of a filled one, use the Shape tool to break the object at a node. If you have drawn an angled object (rectangle, triangle, etc.), convert it to curves by clicking Arrange, Convert to Curves. Next, use commands in the Node Edit menu to add a node between the corners, then break the shape at that node.

The arrowhead assumes the same outline color and thickness as the line it is applied to.

 Related Topics


 Create - Pattern command (Tools menu)

Lets you create your own two-color bitmap and vector fills. Patterns you create are added to those accessed through the pattern fill icons in the Fill tool flyout (see Related Topics).

You can create patterns from graphics drawn with CorelDRAW, or imported from other sources, such as a scanner or a paint program. When you fill an object with the pattern, the pattern becomes a tile that repeats in all directions inside the object.

Patterns created from color bitmaps are converted to a dithered black and white image. If the bitmap contained a lot of detail, much of it will be lost in the conversion.

 Related Topics


Create - Symbol command (Tools menu)

Adds the selected object to the specified Symbol Category. When you choose the command, the Create Symbol dialog box appears.

The object you use must have a closed path, and if it contains multiple objects, all objects must be combined by clicking Arrange, Combine. It can be any size; CorelDRAW scales it to match the proportions of other symbols in the set. You must be using TrueType fonts to create symbols. To enable them, double-click the Fonts icon in the Windows Control Panel.

 Related Topics


Extract command (Tools menu)

Saves text objects in the current drawing as ASCII text which you can edit in a word processor. After editing the text, use the Merge Back command to insert it into your drawing.

The revised text will appear just as the original text did, provided you did not change the attributes of individual characters or apply any of the following features: Extrude, Blend, Contour, PowerLines, and Fit Text to Path

Do not change the drawing after extracting text from it. If you make any changes, you cannot merge the text later.

You can only merge the edited text with the drawing from which it was extracted.

Use Windows WordPad or a word processor that saves in ASCII format to create the merge text file.

 Related Topics


Merge Back command (Tools menu)

Inserts text from the selected ASCII file into the current drawing. The ASCII file contains text extracted from the drawing using the Extract command and revised in a word processor.

You can only merge the edited text with the drawing from which it was extracted.

If you made any changes to the drawing following Extract, the Merge Back operation will fail.

The revised text will appear just as the original text did, provided you did not change the attributes of individual characters or apply any of the following features: Extrude, Blend, Contour, PowerLines, and Fit Text to Path.

 Related Topics


Options command (Tools menu)

Opens the Options dialog box, which controls settings which affect how CorelDRAW displays objects on the screen and how it performs certain operations. Think of this dialog box as a filing cabinet. Its contents are separated into the following files: General, Display, and Advanced. Access these sections by clicking the appropriate tab.

General

Controls placement of Duplicates and Clones, Nudge, Constrain Angle, Miter Limit, Levels of Undo, PowerClip objects and which screen is displayed on start-up.

Display

Controls panning, refresh, snap location marks, controlling preview color display, the minimum extrude facet size, and the appearance of the color palette.

Advanced

Options include setting backup options, choosing the function to be listed first on the right mouse button popup menu, setting the gamut alarm color, and enabling multitasking.

 Related Topics


Multimedia Manager command (Tools menu)

Opens Corel Multimedia Manager 6.0. This program is designed to help you organize, manage, and manipulate files. You can create albums and sub-albums to group your files any way you want. Graphics files are displayed as thumbnail images, so that you can easily identify the contents. You can assign keywords to individual items and to whole albums to help you search for a particular file in your collection.

Files can be moved and copied between albums using both Cut and Paste or Drag and Drop methods. You can also use these methods to insert files into other applications for editing. The program has two mini-editors as well, one for bitmap images and one for vector drawings. There is also a slideshow viewer to allow you to view your graphics files at full screen size.


Symbols command (Tools menu)

Clicking Tools, Symbols opens a roll-up for quick access to symbols from the Symbol Library. The symbol libraries are a collection of pre-drawn graphic symbols relating to business, transportation, sports, and many other subjects.

For quick access to the Symbols Roll-Up, click the Symbols button on the CorelDRAW toolbar (shown below).

 Related Topics


Customize command (Tools menu)

Displays the Customize dialog box. This dialog box lets you customize CorelDRAW's appearance, and the way it reacts to your commands. These settings include: allows you to customize the keyboard, menus, toolbars, roll-ups, and color palette.


Roll-Up Groups command (Tools menu)

Allows you to customize all of the roll-ups in CorelDRAW. A flyout menu is displayed with six commands:

Roll-Up Customization displays the Roll-Ups section of the Customize dialog box

Dimensioning opens the Angular Dimensions Roll-Up

Attributes opens the Pen Roll-Up

Transform opens the Transform Roll-Up

Effects opens the PowerLine Roll-Up, and

Shaping opens the Trim Roll-Up.


View Manager command (Tools menu)

Displays the View Manager, which allows you to name different areas of your drawing, then quickly access them by double-clicking. This feature is useful when completing a complicated drawing.


Color Manager command (Tools menu)

Opens Corel's Color Manager. The Color Manager maps the color gamuts of all the devices (scanners, monitors, and printers) used by your desktop PC to produce consistent color output across those devices. Device profiles are the building blocks used in the system profile: you calibrate your equipment to create device profiles, and the Color Manager uses these device profiles to derive the system profile.

Click tools, Color Manger, Color Wizard to display a wizard which guides you through the Color Manager so that you can choose or create device profiles for scanners, monitors, and printers. The wizard uses these device profiles to build the system profile.

 Related Topics


Save Settings command (Tools menu)

This command changes the default settings for new CorelDRAW documents. CorelDRAW bases these settings on the current document.

The new default document uses the following settings from the current document:

styles

page setup (including size, orientation, color, and borders)

view settings (including Wireframe/Editable Preview mode, rulers, bitmaps)

rulers, grid, and guidelines (including world distance settings)

levels of undo

nudge and duplicate settings

display fountain fill steps

extrude facet size

certain text settings (Greek Text Below, frame formatting, non-printing character display)

print range

Proofreading and Type Assist settings

 Related Topics


Contains icons that let you control your workspace. For example, you can turn the display of the Toolbox, Ruler, or Color Palette on and off, or you can open the Zoom and Roll-up Toolbars.


Turns the display of the of the Toolbox on and off.


Turns the horizontal and vertical rulers along the edges of the drawing window on and off. The rulers are useful for determining the size and position of objects.


Turns the display of the Color Palette on and off.


Turns the display of the Status Bar on and off.


Turns the display of the roll-ups on and off.


Turns the display of the Standard Toolbar on and off. This toolbar contains icons you can click to quickly carry out common operations such as saving, printing, importing, exporting, etc.


Turns the display of the Text Toolbar on and off. This toolbar gives you quick access to text attributes and formatting options.


Opens the Zoom Toolbar. This toolbar contains icons you can click to control how you view your drawings.


Opens the Roll-Ups Toolbar. This toolbar contains icons you can click to open any CorelDRAW roll-up.


Transform Roll-Up (Arrange menu)
Transform command (Arrange menu)

The Transform Roll-Up changes the placement, size, scale, angle of rotation, and degree of skew of a selected object.

The Transform Roll-Up displays the Horizontal and Vertical coordinates for a selected object. Use the fields to reset or copy an object's placement on the page. The Transform Roll-Up also allows you to reset size, scale, rotation angle, and degree of skew on a selected object around a placement point.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Transform - Position command (Arrange menu)

Displays the Transform, Position Roll-Up which allows you to change a selected object's placement.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Transform - Size command (Arrange menu)

Displays the Transform, Size Roll-Up which allows you to change a selected object's size.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


 Transform - Scale & Mirror command (Arrange menu)

Displays the Transform, Scale and Mirror Roll-Up which allows you to change the scaling of a selected object. Objects are scaled from the selected anchor point in the position field. Values below 100 shrink them; values above 100 enlarge them.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Transform - Rotate command (Arrange menu)

Displays the Transform, Rotate Roll-Up which allows you to rotate selected object(s). By default, an object rotates around a point in the middle of its highlighting box, called the center of rotation. You can rotate the object around a different point by dragging the center of rotation to another location using the mouse. Use the coordinating field in the Transform Roll-Up for precise control over the point of rotation.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Transform - Skew command (Arrange menu)

Displays the Transform, Skew Roll-Up which allows you to skew selected object(s). Use the Transform Roll-Up for skewing instead of the mouse when you want precise control over the amount of skew.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Clear Transformations command (Arrange menu)

Reverses the following transformations and effects, allowing you to restore an object to its original size and orientation:

resets all rotation and skew transformations to zero.

removes all envelope and perspective effects.

returns the center of rotation to the object's center.

resets to 100% any scaling or stretching.

When applied to a group of objects, only transformations made to the group are cleared. Those made to objects before they were grouped are not cleared.

Note

The Clear Transformations command does not clear the following operations: Move, Size, Scale, or Mirror.

 Related Topics


Wireframe command (View Menu)

Toggles between editable preview and wireframe view. Editing a drawing in wireframe view is faster because only the object outlines need to be refreshed. In wireframe view, you must click on an object's outline unless you've have changed the selection method.

 Related Topics


Full-Screen Preview command (View Menu)

Removes everything from the screen except your drawing. Preview shows exactly how your drawing will appear when printed on all printers except PostScript printers. When printing to these devices, you won't be able to preview any PostScript texture fills and halftone screen effects in the drawing.

You cannot edit in Preview mode.

To cancel Preview, press the SPACEBAR.

You can program the right mouse button to switch between editable preview and Preview.

Click View, Preview Selected Only if you only want to preview portions of your drawing.

The Paper Color option in the Page Setup dialog box allows you to color the preview screen to match the background of your drawing, or the color of paper it will be printed on.

 Related Topics


Preview Selected Only command (View menu)

Turns previewing of selected objects on and off.

When turned on, only the currently selected object appears. Useful for reducing redrawing times when working with complex drawings, and for identifying superimposed objects.

When turned off, all objects currently in view in the drawing window are redrawn.

 Related Topics


ToolBars command
ToolBars command (View Menu)

Displays the Toolbars dialog box, which allows you to specify which toolbars are displayed, their size, and more.


Status Bar command
Status Bar command (View Menu)

Turns the display of the Status Bar on and off.


Rulers command (View menu)

Turns the horizontal and vertical rulers along the edges of the drawing window on and off. The rulers are useful for determining the size and position of objects.

A dashed line in each of the rulers follows your current cursor position.

The number of increments (or tick marks) on the ruler is determined by the current view. For more accurate rulers, use the Zoom tool to magnify the view. The more you zoom in, the more accurate the rulers become.

The Grid Frequency units determine the ruler's unit of measurement.

The Grid Origin determines the location of the zero points on the rulers.

When the rulers are on, you have access to the ruler crosshairs and the guidelines.

Holding down SHIFT and double-clicking on a ruler moves it away from the edge of the editing window. With SHIFT down, you can drag to reposition the ruler or double-click to return it to its usual location.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - None (View Menu)

Hides the color palette. No palette is visible on the CorelDRAW desktop.


Color Palette - Custom Colors (View Menu)

Displays the colors in the current user palette. You can create new custom palettes and save them to create a library of palettes.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - Uniform Colors (View Menu)

Uses the uniform color palette.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - FOCOLTONE Colors (View menu)

Displays the FOCOLTONE color palette. FOCOLTONE is color system which provides a range of spot colors built with process colors, cyan, magenta, yellow and black (CMYK). The FOCOLTONE colors are organized so that you can choose FOCOLTONE colors with at least 10% of one process color in common with another FOCOLTONE color. This minimizes the need for a trap and makes it an ideal color palette to use for color separating.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - PANTONE Spot Colors (View menu)

Displays the PANTONE Spot color palette. This palette is comprised of an assortment of hundreds of predefined, pre-mixed colors. As spot colors are opaque, overlaying spot colors produces unpredictable results and is generally best avoided.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - PANTONE Process Colors (View menu)

Displays the PANTONE Process color palette. This palette is comprised of the primary colors used in four-color process printing: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Process colors are largely transparent and, consequently, make mixing colors both possible and predictable.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette: TRUMATCH Colors (View menu)
Color Palette - TRUMATCH Colors (View menu)

Displays the TRUMATCH color palette. TRUMATCH is a color matching system for specifying process colors and is designed specifically for digital output. TRUMATCH colors are organized according to the principles of the HSB (Hue, Saturation, Brightness) model.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - Dupont Colors (View Menu)

Displays the Dupont color palette which consists of colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster® solid color library. Colors are based on the L*a*b* color space and are shown as RGB or CMYK for display (depending on the image or drawing) and CMYK for printing.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - Toyo Colors (View Menu)

Displays the Toyo color palette which consists of colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the L*a*b* color space and are shown as RGB or CMYK for display (depending on the image or drawing) and CMYK for printing.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Color Palette - DIC Colors (View Menu)

Diplays the DIC color palette which consists of colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space.

You can change the order of the colors on the palette from either the Uniform Fill or Outline Color dialog box.

Depending on settings chosen in the Options, Display dialog box, some of the colors on the palette may display as pure color or dithered color. These settings are available depending on your computer's video card and have no effect on the printed output. See also True Color.

 Related Topics


Bitmaps - High Resolution command (View menu)
Bitmaps - High Resolution (View menu)

Displays bitmaps at High Resolution. Bitmaps displayed at high resolution decrease screen redraw speed. Changing bitmap resolution using the Bitmaps - High Resolution command only affects the way bitmaps are displayed on screen; it does not affect the way they display in the print preview or how they are printed.


Bitmaps - Visible command (View menu)

Turns the display of bitmaps in the workspace on and off. Using this command increases the screen redraw speed when working in wireframe view.

When turned off, only the bitmap's bounding box appears.

Bitmaps are always displayed when a drawing is previewed.

 Related Topics


Color Correction - None (View Menu)

Improves or optimizes the linearity of your monitor so that on-screen images appear to be as similar as possible to a white-balanced photograph. None provides no color correction.

 Related Topics


Color Correction - Fast (View Menu)

Improves or optimizes the linearity of your monitor so that images appear as similar on-screen as possible to a white-balanced photograph. Fast provides a general color approximation.

 Related Topics


Color Correction: Accurate (View menu)
Color Correction - Accurate (View Menu)

Improves or optimizes the linearity of your monitor so that on-screen images appear to be as similar as possible to a white-balanced photograph. Accurate provides the best possible screen colors.

 Related Topics


Color Correction: Simulate Printer (View menu)
Color Correction - Simulate Printer (View Menu)

Optimizes the linearity of your monitor so that on-screen images appear to be as similar as possible to a white-balanced photograph. Simulate Printer displays screen colors as they would appear when printed.

 Related Topics


Color Correction: Gamut Alarm (View menu)
Color Correction - Gamut Alarm (View Menu)

Shows colors that are not available in the printer’s space. Colors that are out-of-gamut display as a solid color (default is black).

 Related Topics


Properties - Object command (View menu)

Opens the Object properties dialog box. An object must be selected or the command is grayed out on the View menu. The type of object selected determines which dialog box is displayed. For example, if you have selected a rectangle the Object Properties dialog box for rectangles is displayed. Object Properties dialog boxes allow you to change the attributes of the selected object.


Properties - Tool command (View menu)

Opens the Tool Properties dialog box. You can change the attributes and behavior of all of CorelDRAW's tools.


Properties - Style command (View menu)

Opens the Style Properties dialog box. An object or text must be selected or the command is grayed out on the View menu. The type of object selected determines which dialog box is displayed. For example, if you have selected a rectangle, the Default Graphic Style Properties dialog box is displayed. Style Properties dialog boxes allow you to change the object's style.


New Window command (Window menu)

Opens a new window with the same contents as the active drawing window.

 Related Topics


Cascade command (Window menu)

Arranges open drawing windows in layers so that you can see each title bar. You can activate a drawing window by clicking its title bar. CorelDRAW arranges minimized windows at the bottom of the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


Tile Horizontally command (Window menu)

Arranges open drawing windows horizontally in equal sizes to fit in the CorelDRAW window. CorelDRAW arranges minimized drawing windows at the bottom of the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


Tile Vertically command (Window menu)

Arranges open drawing windows vertically in equal sizes to fit in the CorelDRAW window. CorelDRAW arranges minimized drawing windows at the bottom of the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


Arrange Icons command (Window menu)

Arranges minimized drawing windows in the bottom-left corner of the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


Open drawing windows (Window menu)

Opens and activates a drawing window. The open drawing windows are listed in the order in which they were opened.

 Related Topics


Refresh Window command (Window menu)

Redraws objects on the screen. You can use this command to clear the screen of "dirt" left over from earlier manipulations or to resume drawing after a display interrupt.

 Related Topics


Starts a new drawing.


Opens the Open Drawing dialog box.


Saves the active drawing.


Prints the active drawing.


Cuts the selected object(s) and places them on the Windows clipboard.


Copies the selected object(s) and places them on the Windows clipboard.


Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard into your drawing.


Opens the Import dialog box for importing text or objects.


Opens the Export dialog box for exporting text or objects to another format.


Displays a full-screen preview of the drawing, with none of the CorelDRAW interface showing.


Shows only the wireframe outline of objects. Click it again to show the objects' fills.


Enables objects to snap to the Guidelines. Click it again to disable object snapping to the Guidelines.


Groups selected objects, or ungroups a group of objects.


Opens the Align & Distribute Roll-Up, which allows you to align and distribute objects on the screen.


Converts the selected objects to curves.


Places the selected object in front of all other objects on its layer.


Places the selected object behind all other objects on its layer.


Opens the Transform Roll-Up, which allows you to move objects to a specified location.


Opens the Symbols Roll-Up, used for dragging symbols into the drawing.


Opens a menu you can use to start the following Corel programs:

PHOTO-PAINT

PRESENTS

DREAM 3D

MOTION 3D

OCR-TRACE

DEPTH

CAPTURE


Enables the help pointer [image]. Click on any menu or window item with the help pointer to access context-sensitive help.


Opens CorelDRAW’s Tutor Notes. Tutor Notes appear in a Help window and provide an easy way of accessing a limited grouping of online Help “How To” topics.


On-screen color palette used for choosing outline and fill colors. You can display the color palette anywhere in the CorelDRAW window.

To specify a fill color, click it with the left mouse button.

To specify an outline color, click it with the right mouse button.

Clicking the arrows at the ends of the palette with the left mouse button scrolls the colors one at a time.

Clicking the arrows with the right mouse button scrolls a screen-width of colors.

Clicking the [image] arrow with the left mouse button enlarges the color palette.

Clicking the No Fill [image] button at the left end of the palette removes the object's fill if you click with the left mouse button, or outline if you click with the right button.


Drawing Window. You can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, but if your Working page size is the same as the size of the page you're printing on, only portions of the drawing on the Printable page will appear when you print your drawing.

By default, objects display with their fill and outline attributes. You can display them in outline form only for faster screen drawing by clicking View, Wireframe.


Maximize Window button. Clicking on the Maximize button expands the window to fill the entire screen.


CorelDRAW menu bar. This horizontal bar found near the top of the CorelDRAW window contains the names of the available pull-down menus. Choose the menu you want by clicking on it, or by pressing the ALT key plus the underlined character in the menu name.


Minimize Window button. Clicking on this button reduces the window to its smallest size so that it only appears on the task bar.

In this state, the application stays in memory but its window does not take up space on your screen.

To restore the window, click on its name in the task bar.


Closes CorelDRAW. If you have unsaved work in the current drawing, CorelDRAW asks if you want to save your changes before closing.


Page Controls. These controls show which page in a multi-page drawing is currently displayed and the total number of pages in the drawing. To go to a particular page, click the [image] and [image] buttons or click Layout, Go To Page.

Clicking [image] and [image] with the right mouse button moves five pages (or 10 in facing pages view) at a time. Clicking with the left mouse button while holding down the CTRL key, takes you to the first or last page.


Preview Screen. This view option uses the entire screen to display your drawing. You can switch to the Preview screen by clicking View, Full-Screen Preview or by pressing F9. Press SPACEBAR to return to the drawing window.

Notes

You cannot edit your drawing in the Preview screen.

You can preview certain objects only by clicking View, Preview Selected Only.


Printable page or drawing page, shown as a rectangular drop shadow in the drawing window. This area represents that area of your drawing that will fit on the printed page. If your drawing extends beyond the printable page borders, it will not appear on the printed page in its entirety.

To enable and disable the display of the Drawing Page, click Layout, Page Setup, then enable or disable Show Page Border.

For proofing drawings that extend beyond the Drawing Page, use the Fit to Page or Scale option in the Print Options dialog box.


CorelDRAW Toolbar. The toolbar contains icons you can click to quickly carry out common operations such as saving, printing, importing, exporting, and so on. You can also have CorelDRAW display Tooltips by enabling the Show Tooltips button in the Options dialog box.


Horizontal and Vertical Rulers. Rulers can help you when you size and position objects in a drawing. You can also pull guidelines onto the screen by dragging vertically or horizontally from the rulers. Dragging diagonally from the spot where the rulers meet, brings out a set of crosshairs. You can use these crosshairs to move the 0,0 point on the rulers or to align objects in the drawing

Holding down the Shift key and double-clicking on a ruler moves it away from the edge of the drawing window. With the Shift key down, you can drag to reposition the ruler or double-click to return it to its usual location.

Clicking View, Rulers enables and disables the rulers.

The rulers use the unit of measure specified for Grid Frequency while the 0,0 points are determined by the Grid Origin. You can change both of these in the dialog box displayed by clicking Layout, Grid Setup.

You can also move the 0,0 points using the ruler crosshairs.


Scroll bar.

You’ll find scroll bars along the bottom and right sides of the screen. You use scroll bars to view portions of a drawing outside the current viewing area.

Click on	to

An arrow	move the current view 10% in selected direction

An elevator	move the view by one window length or width

On a thumb and drag	move the view an arbitrary amount in any direction

CorelDRAW provides an Auto-panning feature that scrolls the view automatically when you drag beyond the edges of the drawing area. You can turn this feature on and off using the Auto Panning option in the Options dialog box.


A selected CorelDRAW object with selection handles around it.


The status bar provides information about a selected object or about an action you are performing. It also displays the location of the mouse pointer relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.


The title bar displays the names of the program and active file. If it is not maximized, you can move the window by dragging the title bar. The icons found at the right end of the title bar can be used to reduce the window to its smallest size so that it appears only on the task bar, maximize the CorelDRAW window to full screen size, or close the window.


Gives you quick access to the tools and flyouts used to create, edit, and view objects.

By dragging the toolbox, you can move it to another location. You can also make the toolbox a floating window by dragging it onto the drawing window.


Window borders appear around windows that aren’t maximized. Dragging the border lets you make the window smaller or larger.

Tips

Drag the top, bottom, or side border to size the window in one direction only.

Drag the corner of the border to size the window vertically and horizontally.


Horizontal and Vertical Rulers [image] Rulers can help you when you size and position objects in a drawing. You can also pull guidelines onto the screen by dragging vertically or horizontally from the rulers. Dragging diagonally from the spot where the rulers meet, brings out a set of crosshairs. You can use these crosshairs to move the 0,0 point on the rulers or to align objects in the drawing.

Scroll bar [image] You’ll find scroll bars along the bottom and right sides of the screen. You use scroll bars to view portions of a drawing outside the current viewing area.


The area (printable page) of the physical page that your printer can use to print.


The borders of the printable page.


Align and Distribute Roll-Up

This roll-up allows you to align selected objects horizontally and vertically.  It offers controls to select which edge of the objects, or the center point of each one, is to be used in the alignment process.  You may also use this roll-up to distribute selected objects horizontally and vertically, to the extent of the page or to the extent of the space occupied by the current selection.  The distribution options allow you to use the space between objects,  a specific edge or center of the objects to distribute them.

 Related Topics


Aligns the left edge of the selected objects vertically.


Aligns the center of the selected objects vertically.


Aligns the right edge of the selected objects vertically.


Aligns the top edge of the selected objects horizontally.


Aligns the center of the selected objects horizontally.


Aligns the bottom edge of the selected objects horizontally.


Distributes the selected objects horizontally.


Distributes the selected objects vertically.


Snaps the selected object(s)  to the grid.


Allows you to specify whether objects align to the center of the page, the edge of the page, or the edge of the area defined by the selection.


Allows you to specify whether objects are distributed over the page or over the area defined by the selection.


Extends this Roll-Up, allowing you to customize the spacing between distributed objects.


Customizes the horizontal distribution of objects to use the objects’ right or left edges, their centers, or the space between the objects to apply the distribution.


Customizes the vertical distribution of objects to use the objects’ top or bottom edges, their centers, or the space between the objects to apply the distribution.


Applies the chosen align and distribute options.


Applies the chosen align and distribute options.


Blend Roll-Up - overview
Blend Roll-Up

Fuses one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes. Controls in the Blend Roll-up let you specify the number of intermediate shapes created and the range of colors blended. You can also fit objects you've blended to a path.

The intermediate shapes are dynamically linked. This means you can edit either of the blended objects and the blend will reform automatically to incorporate your changes.

When blending objects with unequal numbers of subpaths, some or all the intermediate shapes may be drawn as open paths rather than closed ones. In such cases, the intermediate shapes may not print, or may print as outlined shapes rather than filled ones.

You cannot blend objects on different layers.

Fills blend according to the following rules:

Object fill	Intermediate Shapes

No fill in one object	No fill

Uniform fill with fountain	Blend from uniform fill to fountain

Uniform fill with pattern	Uniform fill

Radial fountains to Linear fountain	Radial fountain

Conical fountains to Linear fountain	Conical fountain

Conical fountains to Radial fountain	Fountain in start object

Custom fountains in both objects	Blends To and From colors in start object

Same fountain type in both objects	Fountain

Pattern in one object only	Other object's fill

Pattern in both objects	Start object's pattern

Bitmap texture in one object only	Other object's fill

Same bitmap texture style in both objects	Blends textures

Different bitmap texture styles	Start object's texture

Spot color with Process color	Process color

Two different Spot colors	Process color


Hides the roll-up’s controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


Displays a list of all roll-ups on the Effects menu. Click one of the names on the list to display the selected roll-up's options.


Lets you type the number of intermediate shapes you want in the blend.

When you blend objects along a path, this number box is also used to specify the spacing between the intermediate shapes. Choose Spacing from the list box above and type the amount of space in the number box.


Lets you specify whether you want to fill the space between the start and end objects based on the number of intermediate objects or by the distance between them. This list box contains the following options:

Steps	Lets you fill the blend based on the number of intermediate objects you want.
Spacing	Lets you fill the blend based on the distance between the intermediate objects as you set it.


Rotates the intermediate blend objects counterclockwise. Specifying negative values reverses the direction of the rotation.


Enable the check box to rotate a blend’s intermediate objects around a point halfway between the start and end objects' centers of rotation. When the check box is disabled, objects rotate around their own centers of rotation.


Available only for objects blended on a path. Enabling the check box and clicking Apply places the start and end objects at either ends of the path. If the path is closed, the end object is placed an appropriate distance from the common start/end node of the path.


Rotates the objects in a blend group that has been blended on a path.


Click to have the shapes that make up the blend distributed on the frames that make up your Corel PRESENTS animation sequence.


Displays a color wheel and options for choosing how colors are blended. The default option blends using colors intersected by a straight line on the color wheel. The colors at either end of the line correspond to the colors of the start and end objects.


Blends object colors by moving through the rainbow in a straight line from the start object’s color to that of the end object.


Blends object colors by moving through rainbow clockwise from the start object’s color to that of the end object.


Blends object colors by moving through the rainbow counterclockwise from start object’s color to that of the end object.


Displays a special mouse pointer for specifying which node on the start and end objects you want CorelDRAW to treat as the objects' first nodes. Mapping nodes gives you more control over the appearance of the intermediate blend objects because you direct the way the start object blends into the end object.

Note

You can use Map Nodes on an existing blend group or before blending.


Displays a special pointer that lets you split a blend at an intermediate object. The object you select becomes the control object [image] that is, the start or end object [image] for the resulting blends.


Recombines split blends. Hold down CTRL and click the blend group you want to fuse. If the start object can be fused, the Fuse Start button becomes available. If the start object is shared by three or more blend groups, a special pointer appears. Click an intermediate object that's at least one object removed from the start object with which you want to fuse.


Recombines split blends. Hold down CTRL and click on the blend group you want to fuse. If the end object can be fused, the Fuse End button becomes available. If the end object is shared by three or more blend groups, a special pointer appears. Click an intermediate object that's at least one object removed from the emd object with which you want to fuse.


Displays the Start Object menu. The menu contains the following commands:

New Start	Displays a special mouse pointer for selecting a new start object.
Show Start	Selects the start object in the selected blend group.


Displays the End Object menu. The menu contains the following commands:

New End	Displays a special mouse pointer for selecting a new end object.
Show End	Selects the end object in the selected blend group.


Displays the Blend Path menu. The menu contains the following commands:

New Path	Displays a special mouse pointer for selecting a new blend path.
Show Path	Selects the path in the current blend group.
Detach From Path	Separates the blend and path in the current blend group. You can then edit the path and reattach the blend using the New Path command.


Applies the specified options to objects you want to blend or to an existing blend group.


Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up - overview
Bitmap Color Mask Roll-Up

This roll-up allows you to choose specific colors you want to hide or show in a bitmap you imported in your drawing.  When you eliminate a color, you let objects show through from behind the bitmap, thereby changing the bitmap’s appearance. Eliminating a color can also alter the bitmap’s shape. For example, if you have a bitmap with red text on a black background, you can use the Bitmap Color Mask to eliminate the background. As a result, the bitmap takes on the shape of the text only.

You can select the colors using the color palette or directly from the bitmap itself using the Color Selector  in the roll-up.  You can adjust the tolerance for each color selected. When the tolerance is increased, a broader range of colors are be masked. For example, if you mask baby blue and increase the tolerance, powder blue and navy blue are also masked.

Bitmap Color Masks can be saved for future use by usiing the commands listed in the roll-up menu. Click the arrow button in the roll-up to see the menu.

 Related Topics


Lists commands for opening an existing mask, saving  the active one and editing the color in the Select Color dialog.


Click to select a color from the bitmap displayed on the working  page.


Specifies whether the colors are to be shown or hidden with the current mask.


Area in which you  choose colors and enable them in the current mask by applying a checkmark. You can choose to disable some chosen colors to experiment with the current mask.  To change a color, click the color preview with the right mouse button and choose edit Color.  To adjust the tolerance, click a color preview with the left mouse button and move the tolerance slider. The color tolerance set for each color is displayed in the column on the right.


Adjusts the color tolerance for each color.  Choose a value between 0 to 100% for each color in the mask. Increased tolerance masks a broader range of the selected color.


Removes the active mask from the bitmap.


Applies the chosen mask to the selected bitmap.


Displays available callout line styles.


Displays text placement options.


Creates curve callout lines when enabled.


Displays a preview of the selected options.


Revert to Master dialog box

Allows you to choose master object attributes that you want the selected clone object to revert to.  Attributes available are: fill, outline, path shape and transformations.

 Related Topics


Applies the master object’s fill to the selected clone.


Applies the master object’s outline to the selected clone.


Applies the master object’s path to the selected clone object.


Applies the master object’s transformations (rotation, skew, scale, size) to the selected clone object.


Closes the dialog box and applied the checked master object attributes to the selected clone.


Closes the dialog box without changing any of the clone’s attributes.


Contour Roll-Up - overview
Contour Roll-Up

Creates a series of concentric shapes radiating in or out from the selected object.  Available controls enable you to set an offset for the new shapes, select the color or range of color to apply to them and precisely set the number of shapes you want created.

You cannot apply Contours to grouped objects, bitmaps or linked and embedded objects.

 Related Topics


Creates proportionate shapes inside the object that get progressively smaller until they reach its center. Use the Offset control to specify the spacing between the shapes.


Creates proportionate shapes inside the object that get progressively smaller as they approach its center. You can specify the number of shapes created with the Steps control and the spacing between them with the Offset control.


Creates proportionate shapes outside the object that get progressively larger as they move away from it. You can specify the number of shapes created with the Steps control and the spacing between them with the Offset control.


Use this box to specify the distance you want between the intermediate shapes. The units used are those specified in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Use this box to specify the number of shapes you want created. With Inside selected, the Offset value takes precedence over the Steps value. If the Offset value is set too high, for example, CorelDRAW may reach the middle of the object before it can create the number of steps specified.


Lets you choose the colors in a contour object using a color wheel. The colors at either end of the arc correspond to the colors of the start and end objects. You can use the three Direction buttons to blend in a straight line, clockwise, or counterclockwise between the ends of the arc.


Blends contoured object’s colors by moving through the rainbow in a straight line from the original object’s fill color to that that specified with the Fill button at the bottom of the Color Wheel page.


Blends contoured object’s colors by moving through rainbow clockwise from the original object’s fill color to that specified with the Fill button at the bottom of the Color Wheel page.


Blends contoured object’s colors by moving through the rainbow counterclockwise from the original object’s fill color to that specified with the Fill button at the bottom of the Color Wheel page.


Lets you select the outline color to which the original object’s outline color will fade once you apply a contour to it. The object must have a uniform color outline and/or fill; otherwise, your selections will have no effect.

You can use Outline tool to change the attributes of the original object after it's been contoured. The Contour command updates your changes automatically.

Note

If you select an object containing a fountain fill, a second fill color selector appears in the Roll-Up, allowing you to contour from one fountain fill to another.


Lets you select the fill color to which the original object’s fill color will fade once you apply a contour to it. The object must have a uniform color outline and/or fill; otherwise, your selections have no effect.

You can use Fill tool to change the attributes of the original object after it's been contoured. The Contour command updates your changes automatically.

Note

If you select an object containing a fountain fill, a second fill color selector appears in the Roll-Up, allowing you to contour from one fountain fill to another.


Click  choose the start color  for the fountain fill to be applied to the last contour object. The intermediate contour objects will be filled with fountain fills made from intermediate colors between the original object’s and the last contour object’s fill colors.  Click More to access the Select Color dialog box.


Click to choose the end color of the fountain fill to be applied to the last contour object. In the palette, click More to access the Select Color dialog box.


ALL TOPICS MATCHED TO .H FILES.


Delete Page dialog box - overview
Delete Page dialog box

Deletes pages inserted with the Insert Page command and the objects on them.

 Related Topics


Determines the first page in the range of pages to delete. Enter the page number of the first page.


Determines the last page in the range of pages to delete. Enter the page number of the last page.


If you want to delete a single page disable Thru Page or enter the same numbers in the Delete Page and Through Page boxes. If you want to delete a series of pages, enable Through Page and type the last page you want to delete in Through Page.


Closes the dialog box and deletes the pages.


Closes the dialog box and does not delete any pages.


SOME TOPICS MATCHED WITH .H; SEVERAL Ids MISSING IN .H FILE. SOME ALIASES (TEXT CONTROLS FOR LINEAR AND ANGULAR DIM. LINES)


Dimension Roll-Up - overview
Dimension Roll-Up

Controls the appearance of text relating to a dimension line. It lets you to specify how units and text are displayed.

Dimension lines are commonly used in technical illustrations to show the size of objects or the distance between them. CorelDRAW’s allows you to create horizontal, vertical, slanted and angular dimension lines. You add them to your drawing using the icons in the Dimension tool flyout menu. You can use them to measure the distance between grouped, combined, or multiple-selected objects (the Status Line doesn't provide measurements for these types of objects).

Dimension lines can be drawn without links to the objects they measure, but are most useful when linked to objects. For example, when a dimension line is linked to an object and the object is stretched or scaled, the dimension line and dimension text are updated to reflect the object's new dimensions.

You can edit a dimension line by:

changing the color of the line or text

changing the placement of the text

changing the point size and typeface of the text

Snap points are visible when Snap to Objects (Layout menu) is enabled; they are represented by small squares that appear when you move the mouse pointer close over their location.

 Related Topics


Displays the two types of dimensions: angular and linear. Linear refers to horizontal vertical and slanted dimension lines. These refer to the tabs in the roll-up. Click the type of dimension to access the options.


Lists available styles for the dimension text:  decimal, fractional, U.S. Engineering, and U.S. Architectural. U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural units refer to the standard U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural units.


Lists available units for the decimal and fractional styles. This option is grayed out for U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural.


Click to show the units beside the dimension text. This option is grayed out for U.S. Engineering and U.S. Architectural.


Applies the options chosen in the Roll-Up to selected dimension text.


Lists available decimal places.


Click to set the style and units of the dimension text. Samples of the selected style appear in the Sample field.


Click to specify dimension text placement, prefixes, and suffixes.


Enter a prefix to be attached to the dimension text here. When you enter a prefix, you must press Enter or click Apply for it to appear in the Sample box, or for it to be applied to selected dimension text.


Enter a suffix to be attached to the dimension text here. When you enter a suffix, you must press Enter or click Apply for it to appear in the Sample box, or for it to be applied to selected dimension text.


Click one of the placement icons to specify where you want the dimension text placed relative to the dimension line. From left to right, the options are inline, above, or below.


Click this icon to keep the dimension text horizontal, even if the dimension line is angular or vertical. If you don't choose this option, the dimension text is placed at the same angle as the dimension line.


Click this icon to center the dimension text on the dimension line. If you choose this option, the text is centered on the dimension line, provided you drag inside the extension lines when establishing the placement of the dimension text. If you drag outside the extension lines when establishing the dimension text placement, the text will not be centered, even if you choose this option. If you don't choose this option, the dimension text is placed where you last click when drawing the dimension line.


The Dimension tool offers two additional tools that are not affected by the controls of this roll-up: the callout tool and the connector tool.

Callouts are used to point to components in a drawing and describe that component with a text string. A callout is a dynamic feature:  the text is linked to the line, which is linked to a snap point on the control object. If the snap point is moved, the callout moves with it.

Connector lines join two objects together by attaching themselves to one node per object.  With Snap to Objects enabled (Layout menu), the connector line will be updated if you move or modify one or both of the objects so that they remain joined by the connector line.  The Properties, Tool command (View menu) allows you to control which nodes are joined when drawing connector lines.


Envelope Roll-Up - overview
Envelope Roll-Up

Use this roll-up to apply envelopes to objects and edit them. An envelope allows you to distort the shape of an object by manipulating the bounding box that contains the object. You can apply envelopes to any object except bitmaps. Applying envelopes to Paragraph text lets you reshape the frame to flow text around or inside objects; the characters themselves are not distorted.

Text reshaped with an envelope remains as text. This means you can edit it and change its attributes. You can’t change attributes of individual characters.

Once you apply an envelope to a curve object, you must clear the envelope or convert the object to curves to select and manipulate one of its nodes.

 Related Topics


Adds a rectangular envelope with eight handles. Dragging the handles reshapes the envelope in the manner set using the Editing Mode buttons. When you click the Apply button, CorelDRAW reshapes the contents of the envelope to conform to the shape of the envelope.

You can add new envelopes on top of existing ones without changing the object's shape. With Paragraph text, however, the new envelope replaces the current one.


Displays a selection of pre-shaped envelopes. Click the one you want, then apply it to the selected object. You can also edit the preset before applying it. When applied to Paragraph text, CorelDRAW stretches the preset envelopes proportionally to fit the text frame. For other types of objects, preset envelopes are stretched non-proportionally.


Displays a special pointer that lets you create an envelope based on the shape of the object you select. The object must be a single curve object. You cannot create an envelope using curve objects that were formed by combining multiple objects with the Combine command.


Straight Line editing mode. Using this mode, you can drag an envelope handle horizontally or vertically to change the envelope’s shape but maintain its straight lines.

Holding down CTRL and/or SHIFT while moving handles in this mode produces the following effects:

CTRL	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the same direction
SHIFT	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the opposite direction
CTRL+SHIFT	moves all four corners or sides in opposite directions


Single Arc editing mode. Using this editing mode, you can drag an envelope handle horizontally or vertically to add a single-arc curve to the shape of the envelope.

Holding down CTRL and/or SHIFT while moving handles in this mode produces the following effects:

CTRL	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the same direction
SHIFT	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the opposite direction
CTRL+SHIFT	moves all four corners or sides in opposite directions.


Two Curve editing mode. Using this editing mode, you can drag an envelope handle horizontally or vertically to add a double-curve to the shape of the envelope.

Holding down CTRL and/or SHIFT while moving handles in this mode produces the following effects:

CTRL	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the same direction
SHIFT	moves the handle opposite the one you are dragging in the opposite direction
CTRL+SHIFT	moves all four corners or sides in opposite directions.


Unconstrained editing mode. Using this mode, you can drag an envelope handle in any direction to make the envelope any shape you want. In this mode, handles move freely and have control points. You can use these control points to make precise adjustments to the shape of the envelope. You can also marquee select multiple handles with the and move them as a unit.


Determines the mapping mode [image] that is, how CorelDRAW fits the object to the envelope.

Horizontal	Stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, then compresses it horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope.
Original	Maps the corners of object's bounding box to the corner handles on the envelope. CorelDRAW maps the other handles linearly along the edge of the object’s bounding box, also taking into consideration the location of the control points.
Putty	Maps the corners of object's bounding box to the corner handles on the envelope only; the location of the other handles is ignored. This tends to produce less exaggerated distortions than Original mode.
Vertical	Stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope then compresses it vertically to fit the shape of the envelope.


Enable the check box to keep CorelDRAW from converting straight lines to curves for the current object.


Reverses any changes to the envelope since it was last applied. If you added a new envelope without applying it, clicking Reset Envelope removes it.


Applies the envelope, editing mode, and mapping options to the selected object.


Hides the roll-up’s controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


SOME TOPICS IN THE RTF DO NOT EXIST IN .H; UNSURE IF THE CONTROLS STILL EXIST IN DRAW; COULD BE LAST YEAR’S CONTROLS THAT HAVE BEEN TAKEN OUT.


Extrude Roll-Up - overview
Extrude Roll-Up

The Extrude Roll-Up is used to apply a three-dimensional look to a selected object by adding surfaces to it. The surfaces are in fact new objects. Extruding an object creates an extrude group which includes the original object and the extruded surfaces; this allows you to manipulate the object and its extrusion as a single entity.

The roll-up offers several controls organized on five pages.  Click a tab to see a specific page and change the values.  The controls allow you to change the direction, position of the vanishing point, depth, placement in 3D space, color of the extrusion and apply up to three light sources to the extrude group.  For  quick results, a collection of preset extrusion attributes is available in the roll up.

To increase the speed of the display and printing of extrusions, use the Minimum extrude facet size control in the Options - Display dialog box (Tools menu).


Displays the selected object's vanishing point for interactive positioning.


Presents two options [image] Save As and Delete Preset(s).

Clicking Save As opens a dialog box that lets you save the current extrusion as a preset for future use. The dialog box allows you to give the preset a name and attach descriptive notes to it. You can also edit original CorelDRAW default presets to suit your needs.

Clicking Delete opens the Delete Preset dialog box. This dialog box provides controls that let you remove any of the presets in the preset list.


Confirms the extrude options you specified and applies them to the selected object.


Opens the Extrude Presets menu. This menu contains the following commands:

New	Opens a dialog box that lets you save a new presets file.

Open	Opens a dialog box that lets you open an existing presets file.

Save As	Opens a dialog box that lets you save a presets file under a new name.

Merge With	Opens a dialog box that lets you combine the current presets file with another.


Displays a sample preview of the currently selected preset.


Lets you choose a preset from the current presets file.


Displays the Camera Page. This page contains controls that let you specify the kind of extrusion, the vanishing point, and how far you want to extend extruded surfaces.


Displays a sample preview of a rectangle extruded using the currently selected camera type.


Lets you specify the type of extrusion you want. With perspective extrusions, the extruded surfaces can be made to approach, or recede from, the vanishing point. With parallel extrusions, the lines of the extruded surfaces are drawn parallel to one another. Front and Back refer to the placement of the extruded surfaces with respect to the object.

You can choose from the following extrusion types:

Small Front

Small Back

Big Front

Big Back

Parallel Front

Parallel Back


Lets you set the attributes of the vanishing point. Using this list box, you can choose to lock the vanishing point to the object or page, copy the vanishing point from another extrusion, or share the another extrusion’s vanishing point.


Lets you specify how far a perspective extrusion recedes from or approaches the vanishing point. As you increase the depth, a front extrusion moves away from the vanishing point, while a back extrusion moves towards the vanishing point. The value you set must be between 1 and 99.


Click this button to display controls that let you position the vanishing point precisely. Click the button again to return to this page.


Click this button to display controls that let you choose extrude styles, vanishing point options and set the depth. Click the button again to return to this page.


Use this box to specify the horizontal (X) coordinate of the current object’s vanishing point. The number you type here depends on the button you enable below the Measured From label. If you enable Page Origin, the X value corresponds to the vanishing point’s position with respect to the 0 point on the horizontal ruler. If you enable Object Center, the X value corresponds to the vanishing point’s horizontal position relative to the middle of the extruded object’s highlighting box.

The units of measurement displayed for the X and Y coordinates reflect the settings in the Grid & Ruler Settings dialog box.


Use this box to specify the vertical (Y) coordinate of the current object’s vanishing point. The number you type here depends on the button you enable below the Measured From label. If you enable Page Origin, the Y value corresponds to the vanishing point’s position with respect to the 0 point on the vertical ruler. If you enable Object Center, the Y value corresponds to the vanishing point’s vertical position relative to the middle of the extruded object’s highlighting box.

The units of measurement displayed for the X and Y coordinates reflect the settings in the Grid & Ruler Settings dialog box.


Enable this button to position the vanishing point relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Enable this button to position the vanishing point relative to the middle of the extruded object’s highlighting box.


Displays controls for rotating the extruded object in three-dimensional space.


Page-flipper button. Click this button to gain access to controls that let you rotate an extruded object based on precise angle measurements. Click this button again to return to this page.


Click this button to cancel the rotation and return the object to its previously applied position.


Tool for rotating selected object. Click and drag the sample image to rotate it. As you rotate the image, the Corel logo rotates to reflect the current orientation. When you click Apply, the selected object rotates to mirror the three-dimensional rotation you performed on the sample image.


Use this list box to specify a horizontal rotation angle. As you change the angle, a wireframe representing the selected object rotates to reflect the current orientation.


Use this list box to specify a vertical rotation angle. As you change the angle, a wireframe representing the selected object rotates to reflect the current orientation.


Use this list box to specify a clockwise rotation angle. As you change the angle, a wireframe representing the selected object rotates to reflect the current orientation.


Light Source Direction tab. Click this tab to display controls for applying up to three light sources to an extrusion. By adding a light source to an extruded object, you simulate the effect of light shining on it. The effect you create changes its appearance. This page provides three different light sources as well as tools for adjusting their intensity and direction.


Light switch 1. When you click this button, you turn on light source 1. The light source appears in the display box as a circle containing the number 1. You can drag the light source to any spot within the display box. By clicking apply, you direct a light toward the extruded object (represented by the sphere in the display box) from the selected location. Click the light switch again to turn the light source off.


Light switch 2. When you click this button, you turn on light source 2. The light source appears in the display box as a circle containing the number 2. You can drag the light source to any spot within the display box. By clicking apply, you direct a light toward the extruded object (represented by the sphere in the display box) from the selected location. Click the light switch again to turn the light source off.


Light switch 3. When you click this button, you turn on light source 3. The light source appears in the display box as a circle containing the number 3. You can drag the light source to any spot within the display box. By clicking apply, you direct a light toward the extruded object (represented by the sphere in the display box) from the selected location. Click the light switch again to turn the light source off.


Interactive display box that lets you position your light sources around the extruded object. In this box, the sphere represents the extruded object. When you turn on a light source, it appears here as a numbered circle. You can move a light source by dragging it to another spot in the display box. When you click apply, you’ll notice that the extruded object’s appearance indicates the location of the light sources as you arranged them using this control.


Slider control for setting the amount of light emanating from the current light source. As the intensity setting approaches 100, the extruded object’s surfaces appear lighter.

You can also type the value you want in the text box provided.

Note

The current light source appears in the display box as a black circle containing a number.


Enable this check box to ensure best results when you add light sources to an extruded object. Full color range combines light and dark shades (brightness and saturation) precisely, creating a more realistic extrusion. If you disable this check box, CorelDRAW uses a more basic shading process.


Displays controls for coloring the extruded surfaces.


Enable this button to apply the current fill of the control object to all of its extruded surfaces. Use this option for uniform fills, fountain fills, two-color and full-color patterns, textures, and bitmaps.


Enable this option to apply a different color to the extruded surfaces of the control object. You can then specify the color you want using the color button. CorelDRAW applies the color you choose to the extruded surfaces only. The control object remains unchanged.


Enable this option to blend two colors along the length of the extruded surfaces. the result is similar to that of a linear fountain fill. The From button that appears when you enable this option lets you define the color that appears adjacent to the control object on the extruded surfaces. Use the To button that appears to define the color to which the extruded surfaces fade.


Enable this option (available only when you enable the Use Object Fill option) if you want to fill the entire extrusion with a pattern, texture, or bitmap. When this check box is disabled, CorelDRAW applies a copy of the texture, pattern, or bitmap to each of the extruded surfaces.


Use this button (available only when you enable the Solid Fill option) to choose the extrusion’s fill color. Click the button to open a color palette, then click the color you want.


Use this button (available only when you enable the Shade fill option) to choose the shade color from which you want the extruded surfaces to fade.


Use this button (available only when you enable the Shade fill option) to choose the shade color to which you want the extruded surfaces to fade.


Go To Page dialog box

The Go To Page dialog box allows you to enter the number of the page you want to display.


Determines the page to go to. Enter a the number of the page in the Go to page  box.


Closes the dialog boxes and goes to the page entered in the Go to page box.


Closes the dialog box and does not move from the current page.


ALL TOPICS MATCHED TO .H EXCEPT OVERVIEW.


Insert Page dialog box - overview
Insert Page dialog box

Adds blank pages to the current drawing. A page counter displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen shows the total number of pages and the number of the currently displayed page. Buttons next to the page counter let you move through the pages.

Note

When you use the page icons to move through the pages, the Insert Page dialog box will open when you reach the first or last page.

 Related Topics


Enter the number of pages you want to add. The maximum number of pages per file is 999.


Inserts the specified number of page(s) before the currently displayed, or specified page.


Inserts the specified number of page(s) after the currently displayed, or specified page.


Type the page number of the page you want to precede or follow the new page(s) to be inserted, if it is different from the one currently displayed.


Closes the dialog box and inserts the pages at the location you specified.


Closes the dialog box and does not insert any new page.


ONE OVERVIEW TOPIC NOT MATCHED  TO .H


Layers Manager Roll-Up - overview
Layers Manager roll-up

Helps you organize your drawing by assigning objects to different layers. Each drawing consists of a guides, grid, and desktop layer as well as an initial drawing layer with the default name Layer 1. You can create any number of additional layers. Controls in the Layers Manager let you create, delete, and color layers, as well as hide, lock, and print selected layers.

You can also use the Layers Manager to:

change the active layer

move objects to a different layer

move a layer and its objects in front of or behind other layers

make a layer a Master Layer so that objects on it appear on all pages in a multi-page document.

 Related Topics


Displays the names and basic attributes of the layers in the current drawing. Double-clicking a layer makes it the active layer. Any new objects you add to a drawing are assigned to the active layer.

Each new drawing contains the following layers:

Layer 1	The initial drawing layer assigned to all new files. If you begin adding objects to a new drawing, CorelDRAW automatically places them on this layer.

Guides	Contain any guidelines you set up in your drawings. Guidelines stay in their own layer, but objects on other layers snap to them.

Grid	Contains the grid you set in your drawing. Grid points stay on their own layer but objects on other layers snap to them.

Desktop	Used when you work with multi-page documents. Any object moved off the printable page is automatically placed on the Desktop layer and displayed on each page in the document. To add the object to a page, you can drag it on to the printable page. CorelDRAW adds the object to the nearest unlocked and visible layer.


Opens the Layers flyout menu. This menu provides the following commands.

Switch To Layer	Lets you change the active layer.

New	Creates a new layer. The layer appears in the Layers Manager roll-up with a default name (for example, Layer 1, Layer 2, and so on). Once you’ve created a layer, you can type a new name and new layer attributes.

Delete	Removes the selected layer and its contents.

Rename	Lets you change the name for the current layer.

Settings	Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can assign a new name to an existing layer and change its attributes.

Move To	Moves the selected object to the layer you select from the Layers Manager.

Copy To	Places a copy of the selected object to the layer you select from the Layers Manager.

Edit Across Layers	Lets you select objects from all layers except those that are locked or invisible.

What’s This?	Allows you to click a control (for example, the Layer Color button) and view help on how to use it.


 Lets you make objects on a layer visible or invisible. Making some layers invisible lets you isolate a part of your drawing for easier editing. Click the icon to make its corresponding layer visible or invisible. When a layer is invisible, its eye icon appears grayed out.


 Lets you enable and disable printing of a layer. Click a printer icon to enable or disable printing of the layer that corresponds to it. Printing only selected layers lets you check and verify parts of your drawing more quickly. When printing is disabled for a layer, its printer icon appears grayed out.


 Enables or disables selection and editing of objects on a layer. Locking a layer prevents accidental movement or changes to its contents. You cannot add new objects to a locked layer. Click a layer’s pencil icon to lock or unlock it. When a layer is locked, its pencil icon appears grayed out.


Lets you have objects on the current layer appear on all pages in a multi-page drawing. Click this icon for a layer to make it a master layer. When a layer is not a master layer, its Master Layer icon appears grayed out. You can have as many Master Layers as you want in your drawing.

Note

Options you specify in the Page Setup dialog box when a master layer is active apply to every page.


 Makes identifying a layer easy by creating wireframes of its objects in the color of your choice. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose a color. Objects on the selected layer will appear with a wireframe outline of the color you choose.

Notes

You must enable the Override Full Color View check box (found on the Layer Settings dialog box) to display the layer’s objects in colored wireframe.

Applying a layer color does not affect the absolute appearance of objects on that layer.


Layer Settings dialog box

Lets you edit the attributes for the current layer. You can use the controls here to edit the name and enable printing, visibility, and editing for the current layer. You can also use the check box provided to make the current layer a master layer.

This dialog box can also help you organize your drawings by color coding certain layers. You can choose a color using the Layer Color dialog box. Then, if you enable the Override full color view check box, CorelDRAW displays the layer’s objects in colored wireframe.

You can also use this dialog box to apply the layer settings to the entire document or the current page only.

Note

Assigning a layer color does not change the absolute appearance of the layer, only the on-screen appearance.

 Related Topics


Displays the name of the selected layer. If you want to change the name of the layer, type the new name in this box.


Lets you make objects on a layer visible or invisible. Making some layers invisible lets you isolate a part of your drawing for easier editing. Enable the check box to make the current layer visible. Disable the check box to make the current layer invisible.


Enables or disables printing of objects on the current layer. Printing only selected layers lets you proof parts of your drawing more quickly.


Enables or disables selection of objects on a layer. Locking a layer prevents accidental movement or changes to its contents. You cannot add new objects to a locked layer.


Enable this option to have objects on the current layer appear on all pages in a multi-page drawing. You can have as many Master Layers as you want in your document.

Note

Options you specify in the Page Setup dialog box when the master layer is active apply to every page.


 Makes identifying a layer easy by outlining its objects in the color of your choice. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose a color. Objects on the selected layer will appear with a wireframe outline of the color you choose.

Notes

You must enable the Override Full Color View check box to display the layer’s objects in colored wireframe.

Applying a layer color does not affect the absolute appearance of objects on that layer.


 Enables and disables the colored wireframe display for the current layer as selected using the Layer Color button. When this check box is enabled, the objects on the current layer are displayed in wireframe. Otherwise, the objects appear with their true fill and outline attributes.


Lets you apply the layer settings to the current page only. Disable this option to apply the current layer’s settings to every page in a multi-page document.


Appears when either the Grid or Guides layer is active. Clicking Setup opens the Grid & Ruler Setup or Guidelines Setup dialog box, respectively.


many topics here have context strings that don’t match the .h file; many Ids in the .h are not present here; will need to check this in the UI.


Lens Roll-Up

CorelDRAW’s Lens Roll-Up provides eleven lenses that you can apply to objects in a drawing. By applying a lens to an object, you change its appearance as well as that of any objects located behind it. For example, if you add a Magnify lens with a magnification factor of 2 to an object covering text, the text appears twice its original size.

You can also apply effects to any lenses you add. The Frozen effect, for example, creates a duplicate of the area covered by the lens. You can then move this duplicate anywhere in the drawing window. In addition, you can use the Viewpoint option to create a reference to another part of your drawing without having to move the lens over the referenced area.

The object you use as the lens cannot be a grouped object. You can however use a child object within a group as the lens object. Press CTRL while selecting the object in its group before applying a lens to it.

Applying a lens to objects on different layers has no effect on the layers.

You can choose from the following lenses:

Transparency

Causes the colors of the objects under the lens to mix with the lens object's color, creating the illusion that you've placed a piece of transparent film over the object. You enter a transparency rate from 1 to 100% for the lens object in the Transparency Rate box. As the value increases, so does the transparency rate of the lens object. At 100%, the lens fill disappears. The color you choose in the Color box overrides the fill color of the selected object which is to become the lens.

Magnify

Magnifies the objects under the lens by the factor you specify in the Amount box, creating the illusion that you've placed a magnifying glass over these objects. You can specify a magnification factor from 1 to 100.

Brighten

Adds brightness or darkness to objects underneath the lens.  This lens is based on the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) color model in which each component can have a maximum value of 255.  When all three components have a value 255, the resulting color is pure white.  RGB values of zero is pure black.

In the Rate box, you enter the percentage of each color (RGB) you want added to the underlying objects. The Brighten rate is between -100% and 100%.  Positive rate values add RGB value to the underlying colors; they brighten the objects.  Negative values subtract RGB value from the underlying colors; they darken the objects.  For example, you have an object filled with 50% black.  In the RGB color model, 50% black is made of 127 red, 127 green and 127 blue (50% of 255 for each value).  If you add a 50% brighten lens, half of the maximum value of 255 is added to the 50% black.  The total value for each component of the RGB  model is now 254 which is almost pure white; the objects underneath the lens are brightened.  Inversely, if you enter -50%, you subtract half of the maximum value from 50% black. You then have RGB values of zero which is pure black.

Invert

Inverts the colors under the lens to their complimentary colors based on the CMYK color wheel. For example, red becomes cyan, green becomes magenta, and yellow becomes blue.

Color Limit

Simulates the effect of a color filter on a camera. A Color Limit lens filters out all colors under the lens except black and the color  you specify in the Color box. For example, if you place a green lens over an object, the lens filters out all colors except green and black within the lens area. You control the strength of the filter by the value you specify in the Rate box. A rate of 100% would only allow green and black  to show through the lens. A lower setting would allow tints of the other colors to show through. A rate of 0% would remove the fill color from the lens and display the objects underneath it, unchanged.

Color Add

Mixes the colors of the lens and the objects beneath it. If you place a Color Add lens over an object filled with white, the lens retains its settings; however, the lens color is not displayed.

Tinted Grayscale

Objects under this lens appear as if they've had a tonal scale setting applied to them. Colors under the lens are mapped from the lens color to an equivalent tonal color of that lens. For example, a blue lens over a light-colored object creates light blue, while the same lens over a dark-colored object creates dark blue.

Heatmap

Maps colors to colors in a pre-defined Heatmap palette ( [image]), creating a heatmap of infrared look. Bright, or hot, colors are mapped to hot colors (yellow, orange), while dark, or cool, colors are mapped to cooler colors (blue, cyan, red and purple). The Palette Rotation value determines where the color mapping begins. For example, a value of 0 or 100% causes mapping to begin at the start of the palette (white), and move to the right (through cyan, blue, etc.). A value of 50% causes mapping to begin halfway through the palette (red) and move to the right and then back to the start of the palette.

Wireframe

Displays the lens object’s outline only and changes the fill and outline color of the objects under it to colors you specify in the Lens roll-up.

Custom Color Map

Maps colors to colors using a user-defined color range.  You choose the From and To colors and decide how the range is defined; directly between the two specified colors or starting with the From color and going through the colors of the rainbow, forward or backward, until it reaches the To color.  For example, choose a light color as the From color and a dark one as the To color to give the appearance of a negative photographic image.

Fish Eye

Magnifies and distorts the area within the lens.  The distortion is most apparent in the outlining area of the lens and becomes less obvious towards the center of the lens.  Acts like a photographic lens that has a curved protruding surface.

None

Removes the lens from the selected object.

Note

When you apply a lens to an object filled with a non-uniform color (for example, a fountain fill), the lens assumes the color displayed in the Color box in the Lens Roll-Up.


Applies the settings you make to the selected object(s).


Lists the eleven lenses available and the None option.  The controls displayed in the roll-up vary according to the selected type of lens.  The None option is used to remove a lens effect.


Enable this check box if you want to view and/or edit the current lens’s viewpoint. When you enable the check box, the Edit button appears.

A viewpoint acts as a reference point to another area of your drawing and is represented by an X. When you click the Edit button, you can drag the referenced area anywhere on the drawing window or use the list boxes provided to specify precise coordinates.


Click this button to display the x viewpoint marker and gain access to controls that let you set the precise horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) coordinates of the current viewpoint. When you finish editing the coordinates, click this button again to indicate that you’ve finished editing the viewpoint.

Tip

You can also drag the viewpoint to change its position.


This display box shows a sample preview of the lens currently selected in the list box below it. Where lenses have attribute adjustment controls, the preview changes to reflect the settings you make.  For some types of lenses, you can change the color of the fountain fill used in the underlying object preview by clicking the preview with the right mouse button and selecting a color in the palette.


Use this list box to specify the X coordinate of the current viewpoint. The X value represents the position of the viewpoint relative to the 0 point on the horizontal ruler. The units reflect the current settings in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Use this list box to specify the Y coordinate of the current viewpoint. The Y value represents the position of the viewpoint relative to the 0 point on the vertical ruler. The units reflect the current settings in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Creates a duplicate of the area to which you apply a lens and freezes this duplicate with the lens object itself. This allows you to move the lens object, and the duplicate, without affecting the original reference object(s) to which you applied the lens; you can move or modify the reference object as you see fit.  The duplicate and the lens are grouped.


Use this box to specify a transparency rate from 1 to 100% for the selected object. As you increase the value, the object becomes more transparent. At 100%, the lens fill disappears.


This is to be used if there is only one ID for the rate box. (Stephen D’S. to call me) to be used by the Transparency, Brighten, Color Limit, Color Add and Fish Eye lenses.  For information about each one of the lenses mentioned, click the Lens roll-up title bar with the right mouse button and choose Help.


Use this button to choose the basic color for the transparent lens. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose a color. The color you choose overrides the color of any object under the lens. You can increase or decrease the transparency rate of the object using the Rate box.


Use this box to specify the factor by which the current lens will magnify the objects under it. The maximum magnification factor is 100.


Use this box to specify the rate by which the current lens will brighten the colors of the objects under it. You can specify a Brighten rate between -100% and 100%. At 100%, the colors approach white. At 0%, the lens has no effect. At -100%, the colors approach black.


Use this box to specify the strength of the Color Limit lens. You can specify any value between 0 and 100%. The value you enter here controls the rate by which the lens filters out all colors under the lens except the one you specify in the Color box. For example, if you place a green lens over an object, the lens filters out all colors except green within the lens area. You control the strength of the filter by the value you specify in the Rate box. A rate of 100% would only allow green through. A lower setting would allow other colors to show through.


Use this button to choose the color of the Color Limit lens. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose a color. For example, if you choose green, the lens filters out all colors except green within the lens area. You control the strength of the filter by the value you specify in the Rate box.


Use this box to specify the rate by which the color of the Color Add lens mixes with colors under it.


Use this button to choose the color of the Color Add lens. If you place a Color Add lens over an object filled with white, the lens retains its settings; however, the lens color is not displayed.


Use this button to select the color of a Tinted Grayscale lens. Colors under the lens are mapped from the lens color to an equivalent tonal color of that lens. For example, a blue lens over a light colored object creates light blue, while the same lens over a dark colored object creates dark blue.


Use this box to rotate the palette to determine where color mapping begins. You can choose a value between 0 and 100%. A value of 0 or 100% causes mapping to begin at the start of the palette (white), and move to the right (through cyan, blue, etc.). A value of 50% causes mapping to begin halfway through the palette (red) and move to the right and then back to the start of the palette.


Use this list box to select the type of Custom Color Map lens you want. You can choose from Direct Palette, Reverse Rainbow, and Forward Rainbow.


Use this button to choose the color from which the lens changes as it approaches the color you choose using the To button. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want. The way the color changes depends on the Custom Color Map type you specify.


Use this button to choose the color to which the lens changes as it recedes from the color you choose using the From button. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want. The way the color changes depends on the Custom Color Map type you specify.


Click this button to switch the start and end colors.


Use this button to specify the outline color of the objects under a wireframe lens. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Use this button to specify the fill color of the object under a wireframe lens. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Use this box to specify the factor by which you want a Fish Eye lens to distort and magnify the objects under it. You can specify a factor between -1000 and 1000.


several topics not found in .h file. To verify against UI.


Object Data Roll-Up

Displays a roll-up window for attaching information to the selected object or group of objects. Once attached, you can use the roll-up to view and edit the selected object's information. To view/edit information for a grouped object, click it while holding down the Ctrl key. Then, if it isn't already open, choose the Data Roll-up command to open the Object Data Roll-up window.

The roll-up appears empty when no objects or multiple ungrouped objects are selected.

You can resize the roll-up window by dragging its border.

 Related Topics


Click to display the Object Data Manager where you can view and edit object data for an object or group of objects.


Displays object data for the currently selected object. To edit the contents of a field, choose it from this list and use the text box above it to change the value. You can also double-click a field to open the Object Data Field Editor dialog box.

Name, Cost and Comments are built-in fields available for all objects. You can delete or rename these fields or add new fields using the commands in the Object Data menu.


Use this text box to enter or edit data in a field. To enter or edit a field’s contents, select the field from the Field list, type or change the data, then press ENTER.

The length of your entry is limited to the width of your screen; the text scrolls horizontally as you type.

The data you enter appears with the appropriate format in the Value column. For example, numbers entered in the Cost field appear with a dollar sign. You can change the format of a field and create new ones through the Field Editor command in the Object Data menu.


Click this button to display the Object Data menu. This menu provides commands for manipulating the data associated with an object.


Displays a dialog box you can use to change the format of the data that appears in them.


Displays a dialog box you can use to create fields and change the format of the data that appears in them.


Deletes the contents of the selected field. Choosing this option also deletes the field unless it was added to all objects using the Object Data Field Editor.


Deletes the contents of all fields. Choosing this option also deletes all fields that were not added to all objects using the Object Data Field Edit.


Displays a special pointer that lets you choose an object and have its data copied to the selected object. The copied data is appended to any data already attached to the object.

When copied to a group, data attached to individual objects in the group remains unchanged.


Click this button to add a new field to the list box. CorelDRAW gives each new field a default name [image] for example, Field0, Field1, Field2 and so on. You can rename a field by selecting it and editing its name in the text box located at the top of this dialog box.

Drag the field names in the list up or down to rearrange their order. The new order will be reflected in the Object Data Roll-up and the Object Data Manager.


Adds fields highlighted in the Fields list to the selected object. To select multiple fields hold down SHIFT and click on the field names. To deselect a field, click its name while holding down CTRL.


Displays the field names for the current object. Select a field by clicking its name, then use the other controls in this dialog box to manipulate it as required.


Enable this check box if you want to add the selected fields to all objects (including those you add later) in the current drawing.

To assign this option to several fields at once, hold down CTRL and click on the field names. To deselect a field, click its name while holding down CTRL.


Enable this check box if you want to add the selected fields to the list of default fields for new drawings.

To assign this option to several fields at once, hold down CTRL, click on the field names, then click Add Selected Fields.


Adds the values for a selected field. This option is not available for fields with General formatting.

Totals for each selected group of objects will appear in the Object Data Manager.

To summarize multiple fields hold down CTRL, click on the field names, then click Add Selected Fields.


Removes selected fields from the current object.

To delete multiple fields hold down CTRL and click on the field names you want, then click Delete Field. To deselect a field, click its name while holding down CTRL.

If the field is assigned to more than one object in the current drawing, CorelDRAW will ask whether you want to delete the field from all objects.


Shows the selected field's current format type. Click the Change button to open a dialog box that lets you change existing formats and create new formats.

To change the format of multiple fields hold down SHIFT, click on the field names, then click Change.


Displays a sample of how data in the field will appear in the selected format.


Provides controls that let you select any of four file types. Enable the button that corresponds to the format type you want. Formats for that type will appear in the adjacent list box.

You can choose any of the following format types:

General	Use to display text, and/or numbers in the simplest possible format.
Date/Time	Use to display the date and/or time,
Linear	Use to display lengths in the imperial or metric system, or in picas and points.
Numeric	Use to display other numeric types, including currency.


Displays a list of formats that correspond to the format type you choose using the Format Type buttons. You can choose a format from this list by clicking it. When you choose a format, it appears in the Create box so you can edit it, if necessary. A sample of the format appears in the Sample area near the bottom of the dialog box.


Displays the format selected in the Format Type box. To add a custom format, edit the one displayed in the Create box or type a new one. The custom format is added to the end of the Format Type list. For information on interpreting format symbols and creating custom formats.


Displays a sample of the format selected in the Format Type box.


Removes the selected custom format displayed in the Format Type box. You cannot delete built-in formats.


These buttons let you choose what elements of your datasheet you want to print. Enable or disable the buttons as desired. The options are:

Print Grid Lines	Select to print grid lines between the cells. Clear to print cell contents only.
Print Row Header	Select to print row
Print Column	Select to print column


Use these boxes to specify the amount of space (and the unit of measurement) you want between the left and top edge of the paper and the printed datasheet.


Open Drawing dialog box - overview
Open Drawing dialog box

Loads a drawing or Styles Template into CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


Double-click the name from the list or type the name into the File Name box. If you're unsure of the name of the file you want to open, you can use wild cards (* and ?). For example, typing text*.cdr in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CDR files in the selected directory beginning with test. Typing test?.cdr in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CDR files in the selected directory that begin with test and are followed by one more character.


Choose the drive  where the file is stored.


Choose the folder where the file is stored.


Choose the type of file -- CDR, PAT or CDT -- to open. PAT files contain Full Color patterns used to fill objects. CDT files contain objects saved with the template when it was created.


Displays a bitmap representation of the selected file.


Toggles the display of the bitmap on and off.


Type single words, phrases, or combinations of both using commas to separate each keyword. CorelDRAW uses these keywords to find files stored on your system.


Type remarks with your files.


ALL TOPICS MATCHED TO .H.


Powerline Roll-Up - overview
PowerLine Roll-Up

Lets you draw a line that varies in thickness along its length. CorelDRAW supplies a large selection of preset PowerLines that look like they were created with traditional artists' tools like paintbrushes, calligraphic pens and wood etching tools. Controls in the PowerLine roll-up let you design your own PowerLines by changing the nib shape, intensity, and controlling the leakiness, spread and flow of ink. You can add your Powerlines to the selection of presets.

In addition to drawing them with the Freehand tool, you can also use PowerLines to "outline" existing objects.

PowerLines are closed paths therefore can have fill and outline attributes.

You can manipulate PowerLines with the Shape tool and the Node Edit roll-up. The roll-up displays additional controls for adjusting the width and shape of your PowerLines.

 Related Topics


Displays a dialog box you can use to save and delete custom PowerLine settings.


Applies the specified powerline and related options to the selected object.  If you checked the Apply when drawing lines option, the selected powerline is also applied to any object you create subsequently with the Freehand or Bezier drawing tools.


Displays a sample image of the preset currently selected in the list box below it.


Use this list box to select a preset PowerLine.


Use this box to specify how wide you want the line to be at its widest point.


Select this option if you want all lines created with the Freehand and Bezier tool drawn as PowerLines.


Click this button to set specific numeric values to define the angle, ratio, and intensity of the drawing nib. Click the button again to return to this screen.


Interactive display box that lets you change the shape and angle of the drawing nib. You can change the shape of the nib by dragging its edges up, down or sideways. Drag around its center to change the angle.


Use this box to specify the angle at which the nib meets the drawing page.


Use this box to specify the percentage of the nib that contacts the drawing surface.


Use this box to specify how much the width of the line varies along its entire length.


Use this slider to specify how much the width of the line varies along its entire length.


Increasing this value produces a corresponding increase in the width of the line at points where it changes direction. The sharper the change in direction, the more pronounced the effect.


The Ink Spread setting acts as a smoothness control. Move the slider to the right to increase the smoothness of the line.


Controls the amount of "ink" in the PowerLine pen. Increasing the value produces a line with more "coverage." Decreasing the value causes the line to "dry up" as it gets thinner.


Enable this option to maintain the proportions of the PowerLine when you scale it.


Delete Powerline Preset dialog box - overview

Allows you to remove a Powerline preset from the list.  Deleting a preset removes it permanently.  Only Powerline presets you created can be removed.  You cannot delete presets shipped with CorelDRAW.

 Related Topics


Options dialog box - overview
Options dialog box

Opens the Options dialog box, which controls settings that affect how CorelDRAW displays objects on the screen and how it performs certain operations. The dialog box is divided into pages called General, Display, and Advanced. You can display any page by clicking its tab.

General

Controls placement of Duplicates, Clones and Nudge, the Constrain Angle, and the Miter Limit. This page also lets you set the number of Undo Levels, the placement of PowerClip objects and which screen is displayed on start-up.

Display

Contains controls that let you set the preview color display as well as the refresh, palette, panning, snap location, and pop-up help options. You can also use this page to set the minimum extrude facet size.

Advanced

Options include setting backup, saving, and opening options, choosing the fucntion to be displayed at the top of the right Mouse Button popup menu, setting the gamut alarm color, and enabling multitasking

Note

You can also customize the behavior of tools by choosing the Properties command in the View menu and selecting Tool in the flyout.

 Related Topics


Closes the dialog box and saves the changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box and does not save the changes you have made.


Controls which page [image] General, Display, or Advanced [image] is displayed. Click the tab that corresponds to the options you want to see or change.


Controls the amount of horizontal offset from the original when objects are duplicated with the Duplicate command or cloned with the Clone command.

Positive values shift the duplicate to the right along a horizontal axis, while negative values shift it to the left.

To use a unit of measure other than the one displayed, choose it from the units list. You cannot change the unit of measure if you have set a drawing scale other than 1:1 using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. In this case, Place Duplicates and Clones uses the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Controls the amount of vertical offset from the original when objects are duplicated with the Duplicate command or cloned with the Clone command.

Positive values shift the duplicate up along a vertical axis, while negative values shift it down.

To use a unit of measure other than the one displayed, choose it from the units list. You cannot change the unit of measure if you have set a drawing scale other than 1:1 using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. In this case, Place Duplicates and Clones uses the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Controls how far a selected object moves when you press the direction keys on the numeric keypad.

To use a unit of measure other than the one displayed, choose it from the units list. You cannot change the unit of measure if you have set a drawing scale other than 1:1 using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. In this case, Place Duplicates and Clones uses the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

The maximum allowable value is two inches, or an equivalent amount in another unit of measure. The minimum value is zero.


Controls the angle of motion when you perform any of the following operations with CTRL held down:

skewing or rotating

drawing straight lines in Freehand mode

adjusting control points when drawing in Bezier mode


Displays Degrees as the units used to specify a constrain angle.


Affects the appearance of corner joints. Any corner that is less than the Miter Limit will have a beveled point.

Corner joints above the limit will come to a sharp point. This limit prevents corners that extend far beyond the actual corner at small angles, like when a text character comes to a spike, as in the letter M.


Displays Degrees as the unit used when setting the miter limit.


Determines the number of actions or operations that can be reversed using the Undo command in the Edit menu. As the setting increases, so does the amount of memory CorelDRAW requires to operate.


Determines whether PowerClip contents objects are placed in the center of container objects.


Selects an action which is to occur automatically everytime you launch CorelDRAW.  You can for example, have the Open dialog box or a new drawing window appear.


Determines the number of bands used to represent fountain fills on the screen. It also affects the appearance of fountain fills in drawings exported in the following formats:

Illustrator (AI, EPS)

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

MAC PICT (PCT)

Windows Metafile (WMF)

All bitmap formats

Choosing a lower value (less than 20) speeds up screen redraws, but results in noticeable banding.

You can control the number of bands used to print fountains with the Fountain Steps setting on the Options page in the Print Options dialog box.

Note

Fountain steps set from the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills appear on your monitor. To control how they appear when printed, you must set the fountain steps on the Print Options page.

The Steps setting in the Fountain Fill dialog box lets you override the settings for selected objects in this dialog box and in the Print Options dialog box.


Enable this button to have CorelDRAW display color using its own dithering scheme. This option controls only how CorelDRAW displays colors on your screen, and has no effect on the printed output.

To use this setting, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that uses this capability.

Whenever settings are changed, update the palette along the bottom of the CorelDRAW screen by clicking on either of the palette's scroll arrows with the right mouse button.


Enable this option to have CorelDRAW display color using the screen driver's default dithering scheme. If you have a 256-color adapter, your screen may redraw faster with this option selected. However, only 15 of these colors will be used in the dithering scheme.

This option controls only how CorelDRAW displays colors on your screen, and has no effect on the printed output.

To use this setting, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that uses this capability.

Whenever settings are changed, update the palette along the bottom of the CorelDRAW screen by clicking on either of the palette's scroll arrows with the right mouse button.


Loads your adapter's palette with pure colors contained in the currently displayed drawing. If the number of colors exceeds the capacity of the palette, CorelDRAW uses the closest matching color. You can only use this option in Preview mode. Colors in editing mode are displayed as dithered.


Enabling this check box lets you stop a screen redraw by clicking with the mouse or pressing a key. This lets you isolate an object in a complex drawing, or choose a menu command or tool without waiting for the screen to redraw completely.

Redrawing resumes after you perform another action, or when you request a redraw with the Refresh Window command.


Enables and disables auto-panning. With auto-panning enabled, the drawing window automatically scrolls when you drag beyond its edges.


Enabling this check box lets you redraw the screen by clicking the slider on your horizontal or vertical scroll bar, or when you request a redraw with the Refresh Window command.


Enables and disables snapping feedback. With snapping feedback enabled, snapping location marks appear highlighted.


Controls the appearance of palettes in CorelDRAW.


Lets you choose the facet size CorelDRAW uses when it renders and prints illustrations containing extrusions. Facet size represents the distance between shades of color in extrusions. Set the Minimum Extrude Facet Size between 0.01 inches and 0.5 inches. A higher value (0.5 inches) reduces redrawing time. For high-quality output, decrease the facet size when you are ready to print your illustration.

To use a unit of measure other than the one displayed, choose it from the units list. You cannot change the unit of measure if you have set a drawing scale other than 1:1 using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box. In this case, Place Duplicates and Clones uses the unit specified for World Distance in the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.


Enables and disables the display of pop-up help labels which identify tools and button ans appear when you rest the mouse pointer over one of them.


Displays the current backup directory.  To change it, click the Select Directory button below.


Lets you specify the directory where you want CorelDRAW to store backup copies of your work. The default directory is displayed above this button.


Enable this check box to create a backup file each time you save a CorelDRAW file. You can specify the backup directory by clicking the Select Directory button.


Lets you have CorelDRAW automatically create a backup file at set intervals while you work. When you enable this check box, the number box beside it becomes available. Use this box to specify the time between backups.

You can specify the backup directory by clicking the Select Directory button.


Lets you specify the time between backups if you have enabled the Auto-backup check box. You can specify a value between 1 and 120 minutes.


Lets you have CorelDRAW optimize the saving and restoring processes for most efficient storage.


Lets you have CorelDRAW optimize the saving and restoring processes for maximum speed.


Choose one of the actions listed in the list box to be displayed at the top of the popup menu accessed by clicking the right mouse button.  The choices are: None, 2x Zoom, open the Character dialog box, open the Edit Text dialog box, Full Screen Preview, and activate Node edit tool.

Regardless of the choice you make for the right mouse button in this dialog box, clicking the right mouse button and dragging the object always leaves a copy of the object behind.


Lets you select the Gamut alarm color. Click the button to open a color palette, then click the alarm color you want.

A gamut represents the range of colors a device can reproduce. The human eye has a very large color gamut, as does color film. A monitor, with its RGB gamut, can also display many colors. Gamut mapping becomes important with printers and output devices, as these gamuts can be very limited. If you use colors outside of the printer's gamut, CorelDRAW's Color Manager ensures that those colors are mapped into the printers gamut as accurately as possible.


Enables and disables multitasking, which allows you to perform one or more operations on several files simultaneously. For example, you can print one file and continue to work on another.


Displays the contents of the drive in the Drives list box. Click a folder to select it; double-click to open it and display its contents.


Lets you choose the drive to which you want to save your backup files. Click the down arrow to open the list box, then click the drive or directory you want. When you choose a drive, the available folders appear in the display box.


Saves the current settings and closes the Select Directory dialog box.


Discards any changes to the settings and closes the Select Directory dialog box.


Opens a dialog box that lets you connect a new network drive to your computer.


MATCHED ALL I COULD FIND IN .H OF JULY 19; CHANGED SOME CONTEXT STRING TO HAVE THE “PSTSAVEPRESETDLG” STRING IN THEM AS PER THE .H FILE. THIS FILES HAS TO BE CHECKED AGAIN WITH UPDATED .H AND/OR UI.


Preset Roll-Up - overview
Preset Roll-Up

The Presets Roll-Up allows you to add preset effects like drop shadows and unique fountain fills to a selected object. You can also use this roll-up to record operations you apply to objects, such as moving, stretching, filling, and so on. Use the controls in the roll-up to change the selected preset or to create your own.

 Related Topics


Displays the key color for the current preset. If no key color is selected, No Key Color is displayed on the button. Click this button to open a palette from which you can choose a new key color.


Displays the key color for the current preset. If no key color is selected, No Key Color is displayed on the button. Click this button to open a palette from which you can choose a new key color.


Lets you make an existing object’s fill color the key color for the current preset. When you click Color, the mouse pointer becomes a large horizontal arrow. Click an object that has the color you want.


Displays the descriptive text entered in the Note window of the Preset dialog box.


Opens a menu with the following commands:

New	Opens the New Presets dialog box. You can use this dialog box to create new presets.

Open	Opens the Open Presets dialog box. This dialog box opens CorelDRAW preset files.

Save As	Opens the Save Presets File as dialog box. You can save the current preset file under a new name.

Merge With	Opens the Merge Presets File with dialog box. This dialog box allows you to merge the current presets file with another.


Click this button to start or stop recording actions you apply to a selected object. You can record any one or combination of the following actions: Move, Stretch, Skew, Rotate, Fill, Outline, Duplicate, To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Convert to Curves.


Opens a dialog box that lets you change the name, notes, key color, and operations of the current preset. Clicking Delete opens the Delete Preset dialog box, where you remove presets from the current preset file.


Applies the current preset to the selected object.


Lets you choose a preset from those available in the current preset file. Click this box to see a list of presets, then choose the preset you want.


Displays a thumbnail of the current preset. Click the Thumbnail button to see a textual description of the preset (if one exists).


Displays the current preset (.PST) file. You can use the Open command in the Presets menu to choose a new preset file.


Displays the name of the current preset. Use this box if you want to rename a preset.


Displays any notes associated with the current preset. Use this box to add or edit notes as desired.


Displays the key color for the current preset. If no key color is selected, No Key Color is displayed on the button. Click this button to open a palette from which you can choose a new key color.


Displays the key color for the current preset. If no key color is selected, No Key Color is displayed on the button. Click this button to open a palette from which you can choose a new key color.


Displays the operations performed to create the selected preset.  An Edit button is displayed to allow you to modify a preset.


Displays the operations performed to create the current preset. Editable operations appear in bold text. Choose an operation from the list to see the controls you can use to edit it.


Opens a dialog box that lets you edit the attributes of the operation you selected from the Operations list.


Lets you change the color of extruded surfaces that use solid fills. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want. Click Edit to apply the new color to the preset.


Lets you change the starting fill color specified in an operation that involves special fills. Examples of special fills include conical, radial, and square fills. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want. Click Edit to apply the new color to the preset.


Lets you change the color of a contoured object that uses a solid fill. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want. Click Edit to apply the new color to the preset.


Lets you change the fill color of an object to which a preset contour is applied. For example, if you have create a preset that adds contours to a red rectangle, you can use this button to change the original rectangle to green. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the starting fill color specified in an operation that involves special fills. Examples of special fills include conical, radial, and square fills. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the color of the outline pen used in the selected operation. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the color of the outline created in the selected operation. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the color of the outline used in an operation that involves contouring. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the end color specified in an operation that applies special fills to extruded surfaces. Examples of special fills include conical, radial, and square fills. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the color specified in an operation that applies fills to the end object created during contouring. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Lets you change the end color specified in an operation that applies special fills to an object. Examples of special fills include conical, radial, and square fills. Click the button to open a color palette, then choose the color you want.


Saves the current changes and closes the Edit Preset dialog box.


Discards the current changes and closes the Edit Preset dialog box.


Opens the Delete Preset dialog box. This dialog box provides controls that let you select a preset and remove it from the current preset file.


Use this list box to choose the preset you want to delete. The presets are arranged alphabetically. Use the scroll bars provided to move through the list.


Executes any deletions you made and closes the Delete Preset dialog box.


Ignores any deletions you made and closes the Delete Preset dialog box.


Removes the selected preset from the list. You must click OK to execute the deletion. If you click cancel, the preset is restored to the list.


ALL TOPICS MATCHED WITH .H EXCEPT OK AND CANCEL


Copy Properties From dialog box

Copies attributes from another object to the selected object. Choose the properties you want to copy, then click OK. When you click OK, the pointer changes to a horizontal arrow. Point this arrow to the object from which you want to copy the selected properties and click the left mouse button.

You can choose to copy any number of the following properties:

Outline Pen

Outline Color

Fill

Text attributes (text objects only)


Enable this check box to copy the outline pen attributes from another object to the selected object.


Enable this check box to copy the outline color attributes from another object to the selected object.


Enable this check box to copy the fill attributes from another object to the selected object.


Enable this check box to copy the text attributes from another text object to the selected text object.


Confirms your selections and changes the mouse pointer to a large horizontal arrow. Use this arrow to select the object from which you want to copy the selected attributes.


Disregards your selections and closes the dialog box.


Select by Properties Roll-Up - overview
Select by Properties Roll-Up

Automatically selects object(s) that share the properties you specify. Properties include the type of object, the type of fill, outline, colors and special effects applied to them.

The four buttons at the top of the roll-up allow you to modify you selection criteria along the way, add to the selection, remove objects from the selection and select objects that are part of a current selection of objects.

 Related Topics


Click to select objects by their shape, fill and outline attributes, color or special effects.


Click to add to a selection already made, using the same or a different criteria.


Removes objects from the current selection based on the chosen selection criteria.


 Click to select objects from a current selection based on their shape, fill and outline attributes, color or special effects


Select the criteria with which you want to make the selection. You may want to select objects with a specific shape and fill type, and to which a special effect has been applied.


Lists available parameters for each criteria listed in the General list. Select for each criteria.


Clears all checkmarks in both the General and Detail lists.


Selects the object(s) according to the criteria you specified.


 Adds the object(s) to the selection according to the criteria you specified.


 Removes object(s) from the selection according to the criteria you specified.


 Selects objects(s) from the selection according to the criteria you specified.


Tool Properties dialog box

Allows you to change the attributes and behavior of all of CorelDRAW's tools. The list box at the top of the dialog is used to choose the tool; the properties displayed change according to the tool selected in the list.

 Related Topics


Object Properties dialog box

Allows you to change an object’s properties such as its shape, various text attributes as well as fill and outline attributes. An object must be selected or the command is grayed out on the View menu. The type of object selected determines which dialog box is displayed. For example, if you have selected a rectangle the Object Properties dialog box for rectangles is displayed. Object Properties dialog boxes allow you to change the attributes of the selected object.

 Related Topics


Styles Properties dialog box

Allows you to select which attributes of an object’s style are applied. An object or text must be selected or the command is grayed out on the View menu. The type of object selected determines which dialog box is displayed. For example, if you have selected a rectangle, the Default Graphic Style Properties dialog box is displayed. Style Properties dialog boxes allow you to change the object's style.

 Related Topics


Click to work with a cross hair cursor instead of the pointer.


Treats unfilled objects as though they were filled; this allows you to select unfilled objects by clicking anywhere inside them.


Draws a dotted outline of objects as you move them.


Specifies a time delay to draw the dotted outline of objects when you move them.


Type the number of points to use to draw polygons, stars and polygons as stars.


Specifies the sharpness level of the angles of stars and polygons as stars.


Sets the Polygon tool to draw polygons.


Sets the Polygon tool to draw stars.


Sets the Polygon tool to draw polygons as stars.


Sets the roundness of the corners of rectangles and squares drawn with the Rectangle tool.  The higher the setting, the more roundness appears on the corners.


Type the number of revolutions to use when drawing spirals.


Click to use the right mouse button settings you have chosen in the Options - Advanced dialog box.


Click to use the right mouse button to automatically zoom out from the page.  This is functional only when you are in a zoom state i.e. when you have zoomed in. When you are not in a zoom state, clicking the right mouse button brings up the popup menu.


Uses the traditional CorelDRAW 5 zoom flyout in the Toolbox which includes icons for zooming in and out, zoom to page, zoom to seleted, fit all objects in window and 1:1 zoom. Added to the version flyout is a one shot Pan tool.


Sets your screen’s resolution to match real life dimensions. Hold a ruler to the screen and set the resolution so that an inch on the screen equals an inch on the ruler; when you are done, what you see on the screen is the same size as what is printed.


 Controls the extent to which a curve's shape is changed when you use the AutoReduce option in the Node Edit roll-up. A high setting, removes more nodes and can change the curve’s shape. A smaller setting removes fewer nodes. The setting represents the limit of the distance the curve moves when you use AutoReduce relative to its original position.


Click to keep the sections of an object cut using the knife as one object.


Sections of an object cut with the knife tool are automatically closed so that they may be filled.


Type the number of cells you want horizontally when drawing graph paper.


Type the number of cells you want vertically when drawing graph paper.


Sets the thickness for the Eraser tool.


Choose the units to use when setting the Eraser tool thickness.


Enables or disables the automatic reduction of  nodes for the objects edited with the Eraser tool. The auto-reduce setting is found in the Tool Properties dialog for the Node Edit tool.


Sets the Ellipse tool to draw full ellipses and circles.


Sets the Ellipse tool to draw pie wedges.


Sets the Ellipse tool to draw arcs.


Type the angle at which you want the arc or pie objects to begin.  Not valid when drawing ellipses.


Type the angle at which you want the arc or pie objects to end. Not valid when drawing ellipses.


Draws the pies and arcs in the clockwise direction.  The beginning and ending points of pies and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting and Ending angles boxes.


Draws the pies and arcs in the counter-clockwise direction.  The beginning and ending points of pies and arcs are determined by the angles specified in the Starting and Ending angles boxes.


Displays the default font currently used for dimension line text.  It is the same as the default artistic text font.


Displays the style applied to the current default font for dimension line text. This is the same font as the one used by default with artistic text.


Displays the size of the font currently used to display dimension line text. This is the same font as the one used by default with artistic text.


Controls how closely CorelDRAW tracks the motion of the mouse when drawing in Freehand mode. The lower the number, the rougher the curves tend to appear.


Controls how closely the Bezier curve follows the edges of a bitmap traced using CorelDRAW's autotracing feature. Low numbers (1 to 3 pixels) tend to produce more accurate results.


Controls when CorelDRAW draws a smooth corner or a cusp when drawing in Freehand mode, and when autotracing a bitmap. The lower the number, the greater the tendency toward cusps.


Controls when CorelDRAW draws a straight or curve segment when drawing in Freehand mode, and autotracing a bitmap. The lower the number, the greater the tendency toward drawing curves.


Controls the AutoJoin radius when drawing in Freehand or Bezier mode. The lower the number, the closer the cursor must be to the end node of an existing segment in order for the next segment to automatically join with it.


Enable this button to have the ends of connector lines snap to the closest object node when you move the object on the page. Enabling Snap to Objects (Layout menu) allows you to see the nodes when you move the mouse pointer near them.


Enable this button to lock the ends of connector lines to the current object node i.e. the node the connector originally snapped to when it was created. This ensures the connection is locked to the same node when you move one or several objects on the page. Enabling Snap to Objects (Layout menu) allows you to see the nodes when you move the mouse pointer near them.


Lists available fonts to use when creating artistic or paragraph text.


Lists available styles for the selected font.


Centers artistic text relative to the place you clicked to begin entering the text. Centers paragraph text in the text frame.


Choose the range of text to which you want to apply the selected font, style and size.  Available choices are: selected text frames, selected and all subsequent text frames or all paragraph text frames.


Locks the properties of the rectangle.


Applies the properties to the rectangle.


Locks the properties of the polygon.


Applies the properties to the polygon.


Locks the properties of the ellipse.


Applies the properties to the ellipse.


Locks the properties of the object.


Applies the properties to the object.


Locks the properties of the connector line.


Applies the properties to the connector line.


ALL TOPICS MATCHED TO .H EXCEPT OVERVIEW.


Drawing Scale dialog box

Use the Drawing Scale dialog box to set the scale for your drawing. For example, if you are drawing floor plans for your office, this feature allows you to specify how many units on your page (the Page Distance) are equivalent to a given number of units on the floor (the World Distance).

Note

The units you specify in Page Distance are the units used by the Contour Roll-Up and Transform Roll-Up. These units are also the ones used for the rulers. However, if the Drawing Scale is set to its default values (where 1 inch of Page Distance equals 1 inch of World Distance), the rulers use the units specified for Grid Frequency.


Represents the units in your drawing that are equivalent to the real (World Distance) units. Choose a different unit of measure by clicking the units box and choosing one from the list. The maximum allowable Page Distance for each unit of measure is 100.


Represents the real units that are equivalent to the Page Distance units in your drawing. Choose a different unit of measure by clicking the units box and choosing one from the list.


This drop-down list box contains some pre-defined drawing scales. To choose one, click it in the list. The Page Distance and World Distance units are updated to reflect your choice.


Styles Manager roll-up

The Styles Manager has controls for applying styles and managing style templates. CorelDRAW comes with a default template containing predefined graphic and text styles which you can apply to objects in your drawing. You can design your own styles and add them to the default template or to new ones you create.

 Related Topics


Lists the names of the styles available the current template. You can apply a style to a selected object by choosing the style from this list, then selecting Apply Style from the Styles menu.


Opens a menu with commands for managing styles and templates, finding objects that use a particular style, and organizing the information displayed in the Styles Manager.

You can choose from the following menu items:

Apply Style	Applies the selected style to the selected object.

Template	Lets you save, load, or merge a template.

View	Lets you choose how you want to view the information in the Styles Manager.

Find	Searches for an object that matches the style selected in the Styles Manager.

Copy Attributes From	Lets you copy the style attributes from another object to the selected object.

Show	Lets you choose which file types you want displayed in the Styles Manager.

New	Lets you create and define a new Graphic, Artistic Text, or Paragraph Text style.

Delete	Deletes the style selected in the Styles Manager. You can't delete default styles.

Rename	Lets you define a new name for a style. You can't rename default styles.

What's This?	Gives you access to context-sensitive help on controls in the Styles Manager.

Properties	Lets you define and edit style attributes. You can also use this command to apply a style to the selected object.


Opens the Load Styles from Template dialog box where you specify the styles template you want to attach to a drawing. The name of the current template appears below the roll-up's title bar.


Opens the Save Template dialog box, where you give a new template a name or rename an existing one.


Removes the selected style from the current drawing. To remove it from the template, delete it, then save the template using the Save Template command.


Selects an object with the highlighted style. If an object using that style is found, the command name changes to Find Next. Click on it to search for the next object using that style.


Displays the Set Hotkeys dialog box where you can assign key combinations to frequently used Paragraph text styles. The command becomes available when you select Paragraph text style from the list.


Applies the style highlighted in the roll-up to the selected object.


Load Styles From Template dialog box

Loads the styles saved in the selected template file (.CDT file extension). The graphic and text styles included in the selected template will be displayed in the Styles Manager Roll-Up window after you click OK.

 Related Topics


Displays a thumbnail of objects saved with the template. For the thumbnail to appear, you must have included the objects with the template when it was saved.


Lists the Paragraph text styles. Also shows the previously assigned key combinations and the point size of each text style.

Select the style you want to assign a key combination to or whose key combination you change.


Choose the key you want assign to the selected style. To remove a key combination from a selected style, click the Unassigned button.


Click to assign hotkeys automatically and sequentially. For example, Ctrl+1 is assigned to the first style, Ctrl+2 to the second, and so on.


Lists styles alphabetically by name or by type size from largest to smallest.


Groups styles that include bullets.


Save Template dialog box

Saves the graphic and text styles currently displayed in the Styles Manager Roll-Up in a template file which has the .CDT file extension.  Use this dialog box to save a new template, change the name or save changes made to styles included in an existing template.

 Related Topics


 Saves objects on the page with the template.


 Adds an image header if With Contents checked. You can specify the type (mono or color) and size of header in kilobytes.


Selects the CorelDRAW version number you want to use to save the new template.  Version 5 and 6 are the available choices.


Merges the highlighted style(s) with the document's template.


Merges all styles listed with the document's template.


Click to select the template which contains the styles you want to merge with the current document's template.


Symbols Roll-Up - overview
Symbols Roll-Up

The Symbols Roll-Up provides quick access to symbols from the symbol libraries. The symbol libraries are collections of pre-drawn graphic symbols relating to business, transportation, sports, and many other subjects.  You can create your own symbols and add them to the symbol librairy.

 Related Topics


Use this list box to select a symbol library. When you choose a symbol library, a sample of its symbols appear in the roll-up’s preview box.


Interactive preview box that displays the symbols available for the symbol font currently selected in the list box above it. You can drag a symbol from this box to the drawing page to place it in your drawing. The symbols are displayed in order according to their index numbers. Index numbers are listed in the Symbol and Clipart Libraries Catalog.


Use this box if you want to choose a symbol by its index number. When you type the index number, the corresponding symbol appears highlighted. Index numbers are listed in the Symbol and Clipart Libraries Catalog.


Use this box to specify the symbol size. You can specify a value between 0.01 and 30.00 inches.


Enable this check box to create a pattern from the current symbol. You can use the Tile Options button to set the pattern’s attributes.


Click this button to open the Tile Options dialog box. This dialog box provides controls you can use to adjust the attributes of the tiled object.


Task Progress (Tools Menu)

Opens the Task Progress dialog box that lets you control the way your computer’s CPU resources are used when running multiple, simultaneous operations (multi-tasking) in CORELDRAW. Using this dialog box, you can assign more resources to one item than another in order to maximize efficiency. This is accomplished by assigning a priority to each item in the list. The higher the priority rating assigned to an operation, the more CPU resources are applied to the performance of that operation. This can be useful when printing a large file that may take an extended period of time to print. If the printing of this file is of marginal importance (i.e., if the final printout it is not immediately required) you can assign a low priority to the operation. This will free up CPU resources for other operations that may be of more importance (i.e., applying effects to another drawing, etc.).

 Related Topics


Task Progress dialog box

The Task Progress dialog box lets you control the way your computer’s CPU resources are used when running multiple, simultaneous operations (multi-tasking) in CorelDRAW. Using this dialog box, you can assign more resources to one item than another in order to maximize efficiency. This is accomplished by assigning a priority to each item in the list. The higher the priority rating assigned to an operation, the more CPU resources are applied to the performance of that operation. This can be useful when printing a large file that may take an extended period of time to print. If the printing of this file is of marginal importance (i.e., if the final printout it is not immediately required) you can assign a low priority to the operation. This will free up CPU resources for other operations that may be of more importance (i.e., applying effects to another drawing, etc.).


Tile Options dialog box

The Tile Options dialog box contains controls that let you adjust the size and proportion of symbols within a tiled object

 Related Topics


Use this box to specify the horizontal dimension to be taken up by the tiled object. You can specify a value between 0.01 and 30.00 inches.


Use this box to specify the vertical dimension to be taken up by the tiled object. You can specify a value between 0.01 and 30.00 inches.


Enable this check box if you want to make the horizontal and vertical dimensions the same for the tiled object. If you this option, you only have to set the horizontal or vertical dimension; the other will automatically change to maintain proportion.


Closes the dialog box and applies the tile size you specified. When you drag the chosen symbol to your page, it will be tiled according to he size you selected.


Closes the dialog box without using the tile options specified


Transform Roll-Up - overview
Transform Roll-Up

The Transform Roll-Up changes the position, size, scale, angle of rotation and degree of skew of a selected object. It is also used to mirror objects quickly and easily.

The Transform Roll-Up displays the Horizontal and Vertical coordinates for a selected object. Use the fields to reset or copy an object's on the page. The Transform Roll-Up also allows you to reset size, scale, rotation angle and degree of skew on a selected object around a placement point. Select the transformation you want to apply in the list at the top of the roll-up to see the related controls.

Note

The Transform Roll-Up uses the unit of measure specified in the Page Distance section of the Grid & Scale Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


Hides the controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


Displays the roll-up options for placing selected objects.


Type the horizontal ruler coordinate of the location where you want the object to be placed.


Type the vertical ruler coordinate of the location where you want the object to be placed.


Defaults to the units used by the horizontal ruler.


Defaults to the units used by the vertical ruler.


Allows you to specify which point of the object is to be positioned at the selected coordinates. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight selection handles of the object, and the center of the object.


Click to make the chosen coordinates relative to the current location of the object instead of relative to the ruler origin.


Opens and closes the anchor point display.


Creates a copy of the original object in the new position you specify.


Moves the selected object to the coordinates you have selected.


Displays the roll-up options for sizing selected objects.


Hides the controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


Type the width you want the selected object to have.


Type the height you want the selected object to have


Defaults to the units used by the horizontal ruler.


Defaults to the units used by the vertical ruler.


Allows you to specify which point of the object remains anchored at a fixed location when the object is resized. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight selection handles of the object, and the center of the object.


Click to maintain the selected object’s aspect ratio when resizing. With this option enabled, type either the width or height required for the object and the other dimension is automatically updated as to maintain the object proportional.


Opens and closes the anchor point display.


Copies the original object and sizes the new object according to the values you select in the roll-up.


Applies the specified options to the selected object.


Displays the roll-up options for scaling and mirroring selected objects.


Hides the controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


Type the horizontal scale factor as a percentage of the current width; a value of 100% leaves the width unchanged, 200% doubles it and 50% halves it.


Type the vertical scale factor as a percentage of the current height: a value of 100% leaves the height unchanged, 200% doubles it and 50% halves it.


Defaults to the units used by the horizontal ruler.


Defaults to the units used by the vertical ruler.


Mirrors the object horizontally using the scale factors specified.


Mirrors the selected object vertically using the scale factors specified.


Opens and closes the anchor point display.


Allows you to specify which point of the object remains anchored at a fixed location when the object is scaled or mirrored. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight selection handles of the object, and the center of the object.


Click to maintain the selected object’s aspect ratio when scaling or mirroring. With this option enabled, type either one of the scale factors and the other one is automatically updated as to maintain the object proportional.


Copies the original object and applies the scale and mirror options you select to the copy.


Applies the specified scale and mirror options to the selected object.


Displays the roll-up options for rotating selected objects.


Hides the controls, leaving just the title bar visible.


Sets the angle of rotation. Positive values rotate counter-clockwise, negative values rotate clockwise.


Displays degrees as the unit used for the rotation angle.


Specifies a fixed horizontal coordonate to rotate around.


Specifies a fixed vertical coordonate to rotate around.


 When enabled, the rotation occurs around either the chosen anchor point, (the default is the center of the object) or a fixed point relative to the center of the selected object as defined in the Center fields. When disabled, the object rotates around a fixed point relative to the page as defined in the Center fields.


Opens and closes the anchor point display.


Rotates selected objects around the selected an anchor point. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight selection handles of the object, and the center of the object.


Copies the original object and rotates the copy according to the specified options.


Applies the specified rotation options to the selected object.


Displays the roll-up options for skewing selected objects.


Specifies the horizontal skew angle relative to the current state of the object. Negative values skew counter-clockwise; positive values skew clockwise.


Specifies the vertical skew angle relative to the current state of the object. Negative values skew counter-clockwise; positive values skew clockwise.


Displays degrees as the unit used for the skew angle.


Displays degrees as the unit used for the skew angle.


Click to enable the use of an anchor point when skewing an object. The anchor point you select remains at a fixed location before and after the object is skewed.


Opens and closes the anchor point display.


Specifies an anchor point which is to remain at a fixed location. The nine anchor points correspond to the eight selection handles of the object, and the center of the object.


Copies the original object and applies the specified skew options to the copy, maintaining the original intact.


Applies the specified skew options to the selected object.


View Manager Roll-Up - overview
View Manager Roll-Up

Provides the ability to save various zoom levels, and the pages where each one is used. You can then quickly revert to those saved levels with a double-click.. Each view can be named for ease of use.

The first view listed in the roll-up is always page 1 at 100%. If you zoom in on an area and click the + button in the roll-up, the current magnification level is automatically registered as the second view for page 1. Should you add pages to your document and find yourself on page 4, double-click the second view to return to page 1 at the appropriate magnification level. Double-clicking a view name in the View Manager Roll-Up surrounds the name with a rectangle and allows you to change the name of that view to something meaningful to you.

Each saved view is includes a magnification level and a page number. The page and zoom icons located on the left of the View Manager Roll-up allow you to turn off one of the two elements. The remaining element is the only one applied when you double-click the view. For example, you are on page 4; in the roll-up, there is a view for page 1 at 250%. You want to zoom in at 250% on page 4. Click the page icon for that view so that is becomes dimmed, then double-click the view. Only the magnification level is applied e.g. it changes to 250% but remains on page 4.

 Related Topics


Lists all views saved with the current drawing.  The list includes the view name, the page number and magnification level associated with each view.  You can click a view name to change it.

The two columns on the left of the view list display a page icon and a magnification level icon for each view. Click the page icon to include or exclude the page number when you activate the corresponding view. When the icon is dimmed, only the magnification of the selected view  applied to the current page.  Click the magnification level icon to include, or not, the magnification level when you activate the corresponding view. When the icon is dimmed, activating the corresponding view changes only the page displayed, not the magnification level.


Click and drag on the page to magnify the area selected.


 Click to zoom out by a factor of two each time you click or returns to the view you were at before the last zoom-in.


Click to display the drawing at the size at which it will print.


Click to bring all objects in the drawing into view.


Click to zoom in on all selected objects.


Click to display the entire Working Page.


Click to change your viewpoint on a drawing by dragging it around the CorelDRAW window.  This is a one shot pan tool; you must click each time you want to drag the drawing around the window.


Click to save the current view and add it to the list. In order for this button to be functional, you must change the view by zooming in or out from the page. The page number is automatically saved with the magnification level as part of that view.


Removes the highlighted view from the list in the View Manager.


Displays a menu which includes commands for switching to a particular view in the list, adding a new view to the list, deleting or renaming an existing view and hide the zoom tools in the View Manager.


ALL TOPICS HAVE BEEN MATCHED TO .H ID STRINGS


Weld - Intersection - Trim Roll-Ups - overview
Weld -Intersection - Trim Roll-Ups

Joins overlapping objects at points where their paths intersect. Though not necessarily apparent in editable preview, welding also removes sections of the path between those intersect points. The resulting curve object assumes the fill and outline attributes of the target object. You choose the target after selecting the weld, trim or intersect options in the roll-up and clicking the Weld To..., Trim or Intersect With... button.

You can also weld single objects with intersecting lines. While its appearance won't change, the object breaks into several subpaths. You then delete the interior subpaths to remove the holes.

There's no limit to the number of objects you can weld at one time. You can even weld objects on different layers as long as you have MultiLayer selection turned on. See Layers Roll-Up command.

Intersecting two or more overlapping objects creates a new object using the area common to the original objects. Intersection joins their paths at the points where they intersect. The resulting curve object assumes the fill and outline attributes of the target object you select.

Trimming two or more overlapping objects reshapes the last object selected. Trimming separates the paths at points where the objects overlap. Initially, the trimmed object may appear no different than it did before trimming. However, closer inspection shows that new nodes appear where the object has been trimmed. Move the trimmed objects apart to see the full effect of the trim.

Notes

It is not possible to weld, intersect, or trim a powerline, dimension line or the master of a clone to an object.  You can however weld clones.

Objects that do not intersect at all can be welded; they become a single curve object and each object welded adopts the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

 Related Topics


Displays a graphical representation of the Weld option; several objects are displayed in solid black because welded objects become one object and adopt either the target or the other object’s color attributes.


Displays a graphical representation of the Intersect option; the intersection of two objects is displayed in black.


Displays a graphical representation of the Trim option; the intersecting portions of the objects have a dotted outline as they will be removed. Use the Leave Original options to keep the original or target object intact as you create new, trimmed objects.


Leaves a copy of the target object, i.e. the second object you click, behind the new  welded object. If this option is not enabled, the target object is combined with the other objects to make one object. Move the welded object to see the copy of the target object.


Leaves a copy of the target object, i.e. the second object you click, behind the new intersection object created. If this option is not enabled, only the portion of the target object that overlaps other objects remains.


Leaves a copy of the target object, i.e. the second object you click, behind the new trimmed object. If this option is not enabled, the portion of the target object under the other object is cut from the original.


Leaves a copy of the other object(s), i.e. the first one selected, in front the new welded object. If this option is not enabled, the target and other object are welded into one object which adopts the fill of the target object.


Leaves a copy of the other object(s), i.e. the first one selected, behind the new intersection object created. If this option is not enabled, only the portion of the other object(s) that overlaps the target object remains.


Leaves a copy of the other object(s) i.e. the first one selected, on screen. Only the portion of the target object that overlaps the other object is removed. If this option is not enabled, the overlapping portion of the objects and the original object are removed; only the trimmed target object remains.


Click to select the target object. When the target object has been identified, the selected weld option is performed. All objects are combined to make one object.


Intersects the original object with the target object according to the options you selected.


Trims the target object according to the options you selected.


Creates a two-color bitmap pattern from the image you select.


Creates a vector pattern from the image you select.


These controls let you change the resolution of the two-color bitmap pattern you are creating.


Creates a low-resolution two-color bitmap pattern.


Creates a medium-resolution two-color bitmap pattern.


Creates a high-resolution two-color bitmap pattern.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Displays the width and height of the selected bitmap in pixels.


Displays the color mode of the selected bitmap.


Displays the selected bitmap’s resolution.


Displays the number of nodes found in the selected curve object.


Displays the number of subpaths included in the selected curve object.  Subpaths can be curve segments that are not physically attached together but that have been combined using the Arrange menu command.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the first node’s location in regards to the rulers.


Displays the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the last node’s location in regards to the rulers.


Exchanging information with other applications

Importing and Exporting

CorelDRAW includes a wide variety of file-format filters that allow you to exchange graphics between CorelDRAW and other applications.

Importing gives you access to graphics created in other illustration programs and presentation packages, as well as to clipart and scanned images. Once a graphic has been imported, you can modify it using CorelDRAW's tools and features. A single drawing can consist of any number of imported graphics in any of the supported formats. You can also import objects from other CorelDRAW files.

Exporting saves CorelDRAW files in formats used by other programs. This feature lets you create graphics for many popular desktop publishing and word-processing programs.

Because each format handles information in a graphics file differently, it's not always possible to translate precisely the contents of one format to another. The amount of variation depends on the graphic and the format used to import or export it.

Linking

Linking lets you include information from a file created in another application. The linked object is pointed to, but not actually stored with your CorelDRAW file. The two files are linked together by copying an object from the source file (for example, a Corel PHOTO-PAINT image) and pasting the object into a destination file (for example, a CorelDRAW drawing). CorelDRAW will update the destination file any time the information changes in the source file. You can specify when updates occur, or update the information automatically whenever the source file changes.

If you link a file you must ensure that the linked file is available to the host file, otherwise the link will be corrupted. For example, if you send a file to another computer, you must include all the linked files.

Embedding

Embedded objects become part of the host file. Charts, graphics, and spreadsheet data are examples of information you can embed. Only Windows applications that support object embedding can supply embedded information. When you embed a file, you do not need to worry about including any other files with

In-place editing

In-place editing allows you to change linked and embedded files without leaving the application that you are using. In any Windows 95 Corel application you can double-click on a linked or embedded object and, if the source file supports in-place editing, you will be able to edit the object as if you were in the source application.

Using the Clipboard

The Clipboard is a temporary storage area used to transfer text, graphics, and other information between Windows applications. In CorelDRAW, the Clipboard is a convenient way to move objects from one drawing file to another.

You transfer information to the Clipboard using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Edit menu.

The information you place on the Clipboard remains on the Clipboard until you exit Windows or replace it with other information. When you close a Corel application, you are asked if you want to clean the clipboard or save the contents for other applications.

Information placed on the Clipboard by other applications can be linked or embedded into your CorelDRAW file.

 Related Topics


Linking and embedding

Linking

Linking lets you include information from a file created in another application. The linked object is pointed to, but not actually stored with your CorelDRAW file. The two files are linked together by copying an object from the source file (for example, a Corel PHOTO-PAINT image) and pasting the object into a destination file (for example, a CorelDRAW drawing). CorelDRAW will update the destination file any time the information changes in the source file. You can specify when updates occur, or update the information automatically whenever the source file changes.

If you link a file you must ensure that the linked file is available to the host file, otherwise the link will be corrupted. For example, if you send a file to another computer, you must include all the linked files.

Embedding

Embedding allows you to create a file that includes information such as graphics and charts that have been created in other applications. When you embed an object, you insert information from a source document created in one application into a destination document. You are making a copy of the information in the source document and transferring it to the destination document. Once transferred, there is no longer any connection to the source document.

Embedded objects become part of the host file. Charts, graphics, and spreadsheet data are examples of information you can embed. Only Windows applications that support object embedding can supply embedded information. When you embed a file, you do not need to worry about including any other files with

In-place editing

In-place editing allows you to change linked and embedded files without leaving the application that you are using. In any Windows 95 Corel application you can double-click on a linked or embedded object and, if the source file supports in-place editing, you will be able to edit the object as if you were in the source application.

 Related Topics


OLE objects - limitations on transformations and effects

Linked or embedded objects inserted with the Paste Special or Insert New Object commands in the Edit menu can be scaled, moved, mirrored and have other basic transformations applied to them.

OLE objects may be copied. Copies of linked objects are linked to the same file as the original object.

OLE objects may be placed into PowerClip containers.

Limitations:

OLE objects cannot be rotated. You can rotate a OLE object if you have another non-OLE object selected at the same time or if the OLE object is placed in a PowerClip. This may produce unexpected results and is not recommended.

OLE objects cannot be skewed.

OLE objects cannot be cloned.

OLE objects cannot have any of the effects in the Effects menu applied to them.

OLE objects cannot be combined, welded, intersected or trimmed with other objects.

 Related Topics


To export graphics for use in other programs

1.	Open the CorelDRAW file you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	From the Files of type box, choose the export format you want.

4.	Accept the name displayed in the File name box for the graphic you are exporting.

You can also enter a new file name in the File name box or choose a name from the File name list.

CorelDRAW adds the extension that corresponds to the export format you chose.

5.	Depending on the format you chose, another dialog box may appear. Choose any options, then Click OK.

Note

To use your CorelDRAW graphic in an application that supports object linking, consider linking the graphic to that application instead of exporting it. This way, if you change the graphic, CorelDRAW will automatically update the graphic in the other application.

In a multi-page document, only objects on the currently displayed page (or facing pages if View Facing Pages is enabled in the Page Setup dialog box) will be exported.

 Related Topics


To export selected objects only

1.	Open the CorelDRAW file you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export.

3.	Turn on the Selected Object(s) Only check box.

4.	From the Files of type box, choose the export format you want.

5.	Accept the name displayed in the File name box for the graphic you are exporting.

You can also enter a new file name in the File name box or choose a name from the File name list.

CorelDRAW adds the extension that corresponds to the export format you chose.

6.	Depending on the format selected, another dialog box may appear. Choose any options, then click OK.

Tip

To use your CorelDRAW graphic in an application that supports object linking, consider linking the graphic to that application instead of exporting it. This way, if you change the graphic, CorelDRAW will automatically update the graphic in the other application.

 Related Topics


To import graphics in other formats

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	From the Files of Type box, choose an import format.

The File name box shows files in the current folder with the chosen format's extension. If the file you want is in another drive or folder, select the drive from the Look in box and the folder from the Folders box.

3.	If you want to preview the file you are importing, enable Preview.

4.	In the File name box, type the name of the file you want to import.

Note

If you are importing a low resolution TIFF or CT file created using OPI (Open Prepress Interface), you must enable Link to high resolution file for output using OPI.

 Related Topics


To import files using drag and drop

Drag the file you want to import into the CorelDRAW window.

 Related Topics


To embed an object in your drawing starting from CorelDRAW

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Click Create New.

3.	In the Object Type box, choose the application you will use to create the object.

The list includes items from applications on your system that support object linking and embedding. You need to install these applications using their setup programs if you want them to appear on the list.

4.	Click OK to open the source application.

5.	Create or select the information you want to embed in your CorelDRAW file.

6.	Once the information is created/selected, choose Update, Exit, or Exit and Return from the source application's File menu.

In some applications, a dialog box appears prompting you to update. Choose Yes or OK.

7.	The embedded object appears in the center of your drawing. Select the object and move it to any position.

Note

You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in CorelDRAW. This will launch the server application and allow you to edit the information. When you exit and return to CorelDRAW the changes will be reflected in your drawing.

Object linking is another way of including objects and files from other applications. Linking, allows you to share the same information with other files.

You can insert an embedded object either by opening the source file from CorelDRAW, or by pasting the object from the server applications.

 Related Topics


To embed an object in your drawing starting from the source application

1.	Open the source application.

2.	Choose the object or information you wish to embed.

3.	Copy the information to the clipboard.

4.	Open CorelDRAW.

5.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in CorelDRAW.

Object linking is another way of including objects and files from other applications. Linking allows you to share the same information with other files.

You can insert an embedded object either by opening the source file from CorelDRAW, or by pasting the object from the server applications.

 Related Topics


To embed a file in your drawing

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Click Create from File.

3.	Type the name, including the path and extension, of the file you want to embed. If you don't know the name of the file or its location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

Note

You can select the object and move it to wherever you want.

 Related Topics


To edit an embedded object

1.	Select the embedded object then Click Edit, type of object, edit.

2.	Make the changes you want.

3.	Unselect the object (i.e. click something else).

Note

You can also open the source application by double-clicking on the embedded object.

 Related Topics


To link a file from CorelDRAW

1.	Click Edit, Insert New Object.

2.	Click Create from File.

3.	Enable Link.

4.	Type the name, including the path and extension, of the file you want to link. If you don't know the name of the file or its location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

Note

Save the source file before starting this procedure.

The linked object appears in the center of your drawing. You may now move or resize  the object.

Any changes you make to the information in the source file are incorporated in your drawing through this link.

 Related Topics


To link an object from the source application

1.	Start the application used to create the information you want to add to your CorelDRAW file.

2.	Open the file with the objects you want to add to your CorelDRAW file.

3.	Copy the required objects.

4.	Open CorelDRAW and click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	Click Paste Link.

6.	From the Data Type box, select the type of information you want to add to your CorelDRAW file.

Note

CorelDRAW positions the linked object in the center of your page. Select the object and move it to any position.

Any changes you make to the information in the source file are incorporated in your drawing through this link.

You can insert a linked object by opening the source file from CorelDRAW.

You can link an object by dragging it into the Draw window while pressing CTRL + SHIFT.

 Related Topics


To specify automatic or manual link updating

1.	Select the linked information in the destination file you want to update.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Choose Manual or Automatic.

 Related Topics


To update a link manually

1.	Click Edit, Links.

Select any links in the Links box you want updated.

2.	Click Update Now.

CorelDRAW incorporates any changes made in the source file after the last update in the destination file for each selected link.

 Related Topics


To update all links in a file

1.	Click Edit, Links.

2.	Select all the links in the Links box.

3.	Click Update Now.

 Related Topics


To jump from a destination file to its source file

1.	Select the linked information you want to edit in the destination file.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Open Source.

4.	Make the changes in the source file.

5.	Click File, Save.

6.	If you want, you can close the file and exit the source application.

If you make the changes in the destination file, CorelDRAW will ignore them when it updates the link.

You can also double-click a linked object to jump to the source file.

If you don't need further updates from the source file, you can break the link.

 Related Topics


To change a link

1.	Select the linked information in your CorelDRAW file.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Change Source.

4.	Type a new name for the source file in the Source box.

 Related Topics


To break a link

1.	Select the linked information.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Break Link.

 Related Topics


To place a copy of an object on the Clipboard

1.	Select the object you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Open the CorelDRAW file or other application into which you want the object copied.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To cut an object from a drawing and place it on the Clipboard

1.	Select the object you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Open the CorelDRAW file or other application into which you want the object placed.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To display the contents of the Clipboard

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows 95 desktop.

2.	Click Programs, Accessories, Clipbook Viewer.

Note

If the Clipbook Viewer is not available, you will have to install it using the standard Windows procedure.

You can close the Clipboard by pressing ALT+F4.

 Related Topics


Outlining objects

Every object has a set of outline attributes that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of each object as being drawn with a pen that changes size, shape, and color. You can use round or square nibs, slanted or symmetrical, thick or hairline-thin to draw dashed, dotted, solid , or calligraphic lines.

In addition to the shape and color of the nib, you can also change the ending shape of an outline. Lines, or objects with open paths, can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (squares, polygons, etc.) naturally have no end-points, but you can still choose from pointed, rounded, or truncated corners.

You can change the outline of an object using the Outline tool or the Outline Pen dialog box.

The Outline tool gives you quick access to the most commonly-used outline styles, and buttons to access more detailed controls.

The Outline Pen dialog box lets you change any aspect of your outline or line-ending shape.

If you just want to change the color of an outline, you can also use the on-screen palette (see Related Topics).

The outline attributes of the current object are always displayed on the far right end of the Status Line.

 Related Topics


To set an object's corner shape

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click a corner style.

 Related Topics


To set an object's line cap shape

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click Square Line Caps to cut the line off exactly at the end points.

Click Rounded Line Caps to round off the ends of the line.

Click Extended Square Line Caps to square off the line and extend it beyond the endpoints for a distance equal to half the line thickness.

 Related Topics


To set outline width using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the line width you want.

The available widths are: Hairline, Thin, Medium, Medium-Thick, and Thick.

 Related Topics


To set outline width using the Pen Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Scroll through the preview box and choose the line width you want.

4.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To set outline width using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	In the Width box, type the line width you want.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click Black Outline Color or White Outline Color.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Pen Roll-up

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Click the color button.

4.	Click the color you want.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Color Roll-up

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Color Roll-Up.

3.	Choose the color you want (see Related Topics).

4.	Click Apply Fill.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Click one of the palettes in the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object you want to outline.

3.	Click the palette's scroll arrows until the color you want is visible.

4.	Click the color you want with the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline Color dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Color.

3.	Select the color you want (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To remove an object's outline using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object with the outline you want to remove.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click No Outline.

 Related Topics


To remove an object's outline using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Click one of the palettes in the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object with the outline you want to remove.

3.	Click No Color with the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To create a dashed outline using the Pen Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To create a dashed outline using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want.

 Related Topics


To create a dotted line or a line with rounded line segments

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want. For a dotted line, click a style with short, widely spaced segments.

5.	Click Rounded Line Caps.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for graphic objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new graphic objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Graphic option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new non-text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for paragraph text

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new Paragraph text objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Paragraph Text option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new paragraph text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for artistic text objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new Artistic text objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Artistic Text option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new artistic text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To copy an object's outline to another object

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Click Update From.

4.	Click the object with the outline you want copied.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To create a calligraphic outline

1.	Select the object with the outline you want to change.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click one of the Corner Styles. The first and third options make the nib square; the second makes it round.

4.	Type a value in the Stretch box.

Lowering the value makes a square nib rectangular and a round nib oval. A low value will create a more pronounced calligraphic effect.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box. The angle controls the orientation of the pen to the drawing surface.

Tip

You can adjust Stretch and Angle interactively by dragging in the Nib Shape box. Experiment to find the combination you want.

Note

To change line widths after creating the calligraphic outline, use the Width setting in the Outline Pen dialog box. Choosing a line width from the Outline menu will reset the Angle to zero degrees and Stretch to 100 percent, thus removing the calligraphic effect.

 Related Topics


Arrowhead Editor

The Arrowhead Editor lets you make changes to the existing line-ending shapes. You can stretch, scale, or move the arrowhead around in relation to the ending point of the line, but you cannot change its basic shape.

If you are looking for a specific effect, choose the line-ending shape closest to what you are looking for, and then edit it using the Arrowhead Editor.

 Related Topics


To apply line-ending shapes using the dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the left Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the end of the line.

Note

To swap arrowheads from one end of the line to another, click Options, Swap.

To remove an arrowhead, click Options, None.

 Related Topics


To apply line-ending shapes using the Pen Roll-Up

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Click the left Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the end of the line.

5.	Click Apply.

Notes

To remove an arrowhead, click the first option in the shape list.

 Related Topics


To stretch an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Drag on the solid handles along the sides of the arrow's box to stretch, or on the corner handles to scale.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To move an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Drag the hollow nodes along the arrow's outline.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To center an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Click Center in X to center the arrowhead horizontally.

Click Center in Y to center it vertically.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To flip an arrowhead

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Click Reflect in X to flip the arrowhead horizontally.

Click Reflect in Y to flip it vertically.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


Filling objects

Any object with a closed path can be filled in with a solid color or one of several Special Fill types. If you leave an object without a fill or remove an object's existing fill, objects behind it will show through as if it were transparent.

Fountain Fills

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, or a cascade of different colors. You can use pre-generated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.

Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials. You can choose from a series of pre-generated textures, or randomly generate variations.

Pattern Fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images that easily lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics to use as pattern fills, and you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns.

Uniform Fills

You can quickly fill an object with a solid color using the on-screen palette. If you want more control over the color, you should use the Color dialog box.

 Related Topics


The Special Fill Roll-Up

The Special Fill Roll-Up is a quick way to apply complicated fills to your objects. You can use the roll-up to apply a single fill, or leave it on screen to rapidly fill a group of objects. The following fills are available from the Special Fill Roll-Up:

Fountain Fills

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path.

Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials.

Pattern Fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images easily lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. There are three types of pattern fills:

A two-color bitmap pattern is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define in the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box.

A full-color bitmap is a regular color picture such as you might get with an electronic photograph.

A vector pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of just dots of color like a bitmap. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images, and are generally easier to manipulate.

 Related Topics


To make an object transparent using the Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the fill you want to remove.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click No Fill.

 Related Topics


To make an object transparent using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Choose one of the palettes from the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object with the fill you want to remove.

3.	Click No Color.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Fill tool

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click Black Fill or White Fill.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Choose one of the palettes from the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object.

3.	Click the palette's scroll arrows until the color you want is visible.

4.	Click the color you want with the left mouse button.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Color Roll-up

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Fill tool, Color Roll-Up.

3.	Choose the color you want (see Related Topics).

4.	Click Apply Fill.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Fill Color dialog box

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fill Color.

3.	Choose the color you want (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To copy an object's fill to another object

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Update From.

4.	Click the object with the fill you want to copy.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To change the default fill for graphic objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new graphic objects a transparent fill.

4.	Enable the Graphic option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new non-text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To change the default background fill for paragraph text

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new Paragraph text objects a transparent background.

4.	Enable the Paragraph Text option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new paragraph text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To change the default background fill for artistic text objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new Artistic text objects a transparent background.

4.	Enable the Artistic Text option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new artistic text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To set tile size using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Tile.

4.	Drag the small square along the bottom edge of the tiling boxes that appear in the object. Adjust the size of the outline until it meets your requirements.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Tile.

4.	Drag the left tiling box until the offset is correct.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of tiles using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Tile.

4.	Drag the right tiling box down and to the left. When it is below the left box, adjust the row offset.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of tiles using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Tile.

4.	Drag the right tiling box up or down to adjust the column offset.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


Fountain fills

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, a rainbow of several colors, or a set of color peaks and highlights. You can use pre-generated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.

You can change the number of color steps in a fill to give it a smoother or rougher appearance. However, since a large number of steps is slow to draw, you might want to limit how the fill appears on screen and how it prints.

The Preview Fountain Steps option in the Display pane of the Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are drawn on screen.

The Fountain Steps option in the Options pane of the Print Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are printed.

The Steps option in the Fountain Fill dialog box overrides these two settings when unlocked (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	In the Type list, click the type of fountain you want:

Linear Fountain creates a fill that changes color in one direction.

Radial Fountain creates a fill that changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards.

Conical Fountain creates a fill that radiates from the center of the object.

Square Fountain creates a fill that changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.

4.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

Tip

You can change the number of color steps in a fountain fill with the Steps option. Enable Unlock and enter a new value. When the Steps option is locked, the fill will print with the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and display with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box (see Related Topics)

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Fountain Fill.

4.	Click Linear Fountain to create a fill that changes color in one direction.

Click Radial Fountain to create a fill that changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards.

Click Conical Fountain to create a fill that radiates from the center of the object.

Click Square Fountain to create a fill that changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.

5.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

6.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

7.	Click Apply.

Tip

You can further refine the attributes of your fill by clicking Edit.

 Related Topics


To change the orientation of a fountain fill using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Adjust the Horizontal Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the left edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the right edge.

4.	Adjust the Vertical Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the bottom edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the top edge.

5.	Adjust the Angle setting until the fill is oriented the way you want it. Positive values will rotate the fill counter-clockwise, negative values will rotate it clockwise.

Note

The Horizontal and Vertical Offset options are not available for linear fountain fills.

The Angle option is not available for radial fountain fills.

 Related Topics


To change the orientation of a fountain fill using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Fountain Fill.

4.	Left-click and drag in the preview box to change the angle of the fill.

5.	Right-click and drag in the preview box to displace the center of the fill.

Tip

Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your adjustments to regular increments.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing only two colors

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Two Color.

4.	Click Direct Color Path.

5.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

6.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Tip

You can increase the percentage of start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing multiple colors

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Two Color.

4.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

6.	Click Clockwise Color Path to determine the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.

or

Click Counter-Clockwise Color Path to determine the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Note

You can increase the percentage of start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To specify the intermediate colors of a fountain fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Custom.

4.	Double-click in the preview ribbon to add a color marker.

You can move existing markers by dragging them along the preview ribbon, and delete them by double-clicking.

5.	Click a color in the palette to assign it to the marker.

You can change the color of an existing marker by selecting it and clicking a new color in the palette.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you achieve the desired effect.

 Related Topics


Pattern fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images that easily lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics to use as pattern fills, and you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns.

For information on a specific type of pattern fill, click the appropriate button:

 Two-color bitmap patterns%two_color_bitmap_patterns

 Full-color bitmap patterns%full_color_bitmap_patterns

 Vector patterns%vector_patterns


Two-color bitmap patterns

A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import an external bitmap to use as a two-color pattern, providing it is composed of just two colors. If you want to import a multi-colored pattern, use the Full-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics).

Transformations applied to objects with two-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


Two-Color Bitmap Pattern Editor

This dialog box lets you create your own two-color bitmap patterns. A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define in the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box.

Remember that two-color bitmap patterns are meant to be tiled. If the pattern you create is not symmetrical, it might not look very good as a tiled fill.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a two-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

5.	Click the Back color button and choose a color for the background.

6.	Click the Front color button and choose a color for the foreground.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a two-color bitmap pattern using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

4.	Click the preview box.

5.	Click the pattern you want.

6.	Click the left color button and choose a color for the foreground.

7.	Click the right color button and choose a color for the background.

8.	Click Apply.

Note

You can further refine the attributes of your fill by clicking Edit.

 Related Topics


To create a new two-color bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Create.

4.	Click the Bitmap Pattern size you want. The size you choose determines the resolution of the pattern.

5.	Click the Pen Size you want. The size you choose determines how many squares in the drawing area are filled when you click with the mouse.

6.	Click with the left mouse button to fill squares in the drawing area.

Click with the right mouse button to erase squares in the drawing area.

Note

Once you have completed your pattern, you can change its colors and tile properties just as you would any other two-color bitmap pattern. The pattern you create is added to the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To set the size of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a two-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create a two-color bitmap pattern fill from an imported image

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics). For best results, import graphics with only two colors.

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a two-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Full-color bitmap patterns

A full-color bitmap is a regular color picture such as you might get with an electronic photograph. They can vary widely in complexity, and it is best to use simpler bitmaps for fill patterns, as complex ones will be very memory-intensive and slow to draw. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import external bitmaps to use as full-color bitmap patterns. If you want to import a simple two-color or black and white bitmap, you might want to use the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics).

Transformations applied to objects with full-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a full-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a full-color bitmap pattern using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

4.	Click the preview box.

5.	Click the pattern you want.

6.	Click Apply.

Tip

You can further refine the attributes of your fill by clicking Edit.

 Related Topics


To set the size of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a full-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create full-color bitmap pattern fills from imported images

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics).

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a full-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Vector patterns

A vector pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of just dots of color like a bitmap. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images, and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can import any CorelDRAW file to use as a vector pattern.

Transformations applied to objects with vector pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a vector pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a vector pattern using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Vector Pattern.

4.	Click the preview box.

5.	Click the pattern you want.

6.	Click Apply

Tip

You can further refine the attributes of your fill by clicking Edit.

 Related Topics


To set the size of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a vector pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create vector pattern fills from imported images

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics).

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a vector pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. There are more than three hundred pre-generated textures, and each texture has a set of parameters that you can change to create millions of variations.

Texture fills add significantly to the size of your file and the time it takes to print. As such, you should avoid filling numerous or large objects with them.

When you rotate an object with a texture fill, the fill does not rotate. Re-sizing an object with a texture fill can distort the texture. To restore its appearance, apply the texture to the object a second time.

Note

You can use colors from any color model or palette for texture fills. However, if you apply a Spot color to a texture fill, it is converted to a Process color (CMYK) when you create color separations. Since the conversion may not reproduce exactly the same color, and since you would necessarily have four color plates in a CMYK separation, it's best to apply Process colors to texture fills.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a texture using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Texture.

3.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

4.	In the Textures List box, click the texture you want.

5.	Adjust the parameters to customize the texture as required. Click the Preview button to see the results of your modifications.

Tip

Click the Preview button to randomly change the unlocked parameters. You can unlock a parameter by enabling the Unlock button next to it.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a texture using the Special Fill Roll-Up

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Special Fill Roll-Up.

3.	Click Texture.

4.	In the upper list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

5.	Click the preview box to display a list of textures. Double-click the texture you want.

6.	Click Apply.

Tip

You can further refine the attributes of your fill by clicking Edit.

 Related Topics


To save a customized texture

1.	Make sure the texture you want to save is displayed in the Preview box.

2.	Click Add.

3.	Type a name in the Texture Name box. The name can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces. You can overwrite an existing texture by typing its name.

4.	Click the library in which you want to save the texture.

or

Type the name of a new library in the Library Name box.

Note

You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.


To delete a texture

1.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

2.	In the Texture List box, click the texture you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.

 Related Topics


PostScript textures

The PostScript Texture Fill dialog box fills the selected object with a special type of pattern fill that will only print on a PostScript or GDI printer. Adjustable parameters allow you to change the pattern's appearance.

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to print or to update on screen. Therefore, PostScript fills display as the letters "PS" rather than the actual texture. The PostScript Texture dialog box contains a pane where you can preview your texture.

When printing color separations, PostScript textures print as black and opaque; objects behind the texture will not show through even if you have made the texture transparent. If you print directly to a color printer, the background object will show through the transparent texture.

Textures that print successfully may be exported in Encapsulated PostScript(EPS) format for use in other programs.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a PostScript texture

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, PostScript Texture.

3.	Click the name of the texture you want.

4.	Adjust the parameters to customize the texture as required.

Tip

Enable the Preview Fill option to preview the texture with the current settings. Click Preview to refresh the image after changing the parameters.

 Related Topics


Page setup

The Page Setup dialog box lets you change various aspects of your Working Page. You can select from one of the pre-defined page sizes and orientations, including standard legal and letter paper, and dozens of label styles.

You can also create greeting cards, books, and booklets, and change the display color to view your drawings as they would print on colored paper.

The Page Setup and Print Options dialog boxes are very closely related, but they are not always synchronized. The Working Page that you see on screen can be different from the Printable Page.

If what you print is different from what you see on screen, make sure your Print Options and Page Setup settings are consistent (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To set the paper style of the Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Paper list box.

3.	Click the Paper style you want.

Tip

Click Set From Printer to set the size and orientation of your page to the current printer settings.

 Related Topics


To set the orientation of the Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable Landscape if you want the horizontal dimension of the page to be greater than the vertical dimension.

or

Enable Portrait if you want the vertical dimension of the page to be greater than the horizontal dimension.

Note

When you print the drawing, a message appears if the orientation you chose does not match the printer page orientation as specified with the Printer Setup command. Click Yes to change the printer's orientation to match that of the Working Page.

 Related Topics


To define a custom Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Paper list box.

3.	Click Custom.

4.	Type your custom dimensions in the Width and Height boxes.

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The dimensions are automatically converted when you change units.

Tip

Click Set From Printer to set the size and orientation of your page to the current printer settings.

 Related Topics


To set the layout style of the Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Layout list box.

3.	Click the Layout style you want.

Each Layout style is accompanied by a short description appearing just below the list box, and a graphical example in the preview box.

 Related Topics


To view facing pages

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Facing Pages option.

Note

Facing Pages is not available for the Tent Card and Top-Fold Card styles.

 Related Topics


To set the starting side of a multiple page document

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Start On list box.

3.	Click Left Side to start the document on a left-facing page.

or

Click Right Side to start the document on a right-facing page.

Note

Left First is only available for Full Page and Book styles.

 Related Topics


To set the color of the Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click Paper Color.

3.	Click the color you want.

Note

The Paper Color option is for reference purposes only; the color appears on the screen, but does not print. Use this option to see what your document would look like printed on colored paper.

 Related Topics


To display the borders of the Working Page

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Enable the Show Page Border option.

 Related Topics


To add a printable background frame

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Click Add Page Frame.

The frame is sized to fit the page and appears behind all objects on the screen. It has the default fill and outline attributes, which you can change the same way as you would for other objects.

 Related Topics


Custom labels

The Customize Label dialog box lets you modify existing label styles or create a label style from scratch. You can save your custom labels if you use them often, or just tweak a label style that doesn't quite match your printer settings.

You create each label on a separate Working page, so you can print several different labels on a single sheet, or use cut and paste to make a sheet of identical labels.

 Related Topics


To use a pregenerated label style

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Choose Labels from the Paper list box.

3.	Choose the label style you want from the Label Types pane.

 Related Topics


To make customized labels

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Choose Labels from the Paper list box.

3.	Choose the label style closest to the one you want from the Label Types pane.

4.	Click Customize Label.

5.	Set the label size and layout.

Note

Each label occupies a single page by itself. To create an entire page of identical labels, cut and paste your first image to a series of new pages.

 Related Topics


To save customized label styles

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Choose Labels from the Paper list box.

3.	Click Customize Label.

4.	Set the label size and layout.

5.	Click Save.

5.	Type a name for the new label style.

 Related Topics


To delete customized label styles

1.	Click Layout, Page Setup.

2.	Choose Labels from the Paper list box.

3.	Click Customize Label.

4.	Choose the label style you want to delete from the Label Style box.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


These controls let you specify the number of rows and columns of labels you want to appear on each sheet.


The available corner styles.


The available line cap styles.


These controls let you change the nib shape and angle to create calligraphic effects.


These controls specify the size of each label on the sheet.


These controls change the margins of a sheet of labels.


These controls change the distance between labels in a sheet.


The number of pages on each sheet of paper. Some layout styles have more than one page per sheet.


The width of the text on each page.


The width of the text on each page.


The type of fold or cut used in the specified layout style.


The height of the text on each page.


The height of the text on each page.


The label type.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing PostScript texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing uniform color fills.


Displays a pair of boxes inside the selected object for scaling and offsetting tiles.

Drag the left box to offset the first tile.

Drag the node along the bottom edge of the boxes to scale the tiles. Hold down the CTRL key as you drag to maintain the pattern's aspect.

Drag the right box down to offset alternating columns of tiles.

Drag the right box down and to the left to offset alternating rows of tiles.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's fill attributes in the Fill Roll-up. You can then easily apply the same fill to other objects.


Opens a dialog box where you can further refine your fill properties.


Applies your fill to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Changes the foreground color to one you select from a palette.


Changes the background color to one you select from a palette.


Displays a linear fountain in the Preview box.

To change the angle of the linear fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a radial fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a radial fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.


Displays a conical fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a conical fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a conical fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a square fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a square fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a square fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Shows the name of the current texture. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of the textures in this library.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Lists the available textures by name. Click on a name, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Each name represents a special type of pattern fill which will only print on a PostScript printer. In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Displays the current color.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the start of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the end of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a selection of dashed and dotted line styles.

Use the scroll bars to see other styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a palette of outline colors. Use the scroll bars to see other colors in the list. Click the one you want.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box where you can access all of the available Outline Pen controls.


Applies your choices to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default outline for new objects.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is particularly useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Toggles the current outline on and off. If the button is depressed, the object will have no outline.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays a pair of boxes inside the selected object for scaling and offsetting tiles.

Drag the left box to offset the first tile.

Drag the node along the bottom edge of the boxes to scale the tiles. Hold down the CTRL key as you drag to maintain the pattern's aspect.

Drag the right box down to offset alternating columns of tiles.

Drag the right box down and to the left to offset alternating rows of tiles.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's fill attributes in the Fill Roll-up. You can then easily apply the same fill to other objects.


Opens a dialog box where you can further refine your fill properties.


Applies your fill to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Previews the current fill.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new starting color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new ending color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Displays a linear fountain in the Preview box.

To change the angle of the linear fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a radial fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a radial fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.


Displays a conical fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a conical fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a conical fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a square fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a square fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a square fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Previews the current pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Opens the Load dialog box, where you can load a new vector pattern file.


These controls let you choose the foreground and background colors of your pattern.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors. This button is only active when there is a spot color selected for both the background and foreground.


Opens the Two-Color Pattern Editor, where you can create your own two-color patterns.


Opens the Import dialog box, where you can import a graphic to use as your pattern.


Permanently removes the current pattern from the pattern list.


Reveals controls for editing the pattern's tiling properties.


Sets the size of your pattern tiles. You can choose one of the pre-set sizes, or enter custom dimensions.


Sets the tile size to 0.25 x 0.25 inches, or to 25% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 0.50 x 0.50 inches, or to 50% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 1.00 x 1.00 inches, or to 100% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


The width of each tile. You can specify new tile widths from 0.1 to 15 inches.


The width of each tile.


Displays the units you are using to measure the tile width. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Width value is automatically converted when you change units.


The height  of each tile. You can specify new tile heights from 0.1 to 15 inches.


The height  of each tile.


Displays the units you are using to measure the tile height. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Height value is automatically converted when you change units.


Sets the offset of the first tile (and therefor, the rest of the pattern) relative to the top right-hand corner of the object. If you want the pattern to start flush with the corner, set these two values to zero.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Shifts rows or columns of tiles so that the pattern is staggered, rather than continuous.


Shifts alternating rows of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating columns of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Alters the pattern tiles so that they seem to be continuous.


Toggles between absolute and proportional tile sizes. When the option is enabled, the tiles will grow and shrink with the object.


The width of each tile. You can specify widths from 5 to 500% of the object width.


The width of each tile. You can specify widths from 5 to 500% of the object width.


The height of each tile. You can specify heights from 5 to 500% of the object height.


The height of each tile. You can specify heights from 5 to 500% of the object height.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your pattern as you draw it. Left-click to add a colored area to the grid, right-click to erase.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the pen size to 1 grid square.


Changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square.


Changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square.


Changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Shows the name of the current texture. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of the textures in this library.


Displays the current fountain fill type. Click in this field to choose one of the four fountain fill types.

A Linear fountain fill changes color in one direction. A Radial fountain fill changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards. A Conical fountain fill radiates from the center of the object like rays of light. A Square fountain fill changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift to the left, positive values shift to the right.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift the center down, positive values shift it up.


Changes the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Positive values rotate the fill counter-clockwise, negative values rotate it clockwise.


Changes the number of bands used to display and print the fountain fill. For a smoother gradation, increase the number of steps.


Toggles the lock on the Steps box.


Adds extra steps of the From and To colors to the ends of your fountain fill.


Previews the selected fountain fill.

You can change the fill's orientation by dragging the pointer in the preview box. Left-click to move the center of radial, conical and square fills. Right-click to change the angle of linear, conical, and square fills. Holding down the CTRL key while dragging constrains your adjustments to regular increments.


These controls let you modify the intermediate colors of your fill.


Determines the intermediate fill colors from a straight line beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.

This option produces a color series composed of blends of your From and To colors.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a starting color for your fill.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose an ending color for your fill.


Displays controls to set the starting and ending colors of your fill, and the color wheel path that the intermediated colors follow. You can create a direct blend containing only two colors, or a multi-colored rainbow blend.


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


Displays controls that let you manually determine the intermediate colors of your fountain fill. You can add up to 99 color markers to control your blend.


Shows the position of the current color marker. You can change a marker's position by editing its position value.


Opens a flyout from which you can change the current color.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Shows the positions of your color markers. Each triangle marks a peak of color in your fountain fill. Once you have selected a color marker by clicking it, you can change its color with the on-screen palette.

You reposition a peak by dragging it along the marker bar, and you delete it by double-clicking. You can add a new peak by double-clicking a blank spot on the bar.


Displays a list of pregenerated fountain fills. You can save a modified fill by typing a name in this field and clicking on the add button.


Saves the current fountain fill. If you have created the fill from scratch, you must first type a name in the Presets field.


Deletes the selected fill from the Presets list.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, where you can add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.

You cannot overwrite textures in the Style Library, but you can modify them and then save the modified textures in other libraries.


Deletes the selected texture. You can delete textures from any Library except the Styles library.


Shows a list of the textures in the current texture library. Click on the texture you want, or use the scrollbars to see the entire list.


Displays a preview of the texture with the current parameters. Click the Preview button to update the preview after making changes to the texture parameters.


Updates the texture preview to reflect any changes to the texture parameters.

If you have not made any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box where you can set the resolution and maximum tile width of your texture fill.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes since the last time you updated the preview, clicking the Preview button randomizes all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes since the last time you updated the preview, clicking the Preview button randomizes all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


The name of your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


The name of the library where you want to store your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


Sets the resolution at which your pattern will print.


Sets the maximum width of your pattern at full resolution. Larger tile widths take more memory to draw.


The amount of memory your bitmap will use at its maximum tile width. Reduce the Maximum Tile Width value to conserve memory.


Returns the texture options to their default settings.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new color.


These controls let you add arrowheads and other line-ending shapes to the ends of lines (open paths).


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads and symbols you can apply to the beginning of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key.

To find out which terminus of a line is the beginning, select the line with the Shape Tool and press the HOME key.


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads and symbols you can apply to the end of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.

To find out which terminus of a line is the end, select the line with the Shape Tool and press the END key.


Opens a menu of options that you can apply to the start of the line.

The None option removes the current arrowhead from your line.

The Swap option moves the arrowhead to the other end of the line.

The Edit option opens the Arrowhead Editor, where you can change the size, Placement , and general shape of the arrowhead.

The Delete option deletes the current arrowhead.


Opens a menu of options that you can apply to the end of the line.

The None option removes the current arrowhead from your line.

The Swap option moves the arrowhead to the other end of the line.

The Edit option opens the Arrowhead Editor, where you can change the size, Placement , and general shape of the arrowhead.

The Delete option deletes the current arrowhead.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Displays the units you are using to measure the line width. Click in this field to display a list of units. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.


Opens a flyout containing a list of dashed styles that you can apply to your line. Use the scroll bars to see other line styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key

You can create dotted lines by applying round Line Caps to a line style with short, widely-spaced dashes.


Draws mitered (pointed) corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Draws rounded corners for polygons, and selects a round nib shape.


Draws blunted corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Truncates the line at each endpoint.


Draws round caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Draws square caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of varying Angle and Stretch. You can also change the shape of the nib by dragging in the preview box.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of varying Angle and Stretch. You can also change the shape of the nib by dragging in the preview box.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Resets the Angle value to 0.0 degrees and the Stretch value to 100%.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is particularly useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can stretch the arrowhead with the solid markers, and move it with the hollow markers.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can stretch the arrowhead with the solid markers, and move it with the hollow markers.


Flips the arrowhead horizontally.


Flips the arrowhead vertically.


Centers the arrowhead horizontally with respect to the X marker.


Centers the arrowhead vertically with respect to the X marker.


Magnifies the arrowhead by a factor of four. Helpful when positioning the arrowhead.


Selects a line thickness. Each click on the scroll arrows changes the thickness by .01 inches. Scroll down repeatedly for the Hairline or No Outline options.


Selects a line thickness from .001 to 0.5 inches. Each click on the scroll arrows changes the thickness by .01 inches. Scroll down repeatedly for the Hairline or No Outline options.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the ends of open paths. The left and right selectors let you choose different arrowheads for both ends of the path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the ends of open paths. The left and right selectors let you choose different arrowheads for both ends of the path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a selection of dashed and dotted line styles.

Use the scroll bars to see other styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a palette of outline colors. Use the scroll bars to see other colors in the list. Click the one you want.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's outline attributes in the roll-up. You can then easily apply the same outline to other objects.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box where you can access all of the available Outline Pen controls.


Applies your choices to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default outline for new objects.


Swaps the height and width values so that the vertical dimension of the page is greater than the horizontal dimension. This switch is not available with paper styles that have fixed orientations, such as labels and envelopes.


Swaps the height and width values so that the horizontal dimension of the page is greater than the vertical dimension. This switch is not available with paper styles that have fixed orientations, such as labels and envelopes.


The current paper style. Click in this field to get a list of available paper styles. When you select a style, the height and width values will adjust to reflect the paper you are using.

Use the Custom style to manually determine the size of your page. Use the Labels style to create your own labels.


The width of the page. When you modify this value, the paper style is automatically set to Custom.


The height of the page. When you modify this value, the paper style is automatically set to Custom.


Displays the units you are using to measure the page size. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Height and Width values are automatically converted when you change units.


Queries the current printer for the page size and orientation, and displays those dimensions in the Width and Height fields.


Previews the page dimensions and orientation, and shows examples of the page layout you have selected.


Previews the page dimensions and orientation, and shows examples of the page layout you have selected.


Toggles the working page border in the Drawing Window. When you disable this option, the shadowed page outline is no longer displayed in the Drawing Window.

Note that any part of your drawing that falls outside the border will not be printed, so it's a good idea to make sure this option is enabled before printing.


Displays two facing pages at the same time in the Drawing Window.

When this option is enabled, and your document has multiple pages, individual objects can lie across two facing pages. Such objects will not print in the page gutter.

This option is not available for top-fold and tent cards.


Indicates whether you want to begin a document with facing pages on the left or right page. This option is only available when using the Book layout style or the Facing Pages option.


Puts a printable background frame the same size as the page on the screen. The frame will have the default fill and outline, and you can change it the same way as you would any other object.


Opens a flyout that lets you color the Preview screen to approximate the paper you plan to print on.

The color you choose is for viewing and information only; it does not print. If you want a color background that does print, choose Add Page Frame.


Displays the current page layout style. Click in this field to get a list of available styles. When you choose a style from the list, an example of it appears in the preview box above.

Once you've chosen a page layout style, you still need to insert the required number of pages for the particular style. For example, Side-Fold Card prints four pages per sheet, however, when you start a new drawing and choose this style, you still need to insert the three remaining pages.

Note that the layout styles in the Print Options Dialog Box will not work properly unless the Full Page Layout is selected here. Any other combination will have unpredictable results.


Opens the Customize Label dialog box, where you can modify an existing label style, or create your own labels from scratch.


Shows the available label styles, grouped by manufacturer.


Saves the current custom label setting under a name you specify.


Automatically adjusts the margins to evenly space the labels on the page.


Automatically equalizes the space between labels. If possible, auto spacing will keep the labels within the defined margins.


Adjusts the bottom page margin.


Adjusts the number of label columns.


Removes the current label style from the Label Style list.


Automatically sets the right margin to mirror the left, and the bottom margin to mirror the top.


Adjusts the height of each label.


Adjusts the horizontal space between labels.


Sets the Gutter units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


Adjusts the left page margin.


Sets the Margin units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


Previews the current label settings.


Adjusts the right page margin.


Toggles the label corners from square to rounded.


Adjusts the number of label rows.


Shows the name of the current label style.


Adjusts the top page margin.


Adjusts the vertical space between labels.


Adjusts the width of each label.


Sets the Label Size units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


The name of the new custom label style.


Three unique PHOTO-PAINT controls in the Full-Color Bmp Pattern DB


Enable to use the original (default) tile size of the currently selected bitmap pattern.


Enable to scale the tile pattern to fit entirely within the tile Preview window.


Enable to maintain identical tile width and height values. When enabled, any value entered in one number box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Lists the available textures by name. Click a texture, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Note

In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


The current texture. Enable Preview fill to preview the texture, and click Refresh to regenerate the texture after changing the parameters.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate. In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Toggles the PostScript texture preview.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate.


Regenerates the texture preview with the current parameters.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture. To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, enable Preview fill and click the Refresh button.


Saves the current custom label setting under a name you specify.


Removes the current label style from the Label Style list.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, where you can add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.


Deletes the selected texture.


Locks and unlocks the parameter.


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Displays a linear fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a radial fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a conical fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a square fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose colors. Click More to open the Color dialog box.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Determines the intermediate fill colors from a straight line beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.


Removes the current fill or outline color.


Lets you adjust the tiling in the current object.


Opens the Fill Tool flyout.


Opens the Special Fill Roll-Up.


Displays controls for editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Opens the PostScript Texture dialog box.


Deletes the fill of the current object, leaving it transparent.


Fills the current object with solid black.


Fills the current object with solid white.


Opens the Color Roll-Up.


Opens the Fill Color dialog box.


Opens the Outline Tool flyout.


Applies a hairline (0.25-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a thin (2-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a medium (8-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a medium-thick (16-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a thick (24-point) outline to the current object.


Opens the Pen Roll-Up.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box.


Applies a solid black outline to the current object.


Applies a solid white outline to the current object.


Removes the outline from the current object.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line styles. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Rounds off the ends of each line segment so that it appears to be dotted.


Determines the corner shape, and, therefore, the nib shape of the outline.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line -ending shapes. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


The nodes marked in red stretch the arrowhead in one direction.


The nodes marked in red scale the arrowhead evenly.


The nodes marked in red move the arrowhead without changing its size or shape.


2D (two-dimensional)

3D (three-dimensional)

A sizes

ABK

Active window

AI

Alignment, relative

Alignment, text

Alpha channel

Ambient_light

ANSI

Anti-alias

Application Command

argument

array

Artistic Text

Ascender

ASCII

Aspect ratio

Attitude

Attributes

Auto-panning

Autotrace

Axis

B size

Backup

BAK

Baseline

Baseline Shift

Bezier Curve

Bezier drawing mode

binary

Bit depth

Bitmap

Bitmap texture

Black point

Bleed

Blend

BMP

Boolean variable

Bounding box

breakpoint

Brighten

Brightness

Brightness and Contrast filter

Bulb light

Bullet

by reference

by value

Calibration

Calibration bar

Calligraphic

callout

Cap height

CDR

Cell

Center of rotation

CGM

Channel

Character Attributes

Character Code

Character Set

Check box

Child

Choke

Chromaticity

Cicero

CIE

Click

Clipart

Clipboard

Clipping hole

Clone

CMY

CMYK

Co-planar

Color depth

Color Manager

Color mask

Color mode

Color Palette

Color proof

Color Separation

Color Tolerance

Color, RGB

Colorimetric

Combining

Command

Command button

compile-time

Complex Object

Component, shader

Composite

Compound blend

Concentric

Conical camera

Conical fill

connector lines

constant

Constrain

Continuous tone

Contrast

Control menu

Control object

Control point

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

CORELAPP.INI

CORELDRW.INI

CORELFLT.INI

CORELFNT.INI

CORELPNT.INI

CORELPRN.INI

CorelTRACE

CPT

Create Object Mode

Crop

Crop marks

Cross section

Crosshairs

Cursor

Curve object

Cusp

Cusp Node=

Data type

Database

Datasheet

debug

declaration, constant

declaration, variable

Default Paragraph Text

Default printer

Default settings

Defringe

Densitometer scale

Descender

Deselect

Destination file

Device driver

Dialog box

DIC

Didot

Dimension lines

Direction keys

Directory

Display screen:

Distant light

Dither

Dithered color

DLL

Dot gain

Double-click

Downloadable fonts definitions=

DPI

Drag

Drawing window

Drive

Duotone

Dupont palette

DXF

Edit

Editable preview

Em

Embedded object

Emboss

Emulsion

En

End node

Envelope

EOF

EPS

Equalize filter

Extension

Extrude

Face

Fade out

Feathering

FH3

Field

File previewer

Film

Film recorder

Filter

Flyout

FOCOLTONE

Folder

Font

Force Justification

Force Line Breaks

Fountain fill

Four-color process

Frame

Freehand drawing mode

Full-color pattern

function

Functions, Shader

G-Buffer (Geometry Buffer)

Gamut

Gamut Mapping

GDF

GEM

GIF

Global Universe

Gradient

Gravity

Gray component replacement (GCR)

Grayscale image

Greeking

Grid

Group

Guidelines

Gutter

Halftone

Halftone screen

Handles

Hanging Indent

Header

Hierarchy

Highlight

Highlighting box

Hints

Histogram

Hot Point

Hotkeys

Hourglass cursor

HPGL

HSB

Hue

Icon

identifier

Image setter

Indent

initialization

Insertion Point

Instance

Intensity

Inter-character Spacing

Inter-Line Spacing

Inter-Paragraph Spacing

Inter-Word Spacing

Interruptible Display

intrinsic statement

Isometric camera

Jaggies

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

Justify

Kerning

LAB

Landscape

Layer

Leader Tabs

Letter Spacing

Limitcheck error

Line art

Line style

Linear fill

Linked object

Lino

List box

Local Universe

LPI

Luminosity

Marquee

Marquee select

Mask

Mask Channel

Master

Master layer

Maximize

Menu

Menu bar

Merge mode

Minimize

Mirror

Mirror Editing=

Modeling_box

Moire pattern

Monochrome

Multiple select

Negative

Nested powerclips

Newspaper-Style Columns

Nodes

Object

Object/Group Coordinate System

One-point perspective

Opacity

Opaque

Operator

Orientation

Overprint

Page border

Paint Color

Paint mode

Paint program

Paint shape

Palette

PANTONE Process colors palette(definition)=

PANTONE Spot colors palette(definition)=

Paper Color

Paragraph Text

Parent

PAT

Path

Path name

PCT

PCX

Photo CD

Photographic Chroma Mapping

Photoshop PSD

PIC

Pica

PICT

PIF

Pipeline

Pitch

Pixel

Pixmap

Plane

PLT

Plug-in filters

Point

Point of view (also viewpoint)

Point Size=

Portrait

Position, absolute

Position, relative

Positive

PostScript

PostScript textures

PowerLine Node=

Powerlines

Preset brush type

Preview

Preview screen

Primary mouse button

Printable page

procedure

Process color

Projection

Proof

Pure color

QuickTime

Radial fill

Radio button

Range Kerning

Rasterizer

Ray tracing

Reference

Reflection

Refraction

Registration mark

Render

Resample

Resident fonts

Resolution

return value

RGB

Roll

Roll-up

Root

Rotate

Ruler crosshairs

Rulers

run

runtime

Sans Serif

Saturation

Scale

Scaling, object

Scaling, text

Scanner

Scitext

SCODL

Screen angles

Screen frequency

script

Scroll

Secondary mouse button

seed value

Segments

Select

Sentence element

Serif

Service bureau

Shader

Shader Tree

Shadow

Shape

Skew

Skinning

Smooth

Smooth Node=

Snap

Source file

Specific Light

Spot color

Spot light

Spreads

Square fill

Start node

Status line

Stretch

Style Template

Styles

Subpaths

subroutine

Subscript

Superscript

Sweep Path

Symbol

Symmetrical

Symmetrical Node=

syntax

Tab

Template

Text Styles

Texture fill

Texture map

TGA

Threshold

Thumbnail

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

Tile

Tiling

Tint

Tints

Title bar

Toggle

Toolbox

TOYO Palette

trace

Transformation

Translation

Translucence

Transparency mask

Transparent

Trap

True Color

TrueType Fonts

TRUMATCH

Two-color pattern

Two-point perspective

Type Assist

Type style

type-declaration character

Typeface

Undercolor removal (UCR)

Uniform color

Universe

variable

Vector graphics

Vertex

Viewpoint

Weight

Welding

WFN

White Point

WIN.INI

Window

Wireframe view

WMF

Word Spacing

Working Box

Working Box System

Working page

WPG

WYSIWYG

X-height

Yaw

YIQ

Z-Buffer


Snap To commands
Using the Snap To commands

CorelDRAW’s Snap To commands let you force objects into perfect horizontal and/or vertical alignment. These commands let you align objects with the grid, with guidelines, and with other objects quickly and precisely. This feature is useful for drawing objects of the same dimension and for aligning objects with each other.

 Related Topics


To snap an object to the grid

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap To Grid command. (The option is enabled when a check mark appears beside the command.)

2.	Select the object and move it to align with the desired grid point.

Note

You can adjust the spacing between the grid points using the Grid & Ruler Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


To snap an object to a guideline

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap To Guidelines command. (The option is enabled when a check mark appears beside the command.)

2.	Select the object and move it to align with the desired guideline.

Note

When one of the sides of the object’s highlighting box approaches the guideline, the object snaps to it.

Tip

Zoom in to place the object more precisely.

 Related Topics


To snap an object to another object

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap To Objects command.

2.	Select the object you want to snap to another object and move it to align with the second object.

Notes

In Wireframe view, and for objects without fills, you can select any spot on the object's outline. In Editable preview, you can select anywhere on a filled object.

If you select the object within the snapping range of a node, it automatically snaps to the node on the object.

Tip

Zoom in to place the object more precisely.

 Related Topics


To disable object snapping

Click Layout, Snap to None.

 Related Topics


To enable all Snap To options

Click Layout, Snap to All.

 Related Topics


Working with layers

CorelDRAW’s Layers Manager provides controls that let you organize your drawing on a series of invisible planes. Each of these planes can contain a portion of your drawing. For example, you can create objects on the Guides layer and use them as the basis for the rest of your drawing. You can even accelerate editing and screen redrawing by making layers visible only when you need to work on them. The Layers Manager also lets you:

save time by printing only selected layers

lock layers to prevent accidental changes

display and print the grid and guidelines

change the order of layers

In a multi-layer drawing, the order of the layers determines the absolute arrangement of all the objects in the drawing. For example, if you have several objects on two different layers, selecting the bottom object on the lower layer and choosing To Front puts the object on top of all objects on its layer. Objects on the upper layer will still overlay any objects on the lower layer.

If you select multiple objects on different layers, the Order commands in the Arrange menu function as expected, but change an object's order only on its particular layer. To change an object's order relative to objects on another layer, you can copy the object to the other layer, then use the stacking commands to move the object to its final position.

 Related Topics


To add a new layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], New.

3.	Use the default layer name or type a new one.

Note

 The new layer becomes the active layer.

 Related Topics


To rename a layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Rename.

3.	Type a new name for the layer and press ENTER.

Note

You can’t rename a locked layer or any of the three default layers (Grid, Guides, and Desktop).

 Related Topics


To delete a layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click the name of the layer you want to delete.

3.	Click [image], Delete.

Notes

When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on that layer.

You can’t delete a locked layer or any of the three default layers (Grid, Guides, and Desktop).

 Related Topics


To change the active layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Double-click the name of the layer you want to make active.

Tip

Making the Grid or Guides layers active lets you change the color of the grid markers or guidelines. Activating the Guides layer also lets you draw objects for use as guides.

 Related Topics


To change a layer's position in the stacking order

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Point to the name of the layer you want to move, then drag it to the desired position.

 Related Topics


To move an object to another layer

1.	Select the object you want to move.

2.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

3.	Click [image], Move To.

4.	Click the name of the layer to which you want to move the object.

Note

If you move an object to a layer below its current layer, CorelDRAW places the object behind all other objects on the layer above it. If you move an object to a layer above its current layer, CorelDRAW places the object in front of all objects on the layer below it.

 Related Topics


To copy an object to another layer

1.	Select the object you want to copy.

2.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

3.	Click [image], Copy To.

4.	Click the name of the layer to which you want to copy the object.

Note

If you copy an object to a layer below its current layer, CorelDRAW places the object behind all other objects on the layer above it. If you copy an object to a layer above its current layer, CorelDRAW places the object in front of all objects on the layer below it.

 Related Topics


To lock a layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Disable the Editable check box.

Tip

You can also lock a layer by clicking its pencil icon ( [image]). You’ll find a pencil icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is locked, its pencil icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To unlock a layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Enable the Editable check box.

Tip

You can also unlock a layer by clicking its pencil icon ( [image]). You’ll find a pencil icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is locked, its pencil icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To make a layer visible

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Enable the Visible check box.

Tip

You can also make a layer visible by clicking its eye icon ( [image]). You’ll find an eye icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is invisible, its eye icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To make a layer invisible

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Disable the Visible check box

Tip

You can also make a layer invisible by clicking its eye icon ( [image]). You’ll find an eye icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is invisible, its eye icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To make a layer printable

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Enable the Printable check box.

Tip

You can also make a layer printable by clicking its printer icon ( [image]). You’ll find a printer icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is unprintable, its printer icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To make a layer non-printable

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], Settings.

3.	Disable the Printable check box.

Tip

You can also make a layer unprintable by clicking its printer icon ( [image]). You’ll find a printer icon beside each layer name in the Layers Manager. When a layer is unprintable, its printer icon appears grayed out.

 Related Topics


To work with multiple layers

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Click [image], and enable the Edit Across Layers command.

 Related Topics


To identify objects on a layer

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Double-click the name of the layer you want.

3.	Click [image], Settings.

4.	Enable the Override Full Color View check box.

5.	Click the Layer Color button.

6.	Choose the color you want to apply to the objects on the selected layer.

Any objects on the selected layer appear as wireframes in the color you choose. You can restore the objects' original properties by disabling the Override Full Color View check box.

Tip

You can also choose a color using the Layer Color button at the bottom of the Layers Manager.

 Related Topics


To create guides from objects

1.	Click Layout, Layers Manager.

2.	Drag the horizontal arrow to Guides to make the Guides layer active.

3.	Draw objects you want to use as guides.

Notes

The objects you draw will appear as dashed outlines.

Objects on the drawing layers always snap to the guide objects even if the Snap To Guidelines command is disabled.

 Related Topics


Ordering objects on a layer

A CorelDRAW drawing can be described as a series of layers containing objects stacked on top of one another. The order of these objects [image] the stacking order [image] determines their absolute appearance and, therefore, that of the drawing.

The Order commands let you change the stacking order. You can move any object within the stacking order using the To Front, To Back, Back One, Forward One, and Reverse Order commands. In addition, you can use the Before Object and After Object commands to move an object to a specific place in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of 20 objects and you want to move Object 2 in front of Object 18, you can use the Order and Before Object commands to place it precisely where you want it.

The stacking order is evident when you display or print overlapping objects with contrasting properties. An object that's higher in the stacking order appears and prints on top of those lower in the order. If objects do not overlap, the stacking order isn’t obvious and so neither is the effect of changing their order.

Grouping objects puts them in the same position in the stacking order. If you select more than one object and choose any of the Order commands, the objects move together and keep the same order relative to each other. Grouping objects also moves them all to the active layer (the one highlighted in the Layers Manager).

 Related Topics


To move an object to the front of a layer

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, To Front.

 Related Topics


To move an object to the back of a layer

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, To Back.

 Related Topics


To move an object forward one on a layer

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, Forward One.

 Related Topics


To move an object backward one on a layer

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, Backward One.

 Related Topics


To reverse the stacking order of objects on a layer

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, Reverse Order.

 Related Topics


To move an object to a specific place in the stacking order

1.	Select the object you want to move.

2.	Click Arrange, Order, In Front Of (or Behind).

3.	Using the horizontal arrow that appears, click the desired object.

 Related Topics


Aligning and distributing objects

CorelDRAW provides many powerful tools to help you align and distribute objects in your drawings. The Align & Distribute command, for example, gives you access to controls that allow you to align objects with one another and/or with a specific part of your drawing. You can also use this command to distribute objects in your drawings in relation to one another or to the drawing page. You can also choose to align objects manually or automatically to the grid, to a guideline, or to other objects.

 Related Topics


To align an object with a guideline

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap To Guidelines command. (The option is enabled when a check mark appears beside the command.)

2.	Select the object and move it to align with the desired guideline.

Tip

Zoom in to place the object more precisely.

 Related Topics


To align an object with the grid visually

1.	Click Layout and enable the Snap To Grid command. (The option is enabled when a check mark appears beside the command.)

2.	Select the object and move it to align with the desired grid point.

Tip

Zoom in to place the object more precisely.

 Related Topics


To align objects using the Align & Distribute Roll-Up

1.	Select the objects you want to align.

2.	Click Arrange, Align and Distribute.

3.	Click a Horizontal alignment button or a Vertical alignment button or one of each.

4.	From the Align to list box choose Center of Page, Edge of Page, or Edge of Selection.

5.	Click Apply.

 Related Topics


To distribute objects

1.	Select the objects you want to distribute.

2.	Click Arrange, Align and Distribute.

3.	Click the Horizontal Distribute button or the Vertical Distribute button or both.

4.	Choose an option from the Distribute To list box.

Choose Extent of Selection to distribute the objects only within the area defined by the selected objects.

Choose Extent of Page to distribute the objects across the page.

5.	Click Apply.

Note

When you hold down SHIFT and click the objects to select them, the last object selected will maintain its position if you distribute to Extent of Selection.

 Related Topics


To set distribute options

1.	Click Arrange, Align and Distribute.

2.	Click [image].

3.	Use the list boxes provided to define how objects will be distributed.

 Related Topics


 Aligns the left edge of the selected objects vertically.

 Aligns the center of the selected objects vertically.

 Aligns the right edge of the selected objects vertically.


 Aligns the top edge of the selected objects horizontally.

 Aligns the center of the selected objects horizontally.

 Aligns the bottom edge of the selected objects horizontally.


Distributes the selected objects horizontally.


Distributes the selected objects vertically.


Grouping objects

CorelDRAW’s Group command lets you bind objects together and manipulate them as a single unit. You can use the Ungroup command to separate grouped objects.

 Related Topics


To group objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to group.

2.	Click Arrange, Group.

 Related Topics


To ungroup objects

1.	Click any object in the group.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

Tip

If you have grouped together two or more groups, click Arrange, Ungroup to ungroup one level at time.

 Related Topics


To select individual objects in a group

Hold down CTRL and click on the object you want.

Note

Notice the handles on the object’s highlighting box are round rather than square; this is to indicate you have selected a child object which is part of a group of objects.

 Related Topics


To select an object in a nested group

Hold down CTRL and click the object until its highlighting box appears.

Note

Notice the handles on the object’s highlighting box are round rather than square; this is to indicate you have selected a child object which is part of a group of objects.

 Related Topics


Combining objects

CorelDRAW’s Combine command lets you join curve and/or line segments, thereby creating a single curve object. If you use the Combine command on rectangles, ellipses, or text objects, CorelDRAW converts them to curves, then converts them to a single curve object. If you use the Combine command on overlapping objects, you create clipping holes.

When you combine objects with different fills and outlines, CorelDRAW fills and outlines the combined object using the attributes of the last-selected object. If you marquee-select the objects, CorelDRAW uses the attributes of the bottom object.

Combining objects can provide many benefits. These benefits include:

conservation of memory for graphics that contain many lines and curves

joining two line or curve segments

creating clipping holes or masks

aligning nodes in different objects

You can use the Break Apart command to separate combined objects.

 Related Topics


To combine objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to combine.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

 Related Topics


To combine objects to create a mask or clipping holes

1.	Select the objects you want to combine.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

3.	Fill and outline the mask as desired.

You can now move the mask so that it overlaps the object you want to show through the clipping holes.

Note

The objects you combine must overlap if you want to create clipping holes.

Tip

Click Arrange, Order, To Front or Forward One to place the mask on top of the other object.

 Related Topics


To separate combined objects

1.	Select any of the combined objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Break Apart.

Note

You can break apart Artistic text using the Break Apart command; however, you must first convert the text to curves using the Convert to Curves command on the Arrange menu.

 Related Topics


Welding objects

CorelDRAW’s Weld command lets you fuse multiple objects together. If the objects overlap, their paths join to create a single curve object that assumes the fill and outline attributes of the target object (the object to which you are welding the selected object or objects). If the objects do not overlap, they form a weld group and assume the attributes of the target object, but appear as separate objects. Objects must overlap to have their paths join.

You can also choose to create a welded object but leave the original object (or objects) and/or target object intact. This way, you can use these objects in your drawing as well as the welded object.

You can weld any number of objects at once. You can even weld objects on different layers, provided you have enabled the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager). Objects on different layers that are welded form one object that resides on the last-selected object’s layer. If you marquee-select and weld objects on different layers, the welded object resides on the bottom object’s layer.

Note

It is not possible to weld a powerline, dimension line or the master  of a clone to an object.  You can however weld clones.

 Related Topics


To weld objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to weld.

2.	Click Arrange, Weld.

3.	Enable the Target Object check box to keep a copy of the target object after welding.

Enable the Other Object(s) check box to keep a copy of the selected object(s) after welding.

4.	Click Weld To.

5.	Select the object to which you want to weld the other objects. (You can click one of the objects you selected in step 1.)

Notes

You can also weld single objects with intersecting lines. While its appearance doesn't change, the object breaks into several subpaths. You then delete the interior subpaths to remove the holes.

You can weld objects on different layers if you enable the Edit Across Layers option (found in the Layers Manager).

You cannot weld a PowerLine, group, or the master object of a clone.

Tip

If you enabled Target Object and/or Other Object(s), move the welded object to see the original object(s).

 Related Topics


Trimming an object

CorelDRAW’s Trim command lets you reshape an object by separating its paths at points where the object overlaps (or is overlapped by) another object. You can use this feature to generate a complex shape very quickly by using simple objects. The Trim command applies to the last object you selected. After trimming, new nodes appear to show where trimming occurred. You can move the objects apart to see the full effect of the trim.

The trimmed object retains any outline or fill attributes you specified. If you marquee-select the objects, CorelDRAW trims the bottom object. There is no limit to the number of objects you select when you trim an object. You can even trim using objects on different layers, provided you have enabled the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager).

Notes

You cannot use grouped objects to trim an object, nor can you trim a grouped object.

It is not possible to use a powerline, dimension line or the master  of a clone to trim an object.  You can however  use clones to trim objects.

 Related Topics


To trim an object

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select at least two overlapping objects.

2.	Click Arrange, Trim.

3.	Enable the Target Object check box to keep a copy of the target object after trimming.

Enable the Other Object(s) check box to keep a copy of the selected object(s) after trimming.

4.	Click Trim.

5.	Click the object you want to trim. (You can click one of the objects you selected in step 1.)

Notes

You can trim objects on different layers if you enable the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager).

You cannot trim a PowerLine, group, or master object of a clone.

Tip

If you enabled Target Object and/or Other Object(s), move the trimmed object to see the original object(s).

 Related Topics


Intersecting objects

CorelDRAW’s Intersection command lets you create a new object using the area common to two or more overlapping objects. Intersection joins the objects’ paths at the points where they intersect. The intersected object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last-selected object. If you marquee-select the objects, CorelDRAW uses the fill and outline attributes of the bottom object. In either case, however, you can select the newly created object and change its fill and outline attributes. By enabling the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager), you can intersect objects on different layers.

Note

It is not possible to intersect a powerline, dimension line or the master  of a clone with an object.  You can use clones to intersect with other objects.

 Related Topics


To intersect objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the objects you want to intersect.

2.	Click Arrange, Intersection.

3.	Enable the Target Object check box to keep a copy of the target object after intersection.

Enable the Other Object(s) check box to keep a copy of the selected object(s) after intersection.

4.	Click Intersect With.

5.	Click the object with which you want the selected objects to intersect. (You can click one of the objects you selected in step 1.)

Notes

You can intersect objects on different layers if you enable the Edit Across Layers command (found in the Layers Manager).

You cannot intersect a PowerLine, group, or master object of a clone.

 Related Topics


Overview of CorelDRAW

Welcome to CorelDRAW, a vector-based drawing program with extensive text-handling and precision-drawing features. With its multi-faceted drawing, text, and layout capabilities, CorelDRAW is the ideal tool for virtually any design project.

We at Corel are extremely excited about this version of CorelDRAW. It features a streamlined, customizable interface, improvements to already-favorite features, and a range of new tools and features that we’re sure you’ll find exciting, too. These include multi-document interface (MDI) capabilities and 32-bit processing to help you work faster and with more power, precision, and accuracy than ever before.

Once again, CorelDRAW meets all your graphics needs.

To learn about the CorelDRAW screen, click Related Topics.

 Related Topics


The CorelDRAW screen

If you’re a first-time user, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with some of CorelDRAW's terms and concepts before you start using the program. Even if you’re an experienced user of CorelDRAW, you’ll notice that we’ve made a number of changes since Version 5. In either case, you’ll find this basic information helpful and informative as you begin using your new version of CorelDRAW.

To access specific information about any area of the CorelDRAW screen, click on the desired area of the graphic below. When you finish reading the information you selected, click the Back button that appears along the top of the Help window to return to this page.


Color palette

CorelDRAW provides an on-screen color palette for choosing outline and fill colors. By default, a one-row palette appears along the bottom of the screen. To choose a fill color, click the color palette with the left mouse button; to choose an outline color, click it with the right mouse button. To scroll through the colors one at a time, click either the left or right scroll button with the left mouse button. Clicking with the right mouse button takes you to the first or last color on the palette. Clicking the X that appears at the left end of the palette removes the object’s fill if you click with the left mouse button, or outline if you click with the right button.

You can move the color palette anywhere on the screen by clicking the border around the palette and dragging it. Placing it on the screen turns it into a floating palette with a title bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the window docks the palette there, making it part of the window border.

You can expand the color palette to view up to five rows of colors at once by clicking the up button that appears on the right side of the color palette. The palette displayed is determined by the currently selected color model. You can select a different color model by clicking View, Color Palette.


Drawing window

The large white portion of the screen is the drawing window. The rectangle in the center with the drop shadow represents your printable page. Normally, you can only print the part of your drawing that falls within the borders of this page.

When you can see both the outlines and the fills of the objects in your drawing, you are working in editable preview mode. Editable preview is the default mode when you start CorelDRAW. You can also view your drawing in Wireframe view mode, in which CorelDRAW displays only the outlines of objects in your drawing. In Wireframe view, the screen redraws more quickly. In most cases, you’ll notice that your machine works faster when you work in Wireframe view.


Horizontal/vertical scroll bars

Used to move the current viewing window to view other areas of a drawing that won’t fit on your screen. This action is called “panning” the drawing window. Panning is particularly useful when you are using a zoomed-in view.

Tip

CorelDRAW has an Auto-Panning feature that scrolls the view automatically when you drag beyond the edges of the drawing window. You can enable and disable this feature by clicking the View tab in the Options dialog box.


Menu bar

A special area displayed across the top of a window directly below the title bar, the menu bar displays the names of the menus. Clicking a menu name displays a list of commands for accessing CorelDRAW’s functions.


Page counter

CorelDRAW lets you create multi-page documents. The page counter box in the bottom left corner of the drawing window displays the number of pages in your drawing. You go to a page by clicking the page forward and page back arrows that appear on either side of the page counter box. You can also move between pages using your keyboard’s PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, by clicking Layout, Go to Page, or by using the page flippers found along the bottom of the page (shown below). Use the flipper buttons on either end of the page counter box to go to the first or last page in your drawing.

Each time you create a new page, CorelDRAW adds an corresponding tab. You can go to a specific page by clicking its tab. Click a tab and drag it to another location to rearrange the order of the pages in your drawing.


Rulers

CorelDRAW provides optional rulers at the edges of your drawing window for determining the size and position of objects. To move the 0,0 point (the origin point) of the rulers, click the icon at the junction of the rulers (shown below) and drag the crosshairs anywhere on the page. The rulers adjust to show the new origin point when you release the mouse button. As you scroll the drawing window, the rulers indicate your position relative to the origin.

You can also move a ruler by holding down the SHIFT key and dragging the ruler anywhere in the drawing window. You can hide the rulers by clicking View and disabling the Rulers command.

When you use the Paragraph Text tool, the appearance and operation of the rulers changes. A white area appears in the each ruler to indicate the width and height of the paragraph frame. You can use this area to add tabs, indents, and to perform other word processing-related tasks. You can access formatting options by clicking either of these areas with the right mouse button.


Scroll arrows

Scroll arrows appear at the end of each scroll bar. These controls let you shift your viewpoint up, down, left, and right. Click an arrow with the left mouse button to move the window a small amount in that direction. For more rapid scrolling, click and hold the mouse button on the scroll arrow.


Status bar

The status bar gives you information on the selected object or on your current action. By default, the status bar appears at the bottom of the screen, below the color palette. You can also choose to display the status bar at the top of the screen.

You can have the status bar display only one line of information instead of the usual two, or you can hide it. To set status bar options, open the status bar’s pop-up menu by clicking the status bar with the right mouse button.


Title bar

The title bar extends across the top of the CorelDRAW window inside the border. It displays the name of the file you’re using, and can be dragged to reposition the CorelDRAW window on the screen. The icons found at the right end of the title bar can be used to reduce the window to its smallest size so that it appears only on the task bar, maximize the CorelDRAW window to full screen size, or close the window.

Unmaximized drawing windows also have title bars. These function in the same way as the CorelDRAW title bar [image] you can move, maximize, minimize, or close a drawing window using its title bar. When you maximize a drawing window, its title appears in the CorelDRAW title bar [image] for example, "CorelDRAW - [Graphic 1]".


Toolbox

The toolbox gives you quick access to the following CorelDRAW tools and flyouts:

Tool	Used for
Pick tool	Selecting and transforming objects.
Shape tool	Shaping objects. The flyout gives you access to the Knife and Eraser tools.
Zoom tool	Changing the viewing window. The flyout gives you access to the Panning tool.
Freehand tool	Drawing lines, curves, and PowerLines. The flyout gives you access to the Bezier tool.
Vertical Dimension tool	Adding dimension lines. The flyout gives you access to the Horizontal and Slanted Dimension tools, the Callout tool, the Angled Dimension tool, and the Connector Line tool.
Rectangle tool	Drawing rectangles and squares.
Ellipse tool	Drawing ellipses and circles.
Polygon tool	Drawing multiple-sided shapes, like stars. The flyout gives you access to the Spiral and Graph Paper tools.
Text tool	Adding Artistic text. The flyout gives you access to the Paragraph text tool
Outline flyout	Setting outline attributes.
Fill flyout	Setting fill attributes.
You can move the toolbox anywhere on the screen by clicking the area that surrounds the tools, and dragging it. Placing the toolbox on the drawing window turns it into a floating toolbox with a title bar. Placing the toolbox on any of the four sides of the window docks the it there, making it part of the window border.

When you click and hold down the left mouse button on certain tools (indicated above), a flyout appears. These tools also have a small triangle located in the bottom right corner that you can click to access the flyout. As with the toolbox, you can drag a flyout to the toolbar or create a floating toolbar.


Windows border

A boundary that defines the shape of the CorelDRAW window. You can scale a window horizontally or vertically by dragging one of its side borders or in both directions by dragging a corner of the border. Scaling is especially useful when you have other Windows applications running.


Toolbars

Toolbars provide quick, one-step access to commonly used features. Clicking a toolbar with the right mouse button displays a pop-up that allows you to access the Standard, Toolbox, Text, Zoom, Roll-Ups, Workspace, and Shape Flyout toolbars. This pop-up also allows you to hide these toolbars.

Clicking Toolbars in the pop-up displays the Toolbars dialog box (shown below). Here, you can specify which toolbars are displayed, their size, and more.

You can also customize a toolbar by holding down ALT+SHIFT, then dragging a button. If you drag the button onto a different toolbar, the button moves to that toolbar and is positioned where you placed it. If you move the button off its toolbar but not onto another, you delete the button. You can also move a button to another position within its toolbar.

You can also access all toolbar functions using the menu bar.


To view all open drawing windows

Click Window, Tile Horizontally/Tile Vertically.

 Related Topics


To cascade drawing windows
To cascade open drawing windows

Click Window, Cascade.

 Related Topics


To arrange minimized drawing windows

Click Window, Arrange Icons.

 Related Topics


To activate an open drawing window in CorelDRAW
To activate an open drawing window

Click Window and then on the name of the window you want to activate.

The open windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu.

 Related Topics


 The left arrow button


 The right arrow button


 The up arrow button


 The Pick tool


 The Shape tool


 The Zoom tool


 The Freehand tool


 The Vertical Dimension tool


 The Rectangle tool


 The Ellipse tool


 The Polygon tool


 The Artistic Text tool


 The Outline tool


 The Fill tool


To adjust the size of the CorelDRAW screen using the keyboard

1.	If they are not already displayed, click [image] to display CorelDRAW's window borders.

2.	Press ALT+SPACE BAR, then S.

3.	Press the Arrow key that corresponds to the side, top or bottom border you want to move.

4.	Press the Arrow keys to move the border.

5.	Press ENTER when the window is the desired size.

Note

The CorelDRAW window opens at the same size it was when you last closed it.

 Related Topics


To adjust the size of the CorelDRAW screen using the mouse

1.	If they are not already displayed, click [image] to display CorelDRAW's window borders.

2.	Drag the side, top or bottom border to resize the window in one direction.

3.	Drag a corner of the border to resize the window horizontally and vertically.

4.	Release the mouse button when the window is the desired size.

 Related Topics


To create a new drawing

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Click Document.

 Related Topics


To create a new drawing from a template

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Click From Template.

3.	Choose a template.

The default directory is the template directory, and the default file extension is .cdt (CorelDRAW Template).

4.	Click Open.

Note

You can use a .cdr file as a template. Change the type of file in the Files of type list box and locate the file.

Template files are stored in the Template directory.

 Related Topics


To create a template

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	In the Save in list box, choose the CorelDRAW Template directory.

3.	Enter a name in the File name box.

4.	In the Save as type list box, choose CorelDRAW! Template (*.cdt).

5.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To open a drawing

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	In the Look in list box, choose the drive where the file is stored.

3.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

4.	Double-click the drawing’s filename.

Note

If you try to open a drawing that is already open, a message box appears asking you if you want to revert to the saved version of the drawing. Click Yes to replace the open drawing with the saved version. Click No to keep the open drawing in its current state.

You can open a recently-saved file by clicking its name at the bottom of the File menu.

You can use wild cards (* and ?) if you're not sure of the name of the file you want to open. For example, typing test*.cdr in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CDR files in the selected directory beginning with test. "Typing test?".cdr in the File Name box and clicking OK lists all CDR files in the selected directory that begin with test and are followed by one character (test1.cdr).

 Related Topics


To open a drawing using drag and drop

1.	Locate the CDR file using the Windows Explorer.

2.	Click and hold down the mouse pointer on the CDR file and drag it onto the CorelDRAW program icon in either the programs directory or on the desktop.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Note

The PANOSE Font Matching feature does not work when you open files using drag and drop.

 Related Topics


To save a new drawing

1.	Click File, Save.

2.	In the Save in list box, choose a drive and folder where you want to save your drawing.

3.	Type a name in the File name box.

 Related Topics


To undo operations

Click Edit, Undo.

Note

The following actions cannot be reversed using undo:

any change of view (zooming, scrolling, etc.)

any file operation (open, saving, importing, etc.)

any object selection operations

any operation with the Grid.

The Undo Levels setting in the Options dialog box determines how many consecutive actions you can undo and redo.

 Related Topics


To repeat an action

Click Edit, Repeat.

Note

If the command is dimmed, the last action performed cannot be repeated using this command.

 Related Topics


To access clipart from the CD-ROM
To add clipart from the CD ROM

1.	Place the CD-ROM disk # 4 in your CD-ROM drive.

2.	Click File, Import in CorelDRAW.

3.	In the Files of type box, choose Corel Presentation Exchange 6.0 (CMX).

4.	In the Look in box, choose the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive.

5.	In the Directories box, double-click the Clipart directory. The clipart categories appear as subdirectories of the Clipart directory.

6.	Double-click the category in which the clipart you want to import resides. (The category name appears at the top of each page in the Clipart manual.)

7.	Select a clipart fileand click the Import button. The clipart image is imported into your current drawing.

Note

If you already have CMX files on your system, follow the same procedure, but select the appropriate directory on your system.

 Related Topics


To start CorelDRAW
To start CorelDRAW from the Windows desktop

1.	On the Windows desktop, click Start, Programs.

2.	Point to the folder that contains CorelDRAW if it does not appear on the main Program menu.

3.	Click CorelDRAW 6.

Note

After CorelDRAW is started, the CorelDRAW button is displayed in the Windows taskbar.

 Related Topics


To start CorelDRAW using the Run command

1.	On the Windows desktop, click Start, Run.

2.	In the Open list box, type CorelDRAW's folder location and coreldrw.

For example, C:\Corel60\Programs\CorelDrw.

Note

If you forget the location of CorelDRAW, click Browse.

After CorelDRAW is started, the CorelDRAW button is displayed in the Windows taskbar.

 Related Topics


To exit CorelDRAW

Click File, Exit.

Note

If you have new drawings open, or drawings that you have modified, CorelDRAW prompts you to save the changes prior to exiting.

 Related Topics


To install options with the Setup program

1.	Insert the CorelDRAW CD disk #1 in your CD-ROM drive.

2.	Click Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel.

3.	Follow the directions on your screen.

4.	Click Custom Installation.

5.	Click Continue.

6.	Choose the Some option next to the application for which you want to install options

7.	If you selected Some, another dialog box appears, where you choose the options you want to install.

8.	Clear all other check boxes for the options you don't want to install.

9.	Click Continue, then follow the instructions that appear on the screen.

Note

 	If you have floppy disks, insert the CorelDRAW Setup disk (disk 1) in the appropriate drive.

 Related Topics


Adds a node at the spot along the segment that you click. Add nodes if you cannot shape a curve the way you want by moving the existing nodes and control points.


Deletes the selected node or segment. Use to remove surplus nodes from an excessively complex drawing and to smooth unwanted bumps along a curve.


Connects two nodes at the beginning or end of curve segments that are part of the same object. Use to close an open path or make two subpaths into a single continuous curve.

You can join nodes of different objects by first combining the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.


Splits the curve into two or more subpaths. Useful for separating curves in a traced bitmap.


Deletes any nodes which can be deleted without significantly changing the shape of the curve. You can adjust the sensitivity of the Auto-Reduce feature in the Node Edit tool properties sheet.


Changes the selected line segment to a curve segment.


Changes the selected curve segment to a line segment.


Changes the selected node to a cusped node. This allows you to edit the line segments on either side of the node independantly. Use when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


Changes the selected node to a smooth node. This constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, but allows you to vary the length of the control points independantly. Use when you want a smooth transition between line segments.


Changes the selected node to a symmetrical node. This constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, and keeps both control points equal lengths. Use when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


Aligns selected nodes and their associated control points. Use to align the edges of objects that share a common boundary such as regions of a map.

To align nodes of different objects, you must first combine the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.


Displays eight stretching/scaling handles that let you stretch and scale selected parts of a curve.


Displays eight rotating/skewing handles that let you rotate and skew selected parts of a curve.


Changes the way multiple-selected nodes move when dragged with the mouse. If left unchecked, all nodes move by the same amount. When checked, nodes move in proportion to their distance from the base node (i.e., the node you are dragging). The end result is that the curve appears to behave like an elastic expanding and contracting in response to the movement of the mouse.


Allows you to draw a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


Allows you to separate a subpath from an object to create a separate path.


Allows you to switch between editing the width of the selected PowerLine and normal node editing.


Allows you to reduce the number of PowerLine nodes in a PowerLine.


Allows you to add a pair of PowerLine nodes to a PowerLine.


Allows you to remove a PowerLine node from a PowerLine.


Allows you to change a straight PowerLine segment to a curved PowerLine segment.


Allows you to change a curved PowerLine segment to a straight PowerLine segment.


Allows you to make a PowerLine segment Concave.


Allows you to make a PowerLine segment Convex.


To pick a color from a color model (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Model radio button.

2.	Click the Model box to display a list of models.

3.	Click a color model from the list to display the visual selectors for that model.

4.	Drag the markers in the visual selectors to edit the color.

Tips

For drawings, it is best to use colors from the RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ color models, since these models produce the truest representation on-screen. In PHOTO-PAINT, use the color model that best suits the image mode.

You can also define a color by typing values in the color component fields.

The color that you choose is shown in the New Color swatch. In addition to adding this color to the custom palette, you can use it directly in both the mixing area and on the drawing or image.

Note

The Registration Color model is a fixed single color. It cannot be redefined through the color components or the visual selectors.

 Related Topics


To pick a color from a color matching palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Palettes radio button.

2.	Click the Type box to display a list of palettes.

3.	Click a palette name to display the color swatches for that palette.

4.	Click the scroll bar to display different areas of the palette.

5.	Click the swatch in the palette to put the color in the New Color swatch.

Tip

For PANTONE® Spot Colors, you can specify a tint percentage to control color saturation (0 for low saturation to 100 for high).

Note

The color components used to define the color depends on the palette and not the drawing or image.

 Related Topics


To show palette colors by name (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Options button.

2.	Enable Show Color Names.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have a palette open for color selection. To open a palette, see "To pick a color from a color matching palette (Color dialog)".

 Related Topics


To show palette colors by swatch (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Options button.

2.	Disable Show Color Names.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have a palette open for color selection. To open a palette, see "To pick a color from a color matching palette (Color dialog)".

 Related Topics


To search for palette colors by name (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Palettes radio button.

2.	Click the Type box to display a list of palettes.

3.	Click a palette name to display the color swatches for that palette.

4.	Click the Search box.

5.	Type a color name.

Tips

When you use a partial name in the search field, the first color with a match is shown. As you type additional characters, the search is refined. You can use a partial name to move to an area of a palette.

Color names consist of two parts: the palette name, and the color name or code. You can reducing typing by using only the color name or code.

You can search by color name when either the color names or color swatches are displayed.

 Related Topics


To mix color in the color blend (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers radio button.

2.	Click the Mode box to display a list of mixing modes.

3.	Click Color Blend from the list.

4.	Click a color button in one of the corners.

5.	Click a color on the palette that pops up.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each color button.

7.	Enable Auto-Blend.

8.	Click the grid to choose a color.

Tips

Use the color blend to create the intermediary colors between highlight and shadow.

To use colors directly from the custom palette on the right half of the dialog, drag and drop the color from the palette to the color button.

To apply the New Color to a color button, click the adjacent arrow key. This lets you pick up a color from anywhere in the dialog box and use it in the color blend.

Use the custom palette to collect the colors that you want to use in the color blend. You can save colors from the color models or the color matching palettes to the custom palette, and then use those colors in the color blend. Also, you can open different custom palettes while the color blend is available.

 Related Topics


To change the color blend grid size (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers radio button.

2.	Click the Mode box to display a list of mixing modes.

3.	Click Color Blend from the list.

4.	Click the Color Options button.

5.	Click Grid Size.

6.	Enable one of the grid sizes.

Tips

You can use a larger grid to obtain a more refined blending of color, where changes in the values of each color dimension decrease as you move between adjacent grid squares.

Moving directly between two adjacent corners shows a two-dimensional change in the color mix. Moving between opposing corners shows a three- and four-dimensional change in the color mix.

 Related Topics


To change the color blend color model (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers radio button.

2.	Click the Mode box to display a list of mixing modes.

3.	Click Color Blend from the list.

4.	Click Color Options, Color Model.

5.	Enable one of the color models.

Notes

When you choose a different color mode, the colors in all color buttons are mapped to corresponding colors in the color model that you choose. The new colors are automatically blended if AutoBlend is enabled.

The selection of color models is limited to the most practical for the color blend: RGB, CMYK, and HSB.

 Related Topics


To mix color in the mixing area (Color dialog box)

1.	Pick up a color from any of the color models, the color matching palettes, the color blend, the custom palette, or the mixing area.

2.	Click the Mixers radio button.

3.	Click the Mode box.

4.	Click Mixing Area from the list.

5.	Type a percentage value in the Blend number box.

6.	Click the Paint Brush.

7.	Click the mixing area to apply the color.

Tips

When you pick up a color from any of the controls, that color is placed in the New Color swatch and is available for the mixing area.

Use the custom palette to collect from the color models or the color matching palettes; you then use those colors in the color blend. Also, you can open different custom palettes while the color blend is open.

You can use the Blend value to increase (high value) or decrease (low value) the subtlety of blending. This feature gives you greater control over the mixing process. Use a high value when you want to gradually build up color to the desired saturation. Use a low value when you want to lay down a saturated base.

 Related Topics


To pick up color from the mixing area (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers radio button.

2.	Click the Mode box.

3.	Click Mixing Area from the list.

4.	Click the Eye Dropper.

5.	Click the mixing area to pick up the mixed color.

Note

The color you pick up is put in the New Color swatch.

 Related Topics


To change the mixing area brush size (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers radio button.

2.	Click the Mode box.

3.	Click Mixing Area from the list.

4.	Click the Color Options button.

5.	Click Brush Size.

6.	Enable a brush size.

Note

Three brush sizes are available: small, medium, and large.

 Related Topics


To change the mixing area color model (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Mixers button.

2.	Click the Mode box.

3.	Click Mixing Area.

4.	Click the Color Options button.

5.	Click Color Model.

6.	Enable one of the color models.

Tips

If you are developing a library of mixing areas, you can organize the library by the color model used.

The selection of color models is limited to the most practical for the mixing area: RGB, CMYK, and HSB.

 Related Topics


To save the mixing area (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Options button.

2.	Click Save Bitmap.

3.	Type a filename into the File name field.

4.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

To save to an existing file, you double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up. The confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite the existing file.

By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects, and save them to a library of mixing areas that you use in the Color dialog box.

 Related Topics


To load a mixing area (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Options button.

2.	Click Load Bitmap.

3.	Locate the file in the list.

4.	Double-click the filename in the list.

Tips

If the bitmap file is not listed in the default directory, you can move to different directories using the Windows File Manager dialog box. You can also type a filename and path in the File Name field.

By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects, and save them to a library of mixing areas that you use in the Color dialog box.

Note

The Load Bitmap action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the current mixing area, you will lose any changes you made when the new mixing area loads.

 Related Topics


To clear the mixing area (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Color Options button.

2.	Click Clear Bitmap.

Tip

You can create new mixing area files by clearing the mixing area, developing a new set of color mixes, and saving the mixing area under a new filename.

Note

The Clear Bitmap action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the current mixing area, you will lose any changes you made when the new mixing area loads.

 Related Topics


To pick color from the custom palette (Color dialog)
To pick a color from the custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the scroll bar to display different areas of the custom palette.

2.	Click the color you want to pick up.

Note

The color is put in the New Color swatch.

 Related Topics


To add color to the custom palette (Color dialog)
To add color to the custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Pick up a color from any of the color models, the color matching palettes, the color blend, or the mixing area.

2.	Click the Name field.

3.	Type a name for the color.

4.	Click the Color Options button.

5.	Click Add Color to Palette.

6.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Tips

You can continue to work in the dialog box. However, if you click Cancel to close the dialog, you lose your color additions unless you save the palette first.

You do not have to name a color to add it to the custom palette. You can always rename the color later.

Notes

The color you add must have a unique name. The custom palette cannot have two colors with the same name [image] even colors of identical values.

When you add a color from one of the color matching palettes, the color name is also used in the custom palette.

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color dialog box are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the dialog box or the Roll-Up. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To convert a PANTONE® Spot Color to a process color (Color dialog box)

1.	Add a PANTONE® Spot Color to the custom palette.

2.	Click that color in the custom palette.

3.	Click the Color Models radio button.

4.	Click a CMYK color model.

5.	Click the Name field.

6.	Type a name for the color.

7.	Click Color Options, Add Color to Palette.

8.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Tips

You may want to convert a spot color to a process color as a way of reducing the cost of color separations for low-cost publications in which the color characteristics of the spot color do not need to be maintained.

This procedure permanently alters the colors used in the image. To convert spot colors only at print time, use the controls in the Print dialog box.

Notes

This procedure adds the spot color to the custom palette as a CMYK process color.

When you open the CMYK color model, the color in the New Color swatch is translated to the closest color in the CMYK color space.

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color dialog box are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the dialog box or the Roll-Up. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

To add a PANTONE® Spot Color to the custom palette, see "To add color to the custom palette (Color dialog box)" and "To pick a color from a color matching palette (Color dialog box)".

 Related Topics


To rename a color in a custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the color in the custom palette.

2.	Click the Name field.

3.	Type a name for the color.

4.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Notes

No additional action is necessary to confirm the name change.

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color dialog box are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the dialog box or the Roll-Up. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To delete a color from the custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click a color in the custom palette.

2.	Click the Palette Options button.

3.	Click Delete Color.

4.	Click YES to delete the color; click NO to cancel the delete action.

5.	Click OK to keep the new color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Notes

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color dialog box are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the dialog box or the Roll-Up. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

 Related Topics


To rearrange color on the custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click a color in the custom palette.

2.	Drag and drop it to a new location on the palette.

3.	Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with the palette arrangement.

4.	Click OK to keep the new color arrangement and close the dialog box.

Notes

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color dialog box are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the dialog box or the Roll-Up. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

If you move the cursor above or below the palette, the color swatches automatically scroll up or down.

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Palette Options button.

2.	Click Save.

Note

The custom palette is saved to the original file, overwriting the old palette information.

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette to another file (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Palette Options button.

2.	Click Save As.

3.	Type a filename for the palette.

4.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

You can use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Remember that files names can be descriptive labels longer than eight characters, and file extensions are not required.

If you are saving to an existing file, double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up (the confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite a custom palette file.)

By using the New Palette, Open Palette, Save Palette, and Save As menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and then save them to create a library. The dialog boxes for these menu options permit you to open, create, and delete.

 Related Topics


To open a custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Save the current custom palette, if you want to keep it.

2.	Click the Palette Options button.

3.	Click Open Palette.

4.	Type a filename for the palette.

5.	Press the ENTER key.

Tips

You can also type a filename in the File Name field and press the ENTER key.

By using the New Palette, Open Palette, and Save/Save As Palette menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and save them in a library arrangement.

Note

The Open Palette action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the custom palette currently in use, you will lose it when the new custom palette loads.

 Related Topics


To start a new custom palette (Color dialog box)

1.	Click the Palette Options button.

2.	Click New Palette.

3.	Type a filename for the new palette.

4.	Press the ENTER key.

Tip

Use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Remember that files names can be descriptive labels longer than eight characters, and file extensions are not required.

Note

If you have not saved the custom palette currently in use, a pop-up displays so that you can confirm the new palette action. Click YES to continue if you have already saved the current palette or if you want to discard it. Click NO to cancel the new palette action so that you can save the current palette using the Palette Options, New Palette menu option.

 Related Topics


To update the Reference Color with the New Color (Color dialog box)

Click the Update Reference Color button.

 Related Topics


To update the New Color with the Printable Color (Color dialog box)

Click the Update New Color button.

 Related Topics


To swap the Reference and New Colors (Color dialog box)

Click Color Options, Swap Color.

 Related Topics


To edit the selected color (Color dialog box)

1.	Click a color component field.

2.	Type a number within the color model’s range of values.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each component.

4.	Click Paint Brush.

Tip

Using the color component fields is one way to edit the selected color. For color models, you can also use the visual selectors. This method of editing is best suited to colors from the color matching palettes. The color component fields let you make slight adjustments as a way of fine tuning the selected color.

 Related Topics


COLOR MODEL RADIO BUTTON


Click the color model radio button to use a model for color editing. Color models are listed in the Model list box. Your choice of model is based on whether you are working with a drawing or an image. If you’re working with an image, you choice is further limited by the image mode. When you choose a model, number boxes for the model’s digital components are displayed to the left of the Model drop-down list.


PALETTES RADIO BUTTON


Click the palettes radio button to use a color matching palette. Palettes are listed in the Type list box. You may want to use the palettes if you are working with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont®, FOCOLTONE®, PANTONE®, TOYO, or TRUMATCH®. By using these palettes along with a color reference book, you can be reasonably certain of how the colors will look when printed. The Uniform palette is also provided, with colors based on the RGB color model.


MIXERS RADIO BUTTON


Click the mixers radio button to use either the Color Blend or the Mixing area to create a custom color. The mixing modes are listed in the Mode list box.


LIST BOX


Lists the color models, color matching palettes, and mixing modes [image] depending on the radio button that you enable. The label changes to "Model" for color models, "Type" for palettes, and "Mode" for mixers. Click this box to display the models, types, and modes that are available.


REFERENCE COLOR


The Reference Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color placed in the reference area from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. The contents of this swatch remains unchanged, regardless of the color editing you undertake, until you update it by clicking the Update Reference Color Button.


NEW COLOR


The New Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color selected from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. If this color is not available in the color gamut of the delivery system (which is usually your printer), the Printable Color swatch appears below it to show the color you’ll print in place of the New Color. You can update the New Color with the Printable Color by clicking Update New Color button.


PRINTABLE COLOR


The Printable Color swatch shows the color that will print if the color in the New Color swatch is not possible in the printer’s color space. The gamut mapping used to do this is determined using the Color Manager. Change the printable color to the new color by clicking the Update New Color button. When the edited color does fall within the printer’s color space, this color does not display.


UPDATE REFERENCE COLOR BUTTON


Click the update reference color button to use the New Color as the Reference Color. This is useful when you are matching colors and wish to update your reference point. To swap the Reference and New Colors, use the Color Options, Swap Color menu selection.


UPDATE NEW COLOR BUTTON


Click the update new color button to use the Printable Color as the New Color, which you can then edit. This button appears only if the New Color is not available in the printer’s color space and a Printable Color swatch is displayed.


COMPONENT FIELDS


The color component fields show the numeric values of the selected color. These fields are accessible when you have edited the New Color through a color model or a mixer. They are inaccessible (grayed out) if the color is selected from a color matching palette. Components change for each color model and palette selected. For colors in the custom palette, the components correspond to the color model or color matching palette through which the color was edited.


NAME FIELD


The color name field shows the name of the selected color, if a name is available. Color names are shown only for the color matching palettes, the custom palette, and the color buttons for the Color Blend (which correspond to swatches in the custom palette). Use this field to name a new color or to rename the selected color in the custom palette. Colors in the color matching palettes cannot be renamed.


CUSTOM PALETTE


Shows the colors in the current user palette. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. You can create new custom palettes and save them to create a library of palettes.


COLOR OPTIONS BUTTON


Click this button to open the Color Options menu. Use this menu to add the selected color to the custom palette, to swap the Reference Color with the Selected Color, and to use the features of the color model, palettes, and mixers.


PALETTE OPTIONS BUTTON


Click this button to open the Palette Options menu. Use this menu to rename or delete the selected color on the custom palette, to open and save the custom palette, and to start a new custom palette.


CMY


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a CMY device, such as a 3-ink printer. C, M, and Y values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the C, M, and Y values; the vertical visual selector scales all current C, M, and Y values geometrically.


CMYK


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a percentage scale (0 to 100). Color values correspond to CMYK swatches. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


CMYK 255


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a computer-based scale (0 to 255). The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


RGB


Red, Green, Blue. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a radiant device, such as a computer monitor or a television screen, or on a transparent media such as slides. R, G, and B values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the R, G, and B values; the vertical Visual adjusts color brightness by scaling all current R, G, and B values geometrically. This model is based on the light primary colors.


HSB


Hue, Saturation, Brightness. An alternative to RGB. Hue determines color, saturation determines color depth, and brightness determines the percentage of white used to make the color lighter or darker. This model is the closest approximation to how we perceive color. There are three visual selectors. The circular selector is for hue (0 to 360), and the vertical selector is for brightness (0 to 100). The triangular selector is used to simultaneously adjust saturation (0 to 100) and brightness. Also known as HSV (hue, saturation, value). The HLS color model is a variant.


HLS


Hue, Lightness, Saturation. A variation on HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the H value (0 to 360) and the S value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the L value (0 to 100).


LAB


The color model developed by Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) based on three parameters: lightness (L*), green to red chromaticity (a*), and blue to yellow chromaticity (b*). The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the a* and b* coordinates from -60 to 60; the vertical visual selector defines the L* value from 0 to 100. This model is device-independent, and encompasses the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB color models.


YIQ


YIQ is the color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor, all three components are visible; on a monochrome monitor, only the Y component is visible. The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the Y component of the splitting process produces a grayscale image that is often superior to results obtained with a grayscale conversion using the Convert To command from the Image menu.


GRAYSCALE COLOR MODEL


Use grayscale to choose from 256 shades of gray. Each colors is defined as a single value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). A single visual selector is used. A grayscale value can also be thought of in terms of the other color models: in RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


UNIFORM PALETTE


The uniform palette offers 255 standard RGB colors for quick selection. Colors are expressed as RGB values to the right of the Type box. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Color Options menu (the color names correspond to the R, G, and B values).


DIC PALETTES


Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. Swatches are identified by palette and color ID code:

DIC id# for DIC Color Guide

DIC Part II id# for DIC Color Guide Part II

DIC Traditional id# for DIC Traditional Colors of Japan


DUPONT PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster® solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on L*a*b* and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


FOCOLTONE PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the FOCOLTONE® color system. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


PANTONE SPOT COLORS PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Spot Colors (also known as PANTONE® Matching System). You define tint through the Tint Number Box, ranging from 0 (lightest) to 100 (darkest) to control saturation. You can also define PostScript options. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate. In Corel DRAW, you can use spot colors freely. In PHOTO-PAINT, you can use spot colors only in CMYK images to affect duotones. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. See also PANTONE® Process Color system.


PANTONE PROCESS COLOR PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. See also PANTONE® Spot Colors.


TOYO PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the L*a*b* color space and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


TRUMATCH PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the TRUMATCH® color system. This system is based on the CMYK color model and therefore colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


COLOR SEARCH FIELD


Click the Search field to find a color in the palette using the color name. You can search on a full or partial name. Color names consist of two parts: the first is the palette name, and the second is the color name or code. A search can be done using only the color name or code.


TINT FIELD


Used the Tint field to control the saturation of the selected PANTONE® Spot Color. This color parameter is available only for the PANTONE® Spot Color palette.


COLOR BLEND


Use the color blend to create a four-way blend of color and choose from the range of color variations. Grids are square, ranging in size from 3x3 to 12x12 (smaller grids produce more distinct colors while larger grids produce more subtle color variations). Colors are selected from the custom palette and can be mapped to the CMYK, RGB, and HSB color models.


COLOR BUTTON


The color button displays the color chosen for this corner of the grid. Click the color button in each corner to display the custom palette from which you can choose a new color.


AUTOBLEND BUTTON


Click this button to enable or disable automatic blending. When enabled, colors are automatically blended in the grid when a new color is selected in the color boxes. When disabled, colors are not automatically blended in the grid.


MIXING AREA


Use the mixing area to mix any number of colors from the color models, palettes, or color blend. The color in the New Color swatch is the active color in the mixing area.


PAINT BRUSH


Use the paint brush to apply color to the mixing area (the cursor changes to a paintbrush). Adjust the blend value through the Blend number box (this is a means of controlling color saturation). Brush size can be adjusted to small, medium, or large through the Color Options button.


EYEDROPPER


Used to pick up color from the mixing area (the cursor changes to an eye dropper).


BLEND FIELD


Click the Blend number box to increase or decrease the amount of color blending when you apply color to the mixing area. A large value increases the blending effect (the color is more transparent); a low value decreases the blending effect (the color is more opaque).


Creating color and managing palettes

Corel applications offer a dialog and a roll-up that you can use to create color and manage custom palettes.

With these controls, you can

select colors from color models, color matching palettes, and custom palettes

mix custom colors

create custom palette

For more information, see Related Topics.

 Related Topics


Color dialog box: overview

Use the Color dialog box to create color for solid fills, paint, paper, and effects. You can create custom colors through the Mixing Area and collect them into custom palettes [image] both of which you can save and organize into libraries.

The Color dialog box is available through any roll-up or tool that requires color selection. It appears under a variety of names, including Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Paint Color, Paper Color, and Outline Color.

Features of the dialog box

You use the left side of the dialog to choose from color models, color matching palettes, and mixers. You choose colors from the models and palettes and blend them in the mixers. The Color Options menu provides options for creating new colors and adding them to the custom palette. The options available depend on your choice of model, palette, or mixer.

You use the right side of the dialog to develop the custom palette. The Palette Options menu provides options for starting new palettes, deleting colors from the current palette, and saving and loading the palettes you develop. Within the custom palette area, you can reorganize and rename the color swatches.

The upper right portion of the dialog includes the Reference and New Color swatches. The Reference Color swatch shows either the color of the selected object or the last color used as the reference. The New Color swatch shows the color you are editing in the dialog. You can use these swatches to fine tune the edited color by comparing the difference between the two colors; the color component fields provide values based on the color model chosen. When the new color is not in the printer’s color space, a third swatch appears to show the closest printable color based on the color mapping technique defined in the Color Manager.

Notes on using color

You choose color from models, palettes, and mixing areas to create custom palettes. You can use the Color dialog box to apply color to the image, even without adding it to the palette.

You have unlimited access to color models, color matching palettes, and mixing areas through the Color dialog box. You decide how color should be used, given the content of a drawing or image. For more information, read the overviews under "Using color models to choose color" and "Using palettes to choose color".

 Related Topics


Color Roll-Up: overview

Use the Color Roll-Up to mix and match colors. You can open the Roll-Up by pressing CTRL + F2. The Roll-Up consists of five areas: a basic area (which is always visible) and four optional areas. The Roll-Up in CorelDRAW also has buttons for Apply Fill and Apply Outine.

Features of the Roll-Up

Basic area. Shows the color swatches and the active mode of the Roll-Up. The format of the swatches differs depending on the application. In CorelDRAW, the swatches represent the reference and new colors (as in the Color dialog box). In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the swatches represent the paper color and paint colors currently selected. In both versions of this Roll-Up, an out-of-gamut color is displayed whenever the active color is not reproducible in the color space of the delivery system (usually a printer).

Color Components. Shows the numeric values for each component of the active color. The color components change depending on the color model. You can use the color components to edit the active color without using the visual selectors.

Color Name. Shows the name of the active color (if a name has been defined for the color). You can also use this field to rename any color in the custom palette.

Mixing Area. In PHOTO-PAINT, this option gives you access to the mixing area, which works like an artist’s palette. Colors can be chosen from anywhere in the Roll-Up and used in the mixing area to create custom colors. The new colors can be added to the custom palette or used on the image. In DRAW, the mixing area is not available as a separate option, but is available as a Color Roll-Up mode.

Model. Displays the color model, palette, and color blend. (In DRAW, there is also a full-size mixing area and two buttons for applying color to fill and outline.) For each model, there is one or two visual selectors that you use to define the color. As you drag the adjustment markers across the selector, the color component values change to define the new color. For each palette, a set of swatches is shown to represent the colors available. The models and palettes available depends on the application. In DRAW, there are no limits on what is available; in PHOTO-PAINT, the mode in which the image was created determines which color models and palettes are available.

Using colors in the Roll-Up

The scope of the Roll-Up differs between CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT:

In DRAW, the Roll-Up gives you unlimited access to color models and color matching palettes.

In PHOTO-PAINT, access is limited to the models and palettes that are appropriate for the image mode. For example, with a 24-bit image you can use colors both from any model except CMYK and CMYK 255, and from all color matching palettes.

As in the Color dialog box, you decide how color should be used, given the content of a drawing or image.

For more information, read the overviews under "Using color models to choose a color" and "Using palettes to choose a color".

 Related Topics


Using color models to choose color

In both the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up, you can choose colors from several models:

CMYK

CMYK 255

CMY

RGB

HSB

HLS

L*a*b*

YIQ

Grayscale

Registration

The availability of a color model depends on the application, and on whether you are using the Color dialog box or the Color Roll-Up. In CorelDRAW, all models are available in the dialog and the Roll-Up. There are no constraints on the colors that you can add to the custom palette or use in the drawing. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the Color Roll-Up limits the models available, depending on the image mode. For example, the choices available for a 32-bit image are CMYK and CMYK 255 only. In the Color dialog box, all models are available and there are no constraints on the colors you can use.

Guidelines on using color

While there are no constraints on your choice of color from any color space, you should strive to use color discriminately. There are some guidelines that you will want to follow.

Drawings are best developed in RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ since these color spaces produce the truest representation on screen. Your choice of model is probably determined by personal preference (for example, it may be more intuitive for you to work in HSB than in RGB.) You can use colors from the CMYK color space, but you must be certain of how the color will look in the context of the drawing once it is printed. In this sense, application of CMYK colors is much like using spot colors.

In PHOTO-PAINT, the mode of the image determines the color space used. You can follow these guidelines:

In 32-bit images, use CMYK or CMYK 255.

In 24-bit images, use RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ

In 256-color and 16-color images, use the colors available in the image palette. In the Color Roll-Up, only the image palette is available in the Color mode list; color models are not available.

In grayscale and black-and-white, use the colors from the grayscale color space (for black and white images, a grayscale value of 127 or less produces black and of 128 or more produces white).

In a properly calibrated system, you can use color correction under the View menu to simulate on screen how the printed drawing or image will look. Device calibration and system profiling are set up through the Color Manager.

 Related Topics


The Registration color model consists of a single color in the CMYK color space, for which C, M, Y, and K are at 100%. You can use this color on any object that you want to appear on all separation plates. It is ideal for company logos, job numbers, or any other identifying marks that you may need for the job. This color cannot be added to the custom palette.


Using palettes to choose color

Palettes offer a range of pre-defined colors which you can either use on the drawing or image, or mix with colors from color models and other palettes to create new colors. The palettes available through the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up are the color matching palettes and custom palettes.

Color matching palettes

Color matching palettes offer reference colors that correspond to established color matching systems:

DIC Color Guides

DuPont Spectramaster Solid Color Library

FOCOLTONE Color System

PANTONE Spot Color

PANTONE Process Color

TOYO 88 Color Finder system

TRUMATCH Process Color System

FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, and TRUMATCH are commonly used in commercial printing; DuPont is used for industrial coatings and colorants. DIC and TOYO are popular color matching systems used in Japan, based on specialty inks from the manufacturer. Typically, you use the palette that corresponds to the color matching system used for a particular project, and you can be reasonably sure that the printed color will match the color of the swatch. You should renew your swatch books regularly, since faded swatches will influence your color choices. Renewing your swatches ensures that the color you choose on screen is the color you chose from the swatch book.

There is also a Uniform Colors palette, which includes 255 pre-defined RGB colors. You can use this palette to quickly choose from a range of colors in the RGB color space. Also, the Color Roll-Up in PHOTO-PAINT offers an image-defined palette, which includes all the colors used in the current image. This palette is not available in the Color dialog box.

Custom palettes

Custom palettes are user defined. You create colors based on either the color models or the color matching palettes, and then add them to the custom palette. The custom palette can be saved for use later. You can create and maintain as many custom palettes as you like, saving each under a unique descriptive file name.

When palettes are available

In the Color dialog box, all palettes except for the image palette are available. In the Color Roll-Up, all palettes except for the image palette are available in DRAW; all palettes are available in PHOTO-PAINT, but with some limitations. While there are a few constraints on your choice and use of color from any color space, you should strive to use color discriminately. There are some guidelines that you will want to follow.

Drawings are best developed using the uniform palette and image palette, and any custom palettes that incorporate color from the RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ color models. These colors produce the truest representation on screen. For the custom palettes, your choice of model is probably determined by personal preference (for example, it may be more intuitive for you to work in hue, saturation, and brightness (HSB) than in RGB.) You can use color from the CMYK color space and from the other color matching palettes, but you must be certain how the color will look in the context of the drawing once it is printed. In this sense, application of these colors is much like using spot colors.

In PHOTO-PAINT, the mode of the image determines the palettes used. You can follow these guidelines:

The FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, and TRUMATCH palettes are available for 32-bit images.

The Uniform palette is available for 32-bit and 24-bit images.

The DuPont Spectramaster Solid Color Library and the image palette are available for 24-bit images, 256-color images, and 16-color images.

Palettes are not available for Grayscale and black-and-white images (these images access only the Grayscale color model).

 Related Topics


Custom palettes: overview

The custom palette area in the Color Roll-Up and the Color dialog box is reserved for the palettes that you create and use. Custom palette area in the Color Roll-Up and the Color dialog box is reserved for the palettes that you create. Each application comes with one pre-defined custom palette based on the RGB color space, which you can edit or copy as you like.

In both the Roll-Up and the dialog, you can start new palettes, save the current palette to its file, save the current palette to a different file, and open saved palettes. You can delete and move files between directories using the Windows file manager dialog. Any number of files can be organized into a library. For example, you can develop a series of custom palettes by color model and color matching palettes to derive subsets of specific color spaces. Custom palettes can be used freely between the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up.

You can modify the palette and its component colors. You can add and delete colors, name and rename colors, move color swatches around the palette using drag-and-drop. If you are using the same custom palette simultaneously in both the dialog and the Roll-Up, any changes made in one are made in the other. For the change to be permanent, you must save the palette to file (the file is also automatically saved when you close the application.)

Colors can be added to a custom palette from any source [image] the drawing or image, a color model, a color matching palette, the color blend, and the mixing area. A custom palette can incorporate colors from all of these sources while retaining the color values associated with each color. When colors are taken from the color matching palettes, the color names are carried over.

Constraints on color and the custom palettes

The capabilities in the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up permit you to choose color from any model and any color matching palette. While there are few constraints on your choice and use of color from any color space, you should strive to use color discriminately. There are some guidelines that you will want to follow.

For more information, read the overviews under "Using color models to choose color" and "Using palettes to choose color".

 Related Topics


Using mixers to create custom colors

There are two mixers you can use to create custom colors: the Color Blend and the Mixing Area.

Color Blend

The Color Blend lets you create a 4-way blend of color, with gradations created across a two-dimensional square grid. Grid sizes range from 3x3 to 12x12 in single-unit increments. To create a more subtle gradation of color you increase the grid size; decrease the grid size for more marked gradation.

The Color Blend lets you use colors from anywhere within the application [image] from the drawing or image, the Mixing Area, a color model, a color matching palette, and the any of the custom palettes that you develop. To do this, you pick up the color and click the arrow next to the color button in each corner. In the Color dialog, you can drag and drop the color directly from the custom palette.

Mixing area

The Mixing Area resembles an artist’s palette on which you apply and mix colors using the Brush tool. While the Color Blend is limited to four colors in the blend, the Mixing Area is unlimited in the number of colors you can use. Further, you can match the background color to the drawing or image to see how a color will look before applying it. There is also a blend setting that lets you to control how much color you apply to the mixing area so that you can achieve extremely subtle variations in color.

The format of the mixing area differs between the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up. In the Roll-Up, there are also differences depending on the application:

In the Color dialog box, there is a mixing area available through the Color Options side of the dialog box (the left side).

In the Color Roll-Up, the format of the Mixing area depends on the application. In DRAW, the mixing area is opened as an active roll-up mode through the Color mode list. This is a full-sized mixing area similar to the mixing area used in the Color dialog box. In PHOTO-PAINT, the mixing area is available as a Roll-Up option. This mixing area is roughly half the size of the area in the Color dialog box.

You can save a mixing area to a bitmap file. In this way, you create a variety of mixing areas based on color models or on the needs of specific projects, and organize them into a library. Also, you can load any bitmap into the mixing area. This lets you choose colors from bitmapped photographs and drawings.

A word of caution about mixing area bitmaps:

The mixing areas that you develop in the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up should be kept separate, since parts of the bitmap may be clipped when saved from the Roll-Up and used in the dialog. This happens because of the difference in size.

 Related Topics


Color dialog box versus Color Roll-Up

The Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up do essentially the same things: you can pick-up colors from the color models, color matching palettes, and custom palettes; blend them in the Color Blend and the mixing area; develop libraries of mixing areas and custom palettes; and apply color to the drawing or image.

The difference between the two lies in the relationship to objects and the drawing or image.

Color dialog box

The main purpose of the Color dialog box is to select and edit color. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, there is neither a close association between the dialog and objects nor between the dialog and the image mode. In other applications, the dialog is closely associated with the type of object selected. The new color that you define applies to the selected object or, if you did not select an object, to a type of object (graphic, artistic text, or paragraph text).

The readily available features in the dialog are directed toward mixing color and adding color to the custom palette. Note that the custom palette is always visible, making it convenient to add and choose from a set of colors that you have defined. You base your custom palettes on color models, color matching palettes, the mixing area, the color blend, and the image or drawing. Almost all color models and palettes are available to you; only the image palette is not available in the dialog.

Your choice of color should be judicious. While you can create a custom palette that includes colors from every available color space and color matching palette, there may be no practical reason for doing so.

You can open the Color dialog box through any roll-up or tool in which you need to choose a color.

Color Roll-Up

The main purpose of the Color Roll-Up is choosing and blending color for immediate use on the drawing or image. The Roll-Up is not associated with objects in either DRAW or PHOTO-PAINT. However, the Roll-Up is associated with the image mode in PHOTO-PAINT, which determines the palettes and color models available. This underscores the premise that specific color spaces are used relative to the image mode in which you are working.

There are some differences between applications:

In DRAW, the Roll-Up gives you unlimited access to color models and color matching palettes.

In PHOTO-PAINT, access is limited to the models and palettes that are appropriate for the image mode These limitations serve as a guideline for the colors spaces that are compatible with the image you are working on.

Depending on the level of color information you are comfortable working with, you can customize the Roll-Up to display different options. This feature is common to both DRAW and PHOTO-PAINT.

You bring up the Color Roll-Up by pressing CTRL + F2. If you need to, you can save mixing areas and custom palettes to your palette libraries, but these tasks are better suited to the Color dialog box.

A word of caution about mixing area bitmaps:

The mixing areas developed in the Color dialog box and the Color Roll-Up should be kept separate, since parts of the bitmap may be clipped when saved from the Roll-Up and then used in the dialog.

 Related Topics


To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up

1.	Click [image].

2.	Enable or disable one or more of

 Show Color Components

 Show Color Name

 Show Mixing Area

 Show Model

Notes

A check mark appears beside enabled options. As you increase your viewing options, the choices in the flyout adjust to support all available features.

The Show Mixing Area option is available only in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. In DRAW, the mixing area is available through the color model list box.

 Related Topics


Use this option to display the color components of the edited color. Components change depending on the color model or palette from which the edited color was picked up. You can edit the color by changing the value of one or more components.


Use this option to display the Color Name field. You can use this field to name and rename colors in the Custom Palette.


Use this option to display the mixing area in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You use the mixing area like an artist’s palette to blend custom colors. In DRAW, the mixing area is available through the color model list box.


Use this option to display the color model area. The content of this option changes, depending on the selection from the color model list box.

When you choose a color model from the list, a geometric representation of the model is shown; when you choose a palette, the swatches for the palette are shown; and when you choose Color Blend, the color blend is displayed. In Corel DRAW, the mixing area is also available through this option.


To pick a color from a color model (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click a color model on the list (RGB, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, YIQ, CMY, CMYK, or CMYK 255).

3.	Drag the markers in the visual selectors to edit the color.

Tips

You can also define a color by typing values in the color component fields.

For drawings, it is best to use colors from the RGB, CMY, HSB, HLS, L*a*b*, or YIQ color models, since these models produce the truest representation on-screen. In PHOTO-PAINT, use the color model that best suits the image mode.

Notes

In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, only those models that are compatible with the image mode are available.

The color you pick up is placed in the active color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or the New Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


In Corel DRAW, the swatches at the top left of the Color Roll-Up are the Reference and New Color swatches. When you pick up or edit a color, it is displayed in the New Color swatch (the lower square). There is also a Printable Color swatch that appears whenever the color you pick up or edit cannot be reproduced by the delivery system. This swatch shows the closest color available in the target color space.


In PHOTO-PAINT, the swatches at the top left of the Color Roll-Up are the Paper Color and Paint Color. The active swatch is highlighted and shows the color you are picking up or editing. There is also an out-of-gamut swatch that displays to the right whenever the color you pick up or edit cannot be reproduced by the delivery system. This swatch shows the closest color available in the target color space.


To pick a color from a palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Palette on the list.

3.	Click the palette name list box.

4.	Click a palette on the list.

5.	Click a color in the palette.

Tips

This procedure gives you access to all of the palettes available [image] depending on the application you are using: Custom,  DIC Color Guides, DuPont®, FOCOLTONE®, Image, PANTONE® Process Colors, PANTONE® Spot Colors, TOYO 88, TRUMATCH®, and Uniform,

For PANTONE® Spot Color, you can specify a tint for color intensity (0 for low intensity and 100 for high intensity).

Notes

In Corel DRAW, you have access to all color matching palettes and custom palettes. The Uniform, PANTONE® Spot Color, and Custom Palettes are defined in the RGB color space. All other palettes are defined in CMYK.

In PHOTO-PAINT, the specific palettes available depends on the image mode. The color space in which palettes are defined depends on the image mode.

The color you pick up is placed in the active color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or the New Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To save the image palette in PHOTO-PAINT (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Save As.

2.	Type a filename for the palette.

3.	Press ENTER.

Tips

Once the image palette has been saved, you use it as you would any custom palette.

You can use descriptive names when naming the palette. Remember that files names can be descriptive labels longer than eight characters, and file extensions are not required.

If you are saving to an existing file, double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up (the confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite a custom palette file).

Note

This procedure assumes that you have the image palette open.

 Related Topics


To show palette colors by name (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image].

2.	Enable Show Color Names.

Notes

If a palette is not displayed in the Model area, this menu option is not available.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To show palette colors by swatch (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image].

2.	Disable Show Color Names.

Note

If a palette is not displayed in the Model area, this menu option is not available.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To mix color in the color blend (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Color Blend on the list.

3.	Click a color button in one of the corners.

4.	Click a color on the custom palette that pops up.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color button.

6.	Enable Auto-Blend.

7.	Click a grid square to choose a color.

Tips

Use the color blend to create the intermediary colors between highlight and shadow.

Because you use colors from the custom palette, you can save colors from any of the models or the palettes to the custom palette and then use those colors in the color blend. (You can use the controls in the Color dialog box to collect these colors more conveniently). Also, you can load and reload a number of custom palettes, picking one or more colors from each until you achieve the desired color blend.

Notes

Moving directly between two adjacent corners shows a two-dimensional change in the color mix; moving between opposing corners shows a three- and four-dimensional change in the color mix.

The color you pick up is placed in the active color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or the New Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To change the color blend grid size (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Color Blend on the list.

3.	Click [image], Grid size.

4.	Enable one of the grid sizes.

Tip

You can use a larger grid to obtain a more refined color blending in which the values for each color dimension change more gradually between adjacent grid squares.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To change the color blend color model (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Color Blend on the list.

3.	Click [image], Color Model.

4.	Enable one of the color models.

Notes

When you change the color model, colors in all corners are mapped to corresponding colors in the color model that you choose.

In Corel DRAW, the RGB, CMYK, and HSB color models are available. Choose the color model that is most appropriate for the drawing. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the choice of model is determined by the image mode. For example, if you are working with a 32-bit image, only CMYK is available.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To open the mixing area in DRAW (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Mixing Area on the list.

 Related Topics


To mix color in the mixing area (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Pick up a color from the color models, the color matching palettes, the color blend, or the mixing area.

2.	Type a percentage value in the Blend number box.

3.	Click the Paint Brush.

4.	Click the mixing area to apply and blend the color.

Tip

You use the Blend value to increase (high value) or decrease (low value) the subtlety of color blending. This feature gives you greater control over the mixing process. Use a high value when you want to gradually build up color to the desired saturation. Use a low value when you want to lay down a heavily saturated base.

Notes

This procedure assumes that you have the mixing area open. To open the mixing area in Corel CRAW, use the procedure "To open the mixing area in DRAW". To open the mixing area in PHOTO-PAINT, use the procedure "To open the mixing area in PHOTO-PAINT".

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To pick up color from the mixing area (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the Eye Dropper.

2.	Click the mixing area to pick up the color.

Notes

This procedure assumes that you have the mixing area open.

The color you pick up is placed in the active color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or the New Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To change the mixing area brush size (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Brush Size.

2.	Enable one of the brush sizes.

Notes

If the mixing area is not displayed on the Roll-Up, the Brush Size menu item is not available.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To change the mixing area color model (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Color Model.

2.	Enable one of the color models.

Notes

In Corel DRAW, the RGB, CMYK, and HSB color models are available. Choose the color model that is most appropriate for the drawing. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the choice of model is determined by the image mode. For example, if you are working with a 32-bit image, only CMYK is available.

If the mixing area is not displayed on the Roll-Up, the Color Model menu item is not available.

 Related Topics


To save the mixing area (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Save Bitmap.

2.	Type a filename in the File name field.

3.	Click OK.

Tips

If you are saving to an existing file, you can double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up (the confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite a mixing area file).

By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects and save them to a library of mixing areas. You can use the Windows File Manager to organize bitmap file locations.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To load a mixing area (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Load Bitmap.

2.	Locate the file in the list.

3.	Double-click the filename in the list.

Tips

You can also type a filename in the File Name field and press the ENTER key.

By using the Save Bitmap and Load Bitmap menu options, you can create mixing areas for specific applications or projects and save them to a library of mixing areas. You can use the Windows File Manager to organize bitmap file locations.

Notes

The Load Bitmap action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the mixing area currently in use, you will lose it when the new mixing area loads.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To clear the mixing area (Color Roll-Up)

Click [image], Clear Bitmap.

Tip

You can create new mixing area files by clearing the mixing area, developing a new set of color mixes, and saving the mixing area under a new filename.

Notes

The clear mixing area action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the mixing area, you lose the current set of mixes.

The mixing area background changes to the color in the Paper Color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or the Reference Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To pick a color from the custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color model list box.

2.	Click Palettes from the list.

3.	Click the palette name list box.

4.	Click Custom Palette.

5.	Click the scroll bar to display different areas of the custom palette.

6.	Click the color you want to pick up.

Notes

The color is put in the active color swatch (for PHOTO-PAINT) or New Color swatch (for DRAW).

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To add color to the custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Define a color from the color models, palettes, or mixers.

2.	Click the Name field.

3.	Type a name for the color.

4.	Click [image], Add Color.

Notes

You cannot add two or more colors under the same name in the custom palette. You do not have to name a color to add it to the custom palette; you can always rename the color later. When you add a color from one of the Palettes, the color name is also used in the custom palette.

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up are reflected in the custom palette in the Color dialog box. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the Roll-Up or the dialog box. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To rename a color in a custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click the color in the custom palette.

2.	Click the Name field.

3.	Type a name for the color.

Notes

No additional action is necessary to confirm the name change.

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up are reflected in the custom palette in the Color dialog box. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the Roll-Up or the dialog box. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To delete a color from the custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click a color in the custom palette.

2.	Click [image], Delete Color.

3.	Click YES to delete the color; click NO to cancel the delete action.

Notes

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up are reflected in the custom palette in the Color Dialog. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the Roll-Up or the dialog. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To arrange color on the custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click a color in the custom palette.

2.	Drag and drop it to a new location on the palette.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you are satisfied with the palette arrangement.

4.	Click OK to keep the color arrangement.

Tips

To cancel changes, click Cancel. All changes made to the custom palette since the last save are discarded.

If you move the cursor above or below the palette, the color swatches automatically scroll up or down.

Notes

Changes that you make to the custom palette in the Color Roll-Up are reflected in the custom palette in the Color dialog box. However, changes are not permanent until you save the palette in either the Roll-Up or the dialog box. When you exit the application, the custom palette is automatically saved.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

Click [image], Save.

Notes

The custom palette is saved to the original file, overwriting the old palette information.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To save a custom palette to another file (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], Save As.

2.	Type a filename for the palette.

3.	Press ENTER.

Tips

You can use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Remember that files names can be descriptive labels longer than eight characters, and file extensions are not required.

If you are saving to an existing file, double-click the filename in the list and then click YES on the confirm pop-up (the confirm pop-up ensures that you do not unintentionally overwrite a custom palette file).

By using the New Palette, Open Palette, Save Palette, and Save As menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and then save them to create a library. The dialog boxes for these menu options permit you to open, create, and delete folders.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To open a custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Save the current custom palette, if you want to keep it.

2.	Click [image], Open Palette.

3.	Locate the file in the list.

4.	Double-click the filename in the list.

Tips

You can also type a filename in the File Name Field and press the ENTER key.

By using the New Palette, Open Palette, and Save/Save As Palette menu options, you can create custom palettes for specific applications or projects, and save them in a library arrangement.

Notes

The Open Palette action is not confirmed. If you have not saved the custom palette currently in use, you will lose it when the new custom palette loads.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To start a new custom palette (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click [image], New Palette.

2.	Type a filename for the new palette.

3.	Press ENTER.

Tip

Use descriptive names when naming your custom palettes. Remember that files names can be descriptive labels longer than eight characters, and file extensions are not required.

Note

If you have not saved the custom palette currently in use, a pop-up displays so that you can confirm the new palette action. Click YES to continue if you have already saved the current palette or if you want to discard it. Click NO to cancel the new palette action so that you can save the current palette through the Palette Options, New Palette menu option.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To update the Reference Color with the New Color in DRAW (Color Roll-Up)

Click the Update Reference Color button.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To swap the Reference and New Colors in DRAW (Color Roll-Up)

Click [image], Swap Colors.

Note

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


To edit the selected color (Color Roll-Up)

1.	Click a color component field.

2.	Type a number within the color model’s range of values.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each component.

Tip

Using the color component fields is one way to edit the selected color. For color models, you can also use the visual selectors. This method of editing is best suited to colors from the color matching palettes. The color component fields let you make slight adjustments as a way of fine tuning the selected color.

Notes

This procedure assumes that all sections of the Color Roll-Up are displayed.

This procedure assumes that you have all Roll-Up options open. Use the procedure "To change viewing options in the Color Roll-Up".

 Related Topics


REFERENCE COLOR


The Reference Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the Roll-Up, or the last color updated in the Reference Color swatch from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. The contents of this swatch remains unchanged, regardless of the color editing you undertake, until you update it using the Update Reference Color Button.


NEW COLOR


The New Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the Roll-Up, or the last color selected from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. If this color is not available in the color gamut of the delivery system (which is usually your printer), the Printable Color swatch appears below it to show the color you’ll print in place of the New Color. You can update the New Color with the Printable Color by clicking Update New Color button.


PRINTABLE COLOR


<reference entry for Color dialog>


PAINT AND PAPER COLORS


The Paint and Paper Color swatches show the current paint color (foreground swatch) and the paper color (background swatch). Click a swatch to make the color active, then edit the color using any of the controls in the Roll-Up. The paper color is used to fill the mixing area when the Clear Mixing Area menu selection is used. These swatches are used only in the Color Roll-Up for Corel PHOTO-PAINT.


UPDATE REFERENCE COLOR BUTTON


<reference entry for Color dialog>


UPDATE NEW COLOR BUTTON


<reference entry for Color dialog>


SWAP BUTTON


Click the Swap button to swap the Paint and Paper Colors.


RESET BUTTON


Click the Reset button to reset the Paper Color to white and the Paint Color to black.


OUT-OF-GAMUT COLOR


The out-of-gamut alarm shows the color that will print when the color you are editing is not possible in the printer’s color space. Click on the out-of-gamut alarm to make this color the active color.

The gamut mapping used to do this is determined in the Color Manager. When the edited color does fall within the printer’s color space, this color does not display.


COLOR MODEL LIST BOX


Click the color model list box to choose from color models and color matching palettes. Only models and palettes that are appropriate for the drawing or image are available. The Color Blend is also available through this list.


FLYOUT MENU BUTTON


Click the flyout menu button to display additional functions for the Roll-Up. In the top portion of the flyout menu, the functions provide choices for adding the new color to the custom palette and for increasing the information options displayed in the Color Roll-Up. In the bottom portion of the menu, the functions available vary depending on the selection in the Model list box.


COLOR COMPONENT FIELDS


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: SURFACE FEATURES: COLOR VALUE FIELDS>


COLOR NAME FIELD


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: CONTROLS>


MIXING AREA


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS, PALETTES, MIXERS: MIXING AREA>


PAINT BRUSH


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS, PALETTES, MIXERS: MIXING AREA>


EYEDROPPER


Click the Eydropper Tool to pick up color from the mixing area, the Paint and Paper Color swatches(for Corel PHOTO-PAINT), or the Reference, New, and Printable Color swatches (for DRAW). The cursor changes to an eye dropper.


BLEND NUMBER BOX


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS, PALETTES, MIXERS: MIXING AREA>


RGB


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: RGB>


HSB


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: HSB>


CMY


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: CMY>


CMYK


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: CMYK>


CMYK 255


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: CMYK 255>


L*a*b*


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: L*a*b*>


HLS

<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: HLS>


YIQ

<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR MODELS: YIQ>


PALETTES DROP DOWN LIST


Click the palettes list box to choose from the color matching palettes or the custom palette. In CorelDRAW, you have access to all palettes; in PHOTO-PAINT, the range of palettes available depends on the color mode of the image. PHOTO-PAINT also offers an image palette which is based on the color content of the image.


UNIFORM PALETTE


The uniform palette offers 255 standard RGB colors for quick selection. Colors are expressed as RGB values for all images and drawings. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu (the color names correspond to the R, G, and B values).


IMAGE PALETTE


This palette is based on the colors in the image, and is available only in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.


CUSTOM PALETTE


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: PALETTES: >


DIC


Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu. Swatches are identified by palette and color ID code:

DIC id# for DIC Color Guide

DIC Part II id# for DIC Color Guide Part II

DIC Traditional id# for DIC Traditional Colors of Japan


DuPont


Offers colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster® solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on the L*a*b* color space and are shown as RGB or CMYK for display (depending on the image or drawing) and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


FOCOLTONE


Offers colors that are available through the FOCOLTONE® color system. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


PANTONE Spot Colors


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Spot Colors (also known as PANTONE® Matching System). You define tint through the Tint Number Box, ranging from 0 (lightest) to 100 (darkest) to control saturation. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate. In Corel DRAW, you can use spot colors freely. In PHOTO-PAINT, you can use spot colors only in CMYK images to affect duotones. Colors are shown as RGB or CMYK for display (depending on the image or drawing), and can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


PANTONE Process Colors


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


TOYO


Offers colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the L*a*b* color space and are shown as RGB or CMYK for display (depending on the image or drawing) and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


TRUMATCH


Offers colors that are available through the TRUMATCH® color system. This system is based on the CMYK color model and therefore colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Show Color Names option in the flyout menu.


COLOR BLEND


<aliased to text for WHAT’S THIS: COLOR DIALOG: COLOR MODELS, PALETTES, MIXERS: COLOR BLEND>


COLOR BUTTON


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR BLEND: COLOR BUTTON>


Auto-Blend button


<aliased to text for COLOR DIALOG: WHAT’S THIS: COLOR BLEND: AUTOBLEND BUTTON>


APPLY FILL BUTTON


Click this button to apply the new color to fill the selected object.


APPLY OUTLINE BUTTON


Click this button to apply the new color to outline the selected object.


File formats - Overview

Data in a computer file can be stored using several systems. The system that any one file uses is known as its file format. Different types of files, such as bitmap, vector, sound, text, etc., use different formats, but even within a type group, there can be dozens of different formats available. Formats are frequently referred to by the extension that gets added to the file when saving it in that format, e.g., .CMX, .BMP, .DOC, .AVI, .TIF, etc. In Windows 95-based applications, different formats use different icons when listed in file managers and dialog boxes, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT's Open dialog box.

File formats are often created for use by a specific application. For example, images created in CorelDRAW are stored as .CDR files. Some formats are more generic, such as the .TXT format, which is an ASCII file and not associated with any specific application.


File compression

Computer files are often stored in a compressed format to save space on your hard disk. There are several compression techniques that can be used, depending on the original file format. Generally, the more compressed a file is, the slower it is to read from and/or write to.

Compression can be lossless or lossy. Lossless compression retains all the original data through the compression and decompression processes. Lossless compression is recommended for storing text or numerical data, such as spreadsheets. Lossy compression loses some of the original data, but depending on your requirements, this loss may not make a difference in the final result of your work. Lossy compression can compress your original files to a much greater extent than lossless compression, and so it may be desired when disk space is at a premium.

RLE, LZW, and CCITT are lossless compression techniques. JPEG is a lossy technique and is used mainly to compress color and grayscale continuous-tone images. The information that is discarded during compression does not seriously affect the image quality.


Color depth

Color depth refers to the number of colors that can be supported in a file. A 1-bit file supports two colors (usually black and white), a 2-bit file supports four colors, a 4-bit file supports 16 colors, an 8-bit file supports 256 colors and a 24-bit file supports 16 million colors. A grayscale image is an 8-bit file, with 256 increments between black and white. The higher the color depth supported by a file, the more space the file takes up on disk.

When you save or export a file, you can often specify what color depth you want to save the image to. If you have few colors in your original image, saving to a higher color depth (e.g., 16 color to 256 color) should produce an image whose colors are very similar to the original. However, if your original image has many colors, and you convert it to a lower color depth (e.g., 24 bit color to 256 color), the file will create a palette of colors and use combinations of these colors to attempt to simulate the original color of the pixel. The colors in the palette will depend on the colors in the original image.

Different applications support different color depths. As well, some file formats support only certain numbers of colors. When deciding what file format to use when saving a file, you should consider any color limitations of the file format and the application you'll be using with the file.

Note

A file format that supports a large number of colors may not necessarily support all color depths less than its maximum. For example, a format may support 24-bit color, but not black and white.


Corel Filter Manager - overview

For an application to read a file that has been saved in a specific file format, it requires a translator to decode the format information and open the file. This translator can be embedded into the application, but with the dozens of file formats available, it would require an enormous amount of memory.

The Corel Filter Manager contains translators for all the file formats supported by all the Corel applications. For example, if you're working in CorelDRAW and you wish to open a file that has been saved in a format other than .CDR, the filter manager translates the file so that the program can open it. If you want to save an image in a format other than .CDR, the filter manager translates the file into the other format before saving it.

Corel applications that create documents, such as CorelDRAW and Corel PRESENTS, have their own native file formats that they use to store document information. The Open and Save/Save As commands are used to load and save this information. The Import command is used to load individual images that have been saved in non-native formats into an open document. The Export command is used to save images in non-native formats.

For applications that do not create documents, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel OCR-TRACE, the Open and Save/Save As commands are used to load and save images.


Importing files

Corel applications support various file formats, but only some of them are native to the application. If you want to read a file that has a non-native format, you must import that file.

The Import command is located in the File menu. When you choose the command, a dialog box appears where you can choose the drive and folder where the file is saved. If you know the format of the file you want, you can choose it from the File As Type list to display only the files with that extension. To choose the file to import, double-click the filename in the display window.


Exporting files

Corel applications can save files in various file formats, but only some of them are native to the application. If you want to save a file in a non-native format, you must export that file.

The Export command is located in the File menu. When you choose the command, a dialog box appears where you can choose the drive and folder where the file is to be saved. You can choose a file type from the list box and the format's extension appears in the File Name box. You can give the file a name by double-clicking the filename in the display window.


Bitmap file formats

Bitmaps are images made up of an array of rectangular dots ("pixels"). They are created in imaging programs, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or when a paper document is scanned.

For information about bitmap file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

Adobe Photoshop (.PSD)

CALS Raster (.CAL)

Cursors (.CUR, .DLL, .EXE))

GEM Raster (.IMG)

Graphics Interchange Format (.GIF)

Icons (.ICO, .DLL, .EXE))

Joint Photographic Experts Group, JPEG (.JPG)

Kodak Photo CD (.PCD)

Macintosh Paint (.MAC)

OS/2 Bitmap (.BMP)

Paintbrush (.PCX)

Picture Publisher 4.0 (.PP4)

Resource Bitmaps (.DLL, .EXE)

Scitex (.CT)

Tag Image File Format, TIFF (.TIF)

Targa (.TGA)

Windows Bitmap (.BMP)


Windows Bitmap (.BMP) Microsoft Windows Bitmap. Bitmap file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by Microsoft Windows and Windows NT platforms on Intel machines. Supported by many applications. Supports 1-, 4-, 8-, 16-, 24- and 32-bit color. Unlimited image size. Supports RLE compression. Used widely to exchange and store bitmap information.


OS/2 Bitmap (.BMP): Bitmap file format developed by Microsoft Corporation and IBM. Supported by Intel machines running OS/2, MS-DOS, Windows and Windows NT. Supported by numerous applications, including non-OS/2 and non-PC applications. Supports 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit and 24-bit color. Supports RLE compression. Maximum image size 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. Used to store bitmap information.


CALS Raster (.CAL):  Bitmap file format developed by the United States Department of Defense. Supported by all platforms. Supports monochromatic images only. Unlimited image size. Supports CCITT Group 4 compression. Used in most U.S. government document-handling applications. Also used as a data exchange format for technical graphics, Computer Aided Design and Computer Aided Manufacturing, and image processing applications.


Scitex (.CT): Bitmap file format. Supported by PC platform. Supported by most applications. Supports grayscale and CMYK (32-bit) color. Does not support compression. Used primarily for color separations.


Cursors (.CUR, .DLL, .EXE): Resource file formats used to create cursors for Windows 3.1, Windows NT and Windows 95 interfaces. Supports 1-bit and 4-bit color. Corel applications can only import these formats.


Resource Bitmaps (.DLL, .EXE): Resource file formats used to create bitmaps (e.g., dialog boxes) for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces. Supports 1-bit and 4-bit color. Corel applications can only import these formats.


Graphics Interchange Format (.GIF):  Graphics Interchange Format. Bitmap file format created by CompuServe Inc. Supported by MS-DOS, Macintosh, UNIX, Amiga, and other platforms. Supports 256 colors. Maximum image size is 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. Supports LZW compression. Mainly used as an exchange format, but is supported by many applications. Can store multiple bitmap images in a single file.


Icons (.ICO, .DLL, .EXE): Resource file formats used to create icons for Windows 3.1, Windows NT and Windows 95 interfaces. Supports 1-bit and 4-bit color. Corel applications can only import these formats.


GEM Raster (.IMG):  GEM Raster. Bitmap file format native to the Graphical Environment Manager developed by Digital Research. Support by GEM, MS-DOS and Atari ST platforms. Supports 16,384 colors. Maximum image size is 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. Supports RLE compression. Used mainly on the Atari ST platform, but is also frequently found in the PC desktop publishing environment.


Joint Photographic Experts Group, JPEG (.JPG):  Also known as JFIF (for JPEG File Interchange Format). Bitmap file format developed by C-Cube Microsystems. Supported by all platforms. Supports 24-bit color. Maximum image size is 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. Supports JPEG compression. Used as a storage and exchange format for files containing data that has been compressed with JPEG.


Kodak Photo CD (.PCD):  Kodak Photo CD. Bitmap file format developed by Eastman Kodak. Supported by all platforms. and supports 24-bit color. Maximum image size is 2,048 pixels by 3,072 pixels. Used to store photographic images on CD-ROMs.


Paintbrush (.PCX):  Bitmap file format native to PC Paintbrush and Microsoft Paintbrush for Windows. Supported by MS-DOS, Windows, UNIX and other platforms, and numerous applications. Supports 24-bit color. Maximum image size is 64,000 by 64,000 pixels. Supports RLE compression. Widely used as a storage and exchange format for Windows-based applications.


Macintosh Paint (.MAC): Macintosh Paint, MacPaint. Bitmap file format developed by Apple Computer Inc. Supported by Macintosh platform. Supports monochrome artwork only. Maximum image size is 576 pixels by 720 pixels. Supports RLE compression. Used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black and white graphics and clipart.


Picture Publisher 4.0 (.PP4): Bitmap file format developed by MicroGrafx. Supported by PC platforms. Supported by Picture Publisher. Supports 1-, 4-, 8-, 24-, and 32-bit color. Supports LZW compression. No maximum image size. Used for storage of bitmap information. Corel applications can only import this format.


Adobe Photoshop (.PSD):  Bitmap file format native to Adobe Photoshop 2.5. Supported by Macintosh and MS Windows platforms. Maximum image size is 30,000 pixels by 30,000 pixels. Supports RLE compression. Widely used in commercial art sector.


Targa (.TGA):  Targa Image File. Bitmap file format developed by Truevision Inc. Supported by MS-DOS, Windows, UNIX, Atari, Amiga and other platorms. Supported by numerous applications. Supports 32-bit color. No maximum image size. Supports RLE compression. Used widely in paint, graphics and imaging applications. Also widely used for still video editing.


Tag Image File Format (.TIF):  Tagged Image File Format (TIFF). Bitmap file format developed by Aldus. Supported by MS-DOS, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms and most paint, imaging, and desktop publishing applications. Supports 24-bit color. Supports RLE, LZW, CCITT Group 3 and Group 4, and JPEG compression. Very widely used format for storing and exchanging graphics information among platforms and applications.


Vector file formats

Vector images are stored as algebraic equations defining the various lines and curves of the drawing. They can also include bitmap information. They are created in illustration programs, such as CorelDRAW or bitmap tracing applications, such as Corel OCR-TRACE. Vector formats are not restricted to certain color depths.

For information about vector file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

Adobe Illustrator (.AI)

AutoCAD (.DXF)

Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS)

Hewlett Packard Graphics Language (.HGL)

IBM PIF (.PIF)

Interpreted PostScript (.PS)

MAC QuickDraw (.PCT)

MicroGrafix (.DRW)


Adobe Illustrator (.AI): Vector file format developed by Adobe Systems. Supported by Windows platform and numerous Windows-based illustration applications.


MicroGrafx Draw(.DRW): Vector file format developed by MicroGrafx. Supported by Windows platform and MicroGrafx Draw illustration application.


AutoCAD (.DXF):  Vector file format native to AutoCAD, a computer aided design application. Supported by MS-DOS platform Supports 256 colors. Can store three-dimensional objects. Cannot be compressed. Supported by many other CAD programs and some drawing programs, including CorelDRAW.


Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS): Vector file format developed by Adobe Systems. Supported by MS-DOS, Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, and other platforms. Supported by numerous applications. Used for illustration and desktop publishing applications and as a bitmap and vector data interchange.


Hewlett Packard Graphics Language (.HGL): Vector file format developed by Hewlett Packard. Supported by PC and Macintosh platforms. Supported by all illustration applications. Widely used as a page description language.


MAC QuickDraw (.PCT):  Macintosh Picture, QuickDraw Picture. Vector file format developed by Apple Computer Inc. and native to QuickDraw. Supported by Macintosh platform. Supports 24-bit color. Supports PackBits and JPEG compression. Widely used in Macintosh applications using graphics.


IBM PIF (.PIF): Vector file format developed by IBM. Supported by PC platform and IBM applications. Not widely used.


Interpreted PostScript (.PS): Vector file format developed by Adobe Systems. Supported by PC, Macintosh and UNIX platforms. Supported by all graphics applications. Used as a page description language. Very common in professional printing industry.


Metafile File Formats

Metafiles are a type of vector file format that are used to facilitate the exchange of information among applications. For example, .CMX is an exchange format used by all Corel graphics applications. For more information about metafile file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM)

NAPLAS Graphic Metafile (.NAP)

OS/2 PM Metafile (.MET)

Windows Metafile (.WMF)

WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG)


Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM): Computer Graphics Metafile. Metafile format developed by the International Standards Organization and the American Standards National Institute. Supported by all platforms. Supports an unlimited number of colors and unlimited image size. Supports RLE and CCITT Group 3 and Group 4 compression. Used to exchange vector and bitmap information between platforms. Supports the exchange of very sophisticated images.


OS/2 PM Metafile ( .MET): Presentation Manager Metafile. Vector file format developed by Microsoft Corporation and IBM. Supported by OS/2 platform. Supports unlimited colors. Supports RLE compression. Used to store and exchange graphics information among OS/2-based applications.


NAPLAS Graphic Metafile (.NAP): Vector file format. Supported by PC and UNIX platforms and communications applications. Mainly used to communicate graphic images between computers.


Windows Metafile (.WMF):  Microsoft Windows Metafile. Vector file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by Windows platform and several Windows-based graphics applications. Supports 24-bit color. Widely used to store and exchange vector and bitmap data between Windows-based applications.


WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG): Vector file format developed by WordPerfect Corporation. Supported by MS-DOS, Windows, Macintosh and UNIX platforms. Supported by WordPerfect and other word processing applications. Supports 256 colors. Supports RLE compression. Used to store document and image data.


Text file formats

For information about text file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

AmiPro for Windows

ASCII (.TXT)

MS Word for DOS, Windows (.DOC)

MS Word for MAC (.MCW)

MS Write (.WRI)

Rich Text Format (.RTF)

WordPerfect for DOS, Windows (.WP?)

WordStar for DOS, Windows (.WSD)

XYWrite for DOS III, III Plus, IV


MS Word for DOS, Windows (.DOC): Text file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by MS Word and other word processing applications.


MS Word for MAC (.MCW): Text file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by MS Word and other word processing applications.


Rich Text Format (.RTF):  Rich Text Format. Text file format created by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by MS-DOS platform and most word processing applications. Supports 256 colors. Does not support compression. Used mainly to exchange formatted text data among platforms and word processing applications.


ASCII (.TXT): Also known as ANSI. Text file format developed by the American National Standards Institute. Supported by all platforms and all applications. Standard text format. Widely used.


WordPerfect for DOS, Windows (.WP): Text file format developed by WordPerfect Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by WordPerfect and other word processing applications.


MS Write (.WRI): Text file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by Windows platform. Supported by MS Write, a word processing application included with Windows 3.1 interface.


.WordStar for DOS, Windows (WSD): Text file format developed by WordStar. Supported by Windows platform. Supported by WordStar word processing application.


AmiPro for Windows: Text file format developed by Lotus Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by AmiPro word processing application.


XYWrite for DOS III, III Plus, IV, Windows: Text file format. Supported by PC platform. Supported by XYWrite word processing application.


Presentation file formats

Presentation file formats are used to store information for business graphics applications. For information about presentation file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

Harvard Graphics 2.0 (.SHW)

Harvard Graphics 3.0 (.SH3)

Lotus Freelance (.FLW)

MS PowerPoint 2.0, 3.0 (.PPT)


Lotus Freelance (.FLW): Presentation file format developed by Lotus Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by Lotus Freelance application. Used for storing business graphics information.


MS PowerPoint 2.0, 3.0 (.PPT): Presentation file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by PC platform. Supported by MS PowerPoint application. Used for storing business graphics information.


Harvard Graphics 3.0 (.SH3):. Presentation file format developed by Software Publishing. Supported by PC platform. Supported by Harvard Graphics and other applications. Used for storing business graphics information. Format is proprietary to Software Publishing.


Harvard Graphics 2.0 (.SHW): Presentation file format developed by Software Publishing. Supported by MS-DOS platform. Supported by Harvard Graphics and other applications. Used for storing business graphics information. Format is proprietary to Software Publishing.


Sound file formats

Sound file formats are used to store digital audio information. For information about sound file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

AIFF (.AIF)

Amiga Sound (.SVX)

MAC Sound (.SND)

MIDI (.MID)

Sound Blaster (.VOC)

Wave (.WAV)


AIFF (.AIF): Sound file format developed by Apple Computer Inc. Supported by Macintosh platform and applications. Supports ACE2, ACE8, MAC3 and MAC6 compression. Used for storing audio information.


MIDI (.MID): Sound file format developed by International MIDI Association. Supported by Windows platform and numerous applications. Used for creating digital sound for musical instruments.


MAC Sound (.SND): Sound file format developed by Apple Computer Inc. Supproted by Macintosh platform and various Macintosh applications. Supports some compression. Used as a system resource format for storing audio information.


Amiga Sound (.SVX): Sound file format developed by Commodore. Supported by Amiga platform and applications. Does not support compression. Used for storing audio information.


Sound Blaster (.VOC): Sound file format developed by Creative Labs Inc. Supported by Windows and DOS platforms. Supports (4/3/2, 16-4), CCITT a-Law, and CCITT u-Law compression. Used for storing audio information.


WAVE (.WAV): Sound file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by Windows platform and applications. Supports MSADPCM, CCITT a-Law, CCITT u-Law and other compression. Used as the resource format for storing audio information in Windows platform.


Animation file formats

Animation file formats are used to store graphics information contained within animation frames. For information about animation file formats supported by Corel applications, click the format name below.

Autodesk FLIC (.FLC)

MacPICTS (.PCS, .PIC)

Microsoft Resource Interchange File Format, RIFF (.AVI)

MPEG (.MPG)

Quick Time (.QTM)


Microsoft Resource Interchange File Format, RIFF (.AVI): Animation file format developed by Microsoft Corporation. Supported by Windows and Windows NT platforms. Supported by Windows and OS/2 multimedia applications. Supports 256 colors. Supports RLE compression. Used to store audio, video and graphics information used in multimedia applications.


Autodesk FLIC (.FLC): Also known as .FLI or Flic. Animation file format native to Autodesk Animator and Animator Pro. Supported by Intel platforms. Supports 256 colors. Maximum image size is 64,000 pixels by 64,000 pixels. Supports RLE and delta compression. Used widely for animation sequences in animation graphics, Computer Aided Design and computer games applications. Not well suited for animating real-world images.


MPEG (.MPG): Animation file format developed by Motion Picture Experts Group of the International Standards Organization. Supported by all platforms. Supported by Xing Technologies MPEG player and other applications. Supports DCT compression. Maximum image size 4095 pixels by 4095 pixels by 30 frames per second. Used to encode audio, video, text, and graphical data.


MacPICTS (.PCS, .PIC): Animation file format developed by Macromedia. Supported by Macintosh platforms. Supported by Macromedia Director and Macintosh applications. Supports 256 colors. Supports PackBits and JPEG compression. Used to store animation data. Predecessor of Quick Time.


Quick Time (QTM): Animation file format developed by Apple Computer Inc. Supported by Apple Macintosh and Microsoft Windows platforms. Supports 24-bit color. Maximum image size is 64,000 by 64,000 pixels. Supports RLE, JPEG and other compression techniques. Used to store audio and motion video information.


Corel native file formats

The following formats are native to Corel applications. For more information, click the format name.

CorelCHART (.CCH)

CorelDRAW (.CDR)

CorelFLOW (.CFL)

Corel Meta Exchange (.CMX)

Corel Metafile (.CMF)

Corel MOVE (.MOV)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (.CPT)

Corel SHOW (.SHW)

Wavelet (.WVT)


CorelCHART (.CCH): Presentation file format.


CorelDRAW (.CDR): Vector file format. Used to save document information from all versions of CorelDRAW.


CorelFLOW (.CFL): Design file format. CorelFLOW creates flowcharts.


Corel Metafile (.CMF): Exchange format used in Corel Version 4 products.


Corel Meta Exchange (.CMX): Exchange format used in Corel products, Version 5 and higher.


CorelMOVE (.MOV): Animation file format.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (.CPT): Bitmap file format. Supported by Windows platform and various image editing applications. Supports 1-, 2-, 4-, 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit color, and 8-bit grayscale images. Can store masks and objects created in PHOTO-PAINT.


CorelSHOW (.SHW): Presentation file format.


Wavelet (.WVT): Bitmap file format. Supports 24-bit color. Supports Wavelet compression. Used to store bitmap information at high compression levels.


OPEN DIALOG


Lists the folders and files in the selected location. To see what’s inside a folder, double-click it. You can also use the Look In box to see the hierarchy of folders.


Lists the available folders and files.  To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what’s inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all files.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you’re interested in.


Opens the file with the name, file type, and location you have specified.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected graphics file. If a non-graphics file is selected, the Preview window is de-activated and appears crossed through with an X.

Note
You must enable the Preview check box to display graphics files in the Preview window. If this check box is disabled, the Preview window appears crossed through with an X.


Displays the progress of the selected file as it loads into the Preview window.


Use the scroll bar to visually scroll through a file containing more than one graphic item. Executable (EXE) files, for example, often contain icons and cursors which may be viewed in the Preview window.

Only graphics files will appear in the Preview window. Non-graphics files are not displayed.


Click the Preview check box (if it is not already enabled) to see a thumbnail of your image. When Preview is disabled an X appears in the Preview window. Also, vector files that do not have a BMP header associated with them cannot be previewed and appear as an X.


Click the down arrow to display a drop-down box listing several different methods of opening files. You can load files as:

Full Image
Loads the entire file. If the file you are opening is too large for your system resources, "not enough memory" is displayed. The file is loaded as a partial area.

Crop
Loads a cropped area. The Crop Image dialog box opens. Crop an area.

Resample
Loads a resampled version of the file. The Resample dialog box opens. Resample an area.

Partial Load
Loads a partial area. The Partial Area dialog box opens. Select an area.


Click to view file information such as image size, file format, keywords, notes, and suppress filter.


Click to open the About Import Filter dialog box that displays information about the currently selected file/filter type (i.e., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image, CPT).


Select filter.


Displays the image dimensions (in pixels) and image color mode.


Displays the file format of the currently selected image (e.g., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image (CPT) Uncompressed).


Displays a list of all notes that are attached to the currently selected file.


Provides a space for you to type file keywords. These keywords are used to find files stored on your system. You can type single words, phrases, or combinations of both. Use commas to separate each keyword.


To use OPI links, you must enable the "Link to high resolution file for output using OPI" option when importing your TIFF (or CT) files. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto a new slide.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto the current slide.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto the current background.


When enabled, suppresses the dialog box that lets you specify options for opening, importing, exporting, or saving a file to or from the specified file format. The program automatically assigns default settings.


Enable this check box when importing vector formats only. If turned on, CorelDRAW eliminates redundant points in the imported graphic. Set the tolerance value in the number box. This value controls how much the curve can vary from the original. A small value forces high accuracy, but will result in more points.


SAVE DIALOG


Lists the folders and files in the selected location. To see what’s inside a folder, double-click it. You can also use the Look In box to see the hierarchy of folders.


Lists the available folders and files. To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what’s inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you’re interested in.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click to displays an overview of this dialog box. For help on an item, click the ? button at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Click to open the About Import Filter dialog box that displays information about the currently selected file/filter type (i.e., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image, CPT).


Displays a list of all keywords that are attached to the currently selected file.


Displays a list of all notes that are attached to the currently selected file.


Displays a drop-down box listing the available compression types. The compression types vary with the file/filter type selected in the Save as type: drop-down box. Click to select a compression type before saving.


When enabled, suppresses the dialog box that lets you specify options for opening, importing, exporting, or saving a file to or from the specified file format. The program automatically assigns default settings.


Enable to create a backup copy of the file when saved.


Enable to save only selected objects.

Note
Ensure that you have selected the desired objects before choosing Save, otherwise this option will be grayed out.


CROP DIALOG


Overview info


Crop Image dialog box

The Crop Image dialog box allows you to crop an image before loading. The cropping is permanent and creates a new, smaller image.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


What’s This?


Displays the path, file name, and file extension of the image to be cropped.


Displays the image with a bounding box. Move the nodes on the bounding box to crop the image. Use the Hand cursor to move the bounding box to a specific area of the image.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the height of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the width of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to position the top of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to position the left side of the cropped area.


Click to select the entire image or to resize the bounding box to cover the entire area and reselect the cropped area.


Displays a drop-down box listing a number of image measurement units. The values displayed in the Width and Height number boxes will reflect the measurement unit selected here.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image in bytes.


RESAMPLE


Overview


Resample dialog box

The Resample dialog box creates a new image, resampled to a smaller size.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


What’s This?


Displays the path, file name, and file extension of the image to be resampled.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the width of the resampled image.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the height of the resampled image.


Displays a drop-down box displaying a number of measurement units by which you can resample an image. The values displayed in the Width and Height boxes reflect the chosen unit of measurement.


Displays the width of the original file according to the measurement unit selected in the Units drop-down box.


Displays the height of the original file according to the measurement unit selected in the Units drop-down box.


Controls the horizontal resolution of the image currently being resampled. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the original image prior to resampling.


Displays the vertical resolution of the original image prior to resampling.


Controls the vertical resolution of the image currently being resampled. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values. Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Enable to maintain the image aspect ratio (the image width and height proportions rated in percentage values). Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Displays the original image size in bytes prior to resampling.


Displays the new image size in bytes based on the current resampling settings.


BITMAP


Bitmap Import/Export dialog box

Use this dialog box to specify how you want to import or export bitmap files.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


Displays a drop-down list box where you choose a color mode. Choose the number of shades of gray or the number of colors you want.

The greater the number of colors, the larger the file.

Black and white = 1 bit

16 shades of gray = 4 bits

256 shades of gray = 8 bits

16 colors = 4 bits

256 colors = 8 bits

16 million colors = 24 bits

CMYK image = 32 bits

Not all levels of color or grayscale are supported by all the bitmap formats. If you have chosen a bitmap format that does not support a gray or color format, the option will not appear in the list box. For example, SCITEX CT is only exportable in CMYK, 32-bit format.


Dithers the colors and gray shades in the file. Dithering may produce better results when you use fewer colors than the original image. If the image contains fountain fills or color blends, dithering can cause obvious banding. Here are some guidelines to help you decide whether to dither the bitmap:

When you are importing 16 or 256 colors or grays, use dithering.

When you intend to scale the bitmap in another application, dithering is not recommended.


Specifies the resolution (in dots per inch) for bitmaps. Choose one of the preset resolutions from the list box or choose Custom and type or choose the resolution in the DPI box.

Note
As the resolution increases, so does the size of the file and the time required to print the image.


Specifies the dimensions of the bitmap. Choose one of the preset sizes from the list box or choose Custom and type the dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. If a size is not selected, the original size of the image is used.


Compresses the imported file so that it takes less disk space. Compressed files take more time to save and load. Compression is optional for some bitmap formats; for others, compression is always performed.


Shows the estimated size of the imported file before compression. Compressed files will be smaller than the value displayed.


Returns to the settings that were in effect when you opened the dialog box.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values. Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Controls the width of the file in pixels. To change the file width, type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new value.


Controls the height of the file in pixels. To change the file height, type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new value.


Type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new vertical resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to select a dpi value.

Note
High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new horizontal resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to select a dpi value.

Note
High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Creates a smoother graphics file by removing the jagged edges from the original.


Toggles guideline visibility. When Show Guidelines is disabled, guidelines will not appear on the screen.


Toggles the guideline snap on and off. When Snap To Guidelines is enabled, objects dragged close to a guideline will fall into alignment with it.


Removes all existing horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.


Click here to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click the question mark at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_ADD	(0x5400003A)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_DELETE	(0x5400003B)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_DELETE_ALL	(0x5400003C)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_HORZ	(0x5400003D)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_MOVE	(0x5400003E)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_POS	(0x5400003F)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_SHOW_GUIDELINES	(0x54000040)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_SNAP_GUIDELINES	(0x54000041)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_UNITS	(0x54000042)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_VERT	(0x54000043)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_ABORTPROCESS	(0x5400001A)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_HIGHERPRIORITY	(0x5400001B)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_LOWERPRIORITY	(0x5400001C)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_SUSPENDPROCESS	(0x5400001D)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_THREADHELP	(0x5400001E)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_THREADTITLE	(0x5400001F)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_LEFTMOVEDOWN	(0x54000064)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_LEFTMOVEUP	(0x54000065)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_RIGHTMOVEDOWN	(0x5400006E)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_RIGHTMOVEUP	(0x5400006F)


IDH_CDRUI_TOOLPAGE_CDRUI_TB_NOITEMS


IDH_SETUP_GRID_CDRUI_SNAPTOFRAMES


IDH_SETUP_GRID_CDRUI_SNAPTOMARGINS


IDH_SETUP_GRID_SHOWMARGINS2


IDH_SETUP_GRID_SNAPTOFRAMES2


The units in which the current value is expressed.


The minimum increment. This is the amount by which the value will increase or decrease when you click one of the spin box arrows.


The units in which the increment value is expressed.


The highest value you can use.


The units in which the maximum value is expressed.


The lowest value you can use.


The units in which the minimum value is expressed.


Displays the roll-ups and roll-up groups that arrange to the left side of the screen.


Displays the roll-ups and roll-up groups that arrange to the right side of the screen.


Moves the current roll-up or roll-up group from the right list to the left list.


Moves the current roll-up or roll-up group from the left list to the right list.


Adds a new, empty roll-up group to the left list.


Adds a new, empty roll-up group to the right list.


The roll-up configuration that will appear on start up.


Resets the roll-up arrangements to their original configuration.


Removes the current roll-up group from the left list.


Moves the current group down.


Moves the current group up.


Removes the current roll-up group from the right list.


Moves the current group down.


Moves the current group up.


Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can change the configuration of your toolbar buttons.


Deletes a custom toolbar, or resets a built-in toolbar.


Displays the available toolbars. Enable the checkbox next to a toolbar to activate it. Click the toolbar's name tag to rename it.


Creates a new toolbar. Click Customize to add buttons to the new toolbar.


Enables large toolbar buttons.


Enables medium toolbar buttons.


Enables small toolbar buttons.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Gives a short description of  the selected command.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Shows the new keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.


Shows the new keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


Automatically resolves conflicts by erasing the old keyboard assignment, and prompting you to assign a new combination to the old command.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Assigns the new keyboard combination to the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


Loads a new keyboard assignment table.


Saves the current keyboard assignment table.


Gives a short description of  the selected command


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Adds the selected command to the menu.


Removes the selected command from the menu.


Adds a separating line to a menu below the current selection.


Adds a new menu.


Moves the current menu or menu entry up.


Moves the current menu or menu entry down.


Displays the current menu structure. Double-click a menu or sub-menu to open it.


Resets the menu assignments to their original configuration.


Gives a short description of  the selected command


Gives a short description of any toolbar button you click.


Displays the available command categories. Click a category to display its command buttons.


Displays the command buttons for the current command category. Click a button to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


A command button. Click it to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


Resets the toolbar assignments to their original configuration.


You can also open the color palette menu by right-clicking the palette border.


These controls let you change the appearance of the on-screen color palette.


The colors in the current palette. Right-click the palette border to open the Color Palette menu.


Shows and hides the color swatch borders.


Toggles between large and small color swatches.


Shows and hides the No Color swatch.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


These controls let you change the effect of right-clicking the color palette.


Changes the effect of right-clicking a color swatch on the palette.


Changes the effect of right-clicking a color swatch on the palette.


Determines the number of horizontal grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of horizontal grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of vertical grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of vertical grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the horizontal position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


Determines the horizontal position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


You can choose another unit of measure for the horizontal ruler from the units box. When you change units, you must specify the Grid Frequency you want to use with that unit.


Determines the vertical position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


Determines the vertical position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


You can choose another unit of measure for the vertical ruler from the units box. When you change units, you must specify the Grid Frequency you want to use with that unit.


Displays markers showing where the grid lines are.

The frequency of the grid marks is determined by the current view. When you use the Zoom tool to magnify the view, the frequency of the grid marks increases.


Forces objects drawn or moved close to a grid line into alignment with the grid. You can also toggle Snap To Grid using the Snap To Grid command in the Layout menu.


Opens the Drawing Scale dialog box where you can set a scale to your drawing other than one to one.


Represents the distance in your drawing that is equivalent to the World Distance value.


Displays the current Page Distance units. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Page Distance value is automatically converted when you change units.


Displays the current World Distance units. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The World Distance value is automatically converted when you change units.


Selects one of several pre-defined drawing scales. The Page Distance and World Distance values are updated to reflect your choice.


Represents the real distance, in inches, that is equivalent to the Page Distance in your drawing.


Creates a slanted guideline at the position and angle you have specified.


The guideline definition method. You can define a slanted guideline using two points, or a single point and an angle. A guideline defined by the points (1,1) and (5,5) would follow the same path as a guideline starting at (1,1) with a 45-degree angle.


The guideline definition method. You can define a slanted guideline using two points, or a single point and an angle. A guideline defined by the points (1,1) and (5,5) would follow the same path as a guideline starting at (1,1) with a 45-degree angle.


The horizontal position of the guideline's origin point.


The horizontal position of the guideline's origin point.


The horizontal position of the guideline's first origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's first origin point.


The guideline's angle, or the horizontal position of the second origin point.


The guideline's angle, or the horizontal position of the second origin point.


The guideline's angle.


The horizontal position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The current guideline definition.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing slanted guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position and angle you have specified.


Creates a vertical guideline at the position you have specified.


The guideline position. Click Add to make a new guideline at this point, or Move to change the selected guideline's position.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing vertical guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing vertical guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position you have specified.


Creates a horizontal guideline at the position you have specified.


The guideline position. Click Add to make a new guideline at this point, or Move to change the selected guideline's position.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing horizontal guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing horizontal guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position you have specified.


Changes the current value.


Displays the roll-ups in this group. Click a roll-up to activate it, or drag it to another part of the screen to split it from the group.


Customize command

Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can customize your toolbars, menus, status bar information, keyboard shortcuts, and other properties of the Corel user interface.


To launch other installed Corel applications

1.	Click Application Launcher.

2.	Click the application you want to run.


Customizing keyboard assignments

Accelerator keys give you quick access to commands that you use frequently.

You can change built-in keyboard assignments, or assign an accelerator key combination to any command. You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different types of operations, saving and loading sets as they are needed.

 Related Topics


To assign an accelerator key to a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	Click the Press new shortcut key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Tip

To automatically resolve accelerator conflicts, enable the Go to conflict on assign option.

 Related Topics


To assign an accelerator key to a text style

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the Style folder.

4.	Click the style you want to change.

5.	Click the Press new shortcut key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination you want to assign to the style. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Tip

To automatically resolve accelerator conflicts, enable Go to conflict on assign.

 Related Topics


To remove an accelerator key from a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Current shortcut keys box, select the key combination you want to remove.

6.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Reset All.

 Related Topics


To save a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Save As.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File in which you want to save your assignments.

Tip

To change the default settings, save your custom accelerator set over the file DEFAULT.ACL.

 Related Topics


To load a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Load.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File you want to load.

 Related Topics


Customizing menus

Your Corel menus are completely customizable. You can add commands to existing menus, or you can add new menus to the menu bar. You can change the order of the menus and their commands to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use most.

Note

When you customize your menus, keep in mind that the help topics referring to those menus do not change.

 Related Topics


To change the order of menus and menu commands

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to move. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click Move Up or Move Down.

 Related Topics


To add a command to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Menu box, click the menu or sub-menu where you want to add the command.

6.	Click Add.

Tip

Use the Separator button to add organizational lines to your menus.

 Related Topics


To remove a menu or menu command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to remove. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click Remove.

 Related Topics


To rename a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to rename. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click the command's name tag, and type the new name.

 Related Topics


To change a menu command's accelerator key

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to rename. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click the command's name tag, and insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as an accelerator.

5.	Remove all unnecessary ampersands.

 Related Topics


To add a new menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Add Menu.

4.	Type a name for the new menu.

Tip

You can add a sub-menu to an existing menu by first double-clicking the existing menu.

 Related Topics


To restore the original menu settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Reset All.

Note

You will lose all changes to the menu settings.

 Related Topics


Customizing the on-screen color palette

Using the on-screen color palette is the easiest way to change colors in your objects. You can move the palette anywhere on the screen and edit the color order to make it easy to find your favorite colors.

 Related Topics


To move the on-screen palette

1.	Click the border of the palette.

2.	Drag the palette to its new position.

Tip

To dock the palette, drag it towards the edge of the window until it changes shape.

 Related Topics


To resize the on-screen palette while it's floating

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the palette.

2.	Drag the edge until the palette is the size you want.

 Related Topics


To resize the on-screen palette while it's docked

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Color Palette.

3.	Type a new value in the Display rows while docked box.

Note

The palette will display up to seven rows of colors.

 Related Topics


To move a color swatch on the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to move.

2.	Drag the color swatch to its new position.

Note

You cannot move the No Color swatch.

 Related Topics


To remove a color swatch from the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to remove.

2.	Right-click the palette border to bring up the palette menu.

3.	Click Delete Color.

 Related Topics


To edit a color swatch on the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to edit.

2.	Right-click the palette border to bring up the palette menu.

3.	Click Edit Color.

4.	Choose the new swatch color (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Using roll-ups

Roll-ups are a quick and easy way to access often-used functions. When you activate a roll-up, you can leave it on screen so its functions are always available, or you can have it close after a single use, like a dialog box. If you like to have several roll-ups available, you can arrange them in a cascading list to conserve screen space.

 Related Topics


To minimize a roll-up

Click the Roll Wind button.

 Related Topics


To close all open roll-ups

1.	Right-click the title bar of an open roll-up.

2.	In the Roll-up menu, click Close All.

 Related Topics


To arrange open roll-ups

1.	Right-click the title bar of an open roll-up.

2.	In the Roll-up menu, click Arrange to minimize the active roll-up and move it to the side of the window

or

Click Arrange All to minimize and arrange all open roll-ups.

Note

When a set of roll-ups is arranged, you can activate them by double-clicking their title bars.

 Related Topics


To get help on roll-ups

1.	Right-click the title bar of an open roll-up.

2.	In the Roll-up menu, click Help.

Tip

You can also get help on a roll-up by pressing Shift-F1 and clicking the roll-up.

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars

Except for the toolbox and its flyouts, you have complete control over the commands on your toolbars. With simple mouse actions, you can dock, undock, resize, and move your toolbars anywhere on the screen.

You can also add and remove buttons to the built-in toolbars, or create your own toolbars containing only the commands you use most often.

Note

When you customize your toolbars, keep in mind that the help topics referring to those toolbars do not change.

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars

You have complete control over your toolbars. With simple mouse actions, you can dock, undock, resize, and move your toolbars anywhere on the screen.

The Toolbars dialog box to controls which toolbars are displayed on the screen at any given moment.

 Related Topics


To move a toolbar

1.	Click the border of the toolbar.

2.	Drag it to its new location. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

Double-click a toolbar's title or border to dock and undock it.

 Related Topics


To resize a toolbar

1.	Move the cursor to the edge of a floating toolbar.

2.	Drag the edge until the toolbar is the correct size. Right-click to cancel the movement.

 Related Topics


To display an existing toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the check box next to the toolbar that you want to activate.

 Related Topics


To create a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click New.

3.	Type a name for the new toolbar.

4.	Use the Customize command to add commands buttons to the new toolbar (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To add a button to a toolbar

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	In the Commands box, click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

5.	Drag the appropriate command button to the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

Click a button to see its description.

You can also hold down the CTRL and ALT keys and drag a button to copy it to another toolbar without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To remove a button from a toolbar

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	Drag the button off the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

You can also hold down the ALT key and drag a button off a toolbar to delete it without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To rename a toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the toolbar you want to rename.

3.	Click the toolbar's name tag.

4.	Type the new name.

 Related Topics


To move a toolbar button

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	Drag the button to another toolbar, or to another spot on the same toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

To add space between two toolbar buttons, drag the right-most button slightly further to the right.

You can also hold down the ALT key and drag a button to move it without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To delete a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the custom toolbar you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

You cannot delete a built-in toolbar.

 Related Topics


To restore the original configuration of a built-in toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the built-in toolbar you want to reset.

3.	Click Reset.

 Related Topics


Navigating your document

The Navigator gives you a quick and easy way to move around in your documents. You can move to any  page in your document with a single mouse click, or quickly add blank pages without interrupting your work.

 Related Topics


To add a page to the beginning of your document using the Navigator

1.	Move to the first page of the document.

2.	In the Navigator, click Add Beginning Page.

 Related Topics


To add a page to the end of your document using the Navigator

1.	Move to the last page of the document.

2.	In the Navigator, click Add Ending Page.

 Related Topics


To go to an existing page of your document using the Navigator

1.	Scroll through the Navigator until you can see the page you want.

2.	Click the Page icon that corresponds to the page you want.

 Related Topics


To go to the first page of your document using the Navigator

In the Navigator, click First Page.

 Related Topics


To go to the last page of your document using the Navigator

In the Navigator, click Last Page.

 Related Topics


To resize the Navigator

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the right border of the Navigator.

2.	Drag the border until the Navigator is the size you want.

 Related Topics


Customizing the status bar

The status bar gives you constant, up-to-date information about your document. You can control the information it gives you so that you always know what you need to know about your work.

 Related Topics


To move the status bar

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Place at Top or Place at Bottom.

 Related Topics


To change the number of status bar display regions

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Number of Regions.

3.	Click the number of regions you want displayed.

Tip

You can have up to six regions displaying different information on a small status bar. When you use a large status bar, you have space for double that amount (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To change what the status bar displays

1.	Right-click the area of the status bar you want to change.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Show.

3.	Click the type of information you want to display.

Tip

To clear the current region, click None.

 Related Topics


To resize the status bar

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, Click Large Status Bar or Small Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Working with grids and rulers

Among its many powerful drawing aids, CorelDRAW allows you to display rulers at the edges of the Drawing window that help determine the size and position of objects in your drawing. CorelDRAW also provides an adjustable grid that lets you align these objects. Using these tools, you can give your drawing the precise look you want.

The Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box provides controls that let you set the grid and ruler parameters, including scale, units, and frequency. You can use rulers or a grid to help you align objects in your drawing.

 Related Topics


Drawing Scale dialog box

Use the Drawing Scale dialog box to set the scale for your drawing. For example, if you are drawing floor plans for your office, this feature allows you to specify how many units on your page (the Page Distance) are equivalent to a given number of units on the floor (the World Distance).

Note

The units you specify in Page Distance are the units used by the Contour Roll-Up and Transform Roll-Up. These units are also the ones used for the rulers. However, if the Drawing Scale is set to its default values (where 1 inch of Page Distance equals 1 inch of World Distance), the rulers use the units specified for Grid Frequency.

 Related Topics


To set ruler parameters

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal and Vertical Unit boxes, specify the unit of measurement you want displayed on the ruler.

4.	Set the 0,0 point in the Horizontal and Vertical Original number boxes.

The 0,0 points determine the cursor and object position information you see in the Status Line. The coordinate values you specify in some dialog boxes are also based on the position of the 0,0 points.

5.	Click OK.

Tip

You can drag the cross hairs onto the drawing window to set the Horizontal and Vertical origins.

 Related Topics


To change the units of measurement on the rulers

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the horizontal ruler to use.

4.	In the Vertical Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the vertical ruler to use.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To reposition the rulers

1.	Hold down the SHIFT key and click the ruler you want to move.

2.	Drag it to a new position.

Tip

To return a ruler to its previous position, hold down the SHIFT key and double-click it.

To move both rulers at once, hold down the SHIFT key and drag the intersection point of the two rulers.

 Related Topics


To display or hide the grid

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Show Grid check box.

 Related Topics


To set grid parameters

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Under Grid Frequency, specify the number of Horizontal and Vertical grid lines you want per unit of measure.

The unit of measure corresponds to the unit set for the rulers.

4.	Enable the Show Grid check box to display the grid in the drawing window. Enable the Snap to Grid check box to have objects snap to the grid.

Notes

When you change the ruler units, you must also specify a new grid frequency. Changing the grid frequency unit also changes the corresponding ruler unit. If the drawing scale setting is not 1:1, the Grid Frequency units appear grayed out and correspond to the drawing scale units.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit apart, type a fractional value in the Grid Frequency field. If the unit of measure is set to inches, for example, you can specify 0.5 to space the grid lines two inches apart.

The Horizontal and Vertical field units are accurate up to two decimal places.

 Related Topics


Working with guidelines

Guidelines provide a useful and easy way to align objects. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the drawing window. You can create any number of guidelines and have CorelDRAW save them along with your drawing.

The Guidelines Setup dialog box provides controls that let you set up horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.

 Related Topics


To move a horizontal or vertical guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Horizontal or Vertical tab.

3.	Choose the guideline you want from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by location.

4.	Specify the location you want relative to the 0 point on the guideline's ruler.

5.	Change the unit of measure as required.

6.	Click Move.

Tip

You can also move a guideline by dragging it. However, If you drag a horizontal or vertical guideline by the handles at the edge of the drawing window, it will convert to a slanted guideline, and cannot be converted back (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To move a slanted guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Slanted tab.

3.	Choose the guideline you want from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by the coordinates of their endpoints.

4.	Choose a two-point guideline or one that has an angle and one point.

5.	Change the unit of measure as required.

6.	Type the guideline's new endpoint coordinates in the four boxes provided; X1, Y1, X2, and Y2.

7.	Click Move.

Tip

You can also move a guideline by dragging the handles where it meets the edge of the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To set up a horizontal guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Horizontal tab.

3.	Type the units and the location relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a horizontal guideline by pointing to the horizontal ruler and dragging into the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To set up a slanted guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Slanted tab.

3.	Type the units and endpoint coordinates (X1, Y1, X2, and Y2) relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a slanted guideline by creating a horizontal or vertical guideline, then dragging one of the handles until the guideline reaches the desired angle.

 Related Topics


To set up a vertical guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Vertical tab.

3.	Type the units and the location relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a vertical guideline by pointing to the vertical ruler and dragging into the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To delete a guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of guideline you want to delete.

3.	Choose the guideline you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Tip

You can also delete a horizontal or vertical guideline by dragging it off the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To position slanted guidelines using the rulers

1.	If you don't see the horizontal and vertical rulers, click View and enable Rulers.

2.	Point to the horizontal or vertical ruler.

3.	Click and drag the guideline onto the drawing window.

4.	Click and drag one of the guideline handles until it is at the desired angle.

Note

Once you have converted a horizontal or vertical guideline to a slanted guideline, you cannot convert it back.

 Related Topics


To position slanted guidelines using the Guidelines Setup box

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click Slanted Guideline.

3.	Type the guideline angle relative to the 0,0 points on the ruler.

4.	Click Add.

 Related Topics


Customizing roll-ups

If you use roll-ups often, you'll want to organize them for easier access. Roll-ups can be grouped together so that a single roll-up window gives you access to the commands of several roll-ups.

Roll-up groups support drag-and-drop, so you can quickly group and ungroup roll-ups while you work.

 Related Topics


To create a roll-up group

1.	Open the roll-ups you want to group together.

2.	Hold down the CTRL key and drag one of the roll-ups onto another.

3.	Continue adding roll-ups until your group is complete.

Tip

To remove a roll-up from a group, drag its icon out of the group window.

 Related Topics


To rename a roll-up group

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Roll-ups.

3.	Click the roll-up group you want to change.

4.	Click the name tag of the roll-up group.

5.	Type the new name.

 Related Topics


To change a roll-up's alignment

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Roll-ups.

3.	Click the roll-up you want to change.

4.	Click Move.

Note

When you change a roll-up's alignment, it appears on the other side of the window.

 Related Topics


To change the initial roll-up configuration

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Roll-ups.

3.	Click Start Up Setting.

4.	Choose a start-up option.

 Related Topics


(On the left or right side of the Navigator.) Adds a page to your document.


(In the bottom, left-hand corner of the window.) Helps you move through your document quickly.


(In the upper, right-hand corner of a roll-up.) Minimizes and maximizes the roll-up.


(On the right side of the Navigator.) Displays the last page of your document.


(On the left side of the Navigator.) Displays the first page of your document.


Jumps to the specified page of your document.


Launches installed Corel applications.


Removes the current fill or outline color.


Displays text just as you entered it. Numbers display without leading or trailing zeroes, and with no thousands separators.

You can use the & placeholder symbol to add a common string to another string. For example, the format string "Hello," & ",you may have already won $5,000,000.00" would format the string "John Doe" as: Hello, John Doe, you may have already won $5,000,000.00.

Note the use of the quotation marks around the strings before and after the &. You must include these when creating your own General format.


Creates date/time formats.

The default date and time formats are based upon the current International settings which you can modify using the Windows Control Panel.


Creates numeric formats to display non-linear values, including currency.


Creates Linear formats to display measurements in the Imperial or Metric system, or in picas and points. Each format can have one or two entries with the first used for the major (or larger unit) and the second the minor (or smaller unit). If the first unit contains digits after the decimal, or a fraction, then you cannot enter a minor unit.

When entering values for formats with major and minor units, enter them in the minor units. A format with miles as the major and feet as the minor unit, for example, would be entered in feet.


Provides a space for you to edit the built-in format or type a new format.


Removes the selected format.


Lists available formats.


Determines the number of pixels per unit of measure for the horizontal ruler.


Determines the number of pixels per unit of measure for the vertical ruler.


Opens the System Info dialog box where you can get information about your system, display, network, printing, Corel EXEs & DLLs and system DLLs.


Displays the disk space and memory available on the drive where the program is installed.


Displays the name of the registered user and the serial number.Displays copyright information.


Displays the version of the product currently installed.


Displays the name of the product.


Double-clicking the CorelDRAW balloon opens the credits window. To view the credits, clickthe balloon in the credits window and hold down the mouse button. To exit the credits and return to your program, click the ESC button.


Provides a list of system information categories. Click one of the following:

System	Displays information about your computer For example, Windows version or processor.
Date/Time	Displays information about your monitor. For example, driver,or driver version.
Network	Displays information about the network. For example, drivers or whether a network is installed.
Printing	Displays information about installed printers.
Corel EXEs and DLLs	Displays information all of the Corel EXEs and DLLs.
System DLLs:	Displays all of the system DLLs.


Displays the system information for the chosen category.


Saves all system information as SYSINFO.TXT. Once it's saved, a message box will appear informing you where the file was saved to.


To view system information

1.	Click Window, About CorelDRAW.

2.	Click the System Info button.

3.	Click a category from the Category list box.

Tip

Use the Save button to store system information for printing. System information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box lets you know where the file is saved.

 Related Topics


To view program information

Click Window, About CorelDRAW.

Tip

Click the System Info button to get information about your system, display, network, printing, Corel EXEs and DLLs and system DLLs

 Related Topics


On-screen color palette used for choosing outline and fill colors. You can display the color palette anywhere in the CorelDRAW window.

To specify a fill color, click it with the left mouse button.

To specify an outline color, click it with the right mouse button.

Clicking the arrows at the ends of the palette with the left mouse button scrolls the colors one at a time.

Clicking the arrows with the right mouse button scrolls a screen-width of colors.

Clicking the [image] arrow with the left mouse button enlarges the color palette.

Clicking the No Fill [image] button at the left end of the palette removes the object's fill if you click with the left mouse button, or outline if you click with the right button.


Drawing Window. You can draw anywhere in the Drawing Window, but if your Working page size is the same as the size of the page you're printing on, only portions of the drawing on the Printable page will appear when you print your drawing.

By default, objects display with their fill and outline attributes. You can display them in outline form only for faster screen drawing by clicking View, Wireframe.


Maximize Window button. Clicking on the Maximize button expands the window to fill the entire screen.


CorelDRAW menu bar. This horizontal bar found near the top of the CorelDRAW window contains the names of the available pull-down menus. Choose the menu you want by clicking on it, or by pressing the ALT key plus the underlined character in the menu name.


Minimize Window button. Clicking on this button reduces the window to its smallest size so that it only appears on the task bar.

In this state, the application stays in memory but its window does not take up space on your screen.

To restore the window, click on its name in the task bar.


Closes CorelDRAW. If you have unsaved work in the current drawing, CorelDRAW asks if you want to save your changes before closing.


Page Controls. These controls show which page in a multi-page drawing is currently displayed and the total number of pages in the drawing. To go to a particular page, click the [image] and [image] buttons or click Layout, Go To Page.

Clicking [image] and [image] with the right mouse button moves five pages (or 10 in facing pages view) at a time. Clicking with the left mouse button while holding down the CTRL key, takes you to the first or last page.


Preview Screen. This view option uses the entire screen to display your drawing. You can switch to the Preview screen by clicking View, Full-Screen Preview or by pressing F9. Press SPACEBAR to return to the drawing window.

Notes

You cannot edit your drawing in the Preview screen.

You can preview certain objects only by clicking View, Preview Selected Only.


Printable page or drawing page, shown as a rectangular drop shadow in the drawing window. This area represents that area of your drawing that will fit on the printed page. If your drawing extends beyond the printable page borders, it will not appear on the printed page in its entirety.

To enable and disable the display of the Drawing Page, click Layout, Page Setup, then enable or disable Show Page Border.

For proofing drawings that extend beyond the Drawing Page, use the Fit to Page or Scale option in the Print Options dialog box.


CorelDRAW Toolbar. The toolbar contains icons you can click to quickly carry out common operations such as saving, printing, importing, exporting, and so on. You can also have CorelDRAW display Tooltips by enabling the Show Tooltips button in the Options dialog box.


Horizontal and Vertical Rulers. Rulers can help you when you size and position objects in a drawing. You can also pull guidelines onto the screen by dragging vertically or horizontally from the rulers. Dragging diagonally from the spot where the rulers meet, brings out a set of crosshairs. You can use these crosshairs to move the 0,0 point on the rulers or to align objects in the drawing

Holding down the Shift key and double-clicking on a ruler moves it away from the edge of the drawing window. With the Shift key down, you can drag to reposition the ruler or double-click to return it to its usual location.

Clicking View, Rulers enables and disables the rulers.

The rulers use the unit of measure specified for Grid Frequency while the 0,0 points are determined by the Grid Origin. You can change both of these in the dialog box displayed by clicking Layout, Grid Setup.

You can also move the 0,0 points using the ruler crosshairs.


Scroll bar.

You’ll find scroll bars along the bottom and right sides of the screen. You use scroll bars to view portions of a drawing outside the current viewing area.

Click on	to

An arrow	move the current view 10% in selected direction

An elevator	move the view by one window length or width

On a thumb and drag	move the view an arbitrary amount in any direction

CorelDRAW provides an Auto-panning feature that scrolls the view automatically when you drag beyond the edges of the drawing area. You can turn this feature on and off using the Auto Panning option in the Options dialog box.


A selected CorelDRAW object with selection handles around it.


The status bar provides information about a selected object or about an action you are performing. It also displays the location of the mouse pointer relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.


The title bar displays the names of the program and active file. If it is not maximized, you can move the window by dragging the title bar. The icons found at the right end of the title bar can be used to reduce the window to its smallest size so that it appears only on the task bar, maximize the CorelDRAW window to full screen size, or close the window.


Gives you quick access to the tools and flyouts used to create, edit, and view objects.

By dragging the toolbox, you can move it to another location. You can also make the toolbox a floating window by dragging it onto the drawing window.


Window borders appear around windows that aren’t maximized. Dragging the border lets you make the window smaller or larger.

Tips

Drag the top, bottom, or side border to size the window in one direction only.

Drag the corner of the border to size the window vertically and horizontally.


Horizontal and Vertical Rulers [image] Rulers can help you when you size and position objects in a drawing. You can also pull guidelines onto the screen by dragging vertically or horizontally from the rulers. Dragging diagonally from the spot where the rulers meet, brings out a set of crosshairs. You can use these crosshairs to move the 0,0 point on the rulers or to align objects in the drawing.

Scroll bar [image] You’ll find scroll bars along the bottom and right sides of the screen. You use scroll bars to view portions of a drawing outside the current viewing area.


The area (printable page) of the physical page that your printer can use to print.


The borders of the printable page.


Pick tool

Selects objects or groups of objects. After you select an object, you can use commands in the menus or the toolbar to change its appearance.

You can also use the Pick tool to move, stretch, scale, rotate, and skew objects interactively.


Node Edit tool

Lets you shape lines, text, bitmaps, rectangles, and ellipses. The function of the Shape tool varies depending on the type of object selected.

Object Type	Function

Line or curve	Changing the shape by moving nodes and control points and using the Node Edit Roll-Up

Text	Editing character attributes and interactive kerning

Bitmaps	Cropping

Rectangle	Rounding corners

Ellipse	Creating arcs and pie wedges

Holding down the mouse button on the Shape tool in the toolbox opens up a flyout from which you can select the Eraser or Knife tools.


Knife tool

Lets you break an object into separate objects. For example, when you cut a circle in two places, you create two separate pie-shaped objects. You can also set the Knife tool to break an object into subpaths rather than into separate objects.

Holding down the mouse button on the Knife tool in the toolbox opens up a flyout from which you can select the Eraser or Shape tools.


Eraser tool

Lets you erase portions of an object without breaking any closed paths. For example, if you drag the Eraser tool across a filled square, you create an object with two closed subpaths.

Holding down the mouse button on the Eraser tool in the toolbox opens up a flyout from which you can select the Knife or Shape tools.


Zoom tool

Magnifies whatever portion of the screen you select.

Holding down the mouse button on the Zoom tool in the toolbox opens up a flyout from which you can select the Panning tool.


Panning tool

Lets you change your viewpoint on a drawing by dragging it around the CorelDRAW window.

Holding down the mouse button on the Panning tool in the toolbox opens up a flyout from which you can select the Zoom tool.


Freehand tool

Selects Freehand mode, a click-and-drag style of drawing similar to the way you move a pencil on paper.

You can also use the Freehand tool to trace bitmaps.

Holding down the mouse button on the Freehand tool in the toolbox opens a flyout that lets you select the Bezier tool.


Bezier tool

Selects Bezier mode, a connect-the-dots style of drawing where you specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw. CorelDRAW then connects these points.

You can also use the Bezier tool to trace bitmaps.

Holding down the mouse button on the Bezier tool in the toolbox opens a flyout that lets you select the Freehand tool.


Vertical Dimension tool

Lets you draw vertical dimension lines.

Holding down the mouse button on the Vertical Dimension tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Horizontal Dimension tool

Lets you draw horizontal dimension lines.

Holding down the mouse button on the Horizontal Dimension tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Slanted Dimension tool

Lets you draw slanted dimension lines.

Holding down the mouse button on the Slanted Dimension tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Callout tool

Lets you draw callouts.

Holding down the mouse button on the Callout tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Angular Dimension tool

Lets you draw angular dimension lines. These lines measure the angle between two points and an apex.

Holding down the mouse button on the Angled Dimension tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Connector Lines tool

Lets you draw connector lines.

Holding down the mouse button on the Connector Lines tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select other dimension line drawing tools.


Rectangle tool

Lets you draw rectangles and squares. The status bar displays the dimensions of the rectangle as you draw it. Objects drawn with the Rectangle tool use the current default fill, outline pen, and outline color attributes.

To select a rectangle you’ve just drawn, press SPACEBAR. To switch between the Rectangle tool and the Pick tool, press SPACEBAR.


Ellipse tool

Lets you draw ellipses and circles. The status bar displays the dimensions of the ellipse as you draw it. Objects drawn with the Ellipse tool use the current default fill, outline pen, and outline color attributes.

To select an ellipse you’ve just drawn, press SPACEBAR. To switch between the Ellipse tool and the Pick tool, press SPACEBAR.


Polygon tool

Lets you draw polygons, stars, and polygons as stars. The status bar displays the dimensions of the object as you draw it. Objects drawn with the Polygon tool use the current default fill, outline pen, and outline color attributes.

To select a polygon you’ve just drawn, press SPACEBAR. To switch between the Polygon tool and the Pick tool, press SPACEBAR.

Holding down the mouse button on the Polygon tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select the Spiral or Graph Paper tools.


Spiral tool

Lets you draw spirals. The status bar displays the dimensions of the spiral as you draw it.

To select a spiral you’ve just drawn, press SPACEBAR. To switch between the Spiral tool and the Pick tool, press SPACEBAR.

Holding down the mouse button on the Spiral tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select the Polygon or Graph Paper tools.


Graph Paper tool

Lets you draw a grid of lines similar to graph paper. The status bar displays the dimensions of the grid as you draw it.

To select a grid you’ve just drawn, press SPACEBAR. To switch between the Graph Paper tool and the Pick tool, press SPACEBAR.

Holding down the mouse button on the Graph Paper tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select the Polygon or Spiral tools.


Artistic Text tool

Lets you enter text directly on the screen as strings of Artistic text. Entering text as Artistic text allows you to fit the text to a path and create special effects using commands in the Effects menu.

Holding down the mouse button on the Artistic Text tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select Paragraph Text tool.


 Paragraph text tool

Lets you enter text directly on the screen in blocks of Paragraph text. Use Paragraph Text for text-intensive applications such as ads and brochures. Formatting features for Paragraph Text allow you to flow text in columns, create bullet lists, and set tabs and indents. You can also link blocks of Paragraph text or wrap text around other objects.

Holding down the mouse button on the Paragraph Text tool in the toolbox opens a flyout from which you can select the Artistic Text tool.


Outline tool

Opens the Outline tool flyout. Choose this tool if you want to specify custom outline attributes, such as outline thickness, line pattern, calligraphic pen effects, and arrowheads.


Outline Color

Opens the Outline Color dialog box. You can use the controls in this dialog box to create and apply a custom outline color to the selected object. You can also create and select colors from a custom palette.

Choose this tool with no object selected if you want to change the default outline color attributes.


Color roll-up

Opens the Color Roll-Up. You can use the controls in this roll-up to create and apply a custom outline color or color to the selected object.


Pen roll-up

Opens the Pen Roll-Up. You can use the controls in this roll-up to define and apply pen attributes such as thickness, arrowheads, and color.

Choose this tool with no object selected if you want to change the default pen attributes.


Outline Pen

Opens the Outline Pen dialog box. You can use the controls in this dialog box to set and apply Outline Pen attributes to the selected object. These attributes include color, width, style, nib shape, and arrowheads.

Choose this tool with no object selected if you want to change the default outline pen attributes.


White Outline

Sets white as the outline color for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make white the default outline color.


Black Outline

Sets black as the outline color for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make black the default outline color.


Remove Outline

Removes outlines from the selected object.


Hairline Outline

Sets the outline thickness to 0.2 points for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 0.2 points.


Thin Outline

Sets the outline thickness to 2 points for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 2 points.


Medium Outline

Sets the outline thickness to 8 points for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 8 points.


Medium-Thick Outline

Sets the outline thickness to 16 points for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make the default outline thickness 16 points.


Thick Outline

Sets the outline thickness to 24 points for the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make the default outline thickness 24 points.


Fill tool

Opens the Fill tool flyout. Choose this tool to specify custom fill attributes, such as uniform fills, fill patterns, and fountain fills.


Fill Color

Opens the Uniform Fill dialog box. You can use the controls in this dialog box to create a uniform fill color and apply it to the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a uniform fill the default fill.


Special Fill roll-up

Opens the Special Fill dialog box. You can use the controls in this dialog box to apply custom fountain, texture, vector, and bitmap fills to the selected object.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a special fill the default fill.


No Fill

Removes the fill from the object, allowing objects to show through from behind it.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make No Fill the default fill.


White Fill

Selects white for the fill color.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make white the default fill color.


Black Fill

Selects black for the fill color.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make black the default fill color.


Fountain Fill

Opens the Fountain Fill dialog box for specifying fountain fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a fountain fill the default fill.


Two-Color Pattern Fill

Opens the Two-Color Pattern dialog box. You can use this dialog box to choose or create two-color pattern fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a two-color pattern the default fill.


Vector Pattern Fill

Opens the Vector Pattern dialog box. You can use this dialog box to choose or create vector pattern fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a vector pattern the default fill.


Full-Color Pattern Fill

Opens the Full-Color Pattern dialog box, from which you choose full-color pattern fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a full-color pattern the default fill.


Texture Fill

Opens the Texture Fill dialog box, from which you choose Texture Fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a texture fill the default fill.


PostScript Texture Fill

Opens the PostScript Texture Fill dialog box, from which you can choose PostScript texture fills.

Choose this tool with no objects selected to make a PostScript texture the default fill.


To open a tool properties sheet

1.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

2.	Choose a tool from the Tools box.

 Related Topics


To open an object properties sheet

1.	Select an object.

2.	Click View, Properties, Tool.

 Related Topics


To open a style properties sheet

1.	Click View, Properties, Styles.

2.	Choose a style from the Styles box.

 Related Topics